-
Communication Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to find and use the communication tools in Google apps; including Gmail; Google+; Hangouts; and Calendar.
-
Features of Microsoft Excel for Mac 2011
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that allows you to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates the features of Microsoft Excel for Mac 2011.
-
Features of Microsoft PowerPoint 2011
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that allows you to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the features of Microsoft PowerPoint.
-
Formatting Cells in Excel 2011
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that enables you to create sophisticated presentations. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses formatting cells in Excel 2011.
-
Formatting in PowerPoint 2011
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that allows you to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses formatting in PowerPoint 2011.
-
Introducing Office for Mac 2011
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that allow you to create documents and to communicate in your office workspace. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces Office for Mac 2011.
-
Manipulating Cells and Sorting Data in Excel 2011
You can create refined documents and spreadsheets using Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 productivity applications. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses manipulating cells and sorting data in Excel 2011.
-
Navigating Spreadsheets in Excel 2011
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that allows you to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to navigate spreadsheets in Excel 2011.
-
Outlook for Mac 2011
Microsoft Office Outlook for Mac 2011 is a powerful e-mail client scheduler and contact management program. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the features of Outlook for Mac 2011.
-
Reviewing Documents in Word 2011
Microsoft Word for Mac 2011 allows you to review documents and provide feedback. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to insert comments and track changes.
-
Tables and Charts in PowerPoint 2011
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that allows you to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses tables and charts in PowerPoint 2011.
-
The Excel 2011 Interface
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that allows you to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates the features of the Excel 2011 interface.
-
The PowerPoint 2011 Interface
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that allows you to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the PowerPoint 2011 interface.
-
The Word 2011 Interface
Microsoft Word for Mac 2011 is a user-friendly text and layout application. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the features of the Word 2011 interface.
-
Word 2011 Document Elements
Microsoft Word for Mac 2011 allows you to quickly add document elements to modify your document. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Word 2011 document elements.
-
Word 2011 Document Layout
Microsoft Word for Mac 2011 offers sophisticated control over document layout. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to work with the document layout in Word 2011.
-
Working with Animations in PowerPoint 2011
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that allows you to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to work with tables and charts in PowerPoint 2011.
-
Working with Charts in Word 2011
Microsoft Word for Mac 2011 allows you to create charts in your documents to organize your data and to provide added visual appeal. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to insert charts in Word 2011.
-
Working with Excel 2011 Workbooks
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that allows you to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell explores the options to manipulate Excel 2011 workbooks. He does this by adding and deleting worksheets; and by creating and editing data to customize charts.
-
Working with Tables in Word 2011
Microsoft Word for Mac 2011 allows you to create tables and organize your data. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to insert tables in Word 2011.
-
Working with Transitions in PowerPoint 2011
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that allows you to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. Office 2011 also includes Outlook; a powerful email client; scheduler; and contact management program. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to work with transitions in PowerPoint 2011.
-
Working with Word 2011 Objects
Microsoft Word for Mac 2011 is a powerful application that allows you to insert objects in your text. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the options to choose and place objects.
-
Working with Word 2011 Templates
In Microsoft Word for Mac 2011; you can choose the templates; colors; and fonts for your document. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to customize a document using templates.
-
Working with Word 2011 Text
Microsoft Word for Mac 2011 provides you options to format your text easily. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the tabs and icons on the Home ribbon that allow you to work with text in Word 2011.
-
Features of Microsoft Word for Mac 2011
Microsoft Word for Mac 2011 is a powerful word processing and document creation program. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the features of Word for Mac 2011.
-
Conditional Formatting in Excel 2011
Excel with Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 allows you to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses conditional formatting in Excel 2011.
-
Configuring and Playing Slide Shows in PowerPoint 2011
Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 is a set of productivity applications that allows you to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to configure and play slide shows in PowerPoint 2011.
-
Creating Basic Formulas with Excel 2011
Microsoft Excel for Mac 2011 is a spreadsheet application that allows you to present data in a refined manner and create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses creating basic formulas with Excel 2011.
-
Creating Charts and Graphs with Excel 2011
Excel within Microsoft Office for Mac 2011 allows you to represent data in a graphical manner to create sophisticated documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses creating charts and graphs with Excel 2011.
-
Entering and Manipulating Data in Excel 2011
Microsoft Excel 2011 is an application that allows you to easily edit data to create documents; presentations; and spreadsheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses entering and editing data in Excel 2011.
-
Getting Started the Easy Way - With a Blank Company File
Creating a new company file can be an arduous and sometimes complicated task; however by starting with a blank chart of accounts in QuickBooks Pro 2013; you'll be able to significantly simplify the process and add; modify; and delete the accounts as needed. In this video; Peter Walls uses the Setup wizard to create a new blank company file.
-
How to Manage Expenses; Advances and Floats
QuickBooks Pro 2013 enables you to treat employees incurring expenses as vendors or banks; thereby allowing you to create an ongoing; detailed history of advances; expenses; and balances. In this video; Peter Walls demonstrates how to pay advances to and raise bills against employees designated vendors as well as monitor the expense accounts of employees designated banks.
-
How to Save Time Using Management-By-Exception Principles
QuickBooks Pro 2013 enables you to use the Management by Exception principle to account for items missing information. In this video; Peter Walls accounts for a blank check stub and a supplier invoice he cannot code by writing a check and raising a bill; both of which he allocates to an exception account until further information becomes available.
-
Importing PayPal Transactions
QuickBooks Pro 2013 enables you to use Microsoft Excel to import your PayPal transactions. In this video; Peter Walls demonstrates how to import PayPal data into QuickBooks Pro for review in the Trial Balance.
-
Making Journal Entries Using an Easy "From-To" Approach and Drilldown
QuickBooks Pro 2013 automatically creates journal entries for transactions but allows you; should you need to offset expenses against accruals to generate accounts or reports; to create journal entries yourself. In this video; Peter Walls explains QuickBooks Pro 2013's background generation of journal entries; before demonstrating simple journal entries that reflect in the Trial Balance.
-
Recording Standing Orders and Direct Debits
In QuickBooks Pro 2013; it is easy to record standing orders and direct debit orders. In this video; Peter Walls demonstrates how to use the Write Check feature to create standing orders; direct orders; and reminders for your monthly payments.
-
The Best Way to Control Petty Cash
QuickBooks Pro 2013 enables you to use the imprest system to record and control your petty cash. In this video; Peter Walls draws a check and codes it to his internal Petty Cash account; establishing a control total. He then draws a check against receipts; coding the check to the appropriate accounts; including Review Control; owing to illegible receipts.
-
Transferring Files to an Accountant Who Doesn’t Have QuickBooks
QuickBooks Pro 2013 allows you to quickly and easily transfer – in print or via Excel; e-mail; or in PDF format – a full set of accounts to recipients lacking access to QuickBooks Pro. In this video; Peter Walls generates a full set of year-end reports and exports them to an Excel workbook; and e-mails it to his accountant.
-
A "One-Touch" Approach to Excellence Using CICO-ART
QuickBooks Pro 2013 offers a flexible bookkeeping and accounting solution for your business; and by combining it with the sound operating principles of a one-touch approach and CICO-ART; you'll be able to improve the efficiency of your bookkeeping effort; saving time and money. In this video; Peter Walls highlights QuickBooks' flexibility before describing one-touch principles and CICO-ART.
-
Bank Reconciliation Made Exceptionally Easy
In QuickBooks Pro 2013; doing your bank reconciliations is very easy; especially if you mirror QuickBooks to your bank statements. In this video; Peter Walls demonstrates how to use the Banking menu to reconcile your bank and create a detailed reconciliation report.
-
Control Opening Balances: Bank Reconciliation
QuickBooks Pro 2013 enables you to you to quickly and easily import and control your company's opening bank reconciliation from a manual or computerized bookkeeping system. In this video; Peter Walls creates a bank control account and uses QuickBooks Pro 2013's drilldown and reports features to demonstrate how to successfully import and control your opening bank reconciliation.
-
Control Opening Balances: Customer Balances
In QuickBooks Pro 2013; you can import and effectively control your opening customer balances when you move from a manual or a computerized bookkeeping system. In this video; Peter Walls demonstrates how to use QuickBooks 2013 to import your opening customer balances from Excel.
-
Control Opening Balances: Trial Balances
QuickBooks Pro 2013 allows you to import and control your opening Trial Balance; be it from a computerized or manual bookkeeping system; using Excel. In this video; Peter Walls specifies the data required for your Excel worksheet’s Trial Balance; journalizes the data in QuickBooks Pro – specifying control accounts; generates a Trial Balance report; and reviews it against the Excel worksheet.
-
Control Opening Balances: Vendor Balances
In QuickBooks Pro 2013; you can import and control your opening vendor balances when you move from a manual or a computerized bookkeeping system. In this video; Peter Walls demonstrates how to use QuickBooks 2013 to import your opening vendor balances from Excel.
-
Distinguishing Bookkeeping; Management Accounts and Compliance Accounting
QuickBooks Pro 2013 assists in coordinating the different aspects of your company's accounting demands by providing bookkeepers; management accountants; and compliance accountants with easy access to the data and tools they require. In this video; Peter Walls highlights features that QuickBooks Pro 2013 offers to bookkeeping; management; and compliance accounting and how to distinguish between these different; yet dependant roles.
-
Sending Meeting Requests
In Microsoft Office 365 calendar; you can see your schedule side by side with the schedule of your colleagues. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how to set meeting requests in Office 365 calendars.
-
Sharing a Calendar
Microsoft Office 365 allows users to share their calendars with other users to effectively schedule meetings and appointments. In this video; Tim Warner explains how to share a calendar.
-
Sharing a Document
Microsoft Office 365 allows you to share Office documents on the SharePoint site to enable other users to work on the documents simultaneously. In this video; Tim Warner explains how to share documents.
-
Sharing a Screen
Microsoft Office 365 allows you to share your screen and work collaboratively with other users. In this video; Tim Warner explains how to share your Desktop screen by using Office 365 and Lync.
-
Sharing Documents using OneDrive for Business
After watching this video; you will be able to share documents using the cloud-based OneDrive for Business solution.
-
Sharing Documents Using SharePoint Online
In Microsoft Office 365; documents can easily be shared and their details tracked and viewed using SharePoint Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to share documents using SharePoint Online in Office 365.
-
Sharing the Office Web App with Another User
Microsoft Office 365 provides you the ability to share online Office documents with other users to ensure easy collaboration. In this video; Tim Warner explains how to share documents with other users.
-
Subscribing to Other Calendars
In addition to sharing your calendar; Microsoft Office 365 also enables you to view other users' calendars. In this video; Tim Warner explains how to view other people's calendars.
-
Taking Mail Offline with Outlook in Office 365
After watching this video; you will be able to use Outlook in Office 365 to access e-mail when offline.
-
The Office 365 Calendar App
After watching this video; you will be able to use the business version of the Calendar application in Office 365.
-
The Office 365 Lync App
After watching this video; you will be able to access and use Lync Online in Office 365.
-
The Office 365 People App
After watching this video; you will be able to use the business version of the Office Online People application in Office 365.
-
Uploading Documents to Libraries
In Microsoft Office 365; you can upload documents to libraries and share documents in the SharePoint world. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how to upload files and create new files in SharePoint 2013.
-
Use Office 365 Apps
After watching this video; you will be able to access and use Office 365 applications for business purposes.
-
Using Office on Demand to Open Access
Microsoft Office 365 provides the Office on Demand feature that you can use to access your Office documents. In this video; Tim Warner explains how to use Office on Demand to open Access databases.
-
Using Office on Demand to Open Excel
Office 365 provides several options for accessing documents. In this video; Tim Warner explains how to use Office on Demand to open Excel documents.
-
Using Office on Demand to Open PowerPoint
Office 365 allows users to browse to a SharePoint document library and click a PowerPoint file to have that file open in PowerPoint Online. In this video; Tim Warner explains how to use Office on Demand to open PowerPoint.
-
Using Office on Demand to Open Publisher
Office 365 allows you to use Office on Demand to open Publisher. In this video; Tim Warner explains how to use Office on Demand to open Publisher.
-
Using Office on Demand to Open Word
In Microsoft Office 365; you can use Office on Demand to read and edit files through OneDrive without installing Microsoft Word on the computer. In this video; Tim Warner demonstrates how to open and make changes to a Word file by using Office on Demand.
-
Using Office Web App to Export to Excel
In Microsoft Office 365; you can use SharePoint Online to interact with Microsoft Office documents and then use them on desktop. In this video; Tim Warner demonstrates how to edit a spreadsheet by using Excel in a web browser and on the desktop.
-
Using OneDrive with Office 365
After watching this video; you will be able to use OneDrive to store and access documents in Office 365.
-
Using the Mailbox in the Outlook Web App
In Microsoft Office 365; you can use the mailbox in the Outlook Web App to access your organization's Outlook information over the web. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how to use Office 365 to access your Outlook.
-
Utilizing Co-authoring Features with Word Web Apps
In Microsoft Office 365; multiple users can work and edit the same file at the same time using co-authoring features. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how to use co-authoring features with Word Web apps.
-
Word Online in Office 365
After watching this video; you will be able to access and use Word Online in Office 365.
-
Working with Drafts in Office 365
After watching this video; you will be able to use Outlook in Office 365 to work with drafts.
-
Working with E-mail Using Outlook in Office 365
After watching this video; you will be able to use Outlook in Office 365 to work with e-mail.
-
Working with Junk Mail in Office 365
After watching this video; you will be able to use Outlook in Office 365 to work with junk mail.
-
Lync Online Integration with Office Online
Microsoft Office 365 includes a built-in instant messaging service; known as Lync; which users are signed into automatically when they sign in to Outlook Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to sign into Lync from Outlook Online and view the presence status of other users.
-
Manage Documents and E-mail
After watching this video; you will be able to manage documents and e-mail using Office 365.
-
Chat
In Microsoft Office 365; you can chat online by using the Instant Messaging feature. In this video; Tim Warner demonstrates how to use Instant Messaging feature for online chats.
-
Choosing the Plan
In Microsoft Office 365; you can select an Office 365 plan for your organization. In this video; Tim Warner discusses how to select an Office 365 plan.
-
Co-authoring Documents via Office 365
Microsoft Office 365 allows you to co-author and collaborate on documents. This functionality is useful for teams and companies that are collaborating on various projects. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to effectively co-author documents in Office 365.
-
Comparing Team Sites with Publishing Sites
In Microsoft Office 365; you can use both Team Site and Publishing Portal to support the primary content. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how to use team Site and Publishing Portal and compares their benefits.
-
Converting from Office Web App to Local Host Office Product
In Microsoft Office 365; you can convert you online SharePoint document to your local system document. In this video; Tim Warner demonstrates how to download a copy of an Excel document to the local system.
-
Creating a List
Microsoft Office 365 and its suite of products include a full-featured version of SharePoint you can access and customize from the Office 365 admin center. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a calendar list on a specific site.
-
Creating a New Announcement (Creating a New List Item)
In Microsoft Office 365; you can create a new list item like announcements. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how to a new announcement list item.
-
Displaying Announcements on the Homepage (Working with Web Parts)
In Microsoft Office 365; you can use web parts to display announcements on the home page. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how to add customized announcements to make your information more relevant on your home page.
-
Editing Content Using the Excel Web App
In Microsoft Office 365; you can edit content using the Excel Web App. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how to combine Office 365 with Office Web Apps and SharePoint to edit content.
-
Editing Content Using the PowerPoint Web App
In Microsoft Office 365; you can edit content using the PowerPoint Web app. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how to combine Office 365 with Office Web apps and SharePoint to edit content.
-
Editing the Homepage of a Team Site
In Microsoft Office 365; you can customize SharePoint site by editing the Homepage. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how we can edit the Homepage of a Team Site.
-
Excel Online in Office 365
Microsoft Office Online and Office 365's integration of OneDrive and Excel Online facilitate the creation; editing; and storage of workbooks. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to sign in to Office 365 to show how OneDrive and Excel Online offer the functionality of Microsoft Excel online.
-
Getting Started with SharePoint 2013 Team Sites
In Microsoft Office 365; you can use different tools to work on deadlines; branding; add styles; and various other options on a team site. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates the various features available in SharePoint 2013 Team Sites.
-
Introducing Office Online for Office 365
Microsoft Office 365 allows you to use applications with Microsoft Office online. Office Online is an extension of the capability of Office 365. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to access and use Office Online for Office 365.
-
Managing Documents Using SharePoint Online
Microsoft Office Online allows users to add; remove; rename; and handle the metadata of documents on SharePoint Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage documents using SharePoint Online within Office Online.
-
Office 365 Calendar Sharing and Subscription
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; calendar sharing is an essential function for increased productivity. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the steps involved for calendar sharing; explores the available options and properties; and customize a sharing message.
-
Office Marketplace Apps
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; apps are available for virtually every kind of Office application which can be used to extend functionality both in the desktop version of the app as well as the online version. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses Office Online and Office 365 to view Marketplace Apps.
-
OneNote Online in Office 365
Microsoft Office Online and Office 365's integration of OneDrive and OneNote Online facilitate the creation; editing; and storage of notebooks. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to sign in to Office 365 to show how OneDrive and Excel Online offer the functionality of Microsoft OneNote online.
-
Outlook in Office 365
Outlook Online in Office 365 has very similar functionality to the desktop Outlook application. For example; you can change the view of the Inbox; delete messages; and insert attachments. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to launch and navigate through the online version of Outlook.
-
Posting Announcements to the Front Page
The SharePoint Team Site in Microsoft Office 365 allows you to add and alter web parts for your shared documents. In this video; Neal Rowland shows you how to edit and customize the information displayed to the user to leverage your web parts.
-
PowerPoint Online in Office 365
Microsoft Office Online and Office 365's integration of OneDrive and PowerPoint Online facilitate the creation; editing; and storage of presentations. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to sign in to Office 365 to show how OneDrive and PowerPoint Online offer the functionality of Microsoft PowerPoint online.
-
Printing via Office Online
You can easily print documents stored in OneDrive for Business using the print option in Microsoft Office Online; which generates a PDF that you can open or save. The print functionality is available in both the View and the Edit views. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to print a document using the print function in Word Online.
-
Saving and Organizing Files on OneDrive for Business
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; OneDrive is a very effective storage mechanism for business use. Users are able to create; rename; move; and manage folders on OneDrive. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to save and organize files on OneDrive for Business.
-
Scheduling Meetings
In Microsoft Office 365; you can schedule meeting events. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how to schedule meeting events in Office 365.
-
Sending Email
In Microsoft Office 365; you can send an e-mail in your Office 365 Outlook Web App. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how to create and send an e-email in Office 365 Outlook Web App.
-
Adding Lists; Libraries; and Other Apps
In Microsoft Office 365; you can add lists; libraries; and other apps. In this video; Sarah Wischmeyer demonstrates how to add lists; libraries; and other apps in SharePoint 2013.
-
Adding Users
In Microsoft Office 365; the administrator can create and manage the user accounts. In this video; Tim Warner demonstrates how to create a new user account.
-
An Alternate Way to Schedule a Meeting
In Microsoft Office 365; you can schedule a meeting with another user. In this video; Tim Warner demonstrates how schedule a meeting with another user.
-
Setting Up Distribution Groups
In Microsoft Office 365; you can create a distribution group with a single e-mail address that can be used to send e-mails to the entire team. In this video; Tim Warner demonstrates how to create distribution groups in Office 365.
-
Accessing Modern Group Content
After watching this video; you will be able to access different kinds of modern group content in Office 365.
-
Accessing the Office 365 Compliance Center
After watching this video; you will be able to enable users to access the Office 365 Compliance Center via the GUI and via PowerShell.
-
Activity Reporting via PowerShell
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Search-UnifiedAuditLog cmdlet in PowerShell to search the unified audit log.
-
Administering Clutter via PowerShell
After watching this video; you will be able to configure Clutter via PowerShell.
-
Apply Branding and Help Desk Information
After watching this video; you will be able to apply branding and Held Desk information to the Office 365 portal.
-
Azure Upload Tool Install
After watching this video; you will be able to install the Azure Upload tool for the Office 365 Import Service.
-
Branding
After watching this video; you will be able to update the Office 365 Portal to reflect company branding.
-
Changing Themes
After watching this video; you will be able to change the default Office 365 presentation theme.
-
Clutter Self-service
After watching this video; you will be able to enable and disable Clutter in Office 365.
-
Controlling Preservation
After watching this video; you will be able to control e-mail and document preservation using the Office 365 Compliance Center.
-
Controlling Retention
After watching this video; you will be able to control e-mail and SharePoint retention using the Office 365 Compliance Center.
-
Creating a CSV File
After watching this video; you will be able to create a CSV file that maps a PST file to a user mailbox in Office 365.
-
Creating and Managing Channels
After watching this video; you will be able to create and manage channels in Office 365.
-
Creating Searches
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new search using the 365 Compliance Center.
-
Creating Sway Content
After watching this video; you will be able to create and edit Sway content in Office 365.
-
Creating User Rights
After watching this video; you will be able to create and assign the user roles for PST imports in Office 365.
-
Custom Help Desk
After watching this video; you will be able to provide customized Help Desk information in Office 365.
-
Customizing the Application Launcher
After watching this video; you will be able to add tiles to the Office 365 Application Launcher.
-
Data Loss Prevention Policies
After watching this video; you will be able to control data loss prevention policies using the Office 365 Compliance Center.
-
Detailed Activity Report Properties
After watching this video; you will be able to produce OneDrive For Business reports via PowerShell.
-
Editing the User Profile
After watching this video; you will be able to use the updated user profile servicing area in Office 365.
-
Enabling Office 365 Activity Auditing
After watching this video; you will be able to run Office 365 activity reports and export them for sharing.
-
Finding Content with Delve
After watching this video; you will be able to search for content within the Delve portal in Office 365.
-
First Release
After watching this video; you will be able to manage Office 365 updates using First Release settings.
-
Gray Mail and Junk Mail
After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between Clutter and junk mail.
-
Installing the SharePoint PowerShell Provider
After watching this video; you will be able to install the SharePoint PowerShell Provider.
-
Introducing Clutter
After watching this video; you will be able to define the Office 365 Clutter feature.
-
Introducing Delve
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the features of Delve for Office 365.
-
Introducing Modern Groups
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the features of Office 365 modern groups.
-
Introducing Office 365 Video
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the basic features of Office 365 Video.
-
Introducing Sway
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the features of Sway in Office 365.
-
Introduction to the Compliance Portal
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the Office 365 Compliance Center.
-
Office 365 Activity Reports
After watching this video; you will be able to enable auditing and view reports using the 365 Compliance Center.
-
OneDrive For Business Reporting via PowerShell
After watching this video; you will be able to set storage quotas in OneDrive for Business.
-
PowerShell Reporting Permissions
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the permissions required for PowerShell reporting.
-
Preventing Sharing in OneDrive for Business
After watching this video; you will be able to enable Office 365 Activity auditing.
-
Retrieving Domain Guids
After watching this video; you will be able to retrieve Active Directory Domain Guides for syncing OneDrive on domain-joined machines.
-
Running and Exporting Activity Reports
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the fields available in Activity reports.
-
Running PST Import Jobs
After watching this video; you will be able to complete the import process through the Office 365 console.
-
Search Results
After watching this video; you will be able to control search results using the Office 365 Compliance Center.
-
Searching for Videos
After watching this video; you will be able to search for videos using Search and Delve in Office 365.
-
Setting Storage Quotas in OneDrive for Business
After watching this video; you will be able to prevent sharing to everyone in OneDrive for Business.
-
Spotlighting Videos and Channels
After watching this video; you will be able to spotlight videos and manage channels on the Office 365 Video portal home page.
-
Training Clutter
After watching this video; you will be able to train Clutter by marking specific mails manually and allowing the system to start processing similar items automatically in Office 365.
-
Uploading and Sharing Videos
After watching this video; you will be able to upload a video in Office 365 and share it.
-
Uploading to Azure
After watching this video; you will be able to upload PSTs to Microsoft Azure for the Office 365 Import service and explore the file structure of the PST upload location in Office 365.
-
Use the Auditing Features
After watching this video; you will be able to enable auditing; search for events; and export the search results in Office 365.
-
Using Permissions to Disable Office 365 Video
After watching this video; you will be able to change admin permissions for the Office 365 Video portal and disable the option completely.
-
Work with Clutter and Compliance Features
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Clutter feature; enable access to the Office 365 Compliance Center; and create a search.
-
Workload-specific Admin Roles
After watching this video; you will be able to deploy workload-specific admin roles via the Office 365 Portal.
-
Limiting File Sync to Domain-joined PCs
After watching this video; you will be able to limit file sync to domain-joined PCs.
-
Manage Video Content and Delve
After watching this video; you will be able to manage video channels; spotlight videos; and search for videos using Delve in Office 365.
-
Managing Modern Groups
After watching this video; you will be able to create and manage modern groups in Office 365.
-
Monitoring PST import Jobs
After watching this video; you will be able to check the PST job status in Office 365 using the GUI and PowerShell commands.
-
Organizing Notebooks in OneNote Online
Microsoft Office Online presents you with access to OneNote Online for creating notebooks for collaboration with other users. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to access OneNote Online and work with notebooks.
-
Outlook Web App Keyboard Shortcuts
Microsoft Office Online and Office 365 allow the use of keyboard shortcuts to speed up the use of Outlook.com. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses keyboard shortcuts to navigate the Outlook interface and access; edit; and process e-mails.
-
PowerPoint Online Keyboard Shortcuts
Microsoft Office Online and Office 365 allow the use of keyboard shortcuts to navigate and perform common tasks in PowerPoint Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses keyboard shortcuts to navigate multiple PowerPoint views; and creates and edits PowerPoint presentations online.
-
PowerPoint Online Presentations
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can create; edit; and present presentations using the PowerPoint Online application. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use PowerPoint online to create and utilize presentations.
-
Saving and Organizing Files in Office Online
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can save and organize your documents using the OneDrive application. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to organize documents and folders; use bread crumbs; and preview documents in OneDrive.
-
Sharing Documents using OneDrive
Microsoft Office Online and Office 365 allow you to easily share documents with others via OneDrive. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to share documents with varying recipient permissions; using OneDrive.
-
Using Templates in Office Online
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can create documents using templates. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to find templates and then create a document based on your requirements.
-
Viewing and Editing Content in Office Online
Microsoft Office Online presents you with access to Word Online or their local version of Word for viewing and editing documents. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to access Word Online; create and edit a document; and use Read or Editing view.
-
Word Online Keyboard Shortcuts
Microsoft Office Online allows you to use predefined keyboard shortcuts in Word Online to increase speed and productivity. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates commonly used shortcuts for Word.
-
Working with E-mail using Outlook.com
By using Outlook.com within Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; managing your emails is a simple process. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to organize and view your emails and inbox different ways.
-
Working with Surveys in Excel Online
Microsoft Office Online presents you with access to Excel Online; which can be used to create surveys to collect and collate information. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create a dummy Excel survey; populate it with various question types; and submit it to view the results.
-
Introducing Office Online for Personal Use
Microsoft Office Online includes free; web-based equivalents of Microsoft Office applications that users can access without needing to install the applications on their local machines. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to sign into office.com and introduces the main web-based applications; such as Word Online; OneNote; and PowerPoint.
-
Introducing OneDrive
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you have access to OneDrive; which is a free file hosting facility. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use the OneDrive application to access the documents you’ve stored in Office Online.
-
Introducing OneNote Online
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can access OneNote Online through a web browser. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the functionality available with the online version of OneNote compared to the regular desktop version.
-
Introducing Outlook.com
With Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can work with your email through the Outlook.com application. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to access your email and use the different features available in Outlook.com in the same way you’d use the desktop version.
-
Introducing PowerPoint Online
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can access PowerPoint Online through a web browser. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how PowerPoint Online can be used to create and edit PowerPoint presentations in a similar way to the desktop version.
-
Introducing the Office Online Calendar
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can use the Online Calendar application to track and organize your tasks and activities through a web browser. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use the Online Calendar application to track tasks and events; as well as organize data in a calendar.
-
Introducing the People Application
With Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can create; import; and manage your address book with the People application. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how address book contacts can be created and imported from social networking and email services; and then managed in the People application.
-
Introducing Word Online
Microsoft Office Online and Office 365 includes word-processing software similar to the desktop version of Microsoft Word; although the desktop version has more subsets with which to edit documents. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the functionality of Word Online and how it can be best utilized.
-
Office Online Limitations
Microsoft Office Online has several limitations compared to the desktop version of Office. While Office Online can be used to edit documents quickly and easily; you need to use the desktop version for more advanced functionality. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the limitations of Office Online by comparing the Word Online and regular Word features and functions.
-
OneNote Online Keyboard Shortcuts
OneNote Online within Microsoft Office Online and Office 365 allows you to use the same keyboard shortcuts that are available in your local OneNote application. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use the most common keyboard shortcuts in OneNote Online.
-
Calendar Sharing and Subscription
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can share your calendar and subscribe to user calendars sent to you. When sharing your own calendar; you can also limit the information the recipient can view. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to share your calendar; and subscribe to another calendar; using Outlook.com.
-
Co-authoring Documents Using Office Online
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can co-author documents with other contributors. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to co-author documents in Word Online by editing a document in a browser window in Normal mode; and observing the changes to the same document in another browser window displayed alongside in InPrivate mode.
-
Creating Aliases using Outlook.com
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can create and add different mailboxes to your Outlook.com account; allowing you to utilize several different mail identities from a single platform. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create; add; and manage aliases from your Outlook.com account.
-
Excel Online Keyboard Shortcuts
When using Excel Online within Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can use the same keyboard shortcuts that are available in your local Excel application. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use the most common keyboard shortcuts within Excel Online.
-
Introducing Excel Online
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can use Excel Online to create and edit spreadsheets with many of the same functions as regular Microsoft Excel; although the desktop version has more subsets with which to create and edit spreadsheets. In this video; Nicolas Blank discusses the functionality of Excel Online and how it is used.
-
Using OneDrive to Share Web Documents
In Office Online and Office 365; you can share content stored on OneDrive and control the recipient permissions; via custom generated email invitations or links. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create and modify links to share content stored within OneDrive.
-
Using OneDrive to Edit Locally Stored Files
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; you can use OneDrive to remotely access access and edit files that are stored locally. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to install OneDrive; and use it to access and edit locally stored documents.
-
Archiving
After watching this video; you will be able to configure Mail archiving and associated settings in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Maps
OS X 10.9 (Mavericks) provides users with a Maps app similar to an iPad or an iPhone; with standard; hybrid; and satellite views. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to switch views; access info cards; reviews and photos; and transfer directions from a MacBook to an iPad.
-
Creating a Pivot Table
After watching this video; you will be able to create a pivot table in a QlikView document.
-
Adding and Using a Search Object
After watching this video; you will be able to add the Search Object and use it to search for information within the QlikView document.
-
Adding the Statistics Box
After watching this video; you will be able to add the statistics box object to a QlikView document to create summaries of the data.
-
Aligning and Managing Items on Sheets
After watching this video; you will be able to align; adjust; and rearrange items in a QlikView document.
-
Configuring Sheet Properties
After watching this video; you will be able to configure sheet properties in a QlikView document.
-
Configuring User and Document Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to configure QlikView user and document settings.
-
Connecting to a Data Source
After watching this video; you will be able to describe and connect to data sources in QlikView to create visualizations.
-
Consolidating Multiple Sources
After watching this video; you will be able to consolidate multiple data sources into one QlikView visualization report.
-
Creating a List Box and Multibox
After watching this video; you will be able to create and configure a list box and multibox to display certain elements in a QlikView visualization.
-
Creating a Quick Chart
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Quick Chart Wizard to create a chart in a QlikView document.
-
Creating a Statistics Chart
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Statistics Chart Wizard to create a statistic chart in a QlikView document.
-
Creating a Table Box
After watching this video; you will be able to create and configure a table box to select the columns to display in the QlikView visualization.
-
Creating a Time Chart
After watching this video; you will be able to use the TimeChart Wizard to create a time chart within a QlikView document.
-
Creating an Input Box
After watching this video; you will be able to create and configure an input box to enter data into QlikView variables and display their values.
-
Creating and Using Bookmarks
After watching this video; you will be able to create and use the Bookmark feature in QlikView.
-
Creating Other Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to create other objects to specify elements of a QlikView visualization to display.
-
Exploring the Interface and Customization
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the parts of the QlikView user interface and how it can be customized.
-
Exporting Data
After watching this video; you will be able to export data from QlikView to other applications and programs.
-
Installing QlikView
After watching this video; you will be able to install QlikView.
-
Managing Chart Properties
After watching this video; you will be able to manage chart properties in QlikView.
-
Managing Sheets
After watching this video; you will be able to add; copy; delete; promote; and demote sheets within a QlikView document.
-
QlikView Introduction
After watching this video; you will be able to describe QlikView and how it is used for business intelligence.
-
Sorting and Filtering Data
After watching this video; you will be able to sort and filter data in a QlikView document using various methods.
-
Using a Pivot Table
After watching this video; you will be able to pivot; filter; and change a pivot table in a QlikView document.
-
Using QlikView to View BI Data
After watching this video; you will be able to use QlikView to create visualizations of BI data for analysis.
-
Collaboration Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to find and use the collaboration tools in Google apps including Docs; Sheets; Forms; Slides; and Sites.
-
Counting Words in a Document
When you have to write a document within a certain number of words or characters; you can use the Word count feature in Google Apps to save time and to avoid counting mistakes. In this video; Peter Lockhart demonstrates how to use the Word count feature in Google Docs.
-
Creating a Site
After watching this video; you will be able to create a site using a template and add content.
-
Creating and Joining a Hangout
After watching this video; you will be able to create a hangout and invite other users; and join a hangout created by another user.
-
Creating and Managing Google Groups
After watching this video; you will be able to create groups in Gmail and add contacts to those groups.
-
Creating and Sharing Word Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to create and share word docs and format text inside the document.
-
Creating Forms
After watching this video; you will be able to create forms and configure questions within them for recipients to input data and integrate the form with a site.
-
Creating Spreadsheets
After watching this video; you will be able to create spreadsheets; identify the features to format; and manipulate data.
-
Downloading Documents Locally
After watching this video; you will be able to save documents from Google Drive to your local drive.
-
Google+ Communities
After watching this video; you will be able to create; join; and use Google+ Communities.
-
Hangouts On Air
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Hangouts On Air feature to broadcast a hangout.
-
How to Get Started with Google Drive
After watching this video; you will be able to install Google Drive locally; and sync files and folders to the cloud.
-
Importing Outlook Calendars
After watching this video; you will be able to import calendars from other e-mail programs.
-
Inserting Images
After watching this video; you will be able to insert images in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Making Documents Public
After watching this video; you will be able to share docs in Google Drive with others; and specify permissions for them.
-
Management Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to find and use the management tools in Google apps including Admin and Vault.
-
Managing Google Contacts
After watching this video; you will be able to add Gmail contacts and configure their information.
-
Searching Gmail
After watching this video; you will be able to search for information or keywords in e-mails contained in Gmail.
-
Sharing with Google+
After watching this video; you will be able to share pictures; documents; and other files publically and privately using Google+.
-
Sharing with Hangouts
After watching this video; you will be able to share pictures; documents and other files using a hangout.
-
Synchronizing with Google Drive
After watching this video; you will be able to sync files from the local drive to Google Drive in the cloud.
-
The Document Editor
After watching this video; you will be able to create and format documents; configure the different views in the interface; and use the various features.
-
Using Google+
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate the interface and use the features of Google+.
-
Using Charts
After watching this video; you will be able to add and configure charts based on spreadsheet data.
-
Using Spreadsheets
After watching this video; you will be able to name and move the spreadsheet files; enter values; and modify cell formatting.
-
What Is It?
In this video; Peter Lockhart outlines the various tasks that can be performed by using Google Drive.
-
Conversions and Attribution
After watching this video; you will be able to identify features of conversion and attribution.
-
Creating a Measurement Plan
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the main steps in creating a measurement plan.
-
Creating and Navigating an Account
After watching this video; you will be able to sign up for and navigate your Google Analytics account.
-
Creating Custom Reports and Using Dashboards
After watching this video; you will be able to create custom reports and use the Google Analytics dashboard to display your most important data.
-
Digital Analysis and Common Digital Strategies
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the importance of data collection and various strategies that it supports.
-
Document Infrastructure and Plan Implementation
After watching this video; you will be able to identify activities leading to plan implementation.
-
E-commerce Reports
After watching this video; you will be able to identify how your site's e-commerce components are performing.
-
Elements of Digital Analysis
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the various elements of digital analysis.
-
Goal and E-commerce Tracking
After watching this video; you will be able to get detailed data on your e-commerce goals.
-
Goal Flow Reports
After watching this video; you will be able to visualize how viewers are arriving at your goals.
-
Data Collection and Processing
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the process whereby data is collected; stored; processed; and reported.
-
Spreadsheet Add-on
After watching this video; you will be able to visualize analytics data in a spreadsheet.
-
Google Management API
After watching this video; you will be able to access profile information using the API.
-
Interacting with Analytics Programmatically
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the features and abilities of the Management API.
-
Introducing Core Reporting API
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the features of the Core Reporting API.
-
Introduction to Tag Manager
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the features and utility of Google Tag Manager.
-
Multichannel Funnels Reports
After watching this video; you will be able to visualize how prior activity has aided sales and conversions.
-
Reporting Tasks and Navigation
After watching this video; you will be able to view reports generated from your data.
-
Resources for Data Measurement
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize required resources for effective data measurement.
-
Setting Data Filters
After watching this video; you will be able to filter out unwanted statistics from your reports.
-
Upgrading from Legacy Page Tracking
After watching this video; you will be able to upgrade the Analytics snippet to the modern version.
-
Upgrading Google Tag Manager
After watching this video; you will be able to replace basic page view tags with updated versions.
-
Using the Google Tag Manager
After watching this video; you will be able to set up and use Google Tag Manager to track app usage.
-
Using the Query Explorer
After watching this video; you will be able to explore the Core Reporting API without code.
-
Tag Manager Concepts
After watching this video; you will be able to describe components and concepts in Tag Manager.
-
Types of Data
After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between categories of Google Analytics data.
-
Acquisition Reports
After watching this video; you will be able to identify how your users are getting to your page.
-
Adding Tag Manager Site Support
After watching this video; you will be able to add tag manager support to a web site.
-
AdWords Reports
After watching this video; you will be able to view reports on how your advertising is directing traffic to your site.
-
Analysis Techniques
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize techniques for segmentation and adding context to performance data.
-
Analytics Mobile App
After watching this video; you will be able to access web and app reports using the mobile app.
-
Attribution Reports
After watching this video; you will be able to identify how to improve your return on advertising spending.
-
Behavior Reports
After watching this video; you will be able to identify how visitors use and navigate your site.
-
Choosing Data Sources
After watching this video; you will be able to make use of data obtained outside of Google Analytics.
-
Commonly Used Metrics
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize commonly used Google Analytics data metrics.
-
Configuring Tag Manager
After watching this video; you will be able to configure Tag Manager accounts for your needs.
-
Using the Analytics SDK
After watching this video; you will be able to set up and use the analytics SDK in your app.
-
Create and set up a Google Analytics account
After watching this video; you will be able to create a Google Analytics account and add the analytics code to your site.
-
Features of Measurement and Data Collection
After watching this video; you will be able to identify steps for creating a data measurement plan and recognize the type of data collected and commonly used metrics.
-
Set Up Tag Manager
After watching this video; you will be able to add tag manager support to a web site.
-
Use the Spreadsheet Add-on
After watching this video; you will be able to use a spreadsheet to access and visualize analytics data.
-
AdWords Conversion Tracking with GTM
After watching this video; you will be able to use AdWords conversion tracking with GTM.
-
Creating an Account and a GTM Container
After watching this video; you will be able to use and install Google Tag Manager application; and create a container.
-
Cross Domain Tracking and Universal Analytics
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google Tag Manager for Universal Analytics with cross domain tracking.
-
E-commerce Tracking Management in GTM
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google Tag manager with e-commerce.
-
Event Tracking Management Using Google GTM
After watching this video; you will be able to use event tracking with Google Tag Manager.
-
Exporting & Importing Containers
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google tag Manager's importing and exporting tools.
-
Floodlight Integration and DoubleClick
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google Tag Manager with floodlight integration and DoubleClick.
-
Folder Management
After watching this video; you will be able to organize the components of Google Tag manager into folders.
-
Google Analytics Content Groups
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google Analytics content grouping.
-
in Use Case Scenario
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google Tag Manager in web applications for business demonstrations.
-
GTM Foundation Concepts and Configuration
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the various components of Google Tag Manager in addition to the various implementations and integrations.
-
GTM Users and Permissions
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the Google Tag Manager user and permission management.
-
How the Works
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google Tag Manager to demonstrate how it works and reasons why you should use it.
-
Implementing Google Analytics with GTM
After watching this video; you will be able to use and install Google Analytics with Google Tag Manager.
-
Introduction to Tags and the
After watching this video; you will be able to define a tag and the Google Tag Manager.
-
Other Common Web Tracking Methods
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google Tag Manager with various other tracking processes.
-
Planning Your Strategy
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google Tag Manager to plan out your strategy and model.
-
Publishing and Version Control
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google Tag Manager to publish and describe container versions.
-
Testing and Debugging
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google Tag Manager tools to preview and debug.
-
The Data Layer
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google Tag Manager to describe the data layer.
-
The Components
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the Google Tag Manager components.
-
Triggers
After watching this video; you will be able to use triggers with Google Tag Manager.
-
Using Google 2-Step Verification with GTM
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google's 2-step verification with Google Tag Manager.
-
Using GTM With Mobile Apps
After watching this video; you will be able to use Google Tag Manager with Mobile Applications.
-
Variables and Built-in Variables
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the variables and built-in variables used in Google Tag Manager.
-
New Features of Adobe InDesign CC
The latest version of Adobe InDesign CC contains a lot of new features and enhancements. In this video; Jamie Campbell will introduce you to Adobe InDesign CC and a few of its new features.
-
New Features of Adobe Photoshop CC
Adobe Creative Cloud is the next generation of Adobe’s popular Creative Suite of applications and contains many new features. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses some of the key new features in Adobe Photoshop CC.
-
New Features of Adobe Premiere Pro CC
Adobe Premiere Pro CC is the industry standard for non-linear editing and post-production application. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the new features of Adobe Premiere Pro CC.
-
Photoshop CC and Camera Raw
Adobe Creative Cloud is used for image editing and manipulation. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to Camera Raw.
-
Photoshop CC Smart Objects
Adobe Photoshop CC provides many new creative features for image editing. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Smart Objects feature in Photoshop CC.
-
The Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC
Adobe Premiere Pro CC is the latest application for developing professional visual and audio and one of its new features is the redesigned Timeline. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC.
-
Using Images as Brushes in Adobe Illustrator CC
Adobe Illustrator CC contains a lot of new features; one of which is the ability to use images as brushes. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use one of Adobe Illustrator CC’s interesting new features; using images as brushes.
-
Adobe InDesign CC’s New UI
One of the important new features in Adobe InDesign CC is the user interface. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the new user interface of Adobe InDesign CC.
-
After Effects CC Refine Edge Tool and Warp Stabilizer VFX
After Effects CC is the latest version of Adobe’s powerful video compositing; animation; and visual effects application used by graphic professionals everywhere to produce visual effects for film and TV. In this video; Jamie Campbell will introduce you to new Adobe After Effects CC features; Refine Edge Tool and Warp Stabilizer VFX.
-
Introduction to Adobe Audition CC
Adobe Audition CC is a powerful audio editing application in Adobe Creative Cloud. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the new features in Adobe Audition CC.
-
Introduction to Adobe Bridge CC
In Adobe CC; you have the Adobe Bridge CC that can be used to find; sort; filter; and organize the photos; graphics; videos; and other digital assets. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses Adobe Bridge CC and its various features.
-
Introduction to Adobe Edge Animate CC
In Adobe CC; you have the Adobe Edge Animate CC application; which can be used to create and animate content on the Web. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses about the latest features of Adobe Edge Animate CC.
-
Introduction to Adobe Fireworks CS6
Adobe Fireworks is a powerful bitmap and vector graphics editor. It’s the application of choice for web designers who want to build graphics for devices; whether it’s for rapid prototyping of websites or the design of application interfaces. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
Introduction to Adobe InCopy CC
In Adobe CC; you have the Adobe InCopy CC; which is a writing and editing software that allows writing and collaborating with others. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses about the new features of Adobe InCopy CC.
-
Introduction to Adobe Muse CC
In Adobe CC; you can use Adobe Muse CC to create and publish dynamic websites for desktops and mobile devices without writing any code. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses about the latest features of Adobe Muse CC.
-
Introduction to Adobe Prelude CC
In Adobe CC; you can use Adobe Prelude CC to review; import; log; select; and export digital media. It can also be used to organize and streamline the digital process. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses about the latest features of Adobe Prelude CC.
-
Introduction to Adobe SpeedGrade CC
In Adobe CC; you have Adobe SpeedGrade CC; which is a color-correction application that delivers balanced color and vibrant results for the video productions. It is generally used at the beginning and ending of the video-editing workflow. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses about the latest features of Adobe SpeedGrade CC.
-
Introduction to the Creative Cloud
Adobe Creative Cloud is the next generation of Adobe’s popular Creative Suite of applications. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to the Creative Cloud suite of applications.
-
New Features of Adobe Acrobat XI Pro
Adobe Premiere Pro is the industry standard for non-linear editing and post-production. Acrobat XI Pro is Adobe’s latest version offered in Adobe Creative Cloud. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the new features of Adobe Acrobat XI Pro.
-
New Features of Adobe After Effects CC
Adobe After Effects is a powerful video compositing; animation; and visual effects application used by graphic professionals everywhere to produce film and TV visual effects. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the new features of Adobe After Effects CC.
-
New Features of Adobe Dreamweaver CC
Adobe Creative Cloud is a cloud-enabled set of applications and the latest version of Adobe’s web development platform is Adobe Dreamweaver CC. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the new features of Adobe Dreamweaver CC.
-
New Features of Adobe Flash Professional CC
Adobe Creative Cloud helps you to easily develop Flash applications and web sites. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the new features of Adobe Flash Professional CC.
-
New Features of Adobe Illustrator CC
Adobe Illustrator CC is Adobe’s powerful vector graphics application that helps to produce graphics; artwork; and illustrations for screen and print. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to the new features of Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
An Introduction to
Adobe Fireworks CS6 is a powerful bitmap and vector graphics editor that is used to develop graphics intended for screen output. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces Adobe Fireworks CS6 and explains what you can do with it.
-
Bitmap and Vector Graphics
Adobe Fireworks CS6 is a powerful bitmap and vector graphics editor used to develop websites and application interfaces for screen output. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the difference between bitmap and vector graphics and how they are used in Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
The Fireworks Interface
Adobe Fireworks CS6 is used to design different types of graphics and interfaces. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Adobe Fireworks Interface.
-
Using the Bitmap Tools
Adobe Fireworks CS6 is a powerful application that can be used to build graphics for devices; to design websites or application interfaces. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Bitmap group of tools in Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
Using the Properties Panel
In Adobe Fireworks CS6; you have context-sensitive panels that simplify the workflow and make working with the application more efficient. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Properties panel in Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
Using the Select Tools
Adobe Fireworks CS6 has a toolbox with tools that are grouped according to their function; this makes it easy to work with; and hence the application of choice for web designers all over. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Select group of tools in Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
Using the Slice Tool
In Adobe Fireworks CS6; you can add interactivity to the designs and select portions to create clickable graphics to get output for integration in the websites or applications. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Slice tool in Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
Using the Vector Tools
Adobe Fireworks CS6 is a powerful application for designing websites; application interfaces; and anything else intended for screen output. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Vector group of tools in Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
Using the Web Tools
Adobe Fireworks CS6 is a powerful Bitmap and Vector graphics editor that can be used to build graphics for devices. Its main purpose is for end-user interaction in websites and application. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains the Web group of tools in Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
Working with Bitmap Graphics
Adobe Fireworks CS6 is used to develop all types of screen outputs. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how bitmaps are used in Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
Working with Layers
Adobe Fireworks CS6 is a powerful bitmap and vector graphics editor that’s used primarily to develop graphics intended for screen output. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses what layers are and how to work with them in Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
Working with Pages
After watching this video; you will be able to create and manage pages in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Working with Photographs
In Adobe Fireworks CS6; you have several features to work with photographs. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to work with photographs in Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
3D Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the 3D Rotation tool and the 3D Translation tool in AdobeFlash Professional CC 2015.
-
Adding Frames
After watching this video; you will be able to add frames to the timeline in AdobeFlash Professional CC 2015.
-
Aligning
After watching this video; you will be able to align objects in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Arithmetic Operators
After watching this video; you will be able to use arithmetic operators in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Changing Stage Properties
After watching this video; you will be able to change stage size; frame rate; and color in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Code Snippets
After watching this video; you will be able to use code snippets in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Color and Stroke
After watching this video; you will be able to set color and stroke in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Configuring the Workspace
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the Workspace in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Converting Objects to Symbols
After watching this video; you will be able to convert objects to symbols in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Create a Motion Tween
After watching this video; you will be able to create a motion tween in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Create a Shape Tween
After watching this video; you will be able to create a shape tween in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Creating a Button
After watching this video; you will be able to create a clickable button in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Creating Animations
After watching this video; you will be able to create animations in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Creating New Flash Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to create new Flash documents in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Creating Scenes
After watching this video; you will be able to create new scenes on the Timeline in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Creating Text
After watching this video; you will be able to create text in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Drawing Lines
After watching this video; you will be able to draw lines in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Drawing Primitive Shapes
After watching this video; you will be able to draw primitive shapes in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Drawing with Adobe Flash
After watching this video; you will be able to draw with Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Editing Document Properties
After watching this video; you will be able to edit document properties in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Extending Flash
After watching this video; you will be able to extend Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015 with the Adobe Exchange.
-
Free Transform Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Free Transform tool in AdobeFlash Professional CC 2015.
-
Grouping and Arranging
After watching this video; you will be able to group and arrange objects in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Guides
After watching this video; you will be able to use guides in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Introduction to the Stage
After watching this video; you will be able to use the stage in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015 graphics preferences.
-
Lasso Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Lasso tools in AdobeFlash Professional CC 2015.
-
Layer Controls
After watching this video; you will be able to modify layer properties on the Timeline in AdobeFlash Professional CC 2015.
-
Logical Operators
After watching this video; you will be able to use logical operators in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Loops
After watching this video; you will be able to use for and while loops in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Motion Presets
After watching this video; you will be able to apply Motion Presets to create animations in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Navigating the Stage
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate the stage in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Panels and Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use panels and tools in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Placing Library Objects on the Stage
After watching this video; you will be able to place Library objects on the stage in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Position and Size
After watching this video; you will be able to set position and size in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Preview Modes
After watching this video; you will be able to change preview modes in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Referencing Stage Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to reference stage objects in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Selecting Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to select multiple objects in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Selection Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use selection tools in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Setting Preferences
After watching this video; you will be able to modify preferences in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Snapping
After watching this video; you will be able to use snapping in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
The Actions Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use and configure the Actions panel in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
The Brush Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Brush tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The Eraser Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Eraser tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The Eyedropper Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Eyedropper tool in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
The Grid
After watching this video; you will be able to use the grid in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Using the Library
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Library in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Working with Gradients
After watching this video; you will be able to create gradient fills in AdobeFlash Professional CC 2015.
-
The Pen Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Pen tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The Ink Bottle Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Ink Bottle tool in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
The Trace Command
After watching this video; you will be able to use the trace command to provide programmatic output in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Using ActionScript
After watching this video; you will be able to use ActionScript in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Using Rulers
After watching this video; you will be able to use rulers in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Working with Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to create objects with tools in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
The Magic Wand Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Magic Wand tool in AdobeFlash Professional CC 2015.
-
The Output Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the output panel to review compiler messages in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
The Paint Bucket Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Paint Bucket tool in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
The Pencil Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Pencil tool in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Exporting in Different Formats in
After watching this video; you will be able to export PDF files in different formats using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Inserting Pages in
After watching this video; you will be able to insert pages into Adobe Acrobat DC files.
-
Organizing Pages in
After watching this video; you will be able to manipulate pages in Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Protecting Documents in
After watching this video; you will be able to describe how to protect documents using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Adding a Watermark in
After watching this video; you will be able to create watermarks using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Adding Attachments Using
After watching this video; you will be able to add attachments to documents in Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Adding Comments and Collaboration in
After watching this video; you will be able to add comments and collaborate using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Adding Links Using
After watching this video; you will be able to add links to documents in Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Adding Page Numbers and Dates in
After watching this video; you will be able to add page numbers and dates in Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Adding Page Transitions in
After watching this video; you will be able to add page transitions in Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Adding Text and Images in
After watching this video; you will be able to add text and images to PDF files using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Combining Files to Create PDFs in
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Combine Files into PDFs feature in Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Create a PDF FILE in
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new PDF file; use an existing file; insert a blank page; add a graphic; and add page numbers in Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Creating a PDF File in
After watching this video; you will be able to create a PDF file using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Creating Fillable Forms in
After watching this video; you will be able to describe options for creating fillable forms using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Creating Headers and Footers in
After watching this video; you will be able to create headers and footers using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Cropping Pages in
After watching this video; you will be able to crop pages in Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Document Cloud and Creative Cloud in
After watching this video; you will be able to save PDF files to the Document Cloud and Creative Cloud using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Editing Text and Images in
After watching this video; you will be able to work with text and images using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Enhance a PDF File
After watching this video; you will be able to enhance a PDF file in Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Saving in Different Formats in
After watching this video; you will be able to save PDF files in different formats using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Signing Documents in
After watching this video; you will be able to create a digital signature using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Stamping Documents in
After watching this video; you will be able to add stamps using Adobe Acrobat DC.
-
Drawing Shapes
Adobe Acrobat X allows you to draw and edit shapes. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to draw shapes and edit them.
-
Adding Comments; Attaching Files; and Making Edits
Adobe Acrobat X allows you to review PDF documents and mark up for editing. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to modify a PDF document and add annotations and text boxes.
-
Creating a Button to Submit a Form
Once you’ve created a form in Adobe Acrobat X; you can add a button that allows users to submit the completed form and even automatically send it to an e-mail address. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to create a button on a form.
-
Creating a Drop-down List From Item
When creating a form in Adobe Acrobat X; you can use drop-down fields to provide users with multiple options to choose from. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to create a drop-down field.
-
Creating a Form from an Existing Document
In Adobe Acrobat; you can create a form in one of two ways; by using Microsoft Publisher or by scanning a form into Acrobat and using the form editing options to edit it. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to create a form.
-
Creating Calculated Fields Form Items
You can insert calculations into forms you create in Adobe Acrobat X. For example; you can add or multiply values in different fields. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to insert calculations into fields in a form.
-
Modifying Form Items
Adobe Acrobat X automatically creates a form from a document by guessing where to insert fields. You can manually edit these fields by changing their properties. You can also delete fields and insert more suitable ones. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to edit fields in a form.
-
Modifying; Previewing; and Testing Changes to a Form
Adobe Acrobat X lets you modify a form you created and then preview and test the changes. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to modify and preview a form.
-
Applying Built-In Themes and Creating Your Own
Adobe Captivate 7 includes many built-in themes along with the ability to customize and reuse themes to create a well-planned and consistent look and feel across your projects. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to enhance a project by applying a Captivate built-in theme; customize the theme; and save it as a unique theme.
-
Attaching Background Audio to a Single Object
Adobe Captivate 7 allows you to attach sound to specific objects in your slides to add emphasis to important steps and bring life to your project. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Audio menu in Captivate to import an audio file that plays when a text caption appears on a mouse event.
-
Creating a Project by Importing a PPT
A useful feature of Adobe Captivate 7 is that it integrates with Microsoft PowerPoint; allowing you to easily import and edit PowerPoint presentations when creating a project. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates the options for importing a PPT file; and how imported slides can be edited in a PowerPoint environment from within Captivate.
-
Creating a Project Manually
In Adobe Captivate 7; you can create a new presentation manually by starting with a blank project and formatting slides to create a consistent look across your project. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to add slides to a blank project and format the theme elements within slides using the options provided in the PROPERTIES panel.
-
Editing a Software Sim
Once you've recorded a software simulation; Adobe Captivate 7 provides a comprehensive set of tools that allow you edit your project and fine-tune the overall look of your finished simulation. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates the various features of the Captivate workspace while making changes to specific elements on the slides within a software simulation.
-
Inserting a Hotspot Question
Adobe Captivate 7 allows developers to insert a hotspot question where the user needs to identify a particular item on screen. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to insert a hotspot on a graded question slide in a presentation on Microsoft Word; and covers associating an image with the hotspot and inserting buttons and text.
-
Inserting a Multiple Choice Question
In Adobe Captivate 7; you can create and edit multiple choice questions. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use the Quiz menu to insert a multiple choice question at the end of a presentation.
-
Inserting a Premade Interaction
Adobe Captivate 7 has a library of premade interactive widgets; called interactions; which you can add to your projects. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use the Insert Interaction feature to insert a glossary into a Word presentation.
-
Inserting Background Audio for a Specific Slide
Adobe Captivate 7 provides options that allow you to import audio as the background track for individual slides in your project or distribute the audio over several slides. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates the different options you have when importing audio into a slide using the Audio Import dialog box from the Audio menu.
-
Inserting Background Audio for an Entire Project
Adobe Captivate 7 allows you to enhance your project by adding a background audio track that plays while the project slides are shown. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to import a background music file into a project; and how you can manipulate the audio using the configuration options and edit tools in Captivate's Background Audio dialog box.
-
Inserting Buttons that Run Actions
In Adobe Captivate 7; you can use buttons to allow for user interactivity in your presentations. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use the Insert Text Caption option to insert two buttons so the user can restart or exit the presentation.
-
Inserting Click Boxes
In Adobe Captivate 7; you can take a non-interactive project and add click boxes to make it interactive. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use the Click Box feature to insert a click box containing an error message and a mouse action.
-
Inserting Video and Animation
In Adobe Captivate 7; you can insert video clips and Flash animations into your projects. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use the Insert Video feature to add a video clip to a Word file.
-
Publishing Projects
After watching this video; you will be able to publish an Adobe Captivate 8 project for use on multiple devices.
-
Randomizing Questions Using Question Pools
Adobe Captivate 7 allows developers to randomize questions in question pools to avoid predictability and reduce the opportunities for collaboration in tests. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to create a question pool containing various types of questions and setting Captivate to choose a random question each time the test is run.
-
Recording New Narration onto a Slide
After watching this video; you will be able to record new narration onto a slide in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Setup and Record Software Demo
The new Video Demo mode in Adobe Captivate 7 allows you to easily create software demonstrations by capturing onscreen actions in real-time. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to configure recording options and global preferences then record a demonstration. He also highlights the publish settings; how the demonstration appears in the editing environment; and how to save the file.
-
Setup and Record Software Sim
Adobe Captivate 7 allows you to rapidly setup and record your onscreen activity to create an interactive software simulation for your audience to use in a controlled environment. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to configure the recording options and global recording preferences; before recording a software simulation and viewing it in the Captivate development environment.
-
Adding Captions
After watching this video; you will be able to insert text captions into a slide in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Adding Images and Smart Shapes
After watching this video; you will be able to add images and smart shapes to a slide in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Adding Slides and Responsive Content
After watching this video; you will be able to add slides and responsive text to a project in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Attaching Background Audio
After watching this video; you will be able to attach background audio in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Create a Captivate 8 Project
After watching this video; you will be able to create an Adobe Captivate 8 project.
-
Creating a Project
After watching this video; you will be able to create an Adobe Captivate 8 project file manually.
-
Creating a Project from PowerPoint
After watching this video; you will be able to create an Adobe Captivate 8 project file by importing a PowerPoint file.
-
Editing Software Sims
After watching this video; you will be able to edit software sims in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Enhance an Project
After watching this video; you will be able to add media and interactive elements to an Adobe Captivate 8 project.
-
Exploring Captivate
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate the Captivate 8 interface and specify preferences .
-
Inserting Action Buttons
After watching this video; you will be able to insert action buttons in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Inserting and Using Click Boxes
After watching this video; you will be able to insert click boxes in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Inserting Hotspot Questions
After watching this video; you will be able to insert hotspot questions in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Inserting Multiple Choice Questions
After watching this video; you will be able to insert multiple choice questions in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Recording Software Demos
After watching this video; you will be able to set up and record a video demo in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Recording Software Sims
After watching this video; you will be able to set up and record software sims in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Using Characters
After watching this video; you will be able to work with characters in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Using Drag and Drop Elements
After watching this video; you will be able to include drag and drop elements in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Using Object Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to use object effects in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Using Premade Actions
After watching this video; you will be able to use premade interactions in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Using Preview Options
After watching this video; you will be able to explore project preview options for responsive design.
-
Using Question Pools
After watching this video; you will be able to randomize questions using question pools in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Using the Timeline
After watching this video; you will be able to use the timeline to control timing in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Working with Rollovers and Zooms
After watching this video; you will be able to apply rollovers of different types and zoom areas in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Adding Extensions
After watching this video; you will be able to use extensions in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Adding Video
After watching this video; you will be able to work with video and audio tracks in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Arranging Windows
After watching this video; you will be able to arrange windows in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Behaviors
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Behaviors panel in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Browsing Add-Ons
After watching this video; you will be able to browse add-ons in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Cleaning Up HTML
After watching this video; you will be able to clean up HTML code in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Code Auto-completion
After watching this video; you will be able to use code Auto-completion in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Code Hinting and Completion
After watching this video; you will be able to use code hinting and completion in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Code Preferences
After watching this video; you will be able to modify code preferences in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Code; Split; and Live Views
After watching this video; you will be able to use Code; Split; and Live views in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Editing the Browser List
After watching this video; you will be able to edit the browser list in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
General Preferences
After watching this video; you will be able to modify general preferences in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Global Find and Replace
After watching this video; you will be able to use global Find and Replace in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Inspect Mode
After watching this video; you will be able to use Inspect Mode in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Installing a Web Server
After watching this video; you will be able to install a web server for use with Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Work with Panels
After watching this video; you will be able to work with panels in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Working with DIVs
After watching this video; you will be able to work with DIVs in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Working with Tabbed Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to work with tabbed documents in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Component Files
After watching this video; you will be able to work with component files in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Creating a Fluid Grid
After watching this video; you will be able to create a fluid grid project in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Creating a New Site
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new site using the Files panel in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Creating DIVs
After watching this video; you will be able to create DIVs in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Creating HTML and Browsing
After watching this video; you will be able to create basic HTML and preview it in a browser in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Creating Hyperlinks
After watching this video; you will be able to create hyperlinks in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Creating Lists
After watching this video; you will be able to create lists in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Creating Media Queries
After watching this video; you will be able to create media queries in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Creating New Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to create new documents in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Creating Rollover Images
After watching this video; you will be able to create rollover images in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Creating Templates
After watching this video; you will be able to create templates in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
CSS Transitions
After watching this video; you will be able to use the CSS Transitions panel in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Design View
After watching this video; you will be able to use Design view in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Device Preview
After watching this video; you will be able to use Device Preview with responsive designs in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Editing a Document
After watching this video; you will be able to edit a document in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Installing the Extension Manager
After watching this video; you will be able to install extension manager in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Introduction to the Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to identify different parts of the Word 2016 interface and their functions.
-
Live View Source Code
After watching this video; you will be able to use Live view source code in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Managing Fonts
After watching this video; you will be able to manage fonts in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Mouse-Over Previews
After watching this video; you will be able to use mouse-over previews in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Previewing in a Browser
After watching this video; you will be able to preview web pages in the default browser in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Source Code Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use Source Code Window Tools in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
The Assets Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Assets panel in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
The Code Inspector
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Code Inspector in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
The CSS Designer Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the CSS Designer panel in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
The DOM Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the DOM panel in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
The Extract Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Extract panel in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
The Files Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Files panel in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
The Insert Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Insert panel in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
The Properties Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Properties panel in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
The Scrubber
After watching this video; you will be able to use the scrubber with responsive designs in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
The Snippets Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Snippets panel in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
The Source Code Window
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Source Code Window in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
The Visual Media Queries Bar
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Visual Media Queries Bar with responsive designs in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Using a Testing Server
After watching this video; you will be able to use a testing server for document source in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Using Emmet
After watching this video; you will be able to use Emmet code completion in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Using Templates
After watching this video; you will be able to use templates in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Warnings and Errors
After watching this video; you will be able to address warnings and errors in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Creating Type
After watching this video; you will be able to create type in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Customizing Workspaces
After watching this video; you will be able to configure work spaces in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Draw Modes
After watching this video; you will be able to use draw modes in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Editing Artboards
After watching this video; you will be able to edit artboards in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Editing Curves
After watching this video; you will be able to edit curves in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Free Transform
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Free Transform tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Graphing Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use Graph tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Grouping
After watching this video; you will be able to group and ungroup objects in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Illustrator Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to use Illustrator Effects in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Introduction to Color
After watching this video; you will be able to work with color in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Isolation Mode
After watching this video; you will be able to isolate objects for editing in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Joining and Breaking Apart Paths
After watching this video; you will be able to join and break apart paths in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Layers
After watching this video; you will be able to use layers in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Modifying Anchor Points
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Direct Selection Tool to modify anchor points in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Navigating
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate documents in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Navigating Workspaces
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate the workspace in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Placing Bitmap Images
After watching this video; you will be able to place bitmap images into Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Placing Text
After watching this video; you will be able to place text files in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Placing Text on a Path
After watching this video; you will be able to place text on a path in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Replicating Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to use copy and paste to replicate objects in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Rotating and Reflecting
After watching this video; you will be able to use Rotate and Reflect in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Rulers and Guides
After watching this video; you will be able to use rulers and guides in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Scaling; Shearing; and Reshaping
After watching this video; you will be able to apply Scale; Shear and Reshape settings in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Selecting Objects On the Fly Using Ctrl
After watching this video; you will be able to select and modify objects on the fly using the CTRL key in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Selection Tools in Adobe Illustrator CC
After watching this video; you will be able to use the selection tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Stroke and Fill
After watching this video; you will be able to modify stroke and fill in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Symbol Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use Symbol tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Tabbed Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to arrange tabbed documents in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Arc Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Arc tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Area Type Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Area Type tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Blob Brush
After watching this video; you will be able to use Blob brush in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Context-Sensitive Toolbar
After watching this video; you will be able to work with and arrange toolbars in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Crystallize and Wrinkle Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Crystallize and Wrinkle tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Flare Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Flare tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Knife Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Knife Tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Lasso Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Lasso tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Line Segment Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Line Segment Tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Live Paint Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Live Paint tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Mesh Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Mesh tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Paintbrush Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Paintbrush Tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Perspective Grid
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Perspective Grid in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Polar Grid Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Polar Grid tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Polygon Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Polygon tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Pucker; Bloat; and Scallop Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Pucker; Bloat; and Scallop tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Rectangle Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Rectangle Tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Rectangular Grid Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Rectangular Grid tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Scissors Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Scissors Tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Shape Builder Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Shape Builder tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Spiral Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Spiral tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Star Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Star tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Touch Type Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Touch Type tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Width; Warp and Twirl Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Width; Warp; and Twirl tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Threading Text
After watching this video; you will be able to thread text between frames a file in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Toolbars and Palettes
After watching this video; you will be able to work with and arrange toolbars and palettes in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Tracing Bitmaps
After watching this video; you will be able to trace bitmaps in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Transform Objects with Adobe Illustrator CC
After watching this video; you will be able to transform various objects using Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Transparency
After watching this video; you will be able to create transparency in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Typesetting Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use typesetting tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Using Paragraph Text
After watching this video; you will be able to use paragraph text in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Working with
After watching this video; you will be able to work with Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Working with Files
After watching this video; you will be able to open; place; and export files in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Zooming
After watching this video; you will be able to zoom in and out in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Adding and Removing Anchor Points
After watching this video; you will be able to add and remove anchor points to paths in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Preferences
After watching this video; you will be able to modify preferences in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Aligning and Distribute Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to align and distribute objects in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Anchor Points and Curves
After watching this video; you will be able to work with anchor points and curves in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Applying Advanced Features
After watching this video; you will be able to apply advanced Adobe Illustrator CC 2014 features.
-
Applying Effects to Bitmaps
After watching this video; you will be able to apply effects to bitmaps in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Arranging Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to arrange objects in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Blending
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Blend tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Changing Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to change document settings and program preferences on the fly in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Clipping Masks
After watching this video; you will be able to create clipping masks in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Converting Anchor Points
After watching this video; you will be able to convert anchor points in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Creating Complex Paths
After watching this video; you will be able to create complex paths with the Pen tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Creating Gradient Fills
After watching this video; you will be able to create and modify gradient fills in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Working with the Context-sensitive Control Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to work with the context-sensitive control panel in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Working with Transparency
After watching this video; you will be able to create transparency in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Zooming with Illustrator
After watching this video; you will be able to zoom artboards on the fly in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
How to Create Clipping Masks
After watching this video; you will be able to create clipping masks in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Eraser Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Eraser Tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Knife Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Knife Tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Lasso Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Lasso tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Magic Wand Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Magic Wand tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Polar Grid Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Polar Grid tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Polygon Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Polygon tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Scissors Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Scissors tool in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using the Star Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Star tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Aligning and Distributing Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to align and distribute objects in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Applying Illustrator Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to use Illustrator Effects in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Blending Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Blend tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Converting Text to Curves
After watching this video; you will be able to convert text to curves in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Replicating Objects Using Copy and Paste
After watching this video; you will be able to use copy and paste to replicate objects in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Area Type Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Area Type tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Blob Brush
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Blob brush tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Crystallize and Wrinkle Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Crystallize and Wrinkle tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Curvature Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Curvature tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Eyedropper Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Eyedropper tool to select colors in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Flare Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Flare tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Grid
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use the grid in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Line Segment Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Line Segment tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Live Paint Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Live Paint tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Mesh Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Mesh tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Paintbrush Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Paintbrush tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Perspective Grid
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Perspective Grid in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Pucker; Bloat; and Scallop Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Pucker; Bloat; and Scallop tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Rectangle Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Rectangle tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Rectangular Grid Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Rectangular Grid tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Selection Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Selection tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Shape Builder Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Shape Builder tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Spiral Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Spiral tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Touch Type Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Touch Type tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Width; Warp; and Twirl Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Width; Warp; and Twirl tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use tools with Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using Workspaces
After watching this video; you will be able to configure workspaces in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Working with Anchor Points and Curves
After watching this video; you will be able to work with anchor points and curves in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Working with Draw Modes
After watching this video; you will be able to use draw modes in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Working with File Types
After watching this video; you will be able to work with file types in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Working with Isolation Mode
After watching this video; you will be able to isolate objects for editing in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Pencil Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Pencil tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Working with Linked Assets
After watching this video; you will be able to use linked assets to keep files up to date in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Creating a Document
After watching this video; you will be able to create an Adobe Illustrator CC 2015 document and prepare it for drawing.
-
Creating Area Type
After watching this video; you will be able to create area type in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Creating Drop Shadows
After watching this video; you will be able to create drop shadows in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Creating Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to create objects and text with Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Editing Bitmaps
After watching this video; you will be able to edit bitmaps in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Exploring Panels and Palettes
After watching this video; you will be able to work with and configure panels and palettes in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Exploring Tabbed Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to arrange tabbed documents in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Exploring Toolbars and Panels
After watching this video; you will be able to work with the toolbars and panels in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Grouping Objects in Illustrator
After watching this video; you will be able to group and ungroup objects in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
How to Use Free Transform
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Free Transform tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Introduction to Creative Cloud Charts
After watching this video; you will be able to access Creative Cloud charts in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Introduction to Stock Art
After watching this video; you will be able to access stock art in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Introduction to Vector Art
After watching this video; you will be able to work with vector art in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Navigating the Workspace
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate the workspace in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Transforming Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to apply object transformations in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Typesetting
After watching this video; you will be able to use typesetting features in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Advanced Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use advanced tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using Illustrator Libraries
After watching this video; you will be able to create new libraries and add assets in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using Illustrator Preferences
After watching this video; you will be able to modify preferences in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using Rulers and Guides
After watching this video; you will be able to use rulers and guides in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using Smart Guides
After watching this video; you will be able to work with Smart Guides in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using Stroke and Fill
After watching this video; you will be able to modify stroke and fill in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using Symbol Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Symbol Sprayer and Symbol tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Arc Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Arc tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Adding Column Guides
After watching this video; you will be able to add column guides in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Anchoring Images in Text
After watching this video; you will be able to anchor images in text frames in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Color Models
After watching this video; you will be able to create new documents in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Creating Text Frames
After watching this video; you will be able to create text frames to place text in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Drawing Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to work with the drawing tools in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Fitting Images
After watching this video; you will be able to fit images in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Images and Irregular Shapes
After watching this video; you will be able to place images into irregular shapes Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Linking Text Frames
After watching this video; you will be able to bring large text documents into the application in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Modifying Paragraph Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to modify paragraph styles as per your preferences in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Pen Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to create complex paths with the pen tools in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Pencil Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the pencil tools in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Placing Images
After watching this video; you will be able to place images in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Positioning Images
After watching this video; you will be able to position images in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Resizing Images
After watching this video; you will be able to resize images in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Splitting Layout View
After watching this video; you will be able to split the layout view in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
The Gradient Swatch Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Gradient Swatch tool in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
The Page Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Page Tool in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
The Toolbars and Tabs
After watching this video; you will be able to familiarize yourself with the toobars and tabs in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Transform Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the transform tool group in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Using the Grids
After watching this video; you will be able to display and customize the grids in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Wrapping Text Around Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to wrap text around objects in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Aligning and Distributing
After watching this video; you will be able to align and distribute objects in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Applying Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to apply effects in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Manipulating Pages
After watching this video; you will be able to add; remove; and organize pages in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Placing Linked Text
After watching this video; you will be able to place text files in linked frames in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Text Scaling and Skewing; and Baseline Text
After watching this video; you will be able to modify text scaling; skewing; and baseline text in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using Basic Paragraph Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to modify paragraph settings in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using Grids
After watching this video; you will be able to display and customize grids in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using Headers and Footers
After watching this video; you will be able to create headers and footers in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using the Content Collector Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to collect and place content in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using the Gap Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to adjust gaps between objects in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using the Gradient Feather Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Gradient Feather tool in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using the Gradient Swatch Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Gradient Swatch tool in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using the Object Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the basic object tools in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using the Page Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Page tool in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using the Pen Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to create complex paths with the pen tools in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using the Pencil Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the pencil tools in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using the Transform Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Transform tool group in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Working with Color
After watching this video; you will be able to work with color in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Working with Images and Irregular Shapes
After watching this video; you will be able to place images into irregular shapes in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Working with Links
After watching this video; you will be able to work with links in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Creating Books
After watching this video; you will be able to create books in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Creating Drop Caps
After watching this video; you will be able to create drop caps in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Creating Tabs
After watching this video; you will be able to create tabs in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Exporting Files
After watching this video; you will be able to export files in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Grouping Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to group objects in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Leading; Kerning; and Tracking
After watching this video; you will be able to modify leading; kerning; and tracking in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Working with Master Pages
In Microsoft Publisher 2013; you can use the Master Page feature to organize and lay out your publications. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses Master Pages in Publisher.
-
Working with Page Types
After watching this video; you will be able to use single and facing pages in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Working with Paragraph Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to modify paragraph settings in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Working with Text in InDesign
After watching this video; you will be able to work with text in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Zooming with Indesign
After watching this video; you will be able to zoom on the fly in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Export PDF Files
One of the best ways of exporting documents created in Adobe InDesign CS6 to PDF files is to use the Adobe PDF presets. Depending on your needs; you can choose from presets such as high quality print or smallest file size. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use a preset to create a PDF from an InDesign document.
-
Adjusting Curves in
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Curves feature in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Adjusting Levels in
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Levels feature in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Marquee Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to make simple marquee selections in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Apply Transformations with
After watching this video; you will be able to • create a new text layer • apply a layer style • apply a Free Transform • crop
-
Auto Adjustments in
After watching this video; you will be able to use auto adjustments in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Blending Modes in
After watching this video; you will be able to apply blending modes in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Changing Brush Sizes on the Fly in Photoshop CC 2014
After watching this video; you will be able to change brush sizes on the fly in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Changing Eye Color
After watching this video; you will be able to change eye color in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Cloning Between Layers
After watching this video; you will be able to clone to a different layer in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Cloning from Different Files
After watching this video; you will be able to clone from different image files in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Color Replacement Tool in
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Color Replacement Tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Colorizing Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to change object colors in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Converting a Selection into a Path
After watching this video; you will be able to convert a selection into a path in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Creating a Mask with a Path
After watching this video; you will be able to create a mask with a path in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Creating Circular Insets in
After watching this video; you will be able to create a circular inset in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Creating Drop Shadows in
After watching this video; you will be able to create a Drop Shadow in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Creating Duotones in
After watching this video; you will be able to create duotones in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Creating Reflection Effects in
After watching this video; you will be able to create a reflection effect in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Creating Text in
After watching this video; you will be able to create text in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Using Adjustment Layers in
After watching this video; you will be able to use adjustment layers in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Using Canvas Size in
After watching this video; you will be able to use canvas size in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Using Free Transform in
After watching this video; you will be able to use Free Transform in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Using Layer Masks in
After watching this video; you will be able to use layer masks in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Using Layer Styles in
After watching this video; you will be able to use layer styles in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Using Pattern Stamps in
After watching this video; you will be able to use Pattern Stamp in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Using Print Screen in
After watching this video; you will be able to use Print Screen and Clipboard in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Using Text Layers to Modify Other Layers
After watching this video; you will be able to use text layers to modify other layers in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Using the Mixer Brush in
After watching this video; you will be able to use Mixer Brush in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Using the Paste Into Feature in
After watching this video; you will be able to paste into a Photoshop document in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Using Transparency in
After watching this video; you will be able to use transparency in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Warping Text in
After watching this video; you will be able to create warped text in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Working with Color in
After watching this video; you will be able to work with color in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Working with File Types in
After watching this video; you will be able to configure different file types in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Working with the Navigator in
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Navigator in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Creating Glow Effects in
After watching this video; you will be able to create a glow effect in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Creating Gradients in
After watching this video; you will be able to create gradients in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Creating Lens Flares in
After watching this video; you will be able to create a lens flare in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Creating Paragraph Text in
After watching this video; you will be able to create paragraph text in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Paragraph Settings in
After watching this video; you will be able to modify paragraph settings in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Placing Images in
After watching this video; you will be able to place images in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Resampling Images in
After watching this video; you will be able to resample images in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Resizing Images in
After watching this video; you will be able to resize images in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Rulers and Guides in
After watching this video; you will be able to use rulers and guides in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Selecting Pixels
After watching this video; you will be able to isolate an object and draw around it in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Setting Preferences in
After watching this video; you will be able to set Preferences in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Smart Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to work with Smart Objects in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Swapping Backgrounds in
After watching this video; you will be able to swap backgrounds in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Tabs in
After watching this video; you will be able to work with the tabbed interface in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Text Layers and Rasterizing in
After watching this video; you will be able to use text layers and rasterize type in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The Background Eraser Tool in Photoshop CC 2014
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Background Eraser Tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The Clone Stamp Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Clone Stamp tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The Eraser Tool in Photoshop CC 2014
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Eraser Tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The Freeform Pen Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Freeform Pen tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The History Brush Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the History Brush tools in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The History Palette in
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Adobe Photoshop CC 2014 History palette.
-
The Magic Eraser Tool in Photoshop CC 2014
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Magic Eraser Tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The Magnetic Lasso Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Magnetic Lasso tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The Polygonal Lasso Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Polygonal Lasso tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The Quick Selection Tool in
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Quick Selection tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The Refine Edge Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Refine Edge tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The Slice Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Slice tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Toolbars in
After watching this video; you will be able to work with the toolbars in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Typesetting in
After watching this video; you will be able to use typesetting features in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Use Paths in
After watching this video; you will be able to • make a path from a selection • give a path a name • apply a stroke to the path • add a mask to the path
-
Cropping Images in
After watching this video; you will be able to crop images in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Desaturating Images in
After watching this video; you will be able to desaturate images in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Dodge and Burn in
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Dodge and Burn Tools in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Drag and Drop from Other Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to drag and drop from other documents in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Duplicating Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to isolate and duplicate objects in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Enhance Images with
After watching this video; you will be able to • select a gradient • create a gradient fill • add a layer and modify transparency • apply a lens flare
-
Feathering
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Feathering feature in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Filling and Outlining with a Path
After watching this video; you will be able to create fills and outlines with a path in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Healing Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use Healing tools in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Introduction to Layers in
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate layers in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Introduction to Workspaces in
After watching this video; you will be able to configure Workspaces in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Irregular Marquee Selection
After watching this video; you will be able to make irregular Marquee selections in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Isolating a Layer Object
After watching this video; you will be able to isolate a layer object and create transparency in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Isolating and Cloning
After watching this video; you will be able to isolate and clone objects in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Isolating for Drawing
After watching this video; you will be able to isolate an object and draw around it in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Live Shapes in
After watching this video; you will be able to use Live Shapes in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Live Shapes Properties in
After watching this video; you will be able to use Live Shapes Properties in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Make Selections with
After watching this video; you will be able to • select with the elliptical marquee • place on new layer • use the rubber stamp to duplicate part of an object • use the lasso to highlight part of an image • place on new layer
-
Making a Selection with a Path
After watching this video; you will be able to make a selection with a path in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Manipulate the Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to • undock toolbar(s) • activate the Navigator • save a new Workspace • display the rulers • add guides to a Photoshop file
-
Marquee and Move Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use marquee options in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Multiple Selection Techniques
After watching this video; you will be able to use multiple selection techniques in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
New Export Options
After watching this video; you will be able to use new export options in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Nudging
After watching this video; you will be able to nudge selections in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Paragraph Styles
After watching this video; you will be able to work with paragraph styles in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Paragraph Text
After watching this video; you will be able to edit paragraph text in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Previewing on Devices
After watching this video; you will be able to preview designs on devices in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Removing Objects from Images
After watching this video; you will be able to remove image objects in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Resampling Images
After watching this video; you will be able to resample images in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Stock and Libraries
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate stock libraries in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Swapping Backgrounds
After watching this video; you will be able to swap backgrounds in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Tabs
After watching this video; you will be able to work with the tabbed interface in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Text Layers and Rasterizing
After watching this video; you will be able to use text layers and rasterize type in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The Background Eraser Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Background Eraser tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The Move Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Move tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The Navigator
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Navigator in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The Patch Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use Healing tools in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The Purpose of Selecting Pixels
After watching this video; you will be able to isolate an object and draw around it in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The Quick Selection Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Quick Selection tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Toolbars
After watching this video; you will be able to work with the toolbars in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Artboards
After watching this video; you will be able to use artboards in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Canvas Size
After watching this video; you will be able to use canvas size in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Free Transform
After watching this video; you will be able to use Free Transform in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Layer Masks
After watching this video; you will be able to use layer masks in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Layer Styles
After watching this video; you will be able to use layer styles in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Live Shape Properties
After watching this video; you will be able to use Live Shapes properties in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Live Shapes
After watching this video; you will be able to use Live Shapes in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Paste Into
After watching this video; you will be able to use the paste into function in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Pattern Stamps
After watching this video; you will be able to use Pattern Stamp in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Print Screen
After watching this video; you will be able to use Print Screen and Clipboard in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using the Freeform Pen Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Freeform Pen tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using the Magnetic Pen Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Magnetic Pen tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using the Mixer Brush
After watching this video; you will be able to use Mixer Brush in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using the Pen Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Pen tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Warping Type
After watching this video; you will be able to create warped type in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Workspaces
After watching this video; you will be able to configure workspaces in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Colorizing Parts of a Black and White Image
After watching this video; you will be able to colorize parts of a black and white image in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Creating Circular Insets
After watching this video; you will be able to create a circular inset in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Creating Duotones
After watching this video; you will be able to create duotones in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Creating Gradients
After watching this video; you will be able to create gradients in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Creating Lens Flares
After watching this video; you will be able to create a lens flare in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Creating Reflection Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to create a reflection effect in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Cropping Images
After watching this video; you will be able to crop images in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Desaturating Images
After watching this video; you will be able to desaturate images in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Dodge and Burn
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Dodge and Burn tools in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Dragging and Dropping
After watching this video; you will be able to drag and drop files in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Exercise: Make Selections with
After watching this video; you will be able to practice selection techniques in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Exercise: Manipulating Layers with Adobe Photoshop CC
After watching this video; you will be able to practice layer manipulation with Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Exercise: Work with Paths
After watching this video; you will be able to work with paths in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Exercise: Working with Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to practice working with tools in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Explaining Pixels
After watching this video; you will be able to work with pixels in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
File Types
After watching this video; you will be able to work with different file types in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Introduction to Layers
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate layers in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Irregular Marquee Selections
After watching this video; you will be able to make irregular Marquee selections in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The Healing Brush Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to link and embed Smart Objects in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The History Palette
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Adobe Photoshop CC 2015 History palette.
-
The Magic Eraser Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Magic Eraser tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Adding Type
After watching this video; you will be able to add type to images in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Adjusting Curves
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Curves feature in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Adjusting Levels
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Levels feature in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Anti-Aliasing
After watching this video; you will be able to work with anti-aliasing in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Auto Adjustments
After watching this video; you will be able to use auto adjustments in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Blending Modes
After watching this video; you will be able to apply blending modes in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Changing Brush Sizes on the Fly
After watching this video; you will be able to change brush sizes on the fly in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Changing Object Color
After watching this video; you will be able to change object color in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Cloning in Adobe Photoshop
After watching this video; you will be able to use cloning techniques in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Color Replacement Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the color replacement tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Adding Adjustments
After watching this video; you will be able to add adjustments to movies in Adobe Premiere Elements 13.
-
Adding Events
After watching this video; you will be able to apply calendar events in Adobe Premiere Elements 13.
-
Adding Media Files
After watching this video; you will be able to add files to the organizer in Adobe Premiere Elements 13.
-
Adding Movies
After watching this video; you will be able to add movies to the timeline in Adobe Premiere Elements 13.
-
Adding Titles to Movies
After watching this video; you will be able to add titles and text to movies in Adobe Premiere Elements 13.
-
Applied Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to add applied effects to movies in Adobe Premiere Elements 13.
-
Editing Clips
After watching this video; you will be able to edit clips on the timeline in Adobe Premiere Elements 13.
-
Navigating the Organizer
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate the organizer interface in Adobe Premiere Elements 13.
-
Organizing Media Files
After watching this video; you will be able to add files to the organizer in Adobe Premiere Elements 13.
-
Working with Audio
After watching this video; you will be able to work with audio in Adobe Premiere Elements 13.
-
Working with Movie Files
After watching this video; you will be able to add files to the organizer; apply calendar elements; add a movie to the timeline; and add a title.
-
Adding Markers
After watching this video; you will be able to add markers to clips in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Adding Markers to the Timeline
After watching this video; you will be able to add markers to the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Adding Titles to the Timeline
After watching this video; you will be able to add titles to the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Adding Video and Audio Clips to the Timeline
After watching this video; you will be able to add video and audio clips to the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Applying Motion Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to apply motion effects in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Browsing Media
After watching this video; you will be able to browse media in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Changing a Program's Duration
After watching this video; you will be able to change a program's duration in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Configuring Graphics Acceleration
After watching this video; you will be able to configure Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015 graphics preferences.
-
Creating a Movie
After watching this video; you will be able to create a movie sequence in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Creating Sequences
After watching this video; you will be able to create sequences in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Editing Clips
After watching this video; you will be able to edit clips in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Effects and Effect Controls
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Effects panel and Effect Controls panel in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Mark In and Mark Out
After watching this video; you will be able to mark in and mark out clips in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Modifying Opacity
After watching this video; you will be able to modify opacity on clips in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Nesting Clips
After watching this video; you will be able to nest clips on the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Organizing the Project Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to organize the Project panel in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Previewing Media
After watching this video; you will be able to preview media in the Source panel in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Removing Jump Cuts
After watching this video; you will be able to remove jump cuts in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Scrubbing Video
After watching this video; you will be able to scrub through movies in the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Selecting and Duplicating Clips
After watching this video; you will be able to select and duplicate clips on the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Snapping on the Timeline
After watching this video; you will be able to snap clips on the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Source Patching on the Timeline
After watching this video; you will be able to modify source targeting on the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
The Audio Clip Mixer
After watching this video; you will be able to work with the Audio Clip Mixer in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
The Source Panel Controls
After watching this video; you will be able to use source panel controls to scrub through and play back clips in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Time Remapping
After watching this video; you will be able to use time remapping in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Track Targeting on the Timeline
After watching this video; you will be able to utilize track targeting on the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Trimming Clips
After watching this video; you will be able to trim clips on the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using Add-Ons
After watching this video; you will be able to use add-ons in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using Extensions
After watching this video; you will be able to use extensions in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using Keyboard Shortcuts
After watching this video; you will be able to use keyboard shortcuts in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using Looks for Your Video
After watching this video; you will be able to use Looks for Your Video in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using Lumetri Color
After watching this video; you will be able to use Lumetri Color in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Exporting Frames
After watching this video; you will be able to export frames as images in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Exporting Movies
After watching this video; you will be able to export movies in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Introduction to Panels
After watching this video; you will be able to use panels in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Linked Selections on the Timeline
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Linked Selection feature on the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using Sync Lock
After watching this video; you will be able to use Sync Lock in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using the CC Libraries for Video
After watching this video; you will be able to use CC Libraries for Video in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using the Effects Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Effects panel in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using the History Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the History panel in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using the Info Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Info panel in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using the Libraries
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Libraries panel in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using the Markers Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Markers panel in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using the Media Browser
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Media Browser panel in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using the Project Panel
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Project panel in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Using Track Lock
After watching this video; you will be able to use Track Lock in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Working with Keyframes
After watching this video; you will be able to apply keyframes in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Working with Metadata
After watching this video; you will be able to work with metadata in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Working with Panels
After watching this video; you will be able to work with panels in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Working with the Timeline Display Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to add markers to the Timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Working with Video and Audio Tracks
After watching this video; you will be able to work with video and audio tracks in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Customizing Premiere Pro
You can customize Adobe Premiere Pro CS6 based on your needs and task requirements. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to modify and move interface elements in the workspace; how to navigate through panes; and how to access the Premiere Pro Preferences.
-
Adding Clips to the Timeline
Adobe Premiere Pro CS6 is a powerful video editing application. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to add clips to the timeline.
-
How to Trim Clips
In Adobe Premiere Pro CS6; you can trim video clips to create a seamless video. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to trim video clips by removing dead space or audio gaps from the beginning or end of each clip. He also demonstrates how to create a seamless video by combining the clips together into a single sequence.
-
Keyboard Shortcuts
To use Excel 2010 well and efficiently; you should consider using keyboard shortcuts. Using the keyboard shortcuts allows you to keep your hands on the keyboard instead of having to reach for the mouse constantly. In this video; Adam Wilcox will demonstrate how to use several keyboard shortcuts to improve your efficiency.
-
Organizing Assets in Premiere Pro
In Adobe Premiere Pro CS6; you work with assets such as video and audio clips. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to preview video thumbnails and organize your assets by creating and storing them in bins.
-
The Premiere Pro Interface
Adobe Premiere Pro CS6 is a powerful video production application. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the user interface in Premiere Pro CS6; how to choose and customize workspaces; and the various Premiere Pro panes.
-
Advanced Security with SCM and Windows Baselines
In Windows 7; the Security Compliance Manager includes the Security Baseline feature; which contains Microsoft’s recommendations for various security settings; and actual baseline settings that can be applied across a domain. In this video; Byron Hynes uses the Security Baseline feature to review how a computer’s security settings should be configured according to the recommendation.
-
Avoid Social Engineering Attacks
Social engineering attacks; such as phishing or e-mail fraud; aim to get your personal information. The United States Computer Emergency Readiness Team (US-CERT) warns against giving sensitive information to anyone unless you’re sure they are who they claim to be. In this video; Byron Hynes provides some key tips to prevent computer crime from happening to you.
-
Company Wide Security with GPOs
In Windows; you can use Group Policy Objects; or GPOs; to centrally apply and manage security settings; such as firewalls and software restrictions; on some or all of the computers in a network. In this video; Byron Hynes creates a group policy to turn on Windows Firewall when a computer connects to a public network.
-
Control Access to Files with Permissions
In Windows; you can use permissions to control who has access to shared information. You can set share permissions on the actual share and NTFS permissions on the files stored in the NTFS file system. In this video; Byron Hynes uses share permissions to share a folder across the network and sets NTFS permissions on the folder.
-
Encrypt Your USB Sticks and Portable Media
You can encrypt your hard drives; portable media; memory cards; and USB sticks to prevent phishing and information theft. Encryption tools include BitLocker; a built-in Windows product; and TrueCrypt; which is a free download. In the video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to access BitLocker and use TrueCrypt to create a virtual drive in which any data stored will be encrypted.
-
Encrypting Your Wireless Networks
It’s important to protect confidential information transmitted across a wireless network from being accessed by others. You can use various methods of network encryption; such as WEP or WPA2; to secure a wireless private network. In this video; Byron Hynes creates an ad hoc wireless network and uses WPA2-Personal encryption to secure it.
-
Enhance Your Privacy on Social Networks
Most social networks; such as Twitter; LinkedIn; Yammer; Foursquare; and Facebook; offer varying levels of privacy that enable you to control your online privacy and reputation. In this video; Byron Hynes uses the Privacy Settings tab on Facebook to customize the privacy levels for his profile and the ads; apps; and web sites that run on his profile.
-
General Concepts
There are a number of ways you can protect your computer from security threats. In this video; Byron Hynes discusses the steps you can take to safeguard data.
-
Improve Security by Running as a Non-Admin
Windows provides several ways to improve system security; such as the User Account Control feature or performing your day-to-day operations as a nonadministrator; depending on your version of Windows. In this video; Byron Hynes uses the User Account Control feature and creates a new user that’s not a member of the Administrators group to improve the security on a system.
-
Recognizing E-mail Scams
E-mail scams; sometimes called phishing or fraud; exist to get your money or personal information. The United States Computer Emergency Readiness Team (US-CERT) provides key steps to avoid e-mail fraud; such as filtering spam and using antivirus software and a firewall. In this video; Byron Hynes discusses some specific things that you can do to recognize a fraudulent e-mail.
-
Transfer Files Securely
It’s important to ensure confidential files are transferred securely via e-mail. You can use a third-party service to encrypt files; or encrypt files yourself using tools such as 7-Zip or WinRar. In this video; Byron Hynes uses WinRar to encrypt a compressed file; assign a password; and encrypt the filenames to ensure they stay protected in transit.
-
Use Automatic Updates
Automatic Updates keep your system up to date and resilient against the most common and newest threats. Most major vendors; such as Microsoft; Apple; and Google; have a secure automatic updating function built into their software. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to configure the Windows Update feature.
-
Use Microsoft
You should use antimalware or antivirus software to protect your computer against cyber attacks. Microsoft Security Essentials is a free antivirus program for standalone systems or small organizations using Windows. In the video; Byron Hynes uses Security Essentials to protect his computer against virus attacks.
-
Basics of Social Networking
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the basics of social networking.
-
Business Communication Benefits
After watching this video; you will be able to identify business communication benefits of social networking.
-
Career Development Benefits
After watching this video; you will be able to describe career development benefits of social networking.
-
Emerging Social Networking Services
After watching this video; you will be able to identify emerging social networking services.
-
Facebook and Twitter
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and work with common social networking features in Facebook and Twitter.
-
Google+ and LinkedIn
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and use common social networking features in Google+ and LinkedIn.
-
Identifying Appropriate Social Networking Services
After watching this video; you will be able to select a social networking service based on business requirements.
-
Personal Benefits
After watching this video; you will be able to recall personal benefits of social networking.
-
Pinterest and Tumblr
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and work with common social networking features in Pinterest and Tumblr.
-
Selecting Social Networking Services
After watching this video; you will be able to choose social networking services for business purposes.
-
Social Networking and SharePoint
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize features of social networking in SharePoint.
-
Popular Social Networking Services
After watching this video; you will be able to identify popular social networking services.
-
Defining a Social Networking Strategy
After watching this video; you will be able to define a basic social networking strategy.
-
Social Networking and Social Media
After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between social networking and social media.
-
Social Networking Best Practices
After watching this video; you will be able to identify best practices for business promotion through social networking.
-
Social Networking Community Management
After watching this video; you will be able to describe best business practices for social networking community management.
-
Social Networking Management Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to compare common social networking management tools.
-
Social Networking Policies
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize benefits of organizational social networking policies.
-
Social Networking Risks
After watching this video; you will be able to identify organizational risks associated with social networking.
-
Targeted Marketing Benefits
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize targeted marketing benefits of social networking.
-
Vine; Instagram; and Flickr
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and use common social networking features in Vine; Instagram; and Flickr.
-
YouTube; Periscope; and Meerkat
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and work with common social networking features in YouTube; Periscope; and Meerkat.
-
Review Social Networking Fundamentals
After watching this video; you will be able to recall various social networking fundamental concepts.
-
Review Social Networking Services
After watching this video; you will be able to work with social networking features of popular social networking services.
-
Being Googleable
In LinkedIn; you can ensure that your public profile can be found by a Google search. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to edit your public LinkedIn profile in order to increase your online presence.
-
Controlling Facebook Notifications
On Facebook; notifications are short messages that tell you when people take actions on Facebook that relate to your profile. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how you can change notification settings for the photos on your profile.
-
Creating Badges
To give people quick and easy access to the information on your social media pages; such as Facebook and Twitter; you can add an icon; called a badge; to your web site; blog; or e-mail signature. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create a Facebook profile badge for a web site.
-
Customizing Badges
On Facebook; you can create badges to use across social media on the Web to show summarized views of your profile. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create and configure badges.
-
Enhancing Your Network with LinkedIn
LinkedIn helps you increase your employability by building up connections to companies and other professionals. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use your profile information to increase visibility and enhance connectability.
-
Getting LinkedIn
LinkedIn is a social network that targets business professionals and is useful for business marketing and building connections. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create a LinkedIn profile that will allow you to start building your network.
-
Getting Your Face on Facebook
To get your own Facebook page; you need to sign up for an account and provide some personal information as well as a password. Once you’ve created your account; you can start populating your Facebook page. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create and populate a new Facebook page.
-
Keywording
On Twitter; you can use keywords; known as hashtags; to find information on topics of interest in categories; such as stories or activities. You can also create your own hashtags by typing the pound symbol followed by the keywords so others can find your information easily. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use hashtags.
-
Linking Twitter and Facebook
To save time; you can have your tweets automatically post to your Facebook page by linking your Facebook and Twitter accounts. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to link a Facebook account and a Twitter account and post a tweet on a Facebook page.
-
Using Facebook Events
On Facebook; you can create events you want to host for your friends or business. Events can be virtual or take place in the real world. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create a virtual event.
-
Using Profiles
Your Twitter profile displays information about you; such as your display name; location; web site; and picture. You can add this information when you first create your Twitter account and update it at a later stage. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to update a Twitter profile.
-
Managing Recommendations
In LinkedIn; you can use the Manage Recommendations feature to add recommendations to increase your chances of future employment or promotion. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to request and make recommendations.
-
Retweeting
Retweeting; which is often abbreviated as RT; lets you forward useful information to your followers. A retweet includes the original author’s name as well as your name. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to retweet information.
-
Sharing Photos on Facebook
On Facebook; you can easily share images or pictures with friends. Adding information; such as the location; date; and a description; to photos makes it easier for people to find them. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create albums and share photos on Facebook.
-
Twitter Basics
It's a good idea to get to know the Twitter interface before you begin tweeting. From the Home page; you can find people; discover different themes; access your profile; view your account’s statistics; get suggestions and hints; and read tweets. In this video; Erin Olsen provides a tour of the Twitter Home page.
-
Activating Your Account to Join the Network
After watching this video; you will be able to sign up and activate your account to join the network.
-
Creating Groups
After watching this video; you will be able to create public and private groups in Yammer; as well as invite people to your group.
-
Creating Polls
After watching this video; you will be able to create a poll in Yammer.
-
Discovering and Joining Groups
After watching this video; you will be able to discover and join groups in Yammer.
-
Exercise: Interacting and Using Yammer
After watching this video; you will be able to log in to and use Yammer to interact with business colleagues.
-
Exploring the Yammer Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the different pages of the Yammer interface.
-
Posting and Sharing Messages
After watching this video; you will be able to post public and private messages; like and share posts; and reply to and delete messages in Yammer.
-
Praising Group Members
After watching this video; you will be able to praise group members in Yammer.
-
Searching for People; Groups; and Content
After watching this video; you will be able to use the search feature in Yammer to find people; groups; and content.
-
Updating Your Profile
After watching this video; you will be able to update your profile and settings within Yammer.
-
Uploading and Accessing Files
After watching this video; you will be able to upload and share files in Yammer; including adding comments; following; and versioning.
-
Using #Topics
After watching this video; you will be able to follow and create #topics in Yammer.
-
Using Notes
After watching this video; you will be able to create and edit notes in Yammer; including adding links to URLs; files; and people and versioning.
-
Using the Yammer Desktop Notifier and Mobile
After watching this video; you will be able to download and use the Yammer Desktop Notifier and the mobile app.
-
Yammer Features
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the features of Yammer for business users.
-
Creating Bookmarks
Safari 7 allows you to create bookmarks so that you can easily access your favourite web pages. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to create bookmarks in Safari and on the desktop.
-
Downloading Files
Safari 7 allows you to download files; such as documents and images; directly from the web. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to download various types of files; such as PDFs and images.
-
Enable or Disable Plugins
In Safari 7; you can disable plug-ins if you have trouble viewing a Flash or Silverlight movie that you really want to see. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use the Internet plug-ins option to enable and disable plug-ins.
-
Handy Shortcuts
Safari 7 provides a range of shortcuts that you can use for more efficient usage of the browser. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use a variety of shortcuts to manipulate tabs; and enter and exit full screen mode.
-
iCloud Tabs
Safari 7 in OS X allows you to view newly opened tabs across multiple devices. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how open tabs on a desktop can be viewed on an iPad and and iPhone using iCloud.
-
Reader
In Safari 7; you can display a web page without its sidebars and advertisements. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use the Reader feature to remove the sidebars and advertisements from a web page that you'd like to read without any distractions.
-
Saving Webpages for Offline Viewing
In Safari 7; you can read saved web pages when you have no Internet connection. In this video; Bob Flisser; demonstrates how to use the Reading List to save web pages for offline viewing.
-
Shared Links in the Sidebar
In Safari 7; you can easily access links that people are tweeting. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use the Shared Links feature to access links that other users have tweeted.
-
Top Sites
In Safari 7; you can use Top Sites to organize the sites that you often visit. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use Top Sites to add sites from your bookmarks and address bar.
-
ActiveX Filtering
After watching this video; you will be able to adjust Internet Explorer 11 settings to have a safer browsing experience and the identify impact on performance and interactive content.
-
Adding Sites to a Security Zone
After watching this video; you will be able to add web sites to the relevant security zone in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Add-on Free Start Experience
After watching this video; you will be able to describe add-on differences between Start and Desktop versions and view; install; remove; and turn off add-ons.
-
Allow or Disallow Location Sharing
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the usefulness of the option to enable your physical location in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Blocking all Pop-ups
After watching this video; you will be able to block all pop-ups; including on Local Intranet or Trusted Site security zones; in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Changing ActiveX Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to enable settings to automatically prompt for ActiveX Controls in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Changing Fonts; Colors; and Format of Pages
After watching this video; you will be able to adjust the formatting of web pages in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Changing the Default Search Provider
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a different search provider as a default in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Pop-Up Blocker Levels
After watching this video; you will be able to determine the preferred level of blocking pop-ups in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Removing and Hiding Tabs
After watching this video; you will be able to remove and hide Tabs in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Resetting Internet Explorer Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to reset Internet Explorer 11 settings.
-
Saving Favorite Sites
After watching this video; you will be able to work with Favorites in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Saving Pages to the Reading View List
After watching this video; you will be able to specify a page to save to the Reading View List in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Screen Reader and Voice Recognition Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to select relevant screen reader and voice recognition settings for user accessibility in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Searching
After watching this video; you will be able to specify a search term in the address bar using the default search engine in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Setting AutoComplete Privacy
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize when to use the AutoComplete feature in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Setting Internet Explorer 11 as the Default Browser
After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot how to set Internet Explorer 11 as the default browser.
-
Setting up the Magnifier to use the cursor
After watching this video; you will be able to set up the magnifier or screen reader in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Share Web Content and RSS Feeds
After watching this video; you will be able to configure downloads; subscribe to RSS feeds; and share content.
-
Sharing Sites
After watching this video; you will be able to share web sites from within the Internet Explorer 11 browser.
-
Snapping Mode for Multiple Apps
After watching this video; you will be able to perform snap mode for multiple apps on the Internet Explorer 11 interface.
-
Start App versus Desktop Version
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the difference between the Start and Desktop versions of Internet Explorer 11.
-
Subscribing to RSS Feeds
After watching this video; you will be able to create an RSS Feed in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Suggested Sites
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize that Suggested Sites do not work when using InPrivate Browsing in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Surfing
After watching this video; you will be able to use a URL to surf the web and apply the option to remove the AutoSearch feature in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Switching between Tabs
After watching this video; you will be able to switch between tabs in Internet Explorer 11.
-
The Address Bar Combination
After watching this video; you will be able to work with the Address Bar in Internet Explorer 11 as a starting point for browsing.
-
Turning off Enhanced Suggestions
After watching this video; you will be able to select the option to remove Enhanced Suggestions.
-
Turning off Notifications
After watching this video; you will be able to turn off notifications when pop-ups are blocked in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Turning on Suggested Sites using the Desktop
After watching this video; you will be able to apply the option to turn on Suggested Sites using the Desktop in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Turning the Blocker On or Off
After watching this video; you will be able to determine when to turn on pop-up blocker or turn off pop-up blocker in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Understanding Certificate Errors
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize different certificate errors in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Understanding Cookies
After watching this video; you will be able to describe what a cookie is and how they affect the browsing experience.
-
Using InPrivate Browsing
After watching this video; you will be able to enable InPrivate Browsing and perform an InPrivate Browsing session in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Using Print Preview and Print
After watching this video; you will be able to configure print options within the Internet Explorer 11 browser.
-
Using Tabs for Efficient Browsing
After watching this video; you will be able to open many sites in one browsing window and master how to navigate between them; using Internet Explorer 11.
-
Using the Keyboard with Caret Browsing
After watching this video; you will be able to perform the most efficient keyboard shortcuts for Internet Explorer 11.
-
Using the Pin Option
After watching this video; you will be able to apply or remove the Pin option to the Internet Explorer tile.
-
Using Windows for Efficient Browsing
After watching this video; you will be able to view multiple windows and create two windows in Internet Explorer 11 side-by-side.
-
Viewing and Managing Downloads
After watching this video; you will be able to download files from the Internet and manage the Downloads folder in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Web Support to Render 3D Graphics
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize that Internet Explorer 11 comprises Web support to render 3D Graphics.
-
What are ActiveX Controls?
After watching this video; you will be able to define what an ActiveX control is and how it could affect interaction with content.
-
Work with Internet Explorer 11
After watching this video; you will be able to identify features of the Internet Explorer 11 interface and work with live tiles; Apps; and Favorites.
-
Working with Enhanced Protected Mode
After watching this video; you will be able to describe why Enhanced Protected Mode makes it harder for malware to run in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Zooming on a Web Page
After watching this video; you will be able to apply zoom options to a web page and increase browser text size in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Changing the Font Size and Format
After watching this video; you will be able to make web pages easier to see by changing fonts; colors; and accessibility options in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Configure Browser Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to configure Internet Explorer 11 for enhanced browsing.
-
Configure Filtering and Pop-ups
After watching this video; you will be able to configure Pop-up blocker and ActiveX filtering in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Configure Security Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to configure security options in Internet Explorer 11 relating to zones; cookies; and privacy.
-
Configure User Preferences
After watching this video; you will be able to configure accessibility options and user preferences for an enhanced browser experience.
-
Creating Live Tiles for Sites
After watching this video; you will be able to identify live tiles and how to create a tile for Internet Explorer 11 and sites within the browser.
-
Customizing Reading View Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to use the required Reading View settings in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Customizing Security Zone Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to configure Internet Options to set security settings in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Deleting Browsing History
After watching this video; you will be able to delete your browser history.
-
Deleting Cookies
After watching this video; you will be able to remove cookies from the desktop or start screen in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Disable Toolbars and Extensions
After watching this video; you will be able to disable toolbars and extensions when InPrivate Browsing is actioned in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Exporting and Importing Favorites
After watching this video; you will be able to perform the exporting and importing of favorite bookmarks from different versions of Internet Explorer.
-
Favorites Center with Customized Imaged Bookmarks
After watching this video; you will be able to configure customized Imaged Bookmarks using the Favorites Center in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Filling out Forms using AutoComplete
After watching this video; you will be able to configure settings in Internet Explorer 11 to enable personal information to populate automatically when filling out forms on the Web.
-
First Look at Internet Explorer 11 and GUI Enhancements
After watching this video; you will be able to identify Internet Explorer 11 as well as graphical user interface changes from previous Internet Explorer versions.
-
Installing Java on the Internet Explorer 11 Desktop
After watching this video; you will be able to complete a Java installation for Internet Explorer 11 using the Desktop version.
-
Internet Explorer 11 Icons and Functions
After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between Internet Explorer 11 icon placement as well as their functions in detail.
-
Introducing RSS Feeds
After watching this video; you will be able to define the term RSS Feed.
-
Keeping Tabs and Address Bar Docked
After watching this video; you will be able to configure docking of tabs and the Address Bar in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Launching IE11 from the Start Screen and the Desktop
After watching this video; you will be able to launch Internet Explorer 11 from the Windows Start Screen.
-
Locating the Reading View Icon
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the Reading View icon in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Managing a Stored Account
After watching this video; you will be able to manage a stored account on Internet Explorer 11.
-
Managing Cookies
After watching this video; you will be able to block cookies; allow cookies; and customize cookie settings in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Multitasking with Tabs
After watching this video; you will be able to create a multitasking environment within Internet Explorer 11.
-
Password Saving by Default
After watching this video; you will be able to apply password saving as a default in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Permanent and Unlimited Tabs
After watching this video; you will be able to work with permanent and unlimited tabs in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Playing Sounds and Displaying Text
After watching this video; you will be able to configure Internet Explorer 11 to play sounds on web pages and to display text only when browsing.
-
Tracking Protection
After watching this video; you will be able to select the option not to track sites visited using Internet Explorer 11.
-
Troubleshooting the Search Charm
After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot the locating of Internet Explorer 11 should the Search Charm not work.
-
Turn off Password Saving
After watching this video; you will be able to adjust the on or off password saving setting in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Turning ActiveX Filtering On and Off
After watching this video; you will be able to adjust settings to turn ActiveX Filtering on and off in Internet Explorer 11.
-
Bookmarks in Chrome
You can use bookmarks in Google Chrome to save and organize your favorite web sites. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the bookmarks bar to add and manage bookmarks.
-
Bookmarks in Firefox 14
In Mozilla Firefox 14; you can easily manage your bookmarks by placing them in subfolders; displaying them on the Bookmarks toolbar; and adding tags and keywords. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use the Bookmarks toolbar and Library to manage your bookmarks.
-
Security Features in Firefox 14
Mozilla Firefox 14 includes several features for managing security; such as blocking particular sites or pop-ups; as well as setting password and privacy options. You can also improve performance by clearing your history or any Flash data. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to configure your browser’s security and improve its performance.
-
Security Features in Internet Explorer 10
Internet Explorer 10 includes a range of options for optimizing your security and performance. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates ways to manage browser security and performance features in the Windows 8 desktop environment.
-
Security Features of Chrome
The Google Chrome browser has a number of features to manage security and performance. In this video; Bob Flisser explores the Chrome security and performance options.
-
Syncing Chrome
You can sync Google Chrome with your Google account to use the same tab and cookie browser settings on every computer you use. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use a Gmail account to synchronize Google Chrome.
-
Syncing Firefox 14
In Mozilla Firefox 14; you can set up a user account that allows you to synchronize multiple computers so you can share your history; bookmarks; and even tabs. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Set Up Sync feature to synchronize your Firefox settings on several machines.
-
Bookmarks in Internet Explorer 10
In Internet Explorer 10; you can organize bookmarks in much the same way you’ve organized bookmarks in older versions. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the traditional desktop version of Internet Explorer to sort bookmarks and pin a tab to the taskbar.
-
Internet Explorer 10 Desktop
Internet Explorer in the Windows 8 user interface looks different than older versions. However; you can find a more traditional-looking browser on the desktop. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the desktop version of Internet Explorer to work with tabs; navigate to web pages; and conduct a search.
-
The Chrome Interface
The Google Chrome interface features a number of tools and commands that make it easy to browse the Internet. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the features of the Google Chrome interface to work with tabs; create bookmarks; and search for information.
-
The Firefox 14 Interface
The Mozilla Firefox 14 interface consists of several useful features for accessing web sites; working with tabs; bookmarking pages; and searching the Web. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates the basic web browsing features in Firefox.
-
The Internet Explorer 10 Interface
The new Windows 8 version of Internet Explorer 10 runs in the Start environment. It has several features for browsing or searching the Web and working with tabs. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use Internet Explorer in the Windows 8 Start environment.
-
Adding Charts to Reports
In Microsoft Access 2010; you can include charts in reports to display table data in a visual format; such as on a graph. In this video; Steve English adds a pie chart to a report to display the proportion and total sales for each product category in a query.
-
Apply Conditional Formatting to a Report
Conditional Formatting in Microsoft Access 2010 changes the way report elements look when they meet certain criteria or conditions. In this video; Steve English shows you how to instantly draw your reader’s attention to the text you want noticed by configuring and doing conditional formatting on your report.
-
Compact and Repair a Database
You can use the Compact and Repair feature in Microsoft Access 2010 to reduce the file size of a database. In this video; Steve English uses the Compact and Repair feature to compress a database so that it has a smaller file size.
-
Create a Crosstab Query
In Access 2010 you can create a Crosstab query that looks and behaves like a spreadsheet. In this video; Steve English will demonstrate how to get data into the spreadsheet format so you can manipulate the data and perform calculations.
-
Create a Data Macro
You can create data macros in Access 2010 that are triggered by specific events in the database. In this video; Steve English will demonstrate how to create data macros in Access 2010.
-
Create a Find Duplicates Query
In Microsoft Access 2010; you can use queries to find particular records or types of records in a database. In this video; Steve English creates a Find Duplicates query that counts records that appear more than once in a Sales table to find out how many items have been sold for each product.
-
Create a Find Unmatched Query
You can use a Find Unmatched query in Microsoft Access 2010 to find records in one table that do not appear in another table. In this video; Steve English uses the Query Wizard to create a Find Unmatched query that finds records in a product table that do not appear in a sales table.
-
Create a Primary Key
Access 2010 will automatically create a key in a primary table; but you can create your own primary key instead. In this video; Steve English will demonstrate how to create a primary key in Access 2010.
-
Create a Subreport
The Subreport tool in Microsoft Access 2010 allows you to combine information from several different reports into one. In this video; Steve English shows you how to create a contextual subreport using the Subreport Wizard.
-
Create a Table in Datasheet View
The Datasheet View in Microsoft Access 2010 makes creating a table quicker and easier. In this video; Steve English explains how to do it all—add fields; select data type; and set field properties—without ever switching to the Design View.
-
Create a Table Index
Microsoft Access 2010 allows you to create a table index to speed up your sorts and searches; such as an index on the phone field in an employee list. In this video; Steve English shows you how to create an index and discusses what data types and index properties to select.
-
Create a UI Macro
In Access 2010 you can create a user interface macro that responds to an action taken by a user; such as clicking a button. In this video; Steve English will demonstrate how to create a user interface macro in Access 2010.
-
Create and Edit Joins
You can use joins in Microsoft Access 2010 to define the relationship between fields in different tables. In this video; Steve English creates and modifies a join between fields in two tables; and explores the effect of different join types on a query.
-
Create and Modify a Select Query
You can use queries in Microsoft Access 2010 to return related fields from different tables. In this video; Steve English uses the Query Wizard to create and modify a SELECT query to show related human resources fields from three tables.
-
Create Validation Rules
Validation Rules in Microsoft Access 2010 allows you to set specific formats or ranges for your data fields and guide users when entering data. In this video; Steve English shows you how to create rules to restrict and permit the data entered.
-
Creating Pivot Tables
A Pivot Table in Microsoft Access 2010 can be used to calculate and display multiple dimensions of query data in an interactive chart. In this video; Steve English creates a Pivot Table and performs operations on it to show a graph of products and calculated sales figures over time; with the results filtered by product category.
-
Customizing Lookup Fields
In Microsoft Access 2010; you can use lookup fields in a table to allow users to select from any of several values. In this video; Steve English creates a lookup field that allows you to select a computer manufacturer from a list.
-
Filter Records
The Filter function in Microsoft Access 2010 makes it easy to find specific values; such as products in a database within a cost range. In this video; Steve English shows you how to filter and display only those records that meet your criteria.
-
Find and Replace Data
Find and Replace is a useful function in Microsoft Access 2010 for searching and replacing data. In this video; Steve English shows you how to restrict your search and keep your data safe from unwanted changes when doing a Replace All.
-
Importing Data from Office
You can easily import data into Microsoft Access 2010 from a number of different data sources; such as Office documents. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to import table data from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
-
Link to Data in Another Database
You can link an Access 2010 database to another Access database so that they share information in tables. In this video; Steve English will demonstrate how to link two Access 2010 databases.
-
Optimize a Database with Table Analyzer
You can use the Access 2010 Table Analyzer to examine your database for inefficiencies and it will recommend how to restructure the database so that it runs as fast as possible. In this video; Steve English will demonstrate how to use the Access 2010 Table Analyzer to make your databases run more efficiently.
-
Refine a Query Using Groupings
In Microsoft Access 2010 you can arrange data in a report into groups to make it more meaningful and to provide summary information. In this video; Steve English uses the Grouping feature to group and sort products in a report into their categories; and to provide a calculated total field for each group.
-
Secure a Database
You can secure an Access 2010 database so that only the people you want to have access to the data have access. In this video; Steve English will demonstrate how to secure an Access 2010 database.
-
Secure an Access Database
By default; when you open a database in Microsoft Access 2010; you get a security warning to prevent VBA macros from being activated. To avoid this; you can create trusted locations. In this video; Steve English configures a folder on his hard disk as a trusted location to prevent Windows from blocking active content in files that are stored there.
-
Sort Records
The Sort function in Microsoft Access 2010 allows you to arrange and rearrange table and query records anyway you like. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to sort a table by single and multiple fields.
-
Use a Predefined Input Mask for a Table Field
You can create an input mask for table fields in Access 2010 so that users are faced to enter data in a specific format. In this video; Steve English will demonstrate how to create an input mask for table fields in Access 2010.
-
Use Object Prefixes
In Microsoft Access 2010; following a good naming convention will be useful for those who inherit the task of maintaining your database and for you when you resume work on it after a while. In this video; Steve English explains how using appropriate prefixes makes the database object type obvious.
-
Create a Subform
In Access 2010 subforms can be nested within another form. In this video; Steve English will demonstrate how to create subforms in Access.
-
Fixing Text
Microsoft Excel 2010 allows you to extract information from strings and fix text to appear the way you want. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to concatenate two strings and to change the case of the text.
-
Manipulating Text
Microsoft Excel 2010 allows you to manipulate strings that comprise text; numbers; and special characters; such as Product IDs. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to apply text functions to return the length of a string; the position of characters within the string; and the prefix; suffix; and number from the string.
-
Useful Math Functions
Excel 2010 includes many math functions including ones to find integers; to round a number; to find greatest common denominator; to find the circumference and area of a circle; and many more. In this video; Adam Wilcox will demonstrate how to use some useful math functions.
-
About Range Lookups
In Microsoft Excel 2010; range lookups allow you to return values even if the information you’re looking up isn’t precisely within the lookup range. The Range Lookup function can be used to return all the sales figures below a certain value in a table. In this video; Adam Wilcox uses the Range argument of the VLOOKUP function to find and return data from a worksheet.
-
Add Data Validation Rule
Data validation is a means to check that the data entered in a workbook conforms to certain rules. You can specify the validation criteria for a cell range; and use messages to communicate to users what the rules are. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to add data validation rules to a workbook.
-
Add Drop Down Validation Rule
You can add drop-down lists to Microsoft Excel 2010 workbooks using validation rules. This allows you to select a value for each cell from a defined list. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to add a list-based validation rule to a workbook.
-
Additional Date Features
Microsoft Excel 2010 has some handy functions that you can use when you work with dates. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how he calculates a date based on a number of days; the number of workdays between two dates; and how to display the month; day; or year as text or as a number.
-
Additional PivotTable Features
Microsoft Excel 2010 provides additional PivotTable features making it easier for you to view data and garner information from spreadsheets. In this video; Adam Wilcox uses the additional PivotTable features to view data by date; summarize data by second; minute; hour; month; day; quarter; or year; view data by subtotals; and filter the data using slicers.
-
Align Text in Cells
Microsoft Excel 2010 has several alignment options for altering the way text displays in a cell. For example; you can center; rotate; or wrap text. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to use the various alignment features to modify the appearance of text in a worksheet.
-
Analysis ToolPak
In Microsoft Excel 2010; you can load add-ins such as the Analysis ToolPak to perform statistical analysis on your data. Some common analysis tools are correlation; sampling; and histograms. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to load the Analysis ToolPak and use some of its tools to analyze data.
-
Apply and Modify Number Formats
Microsoft Excel 2010 provides several number formats. You can easily format numbers as currency; dates; or phone numbers. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to apply various formats to numbers.
-
Apply Conditional Formatting
In Microsoft Excel 2010; you can use conditional formatting to apply formats based on a condition to cells in a worksheet. You can use preset conditional formatting; such as highlighting cells; data bars; or icon sets. Alternatively you can create your own formatting rules. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to use preset rules and create your own rules.
-
Array Formulas
In Excel 2010 you can use arrays to perform some very sophisticated calculations. In this video; Adam Wilcox defines what an array is and then demonstrates how to enter an array and use it to perform calculations.
-
Calculations in Pivot Tables
In Excel 2010; you can control the calculations on the values in a pivot table. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to show values and summarize values on the data in a pivot table.
-
Chart Layout and Formatting
Microsoft Excel 2010 includes several tools for formatting charts to improve their appearance and the information they convey. You can change the chart type; select a style; and insert labels and titles. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to format the style and data labels of a pie chart.
-
Choosing Appropriate Chart Types
In Excel 2010; there is a wide range of chart types you can use to illustrate your data. In this video; Adam Wilcox will demonstrate how to select the appropriate chart type to illustrate your data.
-
Cleaning Data and Removing Duplicates
If you receive data from a source other than an Excel worksheet; you might need to clean up the data to use in Excel 2010. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to clean the data including removing extra characters; converting text to numbers; and removing duplicate values.
-
Combining Text
Microsoft Excel 2010 includes functions for manipulating text. You can combine text from different cells into one cell or you can separate parts of a string into different cells. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to use the CONCATENATE; LEFT; RIGHT; and MID functions to manipulate text.
-
Consolidating Data in Several Workbooks
The Consolidate command in Microsoft Excel 2010 allows you to take information from several similar workbooks and combine it in one workbook. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to consolidate data.
-
Copying and Moving Data
In Microsoft Excel 2010; you can copy or move data in a worksheet from one location to another. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates several methods of copying and pasting data as well as moving data from one cell to another in a worksheet.
-
Copying Cell Formatting
In Microsoft Excel 2010; you can copy the formatting in a cell or cell range to another location in your workbook; using the Paste options or Format Painter. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to copy formatting to a single cell and a range of cells in a workbook.
-
Create a Scenario
In Microsoft Excel 2010; you can create scenarios as a way to look at different combinations of values in your workbook. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to use the Scenario Manager to create and switch between different sets of data in the same worksheet.
-
Creating PivotTable Reports
In Microsoft Excel 2010; PivotTables are an incredibly useful tool. They allow you to generate useful information from large amounts of data. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to create and modify a PivotTable report.
-
Custom Number Formats
Microsoft Excel 2010 enables you to customize number formats in various ways. You can customize positive numbers; negative numbers; zeroes; and text. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to customize various number formats.
-
Elements of an Excel Chart
Charts are visual representations of data. In Microsoft Excel 2010; you can easily create various types of charts from an existing data source. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to create and modify an Excel chart.
-
Entering and Understanding Functions
Microsoft Excel 2010 includes a built-in library of calculations; known as functions. You can use functions to perform various calculations; such as adding numbers or calculating interest payments. In this video; Adam Wilcox uses the SUM; AVERAGE; and SUMIF functions to calculate the total and average sales; as well as the sales per region in a worksheet.
-
Excel Options
The Excel Options dialog box allows you to configure how the Microsoft Excel 2010 environment behaves. You can change the default font; the tabs on the Ribbon; the options for saving and proofing workbooks; as well as the way formulas work. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to configure some of these options.
-
Fill Series
In Microsoft Excel 2010; you can use the fill handle to easily enter a series of data; such as sequential numbers or dates; down a column or across a row. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to create series of numbers; text; and dates in a worksheet.
-
Formula Concepts
You can perform calculations in Microsoft Excel 2010 using formulas. Formulas always start with an equal sign and then use combinations of operators; references; and constants to get a result. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates the components of basic formulas as well as the order in which Excel evaluates the operations in a formula.
-
Goal Seek
In Microsoft Excel 2010; you can perform What-If analysis using tools such as Goal Seek. Goal Seek lets you set a target value to determine what input values will help you reach that target. For more complex analysis; you can use Solver; which is an Excel add-in. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to use Goal Seek and Solver.
-
Graphics and Smart Art
Microsoft Excel 2010 has several tools for adding simple and effective graphics; such as pictures; shapes; and SmartArt; to a workbook. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to add and format graphics in Excel.
-
Grouping and Subtotals
In Excel 2010; you can organize large amounts of data in a worksheet into groups and then subtotal the groups for a higher-level view of the data. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to organize a large worksheet containing sales data into groups and create subtotals for these groups.
-
Headers and Footers
Microsoft Excel 2010 lets you add headers and footers to a worksheet that is being printed. You can add the title or page number to the header or footer on each page. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to add headers and footers to a worksheet.
-
Import Data from the Web
The Web Query feature in Microsoft Excel 2010 lets you create and maintain a live connection between your workbook and data on the Web. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to add a live currency conversion table to a workbook.
-
Import Delimited Text Files
Microsoft Excel 2010 has some useful tools for parsing data from different kinds of files; such as a text file or a Word document; into Excel worksheets. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to bring external data into Excel and display it in columns.
-
Inserting and Deleting Rows and Columns
Microsoft Excel 2010 allows you to easily insert and delete data in the middle of a worksheet. However; you need be aware of how insertions or deletions affect the surrounding data. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to add and remove data from a worksheet.
-
Styles and Themes
In Excel 2010; you can quickly and easily apply consistent formatting to cells or ranges in your worksheets using themes and styles. In this video; Adam Wilcox will demonstrate how to create; apply; and modify styles as well as to change the theme including the color palette; fonts; and effects.
-
Using Match and Index
Microsoft Excel 2010 provides the MATCH and INDEX functions to find values in an array based on the position of those values. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates two methods of returning the product ID in a table using the year and model number.
-
Using Pivot Charts
In Excel 2010; you can use pivot charts to illustrate large amounts of data in digestible chunks. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to create pivot charts from pivot table data.
-
Using Simple Finance Functions
In Excel 2010; there are many financial functions you can use in your worksheets. In this video; Adam Wilcox will demonstrate how to use three of the simple financial functions to calculate future value; present value; and payments.
-
Using Structured References with Tables
Tables are a powerful feature of Excel 2010 and structured references are one of the best things about them. In this video; Adam Wilcox will demonstrate the syntax for referring to table data by structured reference name in formulas.
-
Using Workspaces for Multiple Workbooks
There are several ways of arranging multiple open workbooks in Microsoft Excel 2010. You can also save the configuration as a workspace. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to manage your workbooks and workspaces.
-
Variable-Sized Range Names
Microsoft Excel 2010 enables you to create names for ranges that could vary in size. You can use the OFFSET function to specify the range based on a starting cell and the number of rows and columns you want to include. In this video; Adam Wilcox uses the OFFSET function to create a variable sized range name for a PivotTable.
-
Workbook Properties
Each Microsoft Excel 2010 workbook has a set of properties that are associated with it as a file. These properties include the title; the author; and keywords. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to access and change a workbook's properties.
-
Working with Dates
Microsoft Excel 2010 stores dates in a sequential way to enable you to perform calculations; such as the amount of time between two dates. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to calculate the number of years that an employee has worked at a company.
-
Working with Panes
Using panes and extra windows in Microsoft Excel 2010 allows you to view different parts of a workbook at the same time. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to use panes and windows to display more data in a workbook at the same time.
-
Link Cells from Different Workbooks
In Microsoft Excel 2010; you can connect information in different worksheets or workbooks by using links. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to create links to connect data in separate workbooks.
-
Making Use of Logical Functions
Logical functions are some of the most powerful functions in Microsoft Excel 2010 because they make decisions before doing calculations. For example; Excel can perform different calculations; depending on whether a condition is true or not. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to use logical functions to calculate whether employees qualify for goal bonuses; category bonuses; or club membership.
-
Managing Worksheets
In Microsoft Excel 2010; workbooks usually contain several worksheets. You can add; delete; and move them as you need. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates the different ways to manage worksheets in a workbook.
-
Page Layout Options
Microsoft Excel 2010 enables you to change the page layout of a workbook before printing it. You can use the Page Layout options to change the page orientation; fit data on one page; and set print titles to repeat headings on multiple pages. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to change the page layout of a large worksheet.
-
Protect Workbooks
Microsoft Excel 2010 offers workbook protection; which allows you to add passwords and control what changes other people can make. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to add different levels of protection to a workbook; and to the cells within a workbook.
-
Publishing Workbook Data to the Web
Microsoft Excel 2010 allows you to save your workbook as a web page. You can also maintain a connection between the workbook and the web page. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to save a worksheet as a web page and keep the connection to the published page.
-
Recently Used File List Tips
The Recently Used file list in Excel 2010 is a way you can access the worksheets you use most often. In this video; Adam Wilcox will demonstrate how the Recently Used file list works and how to control the way it behaves.
-
Record and Run a Macro
A macro in Microsoft Excel 2010 is a set of instructions you can record and then play back to repeat the same actions on another worksheet or workbook. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to record and run a macro.
-
Reference Types
In Microsoft Excel 2010; you can copy formulas containing relative; absolute; or mixed references from one cell to another in your worksheet. Using the correct type of reference ensures the formula works as expected in the cells you copy it to. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to apply formulas containing different types of references to a Sales table.
-
Replacing Data and Checking Spelling
In Excel 2010; you can perform some of the same proofing tasks as you would in a word processor including finding and replacing data; spell checking; and using a thesaurus. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to find and replace data; check your spelling; find synonyms; and search the Internet for information on a selected item.
-
Row and Column Formatting
Microsoft Excel 2010 has several options available for formatting rows and columns to improve a table’s appearance and to make it easier to view the content of a large worksheet. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how he formats a large worksheet by hiding columns; as well as splitting the window and freezing panes.
-
Save Data into Different Formats
Microsoft Excel 2010 allows you to save your workbook in a number of formats if you want to display or import it to another program. Some common formats are web pages and CSV files. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to save an Excel workbook as a web page and a CSV file.
-
Send Files Through E-mail
You can send a workbook directly through Excel 2010 as an email attachment or as the body of an email message using your default mail application. In this video; Adam Wilcox will demonstrate how to email a worksheet or a workbook directly through Excel.
-
Solver
Solver is a Microsoft Excel 2010 add-in that lets you set a particular goal for a formula and then work backwards to find the input values that will give you that goal based on rules that you set. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to install and use the Solver add-in.
-
Sorting Information
Microsoft Excel 2010 provides various ways you can sort information; such as alphabetically or numerically. You can also create custom sorts or randomize the data. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates the different sort methods in a list of sales employees in various departments as well as their earnings.
-
Sparklines
You can use sparklines to visually represent data in Microsoft Excel 2010. A sparkline is a small in-cell chart that shows the data. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to add and format sparklines in a workbook.
-
Tables and Filtering
You can use Microsoft Excel 2010 to easily filter data in various ways in a table created from a list of data. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how he creates a table from a list of data and then filters the content.
-
Tracing Precedents
Microsoft Excel 2010 includes auditing tools for tracing the relationships between formulas in the cells of your workbook. You can check which cells feed formulas and which cells depend on the results of formulas. In this video; Adam Wilcox uses the Trace Precedents and Trace Dependents features to trace relationships between cells in a workbook.
-
Tracking Changes and Merging Workbooks
When you share a workbook in Microsoft Excel 2010; you can track changes you and others have made to the workbook. You can also merge several versions of a shared workbook into one workbook. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to use the Track Changes feature and merge different versions of a shared workbook.
-
Trend Lines
Trendlines in Microsoft Excel 2010 are a way to look at the data in your charts to see where it's heading. There are different types of trendlines you can use and you can format them in a range of ways. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to add a trendline to a chart and modify it.
-
Use Comments
In Microsoft Excel 2010; you can add comments to cells or ranges to mark-up a worksheet if you want to convey extra information about the data. In this video; Adam Wilcox uses the Comments feature to add; format; and edit comments.
-
Use Names in Formulas
In Microsoft Excel 2010; you can name ranges and particular values in cells to make formulas and functions more understandable and easier to manage. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to use named cells and ranges in formulas in a worksheet.
-
Useful Statistical Functions
In Excel 2010; you can perform some simple statistical functions based on your data and one or more conditions that you want to test. In this video; Adam Wilcox will demonstrate how to perform several useful statistical functions on spreadsheet data.
-
Using Copy and Paste
The Paste function in Microsoft Excel 2010 allows you to paste content according to your needs. For example; you might want to paste a piece of text without its formatting; or a number without its formula. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to paste content in various ways.
-
Using Data Tables for What If Analysis
In Excel 2010; you can use data tables to show output for a function based on different input values. In this video; Adam Wilcox will demonstrate how to use the What-if Analysis for a data table to calculate values for a single variable -- interest rate; and for two variables -- interest rate and term.
-
Using Lookup Functions
You can use lookup functions in Microsoft Excel 2010 to look up a value in a table based on another value. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to use the VLOOKUP function to look up the region to which each sales rep is assigned and add it to the relevant column in the table.
-
Sending Contact Information
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can easily send contact information to friends and colleagues via e-mail; using the Mail and Contact features. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to forward contact information as a business card; an Outlook contact; and an attachment.
-
Sending from a Different Address
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can send messages from different accounts and addresses. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use an alias address when sending an e-mail.
-
Setting Security Options Using the Trust Center
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can configure the security and privacy options in the Trust Center to help keep your data secure and your computer safe from potential threats on the Internet. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to configure settings in the Trust Center to make your system more secure.
-
Setting Up Free/Busy Information
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; your work calendar allows you to get the most out of your work day by letting people know when you are; or are not; available. In this video; Adam Wilcox uses the features of his work calendar to show you how to schedule meetings with your coworkers; regardless of their time zone or geography.
-
Sharing an Account
You can share your Microsoft Outlook 2010 account with other users and grant them permission to view your mail; as well as edit and send items on your behalf. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to share an Outlook account with another person.
-
Sharing Your Calendar Info
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can share calendar events; meetings; and appointments with your contacts. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to share calendars and set calendar permissions.
-
Shortcuts
If you often visit the same web pages; go to the same folders; or open other programs while using Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can add shortcuts to the Navigation pane. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add shortcuts to the Navigation pane.
-
Stationery
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can customize the appearance of your e-mails to make them more appealing. You can use themes and stationery to customize the font; style; and color; and apply it once or to every outgoing e-mail. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create custom themes and stationery for outgoing e-mails.
-
Subscribing to Calendars
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can subscribe to online calendars; such as a Google calendar. You can't customize or synchronize the calendar; but you can view it or share it with other people. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add a calendar to Outlook from the Internet.
-
Tracking Messages
Microsoft Outlook 2010 allows you to track messages and embed them with certain features. For example; you can use voting buttons to poll the recipients of an e-mail; and track whether or not recipients have received or read messages you sent. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add voting and tracking options to your e-mails.
-
Using and Modifying Forms
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can easily create and use custom forms; such as a contact or task form. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to design a custom contact form.
-
Using AutoArchive
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can automatically archive old e-mails to make room for new messages; but still have the old information readily available. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the AutoArchive settings to store old messages.
-
Using Color Categories
Microsoft Outlook 2010 lets you organize your e-mails; contacts; tasks; and calendar events in a visual way using categories; such as Personal or Work. You can also assign a color to each category. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create and assign categories to various items in Outlook.
-
Using Digital Signatures and Encrypting Email
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can use digital signatures and encryption to maintain the integrity and confidentiality of your e-mails. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the security settings in Outlook to digitally sign or encrypt an e-mail.
-
Using Flags with Email Messages
You can use the flag features provided by Microsoft Outlook 2010 to make sure that you follow up on important messages. Outlook also integrates the flag features with tasks by adding flagged messages to your task list. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add flags to e-mail messages.
-
Using RSS Feeds
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can download RSS feeds from any web site; such as news and technology web sites; that support RSS content. You can use the RSS Feeds feature to download RSS feeds directly to a folder in Outlook. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add RSS feeds in Outlook.
-
Using Signatures
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can use signatures to inform the recipients of your messages about who you are and how to contact you. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to create and format e-mail signatures.
-
Using Symbols; Horizontal Lines and Equations
Microsoft Outlook 2010 allows you to add complex equations and special symbols to your e-mails. You can also add horizontal lines to differentiate areas of your e-mails. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add an equation; horizontal line; and symbol to an e-mail.
-
Using Text Messaging in Outlook
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can send text messages without using your cell phone by subscribing to an Internet service; or through Unified Messaging and Exchange. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set up a text messaging account in Outlook.
-
Using the Journal
The journal in Microsoft Outlook 2010 let's you keep a log of conversations; meetings; messages; and phone calls you've had with certain people. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set up and use the journal.
-
Working with Google Calendars
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can synchronize your Google Outlook calendar with your Outlook calendar using the Google Sync application In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to integrate the Outlook and Google calendars.
-
Working with Google Contacts
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can synchronize your Gmail contacts with your Outlook contacts; using the GO Contact Sync open-source application. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use GO Contact Sync to synchronize contacts between Outlook and Gmail.
-
Working with Google Gmail
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can integrate Gmail to automatically download new messages to your computer. You can also configure Outlook to send messages using the Gmail account. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set up Gmail in Outlook.
-
Working with Graphics
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can organize several images on a single slide. You can use the Arrange feature to change the order of images; and group images in a configuration. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Arrange feature to organize images on a slide.
-
Working with LinkedIn
You can integrate Microsoft Outlook 2010 with the social network; LinkedIn; using the LinkedIn connector. Once integrated; you can invite your contacts join your LinkedIn group. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to connect Outlook to LinkedIn.
-
Linking to Bookmarks
Microsoft Outlook 2010 lets you add bookmarks to long e-mails; making them easier to navigate. You can insert bookmarks into sections of an e-mail message and then create hyperlinks that point to the bookmarked sections. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Bookmarks feature to insert bookmarks into an e-mail.
-
Managing Attachments
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can attach additional information to your e-mails in the form of attachments. These attachments can include Excel documents; PDF files; or images. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to preview; save; open; and remove an attachment from an e-mail.
-
Managing Meetings
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; meetings are calendar items that involve other people or resources; such as meeting rooms or equipment. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to schedule a meeting and how to respond to a meeting request.
-
Managing Outlook Email Views
Microsoft Outlook 2010 displays the Navigation; Content; Reading; and To-Do Panes by default. There are several ways to customize the default e-mail view. For example; you can minimize the To-Do and Navigation Panes; or remove the Tasks list from the To-Do Pane. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to customize the default e-mail view.
-
Manipulating Calendar Views
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; there are a number of ways you can view the scheduling information in your calendar. You can arrange your calendar by day; week; or month. You can also display holidays and add a second time zone. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to view your calendar to best suit your needs.
-
Using Mailbox Cleanup
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can use the Mailbox Cleanup features to automate the process of removing unwanted and unnecessary messages from your mailbox. This can help to manage your e-mails and free up storage space. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to remove old and redundant messages.
-
Adding Bcc
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; blind carbon copy; or Bcc; is useful when you want to send someone a copy of an e-mail; but you don't want everyone else to see who received a copy of the e-mail. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to enable and disable the Bcc feature.
-
Always Reply to All
When you send messages to multiple people and you want to make sure that everyone replies to all; you can use the Tags tracking function built into Microsoft Outlook 2010. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use this function to make sure that everyone included on an mail replies to all.
-
Automated Replies
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can set up automated replies for when you are out of the office. You can also set rules to automatically forward messages you receive to another person. In this video; Adam Wilcox uses the automated reply function to set up replies and to define rules for automated responses.
-
Autoreply Thru Rules
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; the Rules feature gives you greater flexibility than using the Automatic Replies feature when you’re out of the office. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create a new rule that will send an automatic response whenever a message comes in.
-
Backing Up Outlook Items
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; it's always a good idea to back up your work to prevent loss of information from unexpected events such as power surges. You can back up and restore Outlook data using the Import and Export wizard. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to back up and restore your Outlook information.
-
Configuring the Settings for an Outlook Account
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can configure message settings in your Outlook account to suit your needs. You can configure options for creating; replying; forwarding; sending; tracking; and formatting messages. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to configure the message settings for an Outlook account.
-
Contact Groups
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can create contact groups. This allows you to send messages to a number of people at once; or invite the same group of people to a meeting. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to set up and populate a contact group; and send messages to a contact group.
-
Controlling Email Message Format
Microsoft Outlook 2010 allows you to control the format of the messages you send so they display the way you want them to. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to change the way your messages display; and how to change the default message format in Outlook.
-
Conversation Feature
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; the Conversations feature allows you to see all conversations that took place within an e-mail thread and in the order in which the conversations came in. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to use the conversations feature to make your inbox more manageable.
-
Create an Event
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; an event is a type of appointment on your calendar that takes up a whole day; or even multiple days. In this video; Adam Wilcox uses the features of his work calendar to create single and recurring events.
-
Create Custom Rules
Microsoft Outlook 2010 offers many templates for rules; which run on incoming and outgoing messages. In addition to these; you can create custom rules. You can also import or export the rules you create in Outlook. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create a new rule; as well as export and import rules.
-
Creating an Electronic Business Card
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can create electronic business cards to pass on to clients and colleagues via e-mail. You can add a picture and a background color to the business card; as well as edit the information it contains. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Contacts feature to create an electronic business card from existing contact details.
-
Creating and Scheduling Meetings
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can easily organize and schedule meetings. When setting up a meeting; you use the Appointment feature to specify the time and location of the meeting and the Scheduling Assistant to specify the attendees. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set up a meeting.
-
Creating Appointments
In Microsoft Outlook 2010 your work calendar allows you to schedule appointments and set reminders when you have to do something or be somewhere. In this video; Adam Wilcox uses the features of his work calendar to create a monthly recurring appointment; as well as create an appointment from an e-mail.
-
Creating Contacts
Microsoft Outlook 2010 provides several ways to create new contacts easily. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create a new contact from scratch and from existing information.
-
Creating Notes
Microsoft Outlook 2010 lets you store all your quick notes electronically. You can create; edit; and categorize notes; as well as add them to your contacts. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use notes in Outlook.
-
Creating Quick Steps for Email Messages
Quick steps are a great time-saving feature in Microsoft Outlook 2010. They allow you to link together several steps into one overall button. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create a new quick step for sending and moving e-mails.
-
Creating Rules
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can set rules to manage messages in a particular way based on whether they come from a specific person or have a particular piece of text in the subject line. In this video; Adam Wilcox uses the rules feature to set actions on selected messages based on various criteria.
-
Creating Tasks
Microsoft Outlook 2010 provides several options for creating tasks. You can set start and due dates as well as the priority of the task. You can also assign tasks to other people and send out status reports. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create tasks and assign them to other people.
-
Global Address List vs Contacts
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; all the organization's contacts are stored in the Global Address List; whereas personal contacts are stored in a separate list. You can easily move contacts from the Global Address List to the personal contacts list. In this video; Josh Penzell will demonstrate how to move a contact from the Global Address List to your personal contacts list.
-
Homepage
In Microsoft Outlook 2010 you can set the home page; which displays when the program launches. A popular home page is Outlook Today; which shows your calendar items and tasks; and has several customizable features. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to change the home page.
-
Increasing Productivity
Microsoft Outlook 2010 is a useful tool for improving productivity. You can delete unnecessary messages; categorize important e-mails; and use search folders. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use Outlook efficiently to increase your productivity.
-
Junk E-mail
Microsoft Outlook 2010 has a junk e-mail feature to prevent you from receiving any e-mail you are not interested in; such as advertising and other types of spam messages. In this video; Adam Wilcox uses the junk e-mail feature to classify particular e-mail addresses or domains as not safe or blocked content.
-
Downloading Global Addresses
If you use a Global Address List that’s stored on a Microsoft Exchange server; you might not be able to access it when you travel. Using Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can download the list to your laptop to avoid this. In this video Josh Penzell demonstrates how to download the Global Address List.
-
Editing an Attached Document
When a document is sent back and forth in Microsoft Outlook 2010 between two mail recipients; it can create a number of versions of the file; some of which might be out of date. In this video Josh Penzell demonstrates how to edit an attached document to avoid version control issues.
-
Email Importance and Sensitivity
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can make messages stand out by assigning different importance and sensitivity levels to them. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to apply importance and sensitivity settings to e-mail messages.
-
Exporting Contacts
Contacts are very useful in Microsoft Outlook 2010; but they are also useful outside of Outlook. You can add your contacts to an Access database or an Excel file; or upload them to a newsletter service to forward a newsletter to selected contacts. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to export contacts for use in a newsletter service.
-
Message Templates
You can create a message template in Microsoft Outlook 2010. This is useful for when you often send the same message several times. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create a message template; save it; and send it.
-
Note Views
You can effectively organize and view notes you've created in Microsoft Outlook 2010. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to customize the way you view notes.
-
Opening Archival Email
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can keep an archive of all your e-mails and then access these e-mails at a later date from your Outlook account settings. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to access and navigate through an archived data file.
-
Organizing RSS Feeds
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can organize your RSS feeds to save you time. You can categorize; flag; or share them with other contacts. You can also use search folders to locate specific content in the RSS feeds. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to view; share; and search RSS feeds.
-
Organizing Tasks
Microsoft Office 2010 provides you with a number of ways to organize and manage your tasks. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates some of the task management features.
-
Organizing the Inbox
There are many ways you can organize your Microsoft Outlook 2010 inbox. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates a few of those that are particularly useful; such as flagging for follow-up; marking as read or unread; sorting messages; and using folders.
-
Printing in Outlook
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can print your e-mails; contacts; calendar; tasks; and notes in several formats; such as a memo or table. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Print feature to print messages; contacts; calendars; tasks; and notes using various print styles.
-
Quickly Access Functions
Many Microsoft Outlook 2010 functions can be accessed without even opening the program. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to access Outlook functions using the jump list feature and taskbar options.
-
Recall Sent Messages
Microsoft Outlook 2010 allows you to recall a message after you sent it; recall and replace a message; and resend a message. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the recall and resend functions.
-
Responding to Rescheduling Meetings
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can easily accept or deny a meeting invitation sent to you. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Outlook interface to demonstrate the options available for responding to a meeting request.
-
Response Text
When you respond to; or forward; e-mails in Microsoft Outlook 2010; the original e-mail is usually below the current e-mail you're writing. You can customize how the original e-mail is resent along with your response. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Mail options to customize how the original e-mail appears when replying to and forwarding mail.
-
Scheduling Options with Messages
Microsoft Outlook 2010 offers flexibility with the scheduling and delivery of e-mails. You can set messages to be delivered to different recipients and schedule an e-mail to be sent later or to expire after a certain time. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set delivery and expiration dates and times for e-mails.
-
Screen Shots
Microsoft Outlook 2010 includes the Screenshot and Screen Clipping features for taking a screenshot of a window you have open or clipping a part of the screen; and including it in your e-mail. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add screenshots and screen clippings to a message.
-
Search Folders
You can create search folders in Microsoft Outlook 2010 to easily organize e-mails according to conditions you set for the file to be searched. For example; you can create a search folder for a particular category. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create a new search folder to organize categorized e-mails.
-
Customizing the Outlook User Interface
You can customize the Microsoft Outlook 2010 interface to fit your style of working. For example; you can customize the Quick Access Toolbar; which gives you quick access to functions you use often; and the Ribbon; which changes based on what navigation you're using. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to customize the Quick Access Toolbar and the Ribbon.
-
Date Calculator
Microsoft Outlook 2010 provides a built-in Date Calculator; which determines a future date based on the number of days you specify. You can use this feature for setting the due date for tasks. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the Date Calculator to calculate the end dates of tasks and appointments.
-
Defer Sending Emails
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can create a rule to defer the sending an e-mail for a period of time after you hit the Send button. This allows you time to make any quick corrections before the message is sent. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create a rule to defer delivery of an e-mail.
-
Desktop Alerts
When messages arrive in Microsoft Outlook 2010; you receive a notification; such as a sound plays; the mouse pointer or icon changes; or a desktop alert displays. You can customize the desktop alert settings. In this video; Josh Penzell configures desktop alerts.
-
Creating Custom Animations
Using Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can create custom animations in your presentation. The advanced animation options allow you to stack animations together; alter the duration of an animation; and set an animation to repeat. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to combine animations and set the timing.
-
Customizing a Slide Show
You often need to adapt existing PowerPoint 2010 presentations for different audiences. Although you can do this by making multiple presentation files; it's better to customize one file. In this video; Josh Penzell customizes a presentation without editing its slide deck.
-
Delivering Presentations
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can use the Slide Show feature to set up and deliver presentations. You can set up the presentation to show full screen or in a window; depending on how you’re going to present the information. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set up and deliver a presentation.
-
Export a Presentation as an Image File
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 allows you to export the individual slides of a presentation to any of several graphic file formats. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how you can convert one or more slides of a PowerPoint presentation to image files such as JPEGs or TIFFs and create a new file without changing the original PowerPoint file.
-
Format Painter
You can use the Format Painter to quickly apply a set of formatting options to a number of objects in Microsoft PowerPoint 2010. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Format Painter to apply formatting to several slides.
-
Handouts in Word
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 lets you send your presentation to Microsoft Word if you want to edit it before sharing it via printing or e-mailing. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to send a presentation to Word and then edit it.
-
Insert Speaker Notes
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 allows you to insert speaker notes below every slide and keep it hidden from the audience. In this video; Steve English discusses how to use speaker notes to talk to a live audience.
-
Inserting a Slide from Another Presentation
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 enables you to move slides from one presentation to another; and the new slides automatically adopt the appearance of the presentation they’re moved to. In this video; Steve English uses two methods to insert slides from another presentation into his presentation.
-
Inserting a Video File
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can add various multimedia elements to a presentation. You can add a video file and then edit it by adjusting the color; for example. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to add a video file to a slide and resize the video window.
-
Inserting an Audio File
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 enables you to add sound to a presentation. You can add an audio clip; such as applause; to a slide and set the playback options. In this video; Steve English inserts an audio file and sets it to play automatically when the slide displays in the slide show.
-
Inserting an Excel Spreadsheet
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can insert Excel spreadsheets into a presentation in order to perform calculations. You can also customize the appearance of a spreadsheet on a slide. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to add an Excel spreadsheet to a presentation.
-
Inserting Office Content
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can insert content from other Office applications; such as Word or Excel; into presentations either by linking or embedding. Linked content updates when the linked file changes; whereas embedded content remains static. In this video; Steve English uses the insert functions to link and embed content in a presentation.
-
Interactive PowerPoint
You can add interactivity to a Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 presentation to make it more engaging for your attendees. In this video; Josh Penzell uses actions to add interactivity to a presentation.
-
Layouts and Slide Setup
It’s a good idea to set up your slide deck before you create a presentation. Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 provides several slide layouts; depending on the content. You can also modify the size and orientation of a slide. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to choose slide layouts and modify the size and orientation of the slides in a presentation.
-
Making Use of Hyperlinks
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 you can add hyperlinks to a presentation. You can use hyperlinks to navigate to slides in the same presentation; navigate to other files; or open web sites. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to create a hyperlink and a Return action button to navigate between slides.
-
Making Use of Screenshots
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can capture specific areas of your screen and add them to your presentation. You can use the Screenshot tool to capture another application; such as a Word document; or a portion of the current screen. In this video; Steve English uses the Screenshot tool to add a screenshot and a screen clipping to his presentation.
-
Use Animation Painter
Animation Painter in Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 allows you to copy animation sequences from one slide to another without reprogramming. In this video; Steve English shows you how to copy-paste wipes; triggers; delays; and durations all with a single stroke of the paint brush.
-
Using Guides and Precision
You can use gridlines and guides in Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 to align text and images to each other and to margins. In this video; Josh Penzell uses guides to align the objects on a slide.
-
Using Slide Sections
In PowerPoint 2010; you can use slide sections to make it easier to manage groups of slides. In this video; Josh Penzell uses two slide sections to group slides and organize content in the slides.
-
Adding Charts
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 enables you to display information in a visual format by adding charts to a presentation. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to use the Insert Chart function to add a Column chart; enter chart data; and customize the appearance of the chart.
-
Adding Graphics
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can add graphics to a presentation to enhance it visually. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to use the picture functions to insert a photo in a slide.
-
Advanced Protection
You can use the advanced protection features of Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 to protect a presentation with a password and to certify yourself as the author. In this video; Josh Penzell password protects and certifies a presentation.
-
Beautifying Text Boxes
Text boxes in PowerPoint 2010 can be customized and made into exciting visuals. For example; you can change the border and shape or use preset effects. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to customize a text box to help make a presentation stand out.
-
Bullets and Numbered Lists
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can use bulleted and numbered lists to present information concisely. You can customize bullet points by changing the bullet color and design; as well as using images. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to customize a bulleted list.
-
Choose Presentation Views
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 allows you to choose from several different views for your presentation. In this video; Steve English discusses how to choose an appropriate view and navigate between slides and views.
-
Combine Shapes
The Combine Shapes tool in PowerPoint brings advanced graphics editing capabilities and enables you to create various interesting shapes. In this video; Steve English shows how you can insert different shapes on a PowerPoint slide and customize the way that shapes interact with each other using the Combine Shapes tool.
-
Combining and Comparing Presentations
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 lets you compare the changes that were made in copies of the original presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the Compare feature to compare the changes made in a copy of a presentation.
-
Compress Pictures to Save File Size
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 allows you to compress the images in a PowerPoint presentation to make the file size smaller and manageable. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how you can reduce the file size of a presentation containing a large number of slides; or images; or any other elements on the slides by compressing the pictures in it.
-
Constructing and Editing Photo Albums
In PowerPoint 2010; the Photo Album feature is a time-saving way of converting a large number of image files into a presentation. Each image is placed on a separate slide by default. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how you use this feature to create a presentation full of images.
-
Creating a Training Video
You can export a PowerPoint 2010 presentation as a video so that audiences without PowerPoint can also view it. In this video; Josh Penzell saves a presentation as a training video.
-
Making Use of SmartArt
You can use the SmartArt feature in Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 to visually convey concepts; such as hierarchies; processes; or cycles. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to create a cycle graphic and add an animation.
-
Making Use of Themes
Using themes in Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can add a set of fonts; colors; and backgrounds to give a presentation a professional appearance. You can choose from a selection of default themes; or you can create your own. In this video; Steve English applies a default theme to a basic presentation.
-
Making Use of Transitions
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 enables you to add various transitions and effects to slides to enhance a presentation. In this video; Steve English uses the Transition feature to add a transition to the first slide in a presentation.
-
Managing Views
When you work with more than one presentation in Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can arrange the presentations side by side. There are also several ways in which you can view a presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to manage windows and presentation views.
-
Manipulating Graphics
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can manipulate images on slides to make them look their best. You can modify the color; brightness; saturation; and background; as well as the size and angle of an image. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Format tools to manipulate an image on a slide.
-
Printing Presentations
In PowerPoint 2010; you can print a slide deck in various formats and use these as hard copy notes or handouts. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how you use printing options to specify which slides to print and how they should be printed.
-
Protect a PowerPoint Presentation
You can protect a PowerPoint 2010 presentation from being changed or copied by unauthorized users. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how you protect a presentation.
-
Protect a Presentation From Being Opened
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 allows you to configure your PowerPoint presentation with password protection so that only users that you give the password to can open and read it. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to choose a secure passphrase as your password and apply it to your presentation to prevent any unauthorized access.
-
Protect a Presentation from Editing
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 allows you to configure your PowerPoint presentation so that users can open it and read it; but prevent them from editing it or making any changes to it. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how you can restrict other users edit or change your presentation by applying a password protection.
-
Quickly Access Recent Files
There are various ways you can quickly access the presentations that were recently opened in PowerPoint 2010. In this video; Josh Penzell shows how to access recent presentations using the Start menu; a Windows 7 jump list; and PowerPoint's File menu.
-
Recording a Slide Show
In PowerPoint 2010; you can rehearse your slide show and record the time you spend on each slide. This then allows you to present without needing to change slides using a mouse or keyboard. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how you automate a presentation that advances through the slides without needing user action.
-
Remove the Background from an Image
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 allows you to remove the background from an image and keep only that which you want to show your audience. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to remove the unwanted parts and tweak an image and also discusses tips and tricks to make imperfections such as shadows and undefined edges less noticeable.
-
Review and Comments Feature
The Review and Comments feature in Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 is a very useful tool. It enables you to mark up your suggestions without changing the presentation itself. In this video; Steve English uses the Review and Comments feature to create; view; and remove comments in a presentation.
-
Save in a Format with Smaller File Size
Sharing a PowerPoint presentation in a network or sending it in e-mail often becomes difficult because of its large file size. Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 allows you to reduce the file size in many ways. In this video; Steve English demonstrates the different options you can use to reduce the file size even by more than 90%.
-
Save in a Presentation Format
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 allows you to save a file in more than two dozen formats; some of which are specifically tailored for doing presentations. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how you can save a PowerPoint presentation in several editable file formats; such as .ppt; .ppsx; and .odp.
-
Shapes
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 lets you add shapes to your presentation. Using the Drawing feature; you can draw various shapes and link them using connectors. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add a rectangle; oval; square; and circle to a slide and link them with elbow and curved connectors.
-
Share a Presentation Over the Internet
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 enables you to broadcast your PowerPoint presentation to remote audience over the Internet in real time. In this video; Steve English demonstrates the steps to be followed for broadcasting a live slideshow over the Internet; so that users all over the world can watch it.
-
Slide Outlines
In PowerPoint 2010; you can plan presentations by using the Outline feature. While creating the outline; you are also building the basic presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how you create an outline for a PowerPoint presentation.
-
Text Boxes
After watching this video; you will be able to add a text box to a Microsoft Excel 2016 worksheet.
-
Transitions versus Animations
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; you can use animations instead of transitions to add effects to your presentation. With animations; you can add multiple effects to images on a single slide and control how the effects display. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add and control animation effects on a single slide.
-
Turn the Mouse into a Laser Pointer
Laser Pointer in Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 allows you to show specific items on the screen to your audience. In this video; Steve English shows you how to change the mouse on your computer into a laser pointer and highlight specific elements during your presentation.
-
Working with Masters
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2010; every presentation layout is associated with a master slide; which contains the default formatting; such as the font and bullet points. Any changes to the master slide are automatically applied to all the slides in the presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to modify a master slide to make universal changes to a presentation.
-
Adding Subprojects
Microsoft Project 2010 lets you create a master project when you work with a complex project consisting of multiple resources; locations; or departments. A master project consists of several subprojects; which are standalone Project files. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to add subprojects to a master project.
-
Applying Work Contours
Microsoft Project 2010 provides the Work Contour feature to enable you to schedule more accurately by varying the number of hours per day assigned to a particular task over the duration of the task. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use the Contour feature to change the default even distribution of work over time.
-
Constraining Tasks
In Microsoft Project 2010; you can apply constraints to tasks; such as specifying that tasks can't be done after a certain date. You can apply flexible or inflexible constraints and view conflicts created in the schedule. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to apply a constraint to ensure a task is finalized no later than a given date.
-
Converting an Excel Worksheet into a List
Microsoft Project 2010 enables you to import data from another data source; such as an Excel workbook; to an existing Project file. You use the Import wizard to map the data to the fields in the Project file. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the Import wizard to import data from an Excel workbook to a resource sheet.
-
Creating a Resource Calendar
Microsoft Project 2010 enables you to create resource calendars; so that Project can calculate when resources will be available to complete tasks. You can create a new base calendar or adapt an existing calendar for a resource; such as a part-time employee. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the Resource Calendar feature to create a resource calendar for the Marketing Department.
-
Creating a Resource Pool
Microsoft Project 2010 lets you create a resource pool; which is a standalone Project file that captures all the resources involved in a project. When you create a new project using the same resources; you don’t have to re-enter all the information. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create a resource pool.
-
Creating Custom WBS Codes
In Microsoft Project 2010; you can define work breakdown structure (WBS) codes to create a customized numbering scheme. WBS codes are applied at a project level and can be displayed in the Gantt view. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the WBS code feature to create custom WBS codes for each of the tasks of a task list.
-
Designating Milestones
Microsoft Project 2010 lets you add milestones to your projects to identify when a specific deliverable is complete or when the end of a phase has been reached. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates two ways of adding milestones to a project.
-
Displaying Project Columns
In Microsoft Project 2010; a project includes numerous fields; such as start date and finish date; which are not automatically displayed in Gantt Chart view. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to display more fields in Project.
-
Displaying Visual Reports
Microsoft Project 2010 lets you create charts and graphs of your project information to share the content in a manner that’s easily understandable. You can launch visual Excel or Visio reports from within Project. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how she creates an Excel PivotChart to visually represent her Project information.
-
Entering Material Resources
When setting up a project; you need to specify material resources; such as supplies and ingredients. In Microsoft Project 2010; you can keep track of the cost of the material resources; when they should be purchased; and when they will be used. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to insert material resources into the resource sheet of a project.
-
Entering Tasks
One of the first activities required when creating a new project is to enter tasks. Microsoft Project 2010 provides various ways for you to quickly and easily enter task information into a Project file. In this case; Erin Olsen demonstrates two ways to enter tasks and their durations into a Project file.
-
Entering Work Resources
Resources; such as people or equipment; are what you need to complete the tasks in a project. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to enter information in Microsoft Project 2010 to properly allocate resources; as well as scheduling and costing the project.
-
Filtering Project Lists
Filtering information is one of the most useful ways of managing data so that you can work with information that's relevant at a time. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to manage information in Microsoft Project 2010 using the in-column and Ribbon filters.
-
Grouping Project Lists
Grouping in Microsoft Project 2010 allows you to group related data and expand and collapse entries as you require. It also summarizes entries to make it easier to analyze project information. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how the Group feature works for simplifying a list of resource entries.
-
Indicating Lead and Lag Time
Lead and lag times are important for designating delays between tasks in a project schedule. Using this option in Microsoft Project 2010; you can indicate whether a successor task can start only before or after the completion of a predecessor task. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to add lag time to a project schedule.
-
Leveraging a Resource Pool
Resource pools in Microsoft Project 2010 enable you to share a set of resources between projects. You can use an existing file as a resource pool; and link the resource pool file and your new file. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the Share Resources feature to leverage a resource pool and link the resource file to a new file.
-
Modifying Resource Costs
It’s important to keep the resource costs in Microsoft Project 2010 up to date. You can use cost tables to modify cost variations; such as overtime rates or rates for different types of work. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create cost tables and apply them to a resource.
-
Modifying the Timescale
Microsoft Project 2010's timescale determines how a project timeline displays; from very detailed to an overview. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates the various tools you can use to change the timescale so it shows exactly the amount of detail required.
-
Organizing a Task List
To create an accurate schedule in Microsoft Project 2010; you need to organize the tasks in terms of how long each task is going to take and how they relate to one another. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to set the task durations; order tasks; and link related tasks in a project.
-
Performing Simple Sorts
Microsoft Project 2010 allows you to easily sort tasks and resources without making any permanent changes to the project. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to perform simple sorts using in-column drop-downs and the Ribbon.
-
Saving Project Templates
If you tend to do similar types of projects repeatedly; you can create a project template to reuse a lot of the same information for subsequent projects. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create a project template in Microsoft Project 2010 and how to access it again.
-
Selecting a Base Calendar
When creating accurate project schedules; you need to use calendars to specify the working hours. Microsoft Project 2010 provides various project calendar options; depending on whether the operating hours are 24/7; nightshift; or the traditional 9 to 5. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to set the calendar for a project.
-
Setting Project Baselines
In Microsoft Project 2010; you can set baselines to assess whether projects are on time and on budget. You can create a baseline at the start of a project and create interim plans if the baseline has shifted. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to set the baseline and view a snapshot of the project’s current status.
-
Setting Project Properties
In Microsoft Project 2010; you can set the project properties to create an accurate plan. You can specify whether you’re scheduling from the start or finish date; what that date is; and whether it’s based on a standard; 24-hour; or night shift calendar. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the project information to set the project start date.
-
Setting Task Dependencies
Microsoft Project 2010 enables you to set task dependencies to show the relationship between tasks. You can set linked tasks to happen sequentially or concurrently; and add lag or lead time between linked tasks. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to set the Finish-to-Finish task dependency to show that two linked tasks must finish on the same day.
-
Starting a New Project
In Microsoft Project 2010; you can use a blank project file; an existing project file; or a template to start a new project. You can use your own templates; or download a template from the Office web site. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to download a template to track an office move.
-
Updating Project Schedules
Microsoft Project 2010 provides several tools you can use to update your projects as work is being done. This enables you to track progress and keep the schedule up to date. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to update a project.
-
Using Summary Tasks and Milestones
Microsoft Project 2010 enables you to outline a task list to make it more manageable. You can create subtasks and milestones for each phase; and a project summary task to show a project’s total duration. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create subtasks; a milestone for the first phase of the project; and a project summary task.
-
Viewing Project Reports
Microsoft Project 2010 lets you create hard copy reports to communicate and document project information. This is useful if you want to share information with stakeholders; for example. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to locate and display some reports.
-
Add Resources in Site Pages
Adding resources in site pages in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows site users to see the resource availability when they visit the page. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a resource configuration.
-
Adding SharePoint Functionality to the Windows PowerShell
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to configure SharePoint functionality within Windows PowerShell. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to automate SharePoint with Windows PowerShell.
-
Adding SharePoint Snap-In Using Add-pssnapin cmdlet
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to add cmdlets to the SharePoint Snap-In and extend the PowerShell. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to add to Snap-In using the add-PSSnapin cmdlet.
-
Advanced Settings Document Content Types
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to configure document set settings in a document set content type and apply advanced settings. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to provision a new document content type legal set through advanced settings.
-
Audience Targeting
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to define audiences and content relevant to a user or a group. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to define audience for a specific group.
-
Column Level Validation
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to easily enforce column-level validation. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to apply a validation formula at the column level.
-
Content Rating
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to enable content rating and assist users determine the quality of content. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to add star ratings column to a list.
-
Create a Site Collection in a Specific Database
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to create a site collection in a specific database and share data with other site users. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a team site with its own content database.
-
Create My Site Web App
Creating a My Site web app; a social networking feature; in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 is an important task. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to log into a configuration store and set up a My Site application.
-
Create Visio Process Repository
A Visio Process Repository in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to make your process diagrams available for collaboration and quick updating. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to set up a Visio Repository for a Visio file.
-
Creating User Profile Service App
The User Profile Service app in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 provides a central location for configuring and managing the personalization settings. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure the User Profile Service application.
-
Document ID Services
The document ID feature in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to assign document IDs. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create and reset document IDs in the site collection.
-
Document Set Settings
Document set settings in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allow you to manage content as a single unit. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure new advanced settings.
-
Editing the Main Default ASPX Page
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to edit the main default ASPX page. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to edit and publish your Adventure Works site page.
-
Enable All of the Site Collection Features
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows a power user to activate features to allow for list and documents sets to be created. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to enable specific features.
-
Explore Basic Team Site
Exploring the basic team site in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 helps you in creating a site collection. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to explore a basic team site to understand its layout and content.
-
Forefront Identity Manager Service
The Forefront Identity Manager Service in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to manage users' digital identities; credentials; and groupings throughout the lifecycle of their membership of an enterprise computer system. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to verify that the service is installed.
-
Generate a File Plan Report
Generating a file plan report in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to list the records in your organization and show the purpose; use; and subject content of the records. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a file plan report for your organization.
-
Install Windows PowerShell Integrated Scripting
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to install Windows PowerShell Integrated Scripting Environment; which is a graphical host application for Windows PowerShell. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to import the ServerManager module for Windows PowerShell.
-
List Level Validation
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to validate lists by using formulas. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to set validation to a list.
-
Login/Logout
The login and logout functions in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allow you to sign in and out of your site. In this video; David Santana shows you where to find the login logout function in SharePoint 2010 and how to sign in as a different user.
-
Manage Content and Structure
Managing content and structure in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 is an important task. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to access the useful features in a publishing site collection.
-
Metadata Navigation
Navigating metadata in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 is useful for filtering and finding content. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create metadata navigation and use hierarchy to filter the list of items displayed.
-
Modify Site Schedule
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to modify the schedule of your sites. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure the publishing date and time of a site.
-
Peoples and Groups
Users and groups in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 are defined at the site collection. In this video; David Santana shows you how to find users and groups and review permissions.
-
Permission Finder
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to find the permission levels assigned to users or groups. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to set up and verify permissions for a document.
-
Play Your Media Assets
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to play media assets from the asset library. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to correct content type and play media files.
-
Record Declaration Settings
Record declaration settings in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allow you control over where items can be declared as records. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure record declaration settings and allow users to manually declare items as records.
-
Reusable Content
Reusable Content in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to configure and reuse specific content in site pages. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to add an item to the Reusable Content list and then add it to a page.
-
Ribbon
The Ribbon; the new user interface in Microsoft SharePoint 2010; allows you easy access to the most commonly used tools; controls; and commands. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to edit a page by going to the specific Ribbon.
-
Shared Documents
Shared Documents in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allow you to create; upload; and share documents with your team. In this video; David Santana shows how to use the Office Web Apps to create a new document and where to find cool features such as RSS Feed and SharePoint Designer.
-
Site Actions
Site Actions in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you different options for the site. In this video; David Santana discusses the new options available in SharePoint 2010 and what each option does.
-
Turn On Versioning and Content Approval
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to enable versioning and content approval. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to turn on these two tasks.
-
UI Enhancements
User interface enhancements have made Microsoft SharePoint 2010 more accessible to users. In this video; David Santana explains the various options on the interface and how to use them.
-
Upload Media Assets
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to upload media assets. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to drag and drop media files from the Desktop and upload to the media asset library.
-
Use Windows PowerShell to Report Web Properties
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to use Windows PowerShell to report web properties. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to copy; paste; and run existing commands to report URLs and their properties.
-
User Profile Sync Service
The User Profile Synchronization Service in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 enables synchronization of user and group data. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to start; check progress; and complete enabling the service.
-
Using the Grid View
The grid view in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to display all site-related data within a site collection. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to easily insert a command to report in grid view.
-
Validating the Snap-In via SharePoint Management Shell
Validating the Snap-in via SharePoint Management Shell is integral to Microsoft SharePoint 2010. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to add the PSSnapin to the SharePoint Management Shell.
-
Web Part Properties Options
Web Part Properties; a new feature in Microsoft SharePoint 2010; allows you to edit and customize web parts quickly and easily. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to enhance the user experience with the AJAX options.
-
Multi Document Actions
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to perform multi-document actions. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to manage a document set by creating specific set actions.
-
Create a Site Collection
Creating a site collection in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 is a prerequisite to creating a site. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a new top-level website for your team.
-
Create a Group Worksite
A group worksite in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to track people and resources. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to set up a group worksite.
-
Create a Publishing Site Page
Creating a publishing site page in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 is an integral part in the content of the site. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to publish a site page in site collections.
-
Create a Search Center
A search center in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you an interface to submit search queries and view search results. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a search center site using the Enterprise Search Center template.
-
Create a Document Set
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to create and configure the document set content type. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create new site content type.
-
Adding Page Breaks
In Microsoft Word 2010; you can add page breaks to ensure that elements; such as headings; appear consistently at the top of the next page in a document. In this video; Steve English inserts a page break between the Table of Contents and the heading of the next paragraph; and includes a page break in a heading style.
-
Adding Watermarks
After watching this video; you will be able to use Word Art and images to create watermarks in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Adjust Spacing
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to adjust the spacing for a paragraph not just within the paragraph but also between paragraphs. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to apply space change to several paragraphs and have precise control.
-
Apply a Border
In Microsoft Word 2010; you can apply a page border to your document and make it more visually appealing. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how you can apply different styles; add color; and set the thickness of page borders in a document.
-
Apply Page Color
Microsoft Word 2010 enables you to apply color to your pages and make them look pleasant and attractive. This feature is very useful when you’re designing a brochure or a flyer. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how you can apply colors to a page to give your document a color background.
-
Apply Styles to a Table
Applying styles to tables in Microsoft Word 2010 saves you time and effort on formatting. In this video; Steve English uses predefined styles to give an unimaginative black and white table a visually appealing design.
-
Creating Charts
After watching this video; you will be able to create a chart in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Creating Cross References
The cross reference tool provided by Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to replace text that may change; such as figures or bookmarks; with a field that is easy to update. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how he creates a cross reference for a figure in a document.
-
Crop a Picture
The Crop function in Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to trim off areas of a picture that you do not need; such as the expanse of the sky. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to remove unwanted details from a picture to focus the reader’s eye more on the subject.
-
AutoCorrect and AutoText Functions
Microsoft Word 2010 provides the AutoCorrect feature; which automatically corrects your spelling errors as you type. You can also modify AutoCorrect to suit your needs. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to add a propriety term to AutoCorrect.
-
Change Autosave Settings
Microsoft Word 2010 creates an automatic backup of your documents and also allows you to configure the AutoSave options. In this video; Steve English shows how you can change the AutoSave settings and set the AutoSave Interval to avoid the risk of losing your work.
-
Change Footnotes to Endnotes
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to quickly and easily change your citation style. You can reposition your notes from the foot of a page to the end of the document and vice-versa. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to convert footnotes to endnotes and endnotes to footnotes using the right-click menu.
-
Change Footnotes to Endnotes Separator
Microsoft Word 2010 inserts a default 2-inch separator line while inserting footnotes or endnotes in a document. You can delete this separator line or alter it into a longer line; double-line; or shape. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to access the separator line; change the document view; and make modifications to it.
-
Change Margins
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to change the size of the white space around your text. In this video; Steve English shows how to change margins across the document and how to restrict margin changes to document sections.
-
Change the Document View
In Microsoft Word 2010; a document can be viewed in several different views and each view has its own advantages over the others. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how you can change the view of a document and choose and apply different views available in Microsoft Word according to your requirements.
-
Check Spelling and Grammar
The spell check function in Microsoft Word 2010 is useful for correcting common errors in your text; such as misspellings; grammar issues; and misused words. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to use this feature to clean up text and generate readability statistics.
-
Create a Bookmark
Bookmarks in Microsoft Word 2010 have two main uses: easy navigation back to your place in the document and link for creating cross-references. In this video; Steve English shows how to create a bookmark and discusses the rules about naming and how to select a name that can be referenced later.
-
Create a Cross-Reference to a Bookmark
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to cross-reference to a specific set of Word objects; such as headings; numbered items; figures; and tables. In this video; Steve English shows how to cross-reference with bookmarks when none of the other Word objects apply.
-
Create a Hyperlink
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to create a hyperlink right inside your document to link to an existing file or webpage; an existing place in the document; a new document; or an email address. In this video; Steve English shows you how to create a hyperlink that opens another document.
-
Create a Table
Tables in Microsoft Word 2010 help you display information in a tabular format. In this video; Steve English explains how to create and design a table that will stand out better from the surrounding text.
-
Create an Excel Table
Creating an Excel table in Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to bring Excel’s power of complicated computing to your Word document. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to insert an Excel table in a Word document without ever exiting Word.
-
Create Bulleted Lists
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to bullet list items to show that they are all of the same weight and importance. In this video; Steve English explains how bulleting is different from numbering and shows how to bullet; preview bullet styles; and check for appropriateness of the format.
-
Create Numbered Lists
Microsoft Word 2010 makes creating and formatting numbered lists easy. Numbered lists are useful when you want to itemize and set off text. In this video; Steve English shows how to create a list with levels and choose a suitable number format and style.
-
Creating a Building Block
Building blocks in Microsoft Word 2010 are a convenient way to re-use saved blocks of text or graphics in multiple documents. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to create a building block of his company logo and then to use it.
-
Customize Footnotes
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to customize the way footnotes are numbered in a document. In this video; Steve English discusses the various ways in which footnotes can be referenced and provides an overview of the number formats; numbering schemes; and apply changes to options available.
-
Customize the Ribbon
In Microsoft Word 2010; you can customize the tabs and groups on the Ribbon to suit your requirements. You can hide default tabs on the Ribbon; or add and delete commands on the Ribbon and Quick Access toolbar. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how he customizes the Ribbon and Quick Access toolbar by hiding and adding items.
-
Cut; Copy; and Delete
The Cut; Copy; and Delete commands in Microsoft Word 2010 allow you to move or remove content. In this video; Steve English explains how each is different from the other and is useful in moving content within and across documents.
-
Find and Replace
Find and Replace in Microsoft Word 2010 is useful for finding and replacing specific strings of text. In this video; Steve English shows you how to do a find and replace and how to undo any unwanted changes both from the Navigation Pane and from the Ribbon.
-
Format the Font
Understanding the various text font options offered by Microsoft Word 2010 helps you apply them effectively. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to preview; customize; and create your own text font specifications.
-
Format with the Mini Toolbar
The Mini Toolbar in Microsoft Word 2010 saves you time on navigating around format buttons. In this video; Steve English shows how to use the Mini Toolbar to set font size and color; indent; align; and highlight your text from any place in the document.
-
Get Help
The Help function in Microsoft Word 2010 is useful in finding information on specific features and operations. In this video; Steve English explains how to use this feature to draw on the vast store of resources available on your computer and on numerous online resources.
-
How to Create Paragraph Styles
Microsoft Word 2010 includes a collection of style sets designed to work together to achieve the same look and feel in a document. You can use styles sets to quickly format paragraphs. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to apply a style set to a title; subtitle; and heading; modify a default style; and create a new style.
-
How to Use Mail Merge
Microsoft Word 2010 enables you to create a large number of documents that are mostly identical but include some unique information. You can use the Mail Merge feature to import information from a data source into a document. In this video; Steve English personalizes a letter; by importing each client’s name and contact information from an Excel worksheet.
-
How to Use Section Breaks
In Microsoft Word 2010; you can add section breaks to apply different formatting to different sections of a document. In this video; Steve English uses the Section Break feature to create sections; alter the header and page number on the Table of Contents page; and add a field to the header to automatically display the heading for each section.
-
How to Use Templates
Microsoft Word 2010 includes templates that are formatted for a specific task. Some templates are installed on your hard-drive when you install Word; and others are available from the Office web site. You can use these templates as the basis for new documents. In this video; Steve English uses a template to create and modify a fax cover sheet.
-
Indent Text
Inserting indents in Microsoft Word 2010 is useful for setting the edges of a paragraph differently from the edges of the page margin; such as in a bibliography. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to insert indents from the Ruler; from the Paragraph group in the Home tab; and from the Paragraph dialog box.
-
Insert a Footnote
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to insert footnotes and endnotes in a document to hold notes or citations that are referred to in the text. In this video; Steve English discusses both citation styles and shows how to insert a footnote in your document.
-
Insert a Picture
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to insert pictures into your document to compliment the text and make your document more visually appealing. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to add a picture and reconfigure it to fit your space and needs.
-
Insert an Endnote
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to insert footnotes and endnotes in a document to hold notes or citations that are referred to in the text. In this video; Steve English discusses both citation styles and shows how to insert an endnote in your document.
-
Insert and Delete Table Rows and Columns
Adding and deleting columns and rows is easy in Microsoft Word 2010. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to work with the right-click context menu when doing multiple additions and deletions.
-
Insert Building Blocks
Building Blocks in Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to pre-save Word elements; such as snippets of text and images. In this video; Steve English shows you how to pull a building block from the Building Blocks library and apply to a document.
-
Insert Clip Art
Clip Art in Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to make your documents visually appealing by inserting illustrations; photographs; or other media. In this video; Steve English shows you how to use Clip Art to draw the reader’s eye to specific information.
-
Insert Columns
Inserting columns in Microsoft Word 2010 allows your page to look more like a newspaper or magazine article while adding more white space and making it easier for readers to track. In this video; Steve English shows you how to create columns on a page with a banner headline.
-
Insert Headers and Footers
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to insert headers and footers in your document to display repetitive information; such as chapter titles and page numbers. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to use the header and footer tools to have a different first page and also different odd and even pages; such as in a book.
-
Inserting a Table of Contents
In Microsoft Word 2010; you can add a table of contents to a document that has headings and subheadings; and then update and customize it as required. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how he adds a table of contents to a document.
-
Link or Embed an Excel Table
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to import an Excel table in two ways: linking and embedding. In this video; Steve English explains the difference between these two methods and shows how to link an Excel table to a Word document and keep the information updated.
-
Merge and Split Table Cells
Merging and splitting cells in Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to enhance the format of a table and accurately represent the data in it. In this video; Steve English shows how to change the structure of a table by merging and splitting cells.
-
Populating Headers and Footers
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to add headers and footers to documents. You can customize their appearance by applying a design style as well as including graphics and page numbers. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to add and format a header and footer.
-
Print a Document
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to choose and select from a range of print properties and settings. In this video; Steve English explores each of them and shows how to preview the results before you print.
-
Recording a Macro
Microsoft Word 2010 lets you record macros for actions you perform regularly. Macros allow you to link a set of commands to a shortcut key so that you can simply enter the shortcut key when you need to perform the set of commands. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to record a macro.
-
Restrict Editing
Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to set restrictions on the types of edits that other users can perform on your document. In this video; Steve English shows you how to restrict editing in a document so that the reviewers can read it but can’t change it.
-
Reviewing a Document
When you're reviewing a document; Microsoft Word 2010 enables you to mark up your edits using track changes and to insert comments. In this video; Steve English uses the Track Changes feature to review text; and the Comments feature to add and delete a comment in a document.
-
Save a Word Document
The Save As feature of Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to save your files in the format and location that you want. In this video; Steve English explores the various formats available and the purpose each one serves.
-
Sort a Table
The Sort function in Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to sort content by columns and in ascending and descending orders. In this video; Steve English shows how to sort a table with a header row.
-
Undo and Redo
The Undo and Redo commands in the Quick Access Toolbar of Microsoft Word 2010 are useful for correcting the mistakes you make while editing your document. In this video; Steve English explains how you can use these commands to step back and forth through a series of changes.
-
Use the Format Painter
The Format Painter in Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to copy a text format and apply it in multiple places in a document. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how the Format Painter can apply numerous formatting changes spread across various groups in the Home and Page Layout tabs with a single stroke.
-
Use the Navigation Pane
The Navigation Pane in Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to move around in your document and locate Word objects and document elements. In this video; Steve English explains how to use this feature to display all instances that match your search and navigate directly to a particular instance.
-
Use Word to Take a Screenshot
The Screenshot function in Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to define and capture an area of the screen and place it in your document as an image. In this video; Steve English shows how this feature can save you time on typing and formatting the information you find on the web; such as the contact information of your company.
-
Wrap Text
The Wrap Text function in Microsoft Word 2010 allows you to decide how you want the text to flow around a picture in the document. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to insert and wrap text around a picture and use the various wrap text options.
-
Zoom In and Out
In Microsoft Word 2010; you can modify the zoom magnification that displays on-screen. Zooming in shows the page elements in greater detail and zooming out shows a lot of pages at once. In this video; Steve English shows how you can resize your document using Zoom In or Zoom Out.
-
Searching for Contacts
The advanced search capabilities of Microsoft Lync 2010 allow us to effectively search and locate the contact we need to communicate with. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to search with different types of contact information and narrow down the results.
-
Starting An IM Session
Instant messaging on Microsoft Lync 2010 allows you to hold online conversations with contacts and groups such as your project team. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to start and run a conversation efficiently.
-
Updating Status and Location Information
Microsoft Lync 2010 allows you to indicate whether you are available and where you physically are. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to automatically and manually update your presence indicators to best communicate your presence at a given time.
-
Viewing Activity Feeds
Activity Feeds on Microsoft Lync 2010 allows you to share information by leaving notes for your contacts instead of sending emails. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to configure activity feeds and track and keep up-to-date with what people have to say.
-
Adding or Changing our Lync Picture
Microsoft Lync 2010 allows you to customize your personal contact information and enhance your presence online. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to replace the generic picture in your contact information with a real picture.
-
Adding Phone Numbers and Settings
Microsoft Lync 2010 allows you to add phone numbers to your contact card and change settings. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to configure phone settings appropriate to the work environment.
-
Adding to Frequent Contacts
Frequent Contacts in Microsoft Lync 2010 is a tool that assists with organizing and finding your contacts. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to add and remove contacts from the frequent contacts list.
-
Changing Contact Display with Layout Options
The layout options in Microsoft Lync 2010 allow you to access and change the way your contact information is displayed. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to customize these simple options to customize Lync to work the way you need it to.
-
Changing Privacy Categories for Contacts
Microsoft Lync 2010 allows you to restrict the information accessed about you by your contacts. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to control who has access to your phone numbers; email address; meeting details; and can interrupt the Do Not Disturb status.
-
Creating and Adding Contacts to Groups
Creating and adding contacts to groups in Microsoft Lync 2010 helps you get contacts to work quickly because they are arranged into logical groups that make sense. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to organize contacts into groups for a specific project or task.
-
Exploring the Action Bar
The Action bar is designed to allow you to use the real-time services in Microsoft Lync 2010. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use this simple application to get presence information and communication options for a particular contact.
-
Getting Started with Lync 2010
Microsoft Lync 2010 allows you to communicate in a variety of ways all from within one application. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to configure Lync and optimize the way you communicate with others.
-
Making a Phone Call
Using the telephony capabilities of Microsoft Lync 2010; you can place calls to any one inside or outside the organization. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to find a contact and initiate a Lync call.
-
Reviewing a Contact Card
Contact cards in Microsoft Lync 2010 are important to start communications with our contacts. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use contact cards for reviewing and understanding someone’s personal information as well as of the organization.
-
Configure the Administrative Access URL
The Administrator Access URL in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 allows you to have access to the Lync Control Panel. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure administrator access using the Lync Administrative Tools.
-
Create a Common Area Phone
Setting up common area phones in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 will allow you to configure call control behaviour; such as allow call transfers from a lobby. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a common area phone using the cmdlet New-csCommonAreaPhone.
-
Creating a Device Policy
Creating a device policy in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 is quick and easy. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to integrate a device policy in the Lync Server Management Shell.
-
Deploy and Run the Topology Builder
The Lync Server Topology Builder allows you to deploy Microsoft Lync Server 2010 by publishing your topology. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create and configure a new topology for a new site.
-
Editing and Troubleshooting a Device Policy
You can edit and troubleshoot device policies in Microsoft Lync Server 2010. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to correct an error in the device policy from the Lync Management Shell.
-
Install the Local Configuration Store
Installing the local configuration store in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 allows you to publish your topology and have the Central Management Store in place in your front-end pool. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure the local configuration store.
-
Integrating Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified: Associate the Dialplan with Lync Server
Associating your dial plan with the Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified Messaging makes it active. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to add dialing restrictions and associate the dial plan with the server.
-
Integrating Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified: Create a Um Auto Attendant
A Unified Messaging auto attendant allows you to automate the answering and routing of your incoming calls. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create an auto attendant while integrating the Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified Messaging with the Lync Server.
-
Integrating Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified: Create and Edit Umdialplan
Integrating the Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified Messaging with Microsoft Lync Server 2010 is a key task. In this video; David Santana shows you how to create and configure a UM Dial Plan.
-
Integrating Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified: Run the ExchUcUtil
Running the UcUtility and OcsUtility scripts is important for integrating Exchange Unified Messaging with Microsoft Lync Server 2010. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to run these utilities and allow for the dial plan and auto attendant to be enabled.
-
Integrating Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified: Running the Ocs Util
The OCS utility; which allows for permissions; allows you to control both Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified Messaging and Lync Server. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to run the OCS utility by building a new normalization rule and committing the change.
-
Management Shell: Validate the Configuration
The Lync Management Shell in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 enables you to automate administrative tasks. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to retrieve; format; and update user information at the PowerShell command prompt.
-
Prepare Active Directory for Lync Server
The Lync Server Deployment Wizard in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 helps you deploy the Active Directory. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to verify system requirements and prepare the Active Directory using the deployment wizard.
-
Request and Assign Certificates
Assigning certificates in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 is essential to have access to specific URLs; such as the Dial-in or Meet URLs. In this video; David Santana walks you through requesting and assigning certificates to services.
-
Set Up Components with the Deployment Wizard
Setting up the Lync Server components is an important task in Microsoft Lync Server 2010. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to set up the components using the Lync Server Deployment Wizard.
-
Start Lync Server Services
Starting the Lync Server Services in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 is important. In this video; David Santana shows you how to verify on your front-end server that the services are running.
-
Troubleshooting and Logging
Microsoft Lync Server 2010 allows you to troubleshoot and set up login. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to troubleshoot the Lync line by reviewing log files and enabling login.
-
Using RBAC to Add an Administrator to the CSAdministrator Group
Adding an administrator in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 is a vital task in preparing the Active Directory and deploying the Lync Server. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to use role-based access control to verify and add a member to the CSAdministrator group.
-
Data Validation
Microsoft Access 2013 lets you create validation rules to help improve the accuracy of your tables by restricting input in table fields. In this video; Gary Leenhouts demonstrates how to use Access to create rules for validating fields within a table and create display messages for input that is not valid.
-
Enforcing Referential Integrity
As with any relational database; Microsoft Access 2013 lets you create specific relationships between tables and fields. There are a set of rules; also known as referential integrity; that ensure the table relationships are enforced. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates this concept and how to apply it in Access 2013.
-
Export Data from Access
Microsoft Access 2013 enables you to export Access data to other applications better able to manipulate it. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses Access 2013 to export an Access query as a Microsoft Excel workbook to an external location.
-
Find Duplicates Query Wizard
Microsoft Access 2013 finds duplicates easily with its query wizard to keep redundant data out of your database. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to create a Duplicates query in Access 2013.
-
Find Unmatched Query Wizard
Microsoft Access 2013allows you to find unmatched records easily with its query wizard. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to create a Find Unmatched Query Wizard in Access 2013.
-
Hiding and Freezing Fields
Microsoft Access 2013 has features that let you manipulate the visibility of fields and columns. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to use these features by freezing / unfreezing and hiding / unhiding columns and fields.
-
Import Data to Access
Microsoft Access 2013 enables you to import data - by linking; appending; or creating a new file; from external storage locations in different formats; into your existing tables. In this video; Gary Leenhouts demonstrates how to import and append data from an Excel spreadsheet to an existing table.
-
Lookup Fields
Microsoft Access 2013's Lookup wizard eases data entry and enables you to create table relationships by listing predefined values for fields. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the Lookup Wizard to insert a lookup field; containing predetermined values; from one linked database table into another.
-
Multiuser Apps – Locking Splitting
Microsoft Access 2013's Database Splitter Wizard enables you to separate your database into a front-end interface database file containing non-configurable design elements; queries; forms; reports; and macros and a linked back-end file storing your table or other data. This conserves space and resources; and enhances security. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the Database Splitter Wizard to split a database.
-
Optimize Database – Analyze Performance
Microsoft Access 2013's Performance Analyzer reveals how a database's many objects are working together; recommends structural improvements; and accepts suggestions before allowing you to fix and optimize the database. In this video; Gary Leenhouts demonstrates how to run database tables through Access 2013's Performance Analyzer; and then selects Ideas and Analysis Notes for review.
-
Optimize Database – Analyze Table
Microsoft Access 2013's Table Analyzer Wizard enables you to test table data; normalize it by implementing recommended changes; and generate a query enabling forms and reports based on your original table to retain their functionality. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses Access's Table Analyzer Wizard to identify issues; carry out several recommended changes; and generate a query.
-
Optimize Database - Compact and Repair
The Microsoft Access 2013 compact and repair feature helps you maintain optimal performance in your database by eliminating unused space; as well as attempting to recover corrupted files. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the Compact and Repair Database tool to schedule maintenance on a database and reduce the size of files.
-
Optimize Database – Database Documenter
Microsoft Access 2013's customizable Database Documenter enables you to document database object revisions and changes; and generate a detailed; printable report. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses Access 2013's Database Documenter to generate and review a report on all object types in an Access database.
-
Sharing Access Databases
Microsoft Access 2013 enhances database security by allowing you to open Access databases in modes appropriate to their use. These modes include Open; Open Read-Only; Open Exclusive; and Open Exclusive Read-Only. In this video; Gary Leenhouts discusses the different mode in which databases can be viewed.
-
Splitting a Database
Microsoft Access 2013 allows you to split a database to improve its performance and minimize the chance of data corruption. In this video; Lynn Tao will discusses how to split a database.
-
Access and SharePoint
Microsoft Access 2013 makes it easy to collaborate with users of SharePoint sites by allowing you to export a copy of a selected database object and storing the copy as a list in SharePoint. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the Export Wizard in Access to export a table to a SharePoint site as a list.
-
Access and SharePoint - Import
Microsoft Access 2013 allows you to take lists from SharePoint and either creates copies of the lists in Access by importing the data or connects to the data by linking to it. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the Import Wizard in Access 2013 to create a link between Access and a SharePoint list.
-
Access and SharePoint - Moving Data to SharePoint
Microsoft Access 2013 lets you move all your data to a SharePoint site to be displayed as lists in SharePoint that are linked back to the existing database. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the Export Tables in SharePoint Wizard to move the tables in an Access database to a SharePoint site.
-
Access Data Email and Outlook – Export
Microsoft Access 2013 interacts with your Outlook e-mail client to allow you to distribute Access data in multiple formats to your Contacts lists. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the E-mail feature to exploit Access 2013's integration with Microsoft Outlook and e-mail information; already attached as an Excel Workbook; to another user.
-
Access Data Email and Outlook – Import
Microsoft Access 2013's integration with Microsoft Outlook enables you to link to; append; or import information from your Contacts folder. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the Import Exchange/Outlook Wizard to create a live lookup by linking to and naming an Outlook Contacts folder; which presents as a table in Access.
-
Access Event Model
Microsoft Access 2013 enables you to construct user-friendly interfaces from forms containing controls incorporating configured events or user-triggered actions. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses Access 2013's Builder tool to configure several form controls' user-triggered actions or events; before saving and demonstrating their use.
-
Action Queries – Append Query
Append queries in Microsoft Access 2013 are a subtype of action queries and are used to select data from one or more data sources before copying the selected data to an existing table. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the append query type in Access 2013 to produce a query that adds records to an existing table.
-
Action Queries - Delete
Delete queries in Microsoft Access 2013 are a subtype of action queries that allow you to delete data in a table based on specific criteria. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the delete query option in Access 2013 to set criteria; whereby specific rows of data are deleted from a table.
-
Action Queries - Make Table
Make tables in Microsoft Access 2013 are typically used to retrieve data from one or more tables and place the data in another table in order to make a copy or archive data. In this video; Gary Leenhouts demonstrates how to extract information from a table and place it in new table in Access 2013.
-
Action Queries - Update
Update queries in Microsoft Access 2013 are a subtype of action queries and are used to change existing data in your tables. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the update query option from the DESIGN tab within the QUERY TOOLS tab to write an update expression in Query Builder in order to change the list prices in a table.
-
Archiving a Table
In Microsoft Access 2013; you can archive a table without using queries or macros. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to archive an entire table.
-
Archiving All Tables
Microsoft Access 2013 lets you replace all tables by replacing the backend database with an empty copy for archiving purposes. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to archive all tables in a database.
-
Archiving Records
Microsoft Access 2013 helps you organize large amounts of data by archiving older and active data. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to archive records.
-
Attachments
Microsoft Access 2013 lets you add attachment fields to your tables; allowing you to efficiently store different file types in a single field. In this video; Gary Leenhouts demonstrates how to add an attachment field into an Access table; as well as how to attach and manage files.
-
Conditional Formatting
Microsoft Access 2013 conditional formatting lets you format data in your forms and reports based on certain criteria; providing an easy way to highlight and display differences in data. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the Conditional Formatting option in Access 2013 to specify a formatting rule and set the formatting for a specified object within a report.
-
Creating a Crosstab Query
In Microsoft Access 2013; the crosstab query allows you to summarize information by grabbing data from different tables and organizing into a spreadsheet-like format for easy reading and reference. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to create a crosstab query in Access 2013.
-
Creating a Parameter Query
Microsoft Access 2013 allows you to prompt for values to include in a query which helps to run different variations with the same query. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to create a parameter query in Access 2013.
-
Customizing Fields
Microsoft Access 2013 makes it possible to customize fields to suit specific needs. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to customize fields by making it Required; changing the data types; field captions; Field Width; and the Default Value.
-
Customizing the Default Format of Datasheets
Microsoft Access 2013 is a great tool to customize the datasheets which will be more personalized and will visually stand out. In this video; Lynn Tao will demonstrate how to customize the default datasheets.
-
Customizing the List of Recently Opened Databases and Folders
In Access 2013; you can modify the number of databases and folders you want to be displayed as well as pin folders or include recent databases for quick access. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to customize the list of recently opened databases and folders.
-
Customizing the Ribbon and Quick Access Toolbar
Microsoft Access 2013 has features that help you customize its default interface. In this video; Lynn Tao will show how to personalize the Ribbon and the Quick Access Toolbar to make commonly used commands more accessible.
-
SQL Queries
Structured Query Language; or SQL; is what Microsoft Access 2013 uses when building any query. By having an understanding of SQL; you will be able to build and edit queries directly in the SQL window. In this video; Gary Leenhout uses Query Builder to create a query before explaining the syntax behind the query while in SQL View.
-
Subforms
In Microsoft Access 2013; you can use subforms; which are forms that are inserted in other forms; as a convenient way of displaying data between tables or queries that have a one-to-many relationship. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the Subform Subreport control in Access 2013 to embed a subform into a form.
-
Subreports
You can use subreports in Microsoft Access 2013; which are reports inserted in other reports; to display data from more than one table in a logical way in the same report. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the Subform Subreport control in Access 2013 to insert a report into another report to express a one-to-many relationship between two tables.
-
User Interface Macros
Microsoft Access 2013's macros ease and regulate data entry by automating interaction with the user interface through events customized in the Macro interface. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the Macro interface's Expression Builder to configure actions governing selected form field events.
-
VBA in Access
Microsoft Access 2013's embedded programming language; Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) enables you to program the user interface through the macro tool. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses Access 2013's Design view to open a macro and introduce the blocks of code making up submacros; which can be run independently when called from within form events.
-
Package and Sign Tool
Microsoft Access 2013's Package and Sign tool enables you to package and attach a secure digital signature to a database when deploying it into a production environment. In this video; Gary Leenhouts uses the Package and Sign tool to package a selected database and attach a certificate to it.
-
Proofing with AutoCorrect and Spelling
Microsoft Access 2013 has features to correct spelling and grammar inaccuracy. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses AutoCorrect; Spell Check and their associated tools.
-
Restricting Changes to the Front-end Database
Access 2013 allows you to save your databases in a compiled binary file or an ACCDE file that restrict design changes while still allowing you to edit the data. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to restrict design changes to front-end databases in Access 2013.
-
Calculate the Current Date
Microsoft Excel 2013 allows you to easily display the current date on a worksheet; saving you the trouble of having to know it and update it manually. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the TODAY function in Excel 2013 to return the system date to a cell in a worksheet.
-
Calculate the Payments on a Loan
Microsoft Excel 2013 financial functions include the PMT function that you can use to calculate the payment amounts on a loan that will help you determine the affordability before committing to a long-term transaction. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the PMT function in Excel 2013 to calculate the monthly repayment amounts on a loan.
-
Change a Cell Entry to Proper Case
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you can use the proper function to reformat text that has been entered in all caps so that it displays in title; or proper; case without you having to completely retype everything. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create a formula using the proper function to automatically change case.
-
Change How Zero Values Display
Depending on how you want the data to appear; you can change how zero values are presented in Microsoft Excel 2013. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to hide and show zeroes in cells containing a zero value before applying a custom format that determines how zero values are displayed in a specified range of cells.
-
Concatenate Text
The CONCATENATE function in Microsoft Excel 2013 allows you to create elegant-looking results by joining text data from several cells together in a single destination cell to form easily read phrases and sentences. In this video; Erin Olsen highlights the CONCATENATE function syntax while combining text in a worksheet.
-
Configure a Workbook for Multiple Users
Microsoft Excel 2013 gives users a variety of ways to share a workbook with multiple users. This includes sharing a workbook so that users cannot overwrite each other's changes. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to allow editing by multiple users; track changes; configure AutoSave options; and configure conflict management.
-
Control Recalculate
Microsoft Excel 2013 allows you to control automatic recalculations when entering or changing worksheet data. In this video; Erin Olsen sets the calculation options to manual and demonstrates manual recalculation and update options.
-
Convert a Table Back to a Normal Range
Microsoft Excel 2013 allows you to easily convert tables back to a normal data range without losing any of the table style formatting. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to convert an Excel table to a regular range of data in a worksheet.
-
Copy Word Text to Excel
By identifying certain data in Word documents and copying it into Microsoft Excel 2013; you'll be able to take advantage of the many features and the functionality that Excel provides when structuring and analyzing data. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to clean up text in a Word document before copying it into an Excel worksheet.
-
Create a Workbook from a Template
Microsoft Excel 2013's featured worksheet templates offer easy-to-use alternatives to designing fresh worksheet templates. In this video; Erin Olsen introduces Excel 2013's default templates; and demonstrates how to search for; download; and edit a worksheet template.
-
Create an Advanced Filter
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you can limit the amount of data that you see at one time by using an advanced filter. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to do an advance filter using criteria you have specified for the data that you wish to view.
-
Creating a Web Query
In Microsoft Access 2013; the Web query allows you to grab any external data from web pages and web sites in plain text format. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to create a Web query in Access 2013.
-
Customizing Display Options for Workbooks and Worksheets
Excel 2013 contains the option to adjust various settings such as; hide the formula bar; the function screen tips; show all comments; hide the scrollbars; the row; and column headers. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to customize display options for workbooks and worksheets.
-
Customizing the List of Recently Opened Workbooks and Folders
Excel 2013; allows you to adjust the display settings for the list of recently opened workbooks or folders. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to customize the recently opened workbooks and folders.
-
Edit Cell Content
Microsoft Excel 2013 enables you to edit cell data by overtyping; adding; and appending data; or by editing data in the Formula bar. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates each method and describes its advantages or disadvantages.
-
Add a Calculation Using the Paste Function
The paste function feature in Microsoft Excel 2013 simplifies the task of adding calculations to your workbook; guiding you through the process of creating functions while providing you with information about the arguments that the functions take. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the Function Arguments dialog box in Excel 2013 to build and add a function to a cell.
-
Add Comments to Cells
Microsoft Excel 2013 gives users the ability to comment individual cells or a range of cells in a worksheet. These comments can contain explanatory notes or reminders; and can be useful for communication in a shared workbook. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to identify a cell that contains a comment and how to insert or delete a comment.
-
Add Text to Calculated Values
By understanding the syntax and using custom formatting in Microsoft Excel 2013; you will be able to add labels to the calculated values in cells that will help clarify the data for users. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to add text to a cell containing a calculated value.
-
Adjust Row Height and Column Width
You can adjust the default row height and column width in Microsoft Excel 2013 to accommodate the content onscreen or when printed out; as well as add visual appeal to certain elements by creating extra whitespace. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates the various methods used to adjust the row height and column width in an Excel worksheet.
-
Allow Editing of Select Cells
Microsoft Excel 2013 provides users with the ability to allow editing of selected cells by authorized users; leaving the rest of the worksheet unavailable for editing. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to protect sections of a worksheet while allowing editing of other sections.
-
Calculate Due Dates Based on Work Days
Microsoft Excel 2013's WORKDAY date and time function differs from the DAYS and DAYS360 functions by allowing you to easily exclude weekends and holidays from your calculations. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use the Excel 2013 WORKDAY date and time function in a worksheet; and explains how it differs from the DAYS and DAYS360 functions.
-
Export a SharePoint List to Excel
You can manipulate the data stored in a SharePoint list by exporting the list to Microsoft Excel 2013; which allows you to take advantage of the excellent formatting options and features in Excel without affecting the original SharePoint list. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to export a SharePoint list to Excel using the list tools in SharePoint.
-
Fast Convenient Chart Format Tools
In Microsoft Excel 2013; the new chart formatting tools are much easier and convenient to use. In this video; Erin Olsen; demonstrates to use the chart formatting tools to create; format; and modify charts.
-
Format a Cell Based on Its Value
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you can use conditional formatting to make data stand out; based on its value. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to format the data in the cells based on the conditions you have stipulated.
-
Format Data as a Table
Microsoft Excel 2013 provides a useful feature that allows you to format a selected area of data as a table in a couple of easy steps using one of the many predefined table styles. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create an Excel table in a worksheet.
-
Format Tables Using Quick Styles
Microsoft Excel 2013 Quick Styles provide options that let you quickly format your tables with the flexibility of changing the style at any time while retaining your custom formatting. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to apply Quick Style formatting to tables.
-
Identify and Select Chart Formatting Tools
Microsoft Excel 2013 gives users a range of formatting tools to customize their charts. In this video; Erin Olsen discusses the difficulties many users have identifying chart elements; such as the X axis; and demonstrates how to use the Current Selection options to do this.
-
Insert and Delete Rows and Columns
Using spreadsheets in Microsoft Excel 2013 will more than likely require that the worksheet structure be modified from time to time by inserting and deleting rows and columns. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates the different techniques that can be used in Excel 2013 to efficiently add rows and columns into a worksheet.
-
Keep Labels Visible by Freezing Panes
Microsoft Excel 2013's Freeze Panes feature allows you to frame data by selecting which columns or rows remain visible while the rest of your worksheet scrolls. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to freeze a single column; as well as a column and a row simultaneously.
-
Let Excel Recommend a Pivot Table
Microsoft Excel 2013 simplifies the creation of pivot tables by analyzing selected data and proposing several pivot tables. Known as the Recommended PivotTables feature; this option saves steps and time; especially when analyzing complex data. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to select data and use the Recommended PivotTables option to create a suitable pivot table.
-
Look Up Additional Information from a Known Value
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you can use lookups to find information using a known value. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the VLookup function to find related data from a data source.
-
Mark a Workbook as Final
Microsoft Excel 2013's Mark as Final feature enables you to mark collaborative documents as final and disable their editing features; thereby rendering them read-only – a status that can be reversed by users with write permissions. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the Mark as Final feature to mark and save a document as final; before re-opening it for editing.
-
Merge and Center Content Across Columns
The Merge and Center feature in Microsoft Excel 2013 allows you to easily create perfectly centered headings in your worksheets that dynamically change to accommodate any adjustments you might make to the column widths. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the Merge & Center option to create a centered label that spans multiple columns in a worksheet.
-
Modify a Macro Using VBA
Microsoft Excel 2013 enables you to quickly and easily correct or amend your recorded macros by editing their VBA code in the Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications Editor. In this video; Erin Olsen shows you how to read and edit a macro's VBA code; save it as a Macro-Enabled Workbook; and run it from the DEVELOPER tab on the ribbon.
-
Modify How Worksheets Print with Page Break Preview
Microsoft Excel 2013 provides users with the ability to modify how worksheets print using the Page Break Preview option. Users can insert their own page breaks; change page break placement; and remove page breaks. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to work with page breaks so that worksheets print in a way that is clearly readable.
-
Modify Tables Using Style Options
Microsoft Excel 2013 provides you with the ability to optimally display tabular data by easily modifying an Excel table's appearance. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to modify the style of an Excel table.
-
Navigate Through Worksheets and Workbooks
Microsoft Excel 2013 enables you to swiftly and easily navigate increasingly large worksheets by way of shortcut keys. Moreover; should you know the position of a cell; you can use Excel 2013's Go To feature to take you directly there. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use shortcut keys and the Go To feature to navigate a worksheet.
-
Organize Worksheets and Workbooks
Microsoft Excel 2013 allows you to organize your workbook's worksheets quickly and easily by simply dragging and dropping their tabs; before naming and color-coding them. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to move a worksheet from one workbook to another; format worksheet tabs; and delete worksheets.
-
Perform Different Calculations Depending on Cell Values
The IF function is one of the most versatile and useful functions in Microsoft Excel 2013 allowing you to test the value of a cell and perform different calculations depending on whether or not a certain criteria is met. In this video; Erin Olsen describes the formula syntax of the IF function and uses to create a conditional formula.
-
Presenting Online
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you can present your Workbook online by using the Lync Meeting. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to present an Excel Workbook online through the Lync Meeting.
-
Printing Tips
Microsoft Excel 2013 provides users with a range of printing options that allow you to print the active worksheet or an entire workbook. There are also several ways to optimize printing. In this video; Erin Olsen gives various printing tips to optimize printing and demonstrates how to print a worksheet; a workbook; and a data selection.
-
Protect a Workbook
Microsoft Excel 2013 facilitates secure sharing across organizations by enabling you to disable functionalities; partly or completely protecting the structure or screens of your workbooks and their worksheets from change by others. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use Excel 2013’s Protect Workbook feature to protect your workbooks from accidental overwriting or unintended change.
-
Record a Simple Macro
Microsoft Excel 2013's macro recorder enables you to record macros; negating the need to perform repetitive actions and allowing you to accomplish complex tasks with the click of a self-designated shortcut button. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to set up; record; and save a spreadsheet macro formatted for use in a single or multiple workbooks.
-
Remove Duplicates
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you can now remove duplicate data easily and effortlessly. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use the Remove Duplicates feature to specify the criteria for removing duplicate data.
-
Remove Metadata and Personal Information
Microsoft Excel 2013's Document Inspector enables you to selectively edit a shared document's metadata and allows you to remove personal information from it. In this video; Erin Olsen gives an overview of multiple categories of metadata and uses the Document Inspector to remove personal information from a document.
-
Resize a Table
Microsoft Excel 2013 provides different methods that you can use to accurately identify a range of table data by manually modifying the size of tables. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to resize a table and specify a new table data range.
-
Save Data to a SharePoint Library
Microsoft Excel 2013 allows you to easily save your Excel data directly to a library on a SharePoint site; providing colleagues within your organization with the ability to access the data. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to save a workbook to a SharePoint library from the Backstage in Excel 2013.
-
Select Data in Excel
Microsoft Excel 2013 allows you to select worksheet data using navigation shortcut keys in conjunction with the Shift key; as well as with your mouse. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates various methods of selecting entire rows and columns; contiguous and discontiguous data selections; and your entire worksheet.
-
Send a Workbook Using Lync
Microsoft Excel 2013 enables users to send workbooks to other user via Lync. This is the integrated messaging service provided by various Microsoft Office 2013 applications; such as SharePoint. This feature enables workbooks to be shared quickly and in context. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to send a workbook using instant messaging rather than e-mail.
-
Simplify Data with an Outline
Microsoft Excel 2013's Auto Outline feature enables you to expand and collapse specific areas of your spreadsheets; containing calculations; for selective data presentation to different audiences – negating any need to maintain multiple versions. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to best set up; organize; and present multiple collapsible and expandable data levels using Microsoft Excel 2013's Auto Outline feature.
-
Sort Worksheet Columns
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you can organize data in a number of ways. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the in-column filters in a defined table; as well as the Sort & Filter tool to sort data in worksheet columns.
-
Split Single Text Entries into Multiple Columns
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you sometimes have to split single text entries into multiple columns. Excel provides a wizard that makes this easy to do. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use the Text to Columns wizard to split single columns into multiple columns using a delimiter.
-
Splitting a Worksheet into Windows
In Excel 2013; splitting a Worksheet into Windows allows you to compare different sections of the worksheet. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to Split a worksheet into Windows in Excel 2013.
-
Summarize Data with Sparklines
Microsoft Excel 2013's Sparklines feature dispenses with elaborate graphs to give your data trends visual clout by enabling you to render custom; multi-cellular spreadsheet data in multiple graphic styles. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the Sparklines feature to show you how to select; define; and format spreadsheet data selections as mini-charts capable of communicating trends with immediate graphic impact.
-
Summarize Data with Subtotals
Microsoft Excel 2013 gives users the ability to summarize data using subtotals. This method can be used only if there are at least three columns of data; which have been sorted by category. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to choose a valid Subtotal field; summarize the data; and troubleshoot the process if it doesn't work.
-
Understand and Use Excel Views
Microsoft Excel 2013's views offer you three different views of your worksheet; each of which offers you different options and lets you format your worksheet according to your needs. In this video; Erin Olsen details the options available in the Normal; Page Layout; and Page Break Preview views.
-
Understand How Table Calculations Differ
Table calculations in Microsoft Excel 2013 differ from conventional worksheet calculations and with an understanding of how the table calculations work you'll be able to take advantage of the numerous advantages they offer. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to perform a simple table calculation and describes the benefits of using table calculations.
-
Use a Timeline to Filter Pivot Tables
Microsoft Excel 2013 enables the user to slice data in various ways using the timeline in a pivot table; if the data contains dates. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to select data and use the Recommended PivotTables option to create a suitable pivot table.
-
Use Flash Fill
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you can use Flash Fill to auto-complete data in a column. In this video; Erin Olsen uses Flash Fill to auto-complete a column by comparing text entered into a cell with the data in adjacent columns.
-
Use Goalseek to Find an Input
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you can calculate what-if type questions quickly; efficiently; and accurately using the Goal Seek feature. In this video; Erin Olsen; demonstrates how to use Goal Seek to calculate the answers you need; without knowing all the inputs required getting to the answer.
-
Use Quick Analysis Tools
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you can analyse your data even faster and easier using the Quick Analysis tool. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use the Quick Analysis tool to analyse your data and create meaningful information.
-
Use Recommended Charts
Microsoft Excel 2013 gives users the ability to select a chart that suits their data from a list of recommended charts. The Recommended Charts feature presents previews of various charts based on the user's actual data. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to select a data range and choose a chart that best illustrates that data.
-
Use the Namebox to Select Cells
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you can easily navigate to cells and worksheets using the Name box. In this video; Erin Olsen; demonstrates how to use the Name box to select cell names and move to the desired location in your worksheets.
-
Use the Watch Window to Inspect Formulas
In Microsoft Excel 2013; you can use the Watch Window feature to monitor calculations across multiple worksheets while working with data in another worksheet. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the Watch Window to keep track of a calculation on one worksheet while entering data into a different worksheet.
-
Validate Data
Microsoft Excel 2013 includes a data validation feature that you can use to define restrictions and control the data that users enter into a worksheet; thereby eliminating data entry errors. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to define a validation rule and provide messages to guide users; ensuring worksheet data integrity.
-
View Calculation Flow
Microsoft Excel 2013 includes commands that allow you to visually represent the relationship between cells and formulas that can be very useful when contextualizing the flow of calculations as well as providing assistance when checking formulas for reference errors. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use the Trace Precedents and Trace Dependents options in Excel.
-
Add or Change Your Picture
Microsoft Lync 2013 allows you to easily add; hide; change; edit; or remove your profile image. In this video; Erin demonstrates how to add; show; and edit your picture; as well as how to hide it from the main Lync interface or remove it altogether.
-
Contacting Multiple Contacts
Microsoft Lync 2013 is a convenient messaging system that allows you to communicate and collaborate with multiple contacts. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to message multiple people in one instant message; email; and even meeting invite.
-
Create an Ad Hoc Meeting with Meet Now
Microsoft Lync’s Meet Now feature allows you to invite contacts; by Instant Messaging (IM); to an ad hoc virtual meeting with audio and video options in your own meeting space. In this video; Erin Olsen uses Meet Now to configure and initiate a meeting with a Microsoft Lync 2013 contact.
-
Create Groups
Microsoft Lync 2013 allows you to streamline your communications by easily creating; naming; managing; and adding contacts to custom groups of individuals with which you can interact in multiple ways. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to create a group and configure it for optimally streamlined communication.
-
Keep Status and Location Current
Microsoft Lync 2013 allows you to integrate with your Outlook calendar to update your online status and location. In addition; you can control how and what information is shown to whom. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to manually update your status and location from the Lync user interface.
-
Meeting Space Options
Microsoft Lync 2013 contains multiple tools that enable you to configure your meeting space and set user permissions for once-off or reusable meeting spaces; the settings of which can be saved. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to configure presenter and attendee settings and permissions.
-
New Display Options
Microsoft Lync 2013's Options page enables you to view or display your contacts in the manner best fitting your organizational needs - using or omitting images; by name; e-mail address; or differing degrees of availability. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to customize the Contacts List display.
-
Organize Lync Meetings with Outlook
Microsoft Lync 2013 virtual meetings; scheduled through Outlook's Calendar view; enable you to set up a meeting and allow your invitees to respond and prepare for the virtual get-together. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to invite participants; specify a date; time; and subject for the meeting; and send out an invitation.
-
Quick Lync Bar
Microsoft Lync 2013's new; easily accessible Quick Lync bar enables you to start an Instant Messaging (IM) or Chat session; make a Lync phone or video call; view a person's contact card; send e-mails; schedule meetings; and more. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates the Quick Lync bar's features and explains how they can be put to further use.
-
Review and Use Contact Cards
Microsoft Lync 2013's contact cards contain information essential to your successful use of Lync. Consisting of five tabbed pages; a Quick Lync bar; and actionable links; each contact's card contains a wealth of editable personal; demographic; group; and organizational-relationship data. In this video; Erin Olsen explains Lync 2013 contact card data groups’ tabbed pages; their sources; and uses.
-
Search for Contacts
Microsoft Lync 2013's Find Someone's advanced-capability search feature enables you to search for and locate contacts across multiple integrated applications. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates the filtering capabilities of the Find Someone search feature and uses it to locate a contact.
-
Shared Notes
Microsoft Lync 2013's powerful Shared Notes feature; integrated with Outlook and OneNote 2013; enables you to share; add to; or collaborate on pages or complete notebooks before or during one or more meetings. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the Share with meeting function and Outlook's Calendar mode to detail different ways to share notes.
-
Sort Contacts
Microsoft Lync 2013's many built-in sorting and organizing options enables you to sort your contacts by group; status; relationship; name; or availability. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to optimally group and sort Lync contacts.
-
Start an IM Session
Microsoft Lync 2013's Instant Messaging (IM) or Chat feature enables multiple online functions while protecting against accidently interrupted chats; recording missed calls of all types; and allowing you to filter conversations by user. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to use the IM or Chat feature.
-
Tabbed and Pop Out Conversations
Microsoft Lync 2013's single-window; tabbed conversations allow you to maximize screen real estate and easily toggle between multiple chats; each of which can be popped out into its own window; before being popped back in again. In this video; Erin Olsen uses the Lync 2013 Chat feature to demonstrate how to toggle or pop out and in selected conversations.
-
Use Screen Share to Share Content
Microsoft Lync 2013's screen-sharing capabilities enable you to specify who can view; share; or copy documents and files. Lync's Share option allows you to present information using whiteboards; polls; presentations; applications; and the desktop. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to share a PowerPoint presentation in Lync as well use the permissions and management tools.
-
Automatically Accept or Decline Meetings
Microsoft Outlook 2013 has the ability to automatically accept and decline meeting requests; enabling you to better manage your Inbox. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to change the settings in Outlook 2013 to automatically accept and decline meetings.
-
Show Second Time Zone
Working across different time zones is enhanced by the ability to display multiple time zones in the Outlook 2013 calendar. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add a second time zone and switch between zones using Outlook 2013.
-
Adding the Weather Forecast to Your Calendar
In Microsoft Outlook 2013; you can add the weather forecast to your calendar. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to add the weather forecast feature to the calendar.
-
Additional Customizations
Microsoft Outlook 2013 allows you to customize the colour of messages in your message list as well as the lines that separate them. In this video; Josh Penzell uses conditional formatting to change the font color and bar of unread messages before removing the grid lines from between messages.
-
Arranging Calendar Days
In Microsoft Outlook 2013; you can customise the calender to manage different agendas and schedules. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to arrange calendar days to suit your schedule.
-
Attach File Message Task to E-mail
Using Microsoft Outlook 2013; you can attach Outlook items such as tasks to an e-mail message just as easily as you would any other file attachment. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to attach a read-only task to an e-mail; as well as how to assign an actual task.
-
Autoarchiving Your E-mail
The AutoArchive feature in Microsoft Outlook 2013 enables you to store e-mail items so that you can access them in the future. In this video; Josh Penzell uses Outlook's advanced options to set how frequently AutoArchive runs and to delete expired items and archive old items.
-
Automatically Request Read Receipts
In Outlook 2013 you have the option of requesting a delivery or read receipt by default; thus eliminating the need to set these tracking options on an individual message basis. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set mail options so that delivery and mail receipts are requested every time a mail is sent.
-
Automatically Spellcheck E-mail
Microsoft Outlook 2013's spell check program enables you to automatically spell check e-mails before sending them. In this video; Josh Penzell uses Microsoft Outlook 2013's Spell Check program to configure Outlook to automatically spell check e-mail before it is sent.
-
Change the Default Mail List Font Size
Microsoft Outlook 2013 includes advanced view settings for changing the font sizes of e-mail fields appearing in your message list. In this video; Josh Penzell uses conditional formatting in Outlook to set a uniform font size for the message list; before reverting to the default font.
-
Changing the To-Do Bar Order
In Microsoft Outlook 2013 you can customize the To-Do Bar by specifying which To-Do Bar items appear in the different Outlook View as well as the order in which they appear. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to organize the To-Do Bar in the various views.
-
Connect Hotmail Account
Microsoft Outlook 2013 makes it easy to connect to your Hotmail or Outlook.com account. You need only your account details; and Outlook 2013 does the rest for you. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Add New Account feature to connect the Outlook client to a Hotmail e-mail account.
-
Creating Search Folders
Microsoft Outlook 2013 lets you create custom; named search folders that enable you to collect e-mails meeting specified criteria; such as attachments; defined words; or senders and recipients. In this video; Josh Penzell explores search folder templates that automatically filter e-mail and display in the Folder list. He also creates a custom search folder named Flagged Meetings.
-
Customizing How You Open Your To-Do Bar
There are various ways of opening the To-Do Bar in Outlook 2013; including the ability to customize how it opens for quicker access. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates the different methods used for opening the To-Do Bar.
-
Disable Inline Reply
The Inline Reply feature in Microsoft Outlook 2013 allows you to reply to a message instantly; but you can disable this feature. In this video; Josh Penzell disables the Inline Reply feature and configures Outlook to automatically open replies and forwards in a new window.
-
Display Days Left
Microsoft Outlook 2013’s Task view does not include an option for viewing the days left until a task is due. However; this useful information can be added. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add an option to the Task list that allows you to see how many days are left until a task is due.
-
How Not to Save Sent E-mails
When sending an e-mail message; Microsoft Outlook 2013 allows you to turn off the feature that saves a copy of the sent message. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to temporarily disable the feature that automatically saves a copy of your sent items.
-
Importing and Exporting
In Outlook 2013; the Import and Export Wizard enables you to import or export your mailbox as a PST file. It also lets you test a restore by opening an Outlook data file in your folder list. In this video; Josh Penzell exports and imports a PST data file to and from the desktop.
-
Introduction to OWA
Microsoft Outlook 2013 allows you to access your e-mail account in Internet Explorer using the Outlook Web App (OWA). This offers a similar interface and most of the functionality of Outlook on your local machine. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use OWA to view an Outlook 2013 e-mail account and highlights visual and functional similarities and capabilities.
-
Junk E-mail and Phishing Filter
Outlook 2013 has a built-in junk e-mail and phishing filter that assists you in protecting your e-mail information. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to enable the e-mail filter and customize it to meet your requirements.
-
Linking Contacts
Outlook 2013 lets you link contacts so that multiple contact entries for the same person are up to date and organized in a central location. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to link contacts across different contact groups in Outlook 2013.
-
Mailbox Cleanup
The Mailbox Cleanup utility in Microsoft Outlook 2013 enables you to assess available e-mail storage space; as well as the distribution and size of your mail folders. You can free storage by deleting or archiving e-mails by date or size. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Mailbox Cleanup to delete unwanted mail.
-
Notes in Outlook
Microsoft Outlook 2013 allows you to activate and display notes in the Outlook Folder list. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to configure Outlook to display notes.
-
Organizing Folders
Microsoft Outlook 2013 allows you to easily reorganize your subfolders from the default A to Z sorting; giving you control over how you’d like to organize your Outlook data. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to move subfolders in Outlook 2013.
-
Outlook Custom Forms
Microsoft Outlook 2013's Developer tab; when enabled on the Ribbon; lets you create and publish custom Tasks; Contacts; and Calendar forms; overwriting or adding to the information-gathering capabilities of those available to you. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Developer tab to create a named custom form for tasks.
-
Repair Outlook Data Files
Using Microsoft Office Inbox Repair Tool; you can diagnose and repair corrupt Outlook data files. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to repair a corrupt Outlook date file and import the repaired file into Outlook 2013.
-
RSS Feeds
Microsoft Outlook 2013 allows you to keep up to date with your favourite news sites by subscribing to their RSS feeds and having the information delivered directly to your message list. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to subscribe to an RSS feed.
-
Searching Through Outlook
The search functions in Outlook 2013 allow you to easily search your e-mails; attachments; calendar appointments; and contacts to find information quickly. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to refine your searches and locate information as efficiently as possible.
-
Send/Receive Groups
In Microsoft Outlook 2013; you can customize Send/Receive operations. You can choose to send or receive your accounts’ e-mail manually or automatically. In this video; Josh Penzell sets the Send/Receive function to automatically receive mail from all accounts every 30 minutes; while making the Send function a manual operation.
-
Setting Flag Reminders
Flag reminders in Microsoft Outlook 2013 ensure you do not forget to attend to e-mails flagged in your To Do list. You can add detailed instructions to these e-mails. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Add Reminder feature to specify the action required by an e-mail; and the time at which he will be reminded to implement it.
-
Showing the Ruler
In Outlook 2013 the ruler is no longer visible when creating an e-mail. However; if your message layout is important; you have the option of showing the ruler in the message window. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add the ruler to the Quick Access Toolbar and Ribbon of your message window.
-
Translating an E-mail
Microsoft Outlook 2013 is a powerful e-mail management system that helps you translate selected text and entire e-mails into different languages. In this video; Lynn Tao explains how to translate e-mails in Outlook 2013.
-
Turn Off Automatic Acceptance of Meetings
Outlook automatically accepts meetings; adding them to your calendar and marking them as tentative. In Outlook 2013; however; you have the option of turning this feature off. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to disable the feature that automatically accepts meetings.
-
Adjusting Images
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 includes numerous options that allow you to adjust images either by making corrections to them; or by applying effects for visual standout. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to adjust images and apply effects to them.
-
Adjusting the Audio Timing
PowerPoint 2013 gives you the opportunity to incorporate background audio or narration to presentations. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how you can adjust the settings to play the audio in the background; repeat itself; or play throughout all the slides.
-
Animation Pane
The Animation Pane in PowerPoint 2013 enables you to add animations to your slides; allowing the creation of vibrant and engaging presentations. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add animations to a presentation and customize how they are presented.
-
Borders on Images
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013's lets you add image borders that can be customized to enhance the pictures in your presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the various picture tools to demonstrate how to add and manipulate image borders.
-
Change Theme for Specific Slides
In Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 you can apply themes to an entire PowerPoint presentation or to selected slides in a presentation slide deck. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the DESIGN tab to apply a global theme and applies multiple themes to groups of selected slides.
-
Combining Shapes
The Merge Shapes feature is new to Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 and it allows you to create your own custom shapes. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates the various ways you can combine existing shapes to make new ones.
-
Comments Pane
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013's Comment feature enables you to easily collaborate with your team members on the same PowerPoint presentation by adding; reviewing; or deleting comments. In this video; Josh Penzell activates uses the Comments pane to insert; review; reply to; delete; navigate; and save comments in a PowerPoint presentation.
-
Creating Charts from Excel Data
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 enables you to create charts from imported Excel documents. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create a chart and include content from an Excel table in the chart.
-
Creating Handouts in Word
PowerPoint 2013 allows you to export handouts into Microsoft Word; providing you with more options when supplying your audience with a convenient way to take notes of your presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use PowerPoint to automatically create handouts in Word.
-
Creating Slides from Outlines
You can use the Outline View in Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 to create outlines for your presentations and to import outlines created in Microsoft Word. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create an outline in PowerPoint as well as how to import an outline created in Word.
-
Creating User Interactive Presentations
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 allows you to build user interactivity into your slides by adding links and hyperlinks that engage the audience and compliment your presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add hyperlinks to a PowerPoint slide.
-
Cropping and Arranging Images
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 provides tools that allow you to crop and arrange images in your presentation so that they display the way you want your audience to view them. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates crop; rotate; flip; show; and hide images.
-
Custom Motion Animations
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013's new custom motion features allow you to create animations that move objects along straight lines or free-handed motion paths. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set; adjust; and preview an object’s predetermined path; as well as create straight-line and free-handed motion paths.
-
Enabling and Using AutoRecover
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can use the Auto Recover feature to save your work and recover it after power loss or system crash. In this video; Chris Keenan discusses how to enable and use the Auto Recover feature in Microsoft Project 2013.
-
Exporting Presentations as Videos
Using PowerPoint 2013 you can export your presentations as videos; enabling you to distribute your presentation confidently without knowing your recipient's computer setup. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the export settings in PowerPoint to turn a presentation into a video.
-
Exporting Slides as Images
PowerPoint 2013 allows you to export your slides as a series of static images or as an image presentation; where editable slides are replaced by pictures. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to export slides from a PowerPoint presentation as images.
-
Finding and Replacing Text
PowerPoint 2013 allows you to find and replace text and fonts. In this video; Lynn Tao will show you how to use this tool to not only replace text; but fonts as well.
-
Formatting Text
The text formatting options that are available in Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 provide you with numerous options when creating visually appealing presentations. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates some of the text formatting options available in PowerPoint 2013.
-
Insert a YouTube Video
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 enables you to access; search on; and insert YouTube and other online; cloud-based; and local videos directly into your PowerPoint presentations. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the YouTube search feature in PowerPoint to insert a video directly into a PowerPoint presentation.
-
Inserting and Creating Equations
In PowerPoint 2013 formulas and equations can be incorporated into presentations. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to work with formulas and equations in PowerPoint 2013.
-
Inserting Screenshots
PowerPoint 2013 includes a built in feature that allows you to easily insert screenshots into your presentations which is especially useful; for example when describing a software program. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use PowerPoint 2013 to insert a portion of a screenshot into a presentation slide.
-
Inserting Slides from Other Presentations
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 makes it easy to reuse slides from other presentations in a variety of ways; saving you from having to redo work. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates two methods of inserting slides from other presentations.
-
Inspecting Presentations
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 allows you to remove certain information from presentations that you might not want other people to see. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the Document Inspector to remove internal information before sending a presentation to a client.
-
Numbered and Bulleted Lists
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 allows you to customize bulleted and numbered lists to enhance the appearance of the slides in your presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create default bulleted and numbered lists and to customize them by applying a style and color.
-
Options
You can customize Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 in a variety of ways to suit your way of working. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates some of the preferences available and how they can affect PowerPoint and your workflow within it.
-
Overview of PowerPoint Views
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 offers multiple views; each with its own specialized uses. In this video; Josh Penzell gives an overview of PowerPoint's Normal; Slide Sorter; Reading View; Outline View; and Notes Page views.
-
Packaging and Burning Your Presentation to a CD
PowerPoint 2013 can format and burn one or more presentations on a CD. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to package your presentation for CD and burn it onto disk.
-
Personalize Quick Access Toolbar and Ribbon
In PowerPoint 2103 you can personalize the Quick Access Toolbar and Ribbon depending on your preferences and specific tasks at hand. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to customize the Quick Access Toolbar and Ribbon in PowerPoint.
-
Placeholders
PowerPoint 2013 Placeholders help you create customized templates in your presentation. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to insert and customize Placeholders.
-
Playing Audio in the Background of Presentation
A new feature of Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 is that it allows you to set audio to play in the background throughout a presentation. You can set the audio to start automatically or to loop until the presentation is stopped. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to insert an audio file into a presentation and to set its play options.
-
Playing with SmartArt
SmartArt in PowerPoint 2013 allows you to choose from different layouts that can be easily customized to visually represent information in your presentation as effectively as possible. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to customize SmartArt in a presentation.
-
Printing Handouts and Notes
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 allows you to easily print handouts of your slides that can be distributed to your audience enabling them to take notes during a presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the printing features in PowerPoint 2013 to demonstrate how you can print handouts and notes of your slides.
-
Protecting Presentations with a Password
PowerPoint 2013 provides different ways for you to set passwords that protect your presentations by helping to prevent others from opening or modifying them. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add a combination of passwords to protect a presentation.
-
Remove the Background on Images
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 enables you to remove the background from images; thereby allowing you to present only part of an image. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Remove Background tool to remove specific parts of an image.
-
Resume Reading Feature
New to Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 is the Resume Reading feature that allows you to pick up where you left off; whether on your local drive or when accessing a presentation through a web-based application such as SkyDrive. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the Resume Reading feature in PowerPoint.
-
Save as Read-Only
PowerPoint 2013 enables you to protect a presentation by saving a read-only version of the presentation that is marked as final. This is useful in indicating to others that the presentation cannot be edited further. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to mark a PowerPoint presentation as final; saving it as read-only.
-
Saving Chart Templates
PowerPoint 2103 allows you to save your customized charts as chart templates for later use; thereby saving you time when creating and modifying charts in your presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to save a customized chart as a chart template.
-
Self Running Presentation
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 allows you to build a self-running kiosk presentation; which runs in a continuous loop in a kiosk; according to pre-set timings. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set up a self-running presentation; and then view it.
-
Share Presentations Over the Internet
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 makes it easy for you to share presentations with other users over the Internet. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates the options available for sending a presentation to others and for presenting it online to a wider audience.
-
The New Presenter View
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013's Presenter View allows you to see your notes and upcoming slides; and gives you access to multiple presentation tools – on a single screen. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to access Presenter View and introduces its navigation; presentation utilities; slide display; zoom; and text-sizing tools.
-
Transitions
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 provides a variety of transitions you can apply to slides in your presentations. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to apply these transitions and the customization features that are available.
-
Using Animation Painter
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013's Animation Painter enables you to recreate and apply an animation to multiple objects; items; and slides. In this video; Josh Penzell uses the Animation Painter to recreate an animation on a single slide as well as on multiple objects on another slide.
-
Using Customized or Personal Templates
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 allows you to easily save and retrieve personal or customized templates for reuse. In this video; Josh Penzell guides you through DESIGN tab options; Custom Office Templates; and Save as types to ensure that you're able to save and retrieve templates to which you've added personal styles; colors; backgrounds and more.
-
Using Guides and the Grid
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 provides various features to help with the precise alignment and placement of objects on a slide. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the ruler; gridlines; and guides features to position an item; as well as how to configure the settings of these features.
-
Using PowerPoint Templates
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 includes many new; quickly-navigated templates offering easy customization and organization. You can pin or unpin templates to and from your list and you can use custom or suggested searches by category; both on and offline. In this video; Josh Penzell guides you through the various templates and their organizational and search options.
-
Using Translation Tools
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 provides translation tools that can help you include words or phrases in other languages in a presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the translation and research features to translate words on a slide.
-
Web App Overview
You can use the PowerPoint Web App to access your presentations through a web browser. In this video; Josh Penzell uses SkyDrive to demonstrate how the PowerPoint Web App can be used to view; share; and perform quick edits to a presentation through the Internet.
-
Compress Multimedia
PowerPoint 2013 enables you to compress multimedia when file size is important; such as when you wish to send a presentation containing audio and video by e-mail. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to compress media contained in a PowerPoint presentation.
-
Creating a Custom Background
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 allows you to create your own custom background for a presentation. You can choose a gradient fill; adjust the transparency; and use various picture and patterns. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create a custom background.
-
Creating a Custom Slide Show
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 allows you to create custom slide shows within a single presentation. This enables you to modify your presentation by selecting specific slides that suit a particular audience without having to duplicate the entire presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create custom slide shows within a single presentation.
-
Creating a Video from a Presentation
PowerPoint 2013 allows you to create video from your presentations for online; screen; and portable formats. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to create a video from a PowerPoint presentation.
-
Adding a Resource Pool to Your Plan
Microsoft Project 2013 enables project managers to work with a shared resource pool and import it into their current project plan to view over-allocations across multiple projects. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to import a shared resource pool and identify over-allocations.
-
Adding a Text Column
In Microsoft Project 2013; there is more than one way to add and name new columns in your project. In this video; Ashley Hunt; uses the Add New Column feature to add and name a new text column.
-
Adding Graphics to a Gantt Chart
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can easily add and format graphics in a Gantt chart. In this video; Ashley Hunt; uses the Gantt chart formatting tools to add and format arrows and circles to a Gantt chart.
-
Adding Hyperlinks
After watching this video; you will be able to create a hyperlink in an Excel 2016 workbook.
-
Adding Notes to a Project Plan
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can use the Task Information feature to add notes to a project plan. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to create; edit; access; and delete a note for a project task.
-
Adding OT Work for Resources
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can easily add overtime work to assist you in keeping an effective budget. In this video; Ashley Hunt; uses the Resource Usage view to look at individual resources; their assignments; their assignment duration; and their overtime work duration.
-
Apply Text Formatting to Standard Reports
In Microsoft Project 2013; formatting text in standard reports has become much quicker and easier. In this video; Ashley Hunt; uses the formatting tools to change the font; color; effects; glow; fill; and rotation of text in a Burndown report.
-
Changing Linked Relationships Across Two Projects
Microsoft Project 2013 enables you to change the relationship between linked predecessor and successor tasks across projects. In this video; Ashley Hunt changes the relationship type from Finish-to-Start to Start-to-Start between linked predecessor and successor tasks.
-
Create and Format Standard Report
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can create and format standardized reports. In this video; Ashley Hunt uses the Dashboards feature to create and customize a Project Overview report.
-
Create Resource Pool
Microsoft Project 2013 enables users to create a shared resource pool to consolidate information on all resources to use across multiple projects; without which human resources can easily be over-allocated. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to create a resource pool from a blank project plan and then save it as a shared file on the network.
-
Creating a Combination View
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can create a custom combination view; create copies of it; and adjust it to include other views. In this video; Lynn Tao explains how to create a combination view.
-
Creating a Comparison Report Between Two Project Versions
Microsoft Project 2013 enables you to quickly create a detailed report that allows you to review the performance of a project over time by highlighting the differences between two versions of the same project. In this video; Ashley Hunt uses the Compare Project Versions utility to review differences between a current version and an earlier version of the same project.
-
Creating a Custom Table
In Microsoft Project 2013; it is easy to create a custom table and view the table data in different ways. In this video; Ashley Hunt; uses the More Tables list to create new tables and copy built-in tables and adapt them by adding and deleting columns or rows.
-
Creating a Filter
Microsoft Project 2013 lets you create your own filters. In this video Chris Keenan demonstrates how to create a new filter in Microsoft Project 2013.
-
Creating Custom Views
Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to create new customized views that represent the project data in a way that is useful to you; and tailored to your specific needs and workflow. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to create a custom combination view and use the Organizer to copy it to the Global template in Project 2013.
-
Creating Recurring Tasks
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can create recurring task entries and give start and end dates. In this video; Lynn Tao explains how to create recurring task entries.
-
Creating Visual Report Templates
Microsoft Project 2013 allows users to create pivot tables and diagrams by using Excel and Visio. In this video; Lynn Tao explains how to create a Visual Report template.
-
Custom Blank Reports with Graphics
Microsoft Project 2013's Custom Report feature enables you to create graphic-rich reports from a blank template formatted to optimally display selected data. In this video; Ashley Hunt customizes a Blank Project 2013 report by adding a table and a chart; and then styling its graphic elements.
-
Custom Calendars and Non-Working Times
Microsoft Project 2013 enables you to create your own custom calendars and set holidays and other non-working times specific to your company's schedule; which is especially useful when working on international projects. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to add non-working times to a new custom calendar and assign the calendar to specific tasks in a project plan.
-
Custom WBS Codes
Microsoft Project 2013's WBS option enables you to define custom alpha-numeric codes for your Work Breakdown Structure (WBS); customized to meet your project definitions; organizational codes; or customer needs. In this video; Ashley Hunt uses the Task Sheet view's WBS Code Definition feature and Code preview to build a multi-level; alpha-numeric coding structure for a WBS.
-
Customize Fields
Microsoft Project 2013 enables users to create custom columns for their project plans by creating a custom field. This can be a task or resource field of a particular type; such as text; cost; date or duration. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to add a custom field; name it; and insert it into the project plan.
-
Customize Options
Microsoft Project 2013 enables users to customize the standard Project settings. This includes views; proofing; the schedule; currency; language; and display. In this video; Ashley Hunt explores the various default options that can be changed; and demonstrates how to change the default display; a currency symbol; and the assignment duration units.
-
Customize the Quick Access Toolbar
Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to customize the Quick Access Toolbar so that it contains the options you most commonly use. Similarly; you can remove options you never use. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to customize the options on the Quick Access Toolbar; and change the location of the toolbar.
-
Customizing Resource Calendars
Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to create resource calendars for the individuals working on a project that you can customize and use to make adjustments to tasks assigned to a particular resource in the project calendar based on the availability of an individual resource. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to add vacation dates to a resources calendar.
-
Customizing the List of Recently Opened Projects and Folders
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can customize the number of recently opened projects and folders you want displayed as per your preferences. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to customize the list of recently opened projects and folders.
-
Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar
Microsoft OneNote 2013 contains the Quick Access Toolbar which provides a fast way to access commands that you use frequently; making them easier to find rather than having to search through the different menu options. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to customize the Quick Access Toolbar in various ways; for example by adding or removing commands.
-
Delay the Start of an Activity or Project
Microsoft Project 2013's Update Project feature enables you to delay the start of a project task; automatically rescheduling all tasks affected by the delay. In this video; Ashley Hunt uses the Update Project feature to delay the start of a scheduled task and then reschedules a project using the Move Project feature.
-
Determine Methods for Resources Overallocation
Microsoft Project 2013 gives users the ability to automatically level resources when there are resource over-allocations. However; you can use various views to make resource-levelling decisions yourself. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to use the Team Planner to make informed resource allocation decisions.
-
Disabling Default Save to SkyDrive
Microsoft Project 2013 is by default set to save the documents to the SkyDrive. In this video; Chris Keenan discusses how to disable the default save to SkyDrive and enable local saving in Microsoft Project 2013.
-
Edit Macros
Sometimes you need to correct errors or make minor adjustments to your recorded macros; and Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to easily edit macros in Visual Basic without needing to re-record them. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to edit a macro using Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) from within the Macros dialog box in Project 2013.
-
Edit Visual Reports Template
Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to edit an existing visual report template; saving you the time of having to modify the PivotTable every time you export it to Excel. In this video; Ashley Hunt uses the Visual Reports - Field Picker dialog box in Project 2013 to edit an Excel template by adding and removing fields.
-
Customizing the Ribbon
After watching this video; you will be able to modify the Ribbon layout in Excel 2016.
-
Modify Tasks
Microsoft Project 2013 enables you to modify tasks using multiple auto-scheduling methods; from rescheduling tasks by drag and drop; to configuring the many options available in the Task Information dialog box; to manually configuring them from the ribbon. In this video; Ashley Hunt modifies tasks automatically and manually.
-
Organizer
Microsoft Project 2013's Organizer feature enables you to incorporate project elements such as views; templates; and tables from and to the Global template; thereby allowing full template customization and avoiding duplication. In this video; Ashley Hunt uses the Organizer feature to incorporate several international calendars into a template used worldwide.
-
Outline Codes
Microsoft Project 2013's Outline Number option enables you; whether you insert or delete items; to use automatic numbering – recognized by Excel – alongside your Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) elements. In this video; Ashley Hunt enables the Task Sheet view and uses the Outline Number option to demonstrate the practical uses of numbering; be it switched on or off.
-
Personalizing Recently Opened Projects
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can use the Recent Projects list to open recently opened projects. In this video; Chris Keenan discusses how to personalize the list of recently opened projects in Microsoft Projects 2013.
-
Printing in Project
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can navigate the print preview and customize your print settings in one location. In this video; Ashley Hunt uses the Print feature to preview and customize the print settings for a report.
-
Privacy and Security Settings
Microsoft Project 2013 has several options that allow users to protect their project files and computers. In this video; Lynn Tao introduces the privacy and security settings and Trust Center options.
-
Rebaselining Only Unstarted Tasks
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can rebaseline unstarted tasks if major changes occur in the project. In this video; Lynn Tao explains how to rebaseline unstarted tasks in Project 2013.
-
Recording a Macro to Create a Formatted Report
Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to easily automate frequently repeated formatting tasks by recording macros that can be stored and accessed whenever you need to apply specific formatting steps to a report. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to use the macros options to record and run a macro.
-
Recurring Tasks
Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to easily schedule recurring tasks into your project plan. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to accommodate weekly status meetings into your project management plan.
-
Setting Baselines
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can set a baseline to assist in tracking a project. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to create and use a baseline to track a project.
-
Split Screen and Fixed Units for Resources
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can easily manage the scheduling of resources and the duration of scheduled work. In this video; Ashley Hunt; uses the Task Form to assign resources and change the duration of the resource’s scheduled work.
-
Entering Progress Using a Daily Timesheet
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can track the progress of the work. You can enter actual work; change the Timescale; and check the balance work. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to enter the progress using daily timesheet in Microsoft Project 2013.
-
Exporting Cost Data with a Map
In Microsoft Project 2013; maps are a great way to export your information into Excel. In this video; Ashley Hunt; uses the Export Wizard and a custom map to export cost data from Project 2013 to Excel.
-
Exporting to Excel
Microsoft Project 2013's Export Wizard maps Project fields to appropriate export formats; enabling you to share selected Task; Resource; Assignment; and other data by saving it for export to an Excel workbook. In this video; Ashley Hunt saves a project as an Excel workbook; and then steps through Project 2013's Project Export Wizard; mapping and exporting task names as selected data.
-
Filtering
Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to quickly filter your information so that you can sort through your project details easily. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to use the filter function in Microsoft Project 2013.
-
Formatting a Gantt Chart
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can format your Gantt Chart to make it easier to read; and display task information in different ways. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to customize the Gantt Chart color scheme; modify bar styles; and change how tasks display.
-
Highlighting with Cell Background Color
Microsoft Project 2013 allows users to change the cell background; so specific information stands out. In this video; Lynn Tao explains to highlight cell background color.
-
Inactive Tasks
Microsoft Project 2013's Inactivate feature enables you to incorporate tasks and plan for risk events by allowing you to inactivate such tasks without affecting the project plan; the project schedule; resource availability; or other scheduled tasks. In this video; Ashley Hunt uses the Inactivate feature to "inactivate" a task and demonstrates how it has no effect on the project plan.
-
Interim Baselines and Custom Tables for Viewing
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can create an interim plan to track performance from the baseline date to the current date. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to set an interim plan and view the data in a custom table.
-
Leveling Gantt
Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to use the Leveling Gantt to show the visual impact of the leveling of resources across your project. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to use the Leveling Gant in Microsoft Project to judge the most efficient allocation of your resources.
-
Leveling Resources
Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to reallocate your resources when they become over-allocated. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how you can use Microsoft Project to level your resources to make your project plan as efficient as possible.
-
Linking Across Projects
Microsoft Project 2013 enables you to link predecessor and successor tasks across projects. In this video; Ashley Hunt opens two project files and creates a link between predecessor and successor tasks.
-
Master Projects
Microsoft Project 2013 gives users running multiple individual projects the ability to create a master plan that contains all of them. The individual plans remain linked to the master plan so that updates to the master plan are carried over to the original project plans. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to create and maintain a master plan.
-
Split Screen Views
Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to split the screen; enabling you to see two different types of project data at the same time; and avoid the inconvenience of switching between screens. In this video; Ashley Hunt uses the split view feature in Project 2013 to combine different views within a project onscreen at the same time.
-
Splitting a Task
When work needs to be interrupted for an unexpected event; Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to split specific tasks into segments so that part of the task starts later in the schedule. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to split a task in the Gantt Chart view before adjusting the duration of the split task.
-
Task Calendars
Microsoft Project 2013 enables you to assign custom calendars to global tasks; thereby accommodating resources subject to different countries' or organizations' holidays; time zones; or working hours. In this video; Ashley Hunt uses the Task Calendar function to assign a calendar to a resource in another country; thereby ensuring that the project plan tracks tasks correctly.
-
Task Inspector
The Task Inspector feature in Microsoft Project 2013 helps you to quickly identify tasks causing scheduling problems and provides options on how to resolve the issues. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to use the Task Inspector in Project 2013 to draw attention to scheduling issues and to resolve them in your project plan.
-
Team Planner
Microsoft Project 2013's Team Planner enables project managers to allocate and reallocate their project resources through a visual interface. In this video; Ashley Hunt reschedules the work of overallocated resources; formats Team Planner visual elements; and automatically levels resources using the Prevent Overallocation feature.
-
Tracking Gantt for Baseline and Statistics Box
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can use the Tracking Gantt feature to compare the baseline to the current project status. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to view the baseline statistics and use the Tracking Gantt to see the baseline compared to the current status.
-
Tracking Task Links
The new task path feature in Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to highlight successors and predecessors in the Gantt Chart; allowing you to see how selected tasks fit into the overall schedule and help unravel large complex project plans. In this video; Ashley Hunt introduces the task path options for Gantt Charts.
-
Updating a Resource Pool
Microsoft Project 2013 enables users to create resource pools for sharing resources across multiple projects. Updating the project plan automatically updates the resource pool and vice versa. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to add and edit resources in the resource pool.
-
Updating Resource Costs
Microsoft Project 2013 calculates the cost for resources; helping you to track the budgeting of a project by allowing you to update any resource costs that might change throughout the lifetime of a project. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to apply a resource cost increase in the cost rate table for an individual resource.
-
Using Cost Rate Tables
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can easily track your budgeting with Cost Rate Tables. In this video; Ashley Hunt; uses a Cost Rate Table to update overtime at different cost rates for resources and tasks.
-
Using Critical Path Tools
Microsoft Project 2013's Critical Path tools enable you to determine; graphically and on your Gantt chart; the series of interdependent tasks dictating your project's Finish date. In this video; Ashley Hunt uses Project 2013's Critical Tasks and Slack features to graphically identify critical and noncritical tasks; and explains how delays to critical tasks impact a project's Finish date.
-
Using Highlighting Filters
The predefined filters and highlights in Microsoft Project 2013 allow you to quickly focus on specific subsets of task and resource data within a project plan by applying color to the filtered data. In this video; Ashley Hunt introduces us to the different built-in highlighting options within the VIEW tab's ribbon interface.
-
Using Page Setup for Print Settings
Microsoft Project 2013 has a variety of printing options that allows you to adjust settings such as orientation; header; footer; and margins. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to adjust print settings by using the Page Setup.
-
Using Task Notes
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can create notes and link it to files to help you organize your tasks. In this video; Lynn Tao explains how to use task notes.
-
Using the Timeline for Reporting
Microsoft Project 2013 provides a Timeline feature that gives users an overview of all activities in a project; and how phases stretch across time. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to add activities to the timeline; how to format the timeline; and how to copy the timeline into an e-mail and send it out as a reporting tool.
-
Visual Reports Using Excel
Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to create visual reports of your project's data that can be viewed and manipulated in Excel while providing your recipients with easy access to the data. In this video; Ashley Hunt creates a visual report within Project 2013 that is exported to Excel; before demonstrating how to change the report in the PivotTable.
-
Work Contours
Microsoft Project 2013's Work Contour option enables you to shape tasks' particular work requirements to your available resources. In this video; Ashley Hunt uses the Work Contour option to shape a task's work requirements to the hours available to the resource.
-
Configuring Publisher: The Info Pane
In Microsoft Publisher 2013; you can configure the Info pane. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use and configure the Info Pane in Publisher.
-
Creating a Cover Page
In Microsoft Publisher 2013; you can add a cover page to you publication. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create cover pages in Publisher.
-
Creating a New Publisher 2013 Document
Microsoft Publisher 2013 is a desktop publishing application that can be used to create visually appealing documents. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create a new Publisher document.
-
Getting Started with
Microsoft Publisher 2013 can be used to create ads; brochures; and other types of documents that can be distributed electronically or by print. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to Microsoft Publisher 2013 and discusses how best to utilize the templates within to create visually stunning documents.
-
Manipulating and Grouping Objects
In Microsoft Publisher 2013; you can group and manipulate objects like shapes; text; and images in the document. In this video Jamie Campbell discusses how to group and manipulate objects in the Publisher document.
-
Printing; Sharing; and Exporting Documents
In Microsoft Publisher 2013; you can print; share; and export your documents. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Print; Share; and Export options in a Publisher document.
-
Publisher 2013 Document Layout
In Microsoft Publisher 2013; you can create documents like business cards and posters using the Document Layout. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses Publisher 2013 document layout.
-
The Publisher 2013 Interface
Microsoft Publisher 2013 has various features that can be used to create visually stunning documents. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the features of Publisher 2013 interface. He goes through the features available right from creating a document to printing it.
-
Working with Building Blocks
In Microsoft Publisher 2013; you can quickly add pre-designed graphics to your publications. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how you can use the Building Blocks feature to add designed graphics in your document.
-
Working with Pictures
In Microsoft Publisher 2013; you can add images and logos to your document. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses working with pictures in Publisher 2013.
-
Working with Shapes
In Microsoft Publisher 2013; you can create various types of shapes; lines; arrows; flowcharts and callouts in your document. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses working with shapes in Publisher.
-
Working with Text Objects
Microsoft Publisher 2013 is a desktop publishing application that can be used to create visually appealing documents. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses working with Publisher 2013 text objects.
-
Working with the Ruler and Guides
In Microsoft Publisher 2013; you can use the Rulers and Guides feature to have precision in the document. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use Guides in a Publisher document.
-
About Me
About Me in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to manage their online profiles. In this video; David Santana shows you how to locate and use this social feature in the Newsfeed App.
-
Adding Items to Lists
Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to create lists. In this video; David Santana shows you how to add items to a list.
-
Checking Out and In Documents
The check-out and check-in controls in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 ensure that other users cannot edit your document while you are editing it. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to check out a document from the library and check back in.
-
Create a Blog Post
Creating a blog post in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is easy using the Newsfeed section. In this video; David Santana shows you how to create a blog post.
-
Create a List
Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to create lists to structure shared information. In this video; David Santana walks you through how to effectively navigate the apps page and create a list in SharePoint 2013.
-
Create Conversations in Newsfeed
Creating conversations using Newsfeed in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to discuss topics of interest. In this video; David Santana shows you how to post; edit; and delete a conversation.
-
Create Note on Note Board
Creating notes on Note Board in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to post comments on specific site pages. In this video; David Santana shows you how to post comments on a specific site page.
-
Creating Tags
Creating tags in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to follow specific site pages. In this video; David Santana discusses how tags work and demonstrates how to create a tag.
-
Document Libraries
Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to easily create document libraries. In this video; David Santana demonstrates the various ways in which to create a library and add documents.
-
Enhancements to the User Interface
The user interface in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 has a better look and feel. In this video; David Santana discusses how to use the more user-friendly interface to perform a range of tasks—from content authoring to cross-site publishing.
-
I'm Following List
The I’m Following feature in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to track followings; trending; tags; and people. In this video; David Santana shows you how to navigate to the People I’m Following page.
-
Improvements to the User Interface
The user interface in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 has been enhanced to offer users a simple and unified navigation experience to their sites and to all additional sub-sites. In this video; David Santana shows you how to use the interface effectively.
-
List Ribbon Interface
Using the ribbon interface in a list in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to easily access tools; controls; and commands. In this video; David Santana explores the interface and discusses how to use it effectively.
-
Managing Alerts
Managing alerts in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 can be a hassle if you have created multiple alerts. In this video; David Santana shows you how to manage an alert by navigating to an alert and editing it.
-
Mentioning Members
Mentioning a member in a comment in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to directly access the member’s profile details from the comment. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to add member information in your comments.
-
Newsfeed Contact Info
Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to access Contact Information through the Newsfeed App. In this video; David Santana shows you how to navigate to the contact card page and locate privacy settings.
-
Newsfeed Details Page
The Details page in the Newsfeed App in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to add past projects and skills information to their profile. In this video; David Santana shows you how to specify this information and change privacy settings.
-
Overview of Newsfeed Tab
The Newsfeed tab in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 keeps you connected with your co-workers and up-to-date on what is happening. In this video; David Santana talks about how to use the Newsfeed tab effectively by posting and seeking information.
-
Overview of Search Capabilities
Microsoft SharePoint 2013 offers users a very powerful and highly configurable search. In this video; David Santana shows you how to refine your search and set alerts for a specific search.
-
Permissions
Permissions and privileges in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 can be set for groups associated with specific lists and libraries. In this video; David Santana shows you how to manage permission settings.
-
Play Your Media Asset
Playing your media asset in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is simple. In this video; David Santana shows you how to play an uploaded video.
-
Profile Settings
In Microsoft SharePoint 2013; you can limit the amount of personal information that will be visible to other users by using privacy and profile setting. In this video; Lynn Tao will demonstrate how to set the profile settings for a user.
-
Quick Edit Mode
Quick Edit in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 gives users the ability to edit list items. In this video; David Santana shows you how to use this mode to view and edit items on the list using the spreadsheet format.
-
Quick Launch
Quick Launch in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to navigate to specific sites; such as the Sales site; and return to the original parent site. In this video; David Santana shows you how to use the functionality to navigate effectively.
-
Setting Alert on Search Results
Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to set alerts on search query results. In this video; David Santana shows you how to create a new alert on a search result for new items in the search result.
-
Skydrive Tab
The SkyDrive tab in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to access the SkyDrive Pro page. In this video; David Santana shows you how to use the tab to navigate to the SkyDrive Pro functionality.
-
Start a New Discussion
Starting a new discussion in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is vital. In this video; David Santana shows you how to navigate to a community site and post a discussion.
-
View Tags and Notes
Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to view previous tags and notes. In this video; David Santana shows you how to access older tags and notes.
-
Working with SkyDrive Pro
The SkyDrive Pro page in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to drag and drop files just like in a document library. In this video; David Santana shows you how to navigate to the SkyDrive Pro page and how to use it.
-
Adding Controls
Microsoft Word 2013 includes a variety of content controls that you can add to your forms; providing end-users with easy-to-use input options while restricting the input to suit your needs. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to add a date picker control to a form document from within the DEVELOPER tab in Word 2013.
-
Adding WordArt
Microsoft Word 2013's WordArt is a gallery of text styles enabling you to create multiple decorative effects. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to use WordArt in a document.
-
Apply Document Themes
In Microsoft Word 2013; you can use themes to give your documents a distinctive; reoccurring format. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to preview and apply a theme to a document.
-
Automate Tasks Using Macros
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to create macros that can be used to automate repetitive and frequently used tasks. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart records a macro and uses it in a Word document.
-
Changing the Orientation of a Specific Page
In Microsoft Word 2013; you can change the orientation of a single page between landscape and portrait. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to change the page orientation for a single page.
-
Compare Document Changes
The legal blacklining option in Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to compare document changes while retaining the integrity of the document versions. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to compare the changes between two documents.
-
Create a Data Source Using Word
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to create a data source; which is the information that varies when using mail merge to send form letters to multiple recipients. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart uses the mail merge features to create a recipients list.
-
Create a Document Using a Template
Microsoft Word 2013 provides numerous templates that allow you to quickly create stylish and professional looking documents without having to think about formatting. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart uses a letter template in Word 2013 to create a new document.
-
Create a Macro
Microsoft Word 2013 makes it easy to automate commonly repeated tasks by allowing you to create macros that store commands or keystrokes that can be run whenever you need to perform the task. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart records a macro in Word and saves it as a button on the Quick Access Toolbar for easy access.
-
Create a Template
Microsoft Word 2013 lets you save your frequently used documents as templates; thereby saving you time by not having to recreate static content and layout information; as well as maintaining a consistent look to your documents. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to save a document in Word as a document template.
-
Create and Modify Text Styles
By creating and modifying text styles in Microsoft Word 2013; you can apply a set of customized formatting choices consistently throughout your documents. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to create and modify a text style in Word 2013 before applying the style to the layout of a document.
-
Create Custom Style Sets and Templates
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to develop customized style sets; which you can save as templates for faster; more consistent document creation that suits your preferences. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart uses the text format options in Word to create a style set before saving it as a Word template.
-
Create Forms
Microsoft Word 2013 includes content controls for you to use when creating forms that will make data entry more efficient; reduce errors; and ensure consistency. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart uses the content controls in Word 2013 to create a form template.
-
Inserting Cover Pages
In Microsoft Word 2013; you can either use predefined Cover Page templates or design custom templates. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to use the predefined Cover Page templates and create custom Cover Page templates in Microsoft Word 2013.
-
Creating Custom Color Themes
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to set custom color formatting options within a document and save them as a document theme to be shared across Office programs for a professional; uniform look. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to apply theme color options to a document before saving it as an Office theme document.
-
Creating Custom Font Themes
Microsoft Word 2013 lets you customize the fonts in themes; including heading and body text fonts; allowing you to easily format documents across Office programs with the same; uniform font choices. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to create a custom font theme in Word 2013.
-
Customize the Word Interface
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to customize elements within the interface; thereby letting you create an efficient environment tailored to your specific preferences and workflow. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to customize the Quick Access Toolbar and manipulate the ribbon in Word 2013.
-
Deleting Building Blocks
Microsoft Word 2013 lets you to maintain your building blocks by allowing you to delete building blocks; for example when you have duplicate items listed. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart uses the Building Blocks Organizer to delete a building block in Word 2013.
-
Deleting Document Draft Versions
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to easily delete the automatically generated draft versions of your document before sharing it with other people while working within SharePoint. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to delete draft documents from the Versions menu in the Backstage view.
-
Desktop Publishing with Word
Microsoft Word 2013 includes tools that you can use to enhance your images by applying effects and layout options; giving your desktop-publishing project the polished look you're after. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart uses some of the picture tools in Word 2013 to help create a professional looking a document.
-
Document Properties
In Microsoft Word 2013; you can check your documents to see what types of information are attached to them in the document properties. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to review and change document properties; and how to clean up documents prior to sharing them.
-
Editing Building Blocks Properties
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to edit the properties of existing building blocks. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart uses the Building Blocks Organizer in Word 2013 to modify and redefine an existing building block in order to make it part of the Quick Part Gallery.
-
Embedding and Linking Charts and Data
In Microsoft Word 2013; you can embed and link charts from Excel. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to embed and link charts and data from Excel to a Word document.
-
Enabling AutoRecover
In Microsoft Word 2013; you can recover from power outage or system crash by using the AutoRecovery feature. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to use and edit the duration for AutoRecovery in a Word document.
-
Envelopes and Labels
By using the mail merge capabilities in Microsoft Word 2013; you can easily produce multiple labels and envelopes when distributing paper-based mail. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to specify the format and printing options of an envelope before connecting the envelopes to an Outlook contacts list.
-
Finding Hidden Characters
In Microsoft Word 2013; you can display hidden characters and also find and replace the special formatting characters. In this video Lynn Tao demonstrates how to display; find; and replace special hidden characters in a Word document.
-
Formatting with Columns
In Microsoft Word 2013 you can improve the layout of documents such as newsletters; step-by-step training documents; and brochures by using columns to produce a newspaper style format. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to split a selected section of text into two columns.
-
Header and Footer
In Microsoft Word 2013; you can add headers and footers to maintain a consistent layout to all pages of a document. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to insert a picture into the header as well as add page numbers to a document.
-
Including the Print Date
In Microsoft Word 2013; the PrintDate feature allows us to record the date and time on any printed document. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to add PrintDate to a printed Word document.
-
Inserting Building Blocks
Microsoft Word 2013 building blocks are predesigned reusable items that can be used as an efficient way of attaining consistency within the layout and content of your documents. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart uses the Building Blocks Organizer to insert a Quick Part into a Word document.
-
Limiting Authors
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to protect specific sections of your shared documents when the documents are saved to a Microsoft SharePoint site that supports workspaces. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart uses the Block Authors feature in Word 2013 to prevent authors from making changes to a selected piece of text in a shared document.
-
Manage Document Changes
Microsoft Word 2013's track changes feature marks up all changes to documents and allows you to view; comment on; navigate; and accept or reject such changes. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart reviews a document using track changes.
-
Manage Multiple Documents
Microsoft Word 2013's allows you to manage and work in multiple documents simultaneously. You can switch between layouts and documents from the documents' title bars; the Windows taskbar; and the ribbon. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to enable Read Mode and use multiple-document layouts.
-
Managing Recipient Lists
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to manage the list of recipients that will be used in your mail merge by providing options to refine the list as well as add and remove recipients from the merge. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to manage a recipient list when performing a mail merge in Word 2013.
-
Manipulate Forms
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to easily manipulate the design; layout; components; and content of already-existing forms. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart uses form properties and Word 2013 design elements to create and configure a new combo box content control.
-
Merge Document Changes
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to merge and save document changes by multiple reviewers in a single document. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart combines two versions of a reviewed document into one document.
-
Modify Control Properties
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to modify the properties of the content controls in order to change the format of a particular control to better suit your documents appearance. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to customize a checkbox in a form by modifying the control properties from the DEVELOPER tab in Word 2013.
-
Modify User Information
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to view and edit the user information contained in the properties of a Word document. You can also add custom fields; which will then reflect on the Properties page. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to populate information fields and add a custom field.
-
Page Setup
Microsoft Word 2013 provides users with a variety of page layout options; through which you can manage how the content of a document is displayed. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to change the margin settings in a document; and how to insert a page break.
-
Prepare a Document for Accessibility
Microsoft Word 2013's Accessibility Checker includes features such as Backstage view; a navigable Print Preview; a Zoom bar; and the ability to customize your ribbon with shortcut keys. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart introduces features designed to assist users with disabilities and adds a new shortcut key to the ribbon.
-
Prepare Documents for Review
Before submitting a Microsoft Word 2013 document for review; it’s advisable to run a spelling and grammar check; the Accessibility Checker; and the Compatibility Checker. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how these features ensure your document contains only accurate information; suits users with disabilities; and is compatible with earlier versions of Word.
-
Printing Comments
In Microsoft Word 2013; you can add comments to the documents and print the comments. In this video; LynnTao demonstrates how to add comments to the document and how to print the comments by enabling the Print Markup feature.
-
Restrict Document Access
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to use case-sensitive password encryption to restrict document access. This prevents others opening or modifying your documents. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to create a password to protect the document on which she is working.
-
Review Tracked Changes
Microsoft Word 2013 enables you to review tracked changes before accepting or rejecting them. You can accept or reject them individually or collectively. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to accept changes in a document and turn off the Track Changes feature.
-
Saving Selection as Quick Parts
Microsoft Word 2013 Quick Parts allow you to highlight a selection in your document and save it to the Quick Parts Gallery from where you can reuse it in future documents. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to save an object in a Word document to the Quick Parts Gallery.
-
Set Formatting and Editing Restrictions
Microsoft Word 2013 enables you to set formatting and editing restrictions; denying certain editing rights to selected users. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart sets formatting and editing restrictions on a document.
-
Share a Document
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to e-mail Word documents for review as attachments; links; or PDF files. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to send a document as an attachment to a chosen recipient.
-
Supress Information
Microsoft Word 2013's Document Inspector searches your document; its properties; and metadata for hidden or personal information you do not wish to share. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to use the Document Inspector to remove organizational or personal information and metadata from a document.
-
The Mail Merge Features
Microsoft Word 2013's Step-by-Step Mail Merge Wizard allows you to generate mass mailings in six easy; configurable steps using a single document and a direct data source. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart uses the wizard to generate a mail merge.
-
Word Options
Microsoft Word 2013 offers a number of different options when it comes to working within your environment. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to customize the Quick Access Toolbar to allow easy access to tools that are used regularly.
-
Working with PDFs
Microsoft Word 2013 enables you to turn your documents into PDFs; allowing you to share them with users not in possession of Office. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to convert a Word 2013 document into a non-editable PDF; accessible on a free PDF reader.
-
OneNote Overview
OneNote 2013 is a great application to keep track of all of your notes; your To Do’s; your preparation documents or anything else you might want to keep track of. In this video; Neal Rowland explains how you can use OneNote 2013 to create and track your To Do’s and even connect it with your Outlook 2013 tasks.
-
Outlook Calendar
Microsoft Office 2013 allows you to view and customize your calendar. In this video; Neal Rowland demonstrates how to maintain and reference your calendar.
-
PowerPoint Templates
PowerPoint 2013 allows you to jump-start your presentation with a collection of new themes. The quick launch screen with thousands of template options helps you to spark your creativity. In this video; Neal Rowland demonstrates how to create a new presentation by selecting different attractive templates and add them to your list.
-
Send to OneNote
Office 2013 allows you to send information to OneNote while using other Office 2013 programs; thus making great strides to be more collaborative and integrated. In this video; Neal Rowland explains how you can send e-mail messages from Outlook 2013 to OneNote 2013 Notebook with an example.
-
Sharing Using Instant Message
In Office 2013; sharing and collaborating is now more integrated; quick; and easy to use. In this video; Neal Rowland explains how you can use Office 2013 to share your documents in PowerPoint; Word; and Excel even over Instant Messaging.
-
Tagging in OneNote
The Tag feature in OneNote 2013 allows you to search and find your notes easily. At a quick glance you can see more information about an item then just the words themselves. In this video; Neal Rowland explains how you can customize your tags and find related notes quickly in OneNote 2013.
-
Docking OneNote
The Docking option in OneNote 2013 allows you to hold all your notes and all of the material on the notes you took in one single location. In this video; Neal Rowland explains how you can use multiple programs such as PowerPoint; Word; or Excel at one time in OneNote 2013.
-
InfoPath
InfoPath 2013 supports few new changes that you may find useful. In this video; Neal Rowland provides you an overview of the changes made in InfoPath 2013 and how the features are enhanced from InfoPath 2010.
-
OneNote Cool Tricks
A cool feature of OneNote 2013 is that it creates new pages and does math as you type. In this video; Neal Rowland explains you a couple of really cool tricks in OneNote that you may not be familiar with; one is solving a mathematical equation and the other; creating a new page.
-
OneNote Meeting Notes
OneNote 2013 allows you to take notes during a meeting without opening a Word document or a piece of paper. In this video; Neal Rowland explains how OneNote 2013 helps you to create meeting notes; retain a copy; and share it so that everyone in the meeting gets a copy of the notes you took.
-
Excel 2013 Charts
Microsoft Excel 2013 includes significant improvements to its chart features that will allow you to efficiently and intuitively display your data in easily readable charts and graphs. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to use the new and improved chart features in Excel 2013 to graphically represent data.
-
Excel 2013 Quick Analysis
Microsoft Excel 2013 includes the new Quick Analysis tool that allows you to easily preview and apply conditional formatting; suggested charts; and tables to a selected range of data. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how the Quick Analysis options can be used to make fast improvements to Excel spreadsheets and make data analysis a lot easier.
-
Excel 2013 Templates
In Microsoft Office 2013; templates are a great resource that can save you a lot of work by providing ready formatted documents. In this video; Isabel Garcia uses Excel 2013 to demonstrate how to access a range of different templates for a variety of uses.
-
Outlook 2013 Navigation Bar and Views
Microsoft Outlook 2013 includes a new Navigation Bar at the bottom of the Outlook window; as well as different view options that you can use to tailor the layout of Outlook to your specific needs. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to use the Navigation Bar as well as the options in the VIEW tab.
-
Outlook 2013 Overview
Microsoft Outlook 2013 offers a new cleaner interface designed for ease of use; providing enhanced features that make communication quicker and help keep your e-mails; contacts; and schedules manageable. In this video; Isabel Garcia highlights the main features of the brand new Outlook 2103 interface.
-
Outlook 2013 People
The Contacts section in Microsoft Outlook 2013 has been renamed People. Managing contacts is now easier with the new People Card that contains all the information that you have for a specific contact in one place. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to use the features within People view to manage your contacts in Outlook 2013.
-
PowerPoint 2013 Images and Media
Microsoft Outlook 2013 allows you to enhance your presentation by inserting images and other media elements such as audio and video; quickly and easily from an online source into your slides. In this video; Isabel Garcia uses the online picture and media options from the ribbon to insert an image; a video; and audio into a PowerPoint presentation.
-
PowerPoint 2013 Overview
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 provides updates that facilitate professional presentations with its new and improved presenter tools and Presenter View; as well as the introduction of variations for the themes that help you achieve the look you're after. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates some of the improvements; and new features in PowerPoint 2013.
-
SkyDrive in Word
With Microsoft Office 2013; you can create your files and then save them to your SkyDrive. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to save a file from Word 2013 to SkyDrive.
-
PowerPoint 2013 Formatting and Animations
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 provides new features and improvements that make it easier to format images and add motion path animations to objects when enhancing your slide presentation. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to use the new formatting options to add an animation to a picture.
-
SkyDrive Overview
Microsoft Office 2013's SkyDrive – and its business counterpart; SkyDrive Pro – offers you an immediately accessible; cloud-based storage library that allows you to save; access; and share your synchronized document; photo; and other files from any device. In this video; Isabel Garcia introduces SkyDrive before signing in to a SkyDrive Pro account where she accesses her documents through Internet Explorer.
-
SkyDrive.com
You can open and edit files that are stored on SkyDrive.com with Microsoft Office 2013 applications. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to open a document using both the Word Web App and the full Word 2013 application.
-
User Interface File Tab
In Microsoft Office 2013 applications; the FILE tab offers improvements for saving; opening; and sharing documents. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates the options that are available when you access the FILE tab.
-
Word 2013 Design Tab
In Microsoft Word 2013; the new DESIGN tab on the ribbon offers newly streamlined and easily accessible options. In this video; Isabel Garcia reviews the DESIGN tab; focussing mainly on applying and modifying paragraph spacing style sets.
-
Word 2013 PDFs
With Microsoft Word 2013; you can now open PDF files and edit the content without having to use Adobe Acrobat or Reader. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to create; open; and edit PDF files with Word 2013.
-
Word 2013 Pictures
In Microsoft Word 2013; from the INSERT tab; you can insert your own files; or download online pictures and videos to add interest to any document quickly and easily. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to add a picture to a document and the various tools that are available to adjust and enhance your image.
-
Word 2013 Templates
Microsoft Office 2013 provides you with hundreds of new and improved templates to create documents from. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates the template screen in Word 2013; and how to search for and download new templates.
-
Word 2013 Tracking
Microsoft Word 2013 comes with improved tracking options; as well as the new Simple Markup view; which makes your markups; indicators; and comments easier to view and understand. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates some of the tracking options.
-
Word 2013 Videos
When you insert a video in Microsoft Word 2013; you'll be able to view and use the video directly in Word. You don't have to launch a browser or media player. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to insert a video and edit the video container in your document.
-
Create a New Notebook
Microsoft OneNote 2013 makes creating notebooks simple and easy. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates how to create and organize notebooks and format text in OneNote.
-
Exporting Pages; Sections or Notebooks
Exporting specific pages; sections; and notebooks in Microsoft OneNote 2013 is easy. In this video; Allen Goldberg simulates how to export a particular page in OneNote 2013.
-
Formatting and Editing
Formatting and editing in Microsoft OneNote 2013 is easy. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates the formatting and editing capability of OneNote 2013.
-
Office 2013 Integration
The integration of Outlook 2013 into Microsoft OneNote 2013 makes working with OneNote much easier. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates how to use the Screen Clipping; Send to OneNote; and New Quick Note features.
-
Outlook 2013 Integration
The integration of Microsoft OneNote 2013 with Outlook allows you to work effectively. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates how to keep track of the Outlook tasks; email; and meeting components in OneNote.
-
Searching and Tagging Your Information
Searching and tagging information in Microsoft OneNote 2013 lets you find data simply and easily. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates how to use the special controls built-in for filtering information and tagging.
-
Sharing Your Notebooks
Sharing your notebooks in Microsoft OneNote 2013 is easy. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates how to share a notebook using a SkyDrive account.
-
The Draw Tab
The Draw tab in Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows you to manipulate shapes and draw on text. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates how to draw people’s attention to your text by using some unusual functionalities; such as the OCR component.
-
The History Tab
The History tab in Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows you to view the edit history. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates how to use this capability to search notebooks and how to delete page versions.
-
The Home Tab
The Home tab in Microsoft OneNote 2013 provides you additional functionality over and above the basic Microsoft Office functions. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates how to take advantage of those functions and how to tag information.
-
The Insert Tab
The Insert tab in Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows you to add various content and elements to your notebook. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates the functionality of the tab and shows how to select a page template.
-
The Review Tab
The Review tab in Microsoft OneNote 2013 provides you proofing and translation tools. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates how to convert text from English to other completely different languages.
-
The View Tab
The View tab in Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows you to view each section of your notebook differently. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates how to take advantage of this particular capability and set a different view for each section.
-
Adding Audio and Video Content
Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows you to record new; or add pre-recorded audio and video clips; to your notebook pages. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to embed an existing video clip into a notebook page as a file attachment; as well as how to record a clip directly from the OneNote Ribbon.
-
Adding Drawings to Notebooks
Microsoft OneNote 2013 provides tools that allow you to add freehand drawings or predefined shapes to your notebooks pages. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to draw freehand strokes; insert shapes; and manipulate the objects using tools from the OneNote Ribbon's DRAW tab.
-
Adding Pictures
Microsoft OneNote 2013 lends notebook content graphic appeal by facilitating the insertion of screen clippings; Web images; or images stored locally. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to insert; place; edit; and manipulate images in OneNote notebooks.
-
Attaching Files and Printouts
Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows you to combine relevant information from other sources in your notebook pages as attachments or printout images of the document or file. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to insert a Word document into a notebook page either as a file attachment; or as a printout of the information from the OneNote Ribbon's INSERT tab.
-
Changing General and Display Options
Microsoft OneNote 2013 supports various general and display options that can be configured to suit your needs. These options can change the default behavior of OneNote so they should be handled with caution. In this video; Pierre Devereux provides an overview of the various options and demonstrates some of their effects.
-
Checking Spelling
Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows you to check your spelling as you type. There are a couple of different methods you can implement to do this. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to use the spell checker; spelling pane; and dictionary in OneNote.
-
Collaborating on Notebooks
Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows multiple team members to author shared notebooks on the fly while it tracks when and who adds; alters; or deletes content. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to create; name; and share a collaboratively authored notebook on a shared drive.
-
Conducting Research
In Microsoft OneNote 2013; research can be performed from inside of OneNote by using the Research command. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to use the Research feature to search for spellings; definitions; translations; or synonyms of words.
-
Converting a OneNote Table to an Excel Worksheet
The integration of Microsoft OneNote 2013 and Microsoft Excel allows OneNote tables to have the full functionality of Excel. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how a OneNote table can be converted into an Excel spreadsheet that can be edited and updated.
-
Converting Handwriting to Text
Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows you to convert digital handwriting to text; which is useful if you constantly take handwritten notes. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to convert handwritten notes for use in your notebooks.
-
Formatting and Sorting Tables
In Microsoft OneNote 2013 you can easily format and sort tables; allowing data to be changed in various ways. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to format data in a cell; create additional rows; sort columns; and use a variety of shortcut options.
-
Formatting Text and Applying Styles
Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows for the easy formatting and styling of notebook text. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to format and style notebook text using drop-down menu and button commands grouped for quick access on the OneNote 2013 ribbon.
-
Inserting Excel Workbooks
Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows you to to gather handwritten notes; drawings; or audio clips; and include Excel workbooks. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to insert Excel Workbooks in OneNote 2013.
-
Inserting Excel Workbooks in OneNote
In Microsoft OneNote 2013; Microsoft Excel spreadsheets can be embedded directly into pages to provide a preview of the spreadsheet. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how existing and new Microsoft Excel spreadsheets may be embedded into a OneNote notebook.
-
Inserting Links
In Microsoft OneNote 2013; you can include links to websites; files; and even other notebooks. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to insert links in OneNote 2013.
-
Inserting Word and PowerPoint Files in OneNote
Microsoft OneNote 2013 integrates seamlessly with other Microsoft applications and it is easy to insert a Word document or a PowerPoint presentation into your notebook pages. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how a Word document can be embedded into a OneNote notebook page.
-
Introducing the OneNote Interface
Microsoft OneNote 2013 offers anytime; anywhere access to digital notebooks compiled; printed; and shared in a home; school; or business environment. In this video; Pierre Devereux discusses OneNote 2013's interface and navigates its many immediately-accessible features.
-
Managing Audio and Video Content
After embedding audio and video content in your notebook pages; Microsoft OneNote 2013 provides a number of useful features that allow you to control playback and customize how OneNote makes and plays recordings. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to manage audio and video content using the options from the PLAYBACK tab in the OneNote Ribbon.
-
Managing Meetings with Outlook and OneNote
In Microsoft OneNote 2013; meeting notes can be provided to other participants who have access to a shared notebook. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how the Share with Meeting feature allows meeting participants to view; edit; and update meeting notes.
-
Notebook Settings and Properties
Microsoft OneNote allows users to work on multiple Notebooks and sync them as necessary. In this video; Lynn Tao introduces the settings and properties in OneNote 2013.
-
OneNote 2013 Linked Notes in Word and PowerPoint
In Microsoft OneNote 2013; you can make research notes which can link back to their original sources by using the Linked Notes feature. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how OneNote allows you to make research notes which can be linked back to the original source material for ease of reference.
-
Outlook Appointments and Tasks in OneNote
The integration of Microsoft OneNote 2013 with Microsoft Outlook makes it easy to insert Outlook meeting and task details into OneNote note pages. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how Outlook meetings and tasks can be inserted into OneNote pages.
-
Performing Calculations
Unlike a word processor; OneNote allows users to freely construct calculations in an informal platform. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to perform and add calculations to your notebook pages.
-
Printing a Notebook
Microsoft OneNote 2013 supports features that allow you to preview and print your notes in a familiar way. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to use the Print and Print Preview and Settings dialog boxes in OneNote to select a printer; configure print settings; and preview the notebook pages as they would appear when printed.
-
Saving and Backing up a Notebook
In addition to saving notes as you work; Microsoft OneNote 2013 provides fail-safe mechanisms that allow you to backup notebooks and protect valuable information. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to use the Save & Backup options in the OneNote Options dialog box to set automatic notebook backups and run manual notebook backups as required.
-
Sending OneNote Content to Word
Microsoft OneNote 2013's integration with other Microsoft Office applications enables the formatting of text; pages; or complete notebooks in Microsoft Word without having to copy and paste. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to send OneNote text to be formatted in Microsoft Word.
-
Sending Outlook Messages to OneNote
In Microsoft OneNote 2013; you can send Outlook mail messages to OneNote notebook pages. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to use the Send to OneNote feature to attach Microsoft Outlook email messages to OneNote pages.
-
Syncing OneNote 2013 and OneNote Mobile
Microsoft OneNote 2013 uses OneNote Mobile to give immediate; streamlined access to notebooks on mobile devices – enabling viewing; editing; and sharing on the move. In this video; Pierre Devereux discusses OneNote Mobile's streamlined interface and explains its many features.
-
The File Tab
Microsoft OneNote 2013 includes the FILE tab; which opens the Backstage view. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates the FILE tab where you can access file management options; such as opening a file; creating a new file; and printing a file.
-
Tracking Changes
In Microsoft OneNote 2013; content added or changed by multiple authors can easily be tracked. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how new and modified content can be tracked by author or date.
-
Using and Creating Templates
Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows predefined page designs to be applied to notebook pages; adding individual style; consistency; and professional flair. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to navigate to OneNote's Templates pane to apply different categories of template to new; blank notebook pages.
-
Using QuickNotes
Microsoft OneNote 2013 Quick Notes is a time-saving feature that allows you to take notes quickly outside the organizational structure of OneNote that can be filed later at a convenient time. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to create; manage; review; and pin Quick Notes.
-
Using SharePoint to Share Notebooks
Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows the saving; syncing; and sharing of part or whole notebooks using OneDrive and SharePoint. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to save a notebook to a SharePoint site; and how to share it by e-mail or a sharing link.
-
Using the Interface
In Microsoft OneNote 2013; you can gather handwritten notes; drawings; and audio clips. You can also access the notes anywhere on any device. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses the interface for Microsoft OneNote 2013.
-
Using the Web App
Microsoft OneNote allows users to access notes anywhere and on any device and also on Web apps. In this video; Lynn Tao introduces the OneNote Web app.
-
Version Control Options
In Microsoft OneNote 2013; version control allows you to retrieve earlier versions of a page in a shared notebook that may have been modified by different authors over time. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how version control allows you to view; restore; copy; and delete earlier versions of a page.
-
Clipping and Saving
Microsoft OneNote allows you to insert screen clippings and an image from a browser; as well as insert a Quick Note. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses how to clip and save from the desktop; the web; and also insert Quick Notes in OneNote 2013.
-
Touchscreen Tips
Microsoft OneNote can be accessed anywhere and on any device. And you can gather notes; drawings; and audio clips in OneNote. In this video; Lynn Tao introduces you to Touchscreen basics in OneNote 2013.
-
Sharing Files and Pictures
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the steps required to share files and pictures in an IM conversation or meeting.
-
Sharing Notes
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to share OneNote notes; including using existing notes and creating new notes.
-
Sharing Whiteboards
After watching this video; you will be able to share and use the whiteboard feature.
-
Starting IM Conversations with Multiple Contacts
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to send instant messages to multiple contacts or groups at once.
-
Adding contacts
After watching this video; you will be able to add internal and external contacts.
-
Answering Video Calls
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the steps to answer a video call; ignore the call; and use other available options.
-
Answering; Transferring; and Forwarding Calls
After watching this video; you will be able to identify how to answer a call; transfer a call; and forward calls.
-
Using Instant Messaging
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the steps to send an IM; including sending a file or image; using emoticons; and configuring the message as high priority.
-
Using Instant Messaging Options
After watching this video; you will be able to use IM options; including adding audio and video; sharing files; and toggling between conversations.
-
Using Sharing Options
After watching this video; you will be able to use the present desktop and present programs sharing options and sharing a PowerPoint presentation.
-
Using the Contact Cards
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to access contact cards and available options.
-
Using the Polling Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to use the polling feature including creating a poll.
-
Using Video with an Instant Message Conversation
"After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to include a video in an instant message conversation and recognize the available options such as ""Stop My Video"" and ""End Video""."
-
Scheduling a Skype Meeting Using Outlook
After watching this video; you will be able to schedule a Skype for Business meeting using Outlook and configure meeting options.
-
Attending a Meeting
After watching this video; you will be able to identify methods to join a scheduled meeting including using the Meetings option in Skype for Business; from an Outlook meeting request and from a meeting reminder.
-
Changing the Picture
After watching this video; you will be able to configure picture options including hiding; showing; editing; or removing a picture.
-
Configuring an Unscheduled Meeting
After watching this video; you will be able to create and configure options for an unscheduled meeting using the Meet Now option.
-
Configuring Audio Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to complete the steps to configure an audio device and configure audio options.
-
Configuring Contact List Options
After watching this video; you will be able to configure how the contact list displays; order options; and which information is displayed.
-
Configuring Conversation View Options
After watching this video; you will be able to configure meeting conversation options including choosing a layout; using full screen; and the pop out and pop in options.
-
Configuring Global Instant Message Options
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to configure IM options including spelling; copying; tabbed conversations; and font options.
-
Configuring Groups
After watching this video; you will be able to create a group; add contacts; and delete an existing group.
-
Configuring the Video Device
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the steps to set up a video device and access and configure advanced settings.
-
Configuring your Presence
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to configure presence options.
-
Discovering the File Transfer Preview
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the File Transfer Preview feature and the available options.
-
Exploring the Location Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and configure the location feature.
-
Initiating a Video Meeting and Managing Participants
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the steps to start a video meeting and manage participants using participants actions options.
-
Making a Video Call and Using Controls
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to start a video call and use video controls.
-
Making Calls
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to make a call and using the call controls.
-
Managing Control Options
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to give control or take away controls from other users while presenting.
-
Managing Download Permissions on Shared Files
After watching this video; you will be able to configure who will have access to downloading files that are shared.
-
Managing Meeting Participants and Recording Options
After watching this video; you will be able to add participants to a meeting; configure participant actions; record a meeting; and manage recordings.
-
Managing Your Profile and Contacts
After watching this video; you will be able to configure your presence and location; add contacts; and create a new group.
-
Scheduling a Meeting in Outlook
After watching this video; you will be able to configure a Skype for Business meeting in Outlook.
-
Sharing Files and Using the Poll Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to share a file in an IM conversation; share the whiteboard; and create a poll.
-
Access 2016 Enhancements
After watching this video; you will be able to list the enhancements of Access 2016 and the benefits the enhancements provide to the user.
-
Create a Database
After watching this video; you will be able to create and modify a database in Access 2016.
-
Create Relationships; Queries; and Reports
After watching this video; you will be able to set a relationship between fields; create a parameter query and report; and import data in Access 2016.
-
Creating and Previewing Reports
After watching this video; you will be able to modify and preview reports in Access 2016.
-
Creating and Running a Select Query in Design View
After watching this video; you will be able to create and run queries in Access 2016.
-
Creating Forms and Selecting Form Views
After watching this video; you will be able to change form views and edit a form using Design view in Access 2016.
-
Creating New or Opening Existing Databases
After watching this video; you will be able to open; create; and save databases in Access 2016.
-
Creating Tables in Datasheet and Design View
After watching this video; you will be able to create a table using Datasheet and Design view in Access 2016.
-
Creating Update; Make Table; and Append Queries
After watching this video; you will be able to create update; make table; and append queries in Access 2016.
-
Database Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between database objects such as tables; queries; forms; reports.
-
Defining Primary Keys and Setting Relationships
After watching this video; you will be able to choose a primary key from table fields and set relationships between tables in Access 2016.
-
Discovering Import and Export Types
After watching this video; you will be able to export and import data in different file formats in Access 2016.
-
Inserting Data as a New Record on a Form
After watching this video; you will be able to modify data in a form in Access 2016.
-
Modifying Table Fields and Data
After watching this video; you will be able to work with table fields and data using the Design and Datasheet view in Access 2016.
-
Navigating and Deleting Form Records
After watching this video; you will be able to modify data on a form and delete form records in Access 2016.
-
Orientation to the Access Environment
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the Access 2016 interface.
-
Overview of Databases
After watching this video; you will be able to describe what a database is and the advantages of using a database for different purposes.
-
Overview of Query Types
After watching this video; you will be able to list the different query types available in Access 2016.
-
Overview of Relationship Types
After watching this video; you will be able to outline the different types of relationships and when they should be applied in Access 2016.
-
Using Total Columns and Query Setup
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Total Column and the Query Setup features in Access 2016.
-
Planning a Database
After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between data and information and structure a database to ensure speed and accuracy when working with data.
-
Rules for Creating Relationships
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the rules for creating relationships between tables in an Access 2016 database.
-
Setting Table Field Properties
After watching this video; you will be able to modify table field properties in Access 2016.
-
Sorting and Filtering Table Data
After watching this video; you will be able to apply sort options and filter types when working with table data in Access 2016.
-
The Access Backstage and Setting Options
After watching this video; you will be able to set various database options using the Access 2016 Backstage.
-
Using Application Parts and the Quick Start Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to apply blank forms and quick start templates to an Access 2016 database.
-
Using Table Views and Applying Data Types
After watching this video; you will be able to switch table views and modify table fields in Access 2016.
-
Creating a Notebook in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new notebook in OneNote 2016.
-
Creating Bullet Lists in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create bullet and numbered lists in OneNote 2016.
-
Customizing OneNote and Adding Notebooks
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the OneNote 2016 ribbon and options; and add a new notebook and section.
-
Exploring the OneNote 2016 Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the main features of the OneNote 2016 interface.
-
Formatting Notes in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to apply text formatting and styles to notes in OneNote 2016.
-
Inserting Links and Time Stamps in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create hyperlinks and add time stamps in OneNote 2016.
-
Inserting Pictures in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert pictures in OneNote 2016.
-
Inserting Screen Clippings in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert images using the screen clipping option in OneNote 2016.
-
Inserting Shapes in Notebooks in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert shapes using the draw tools in OneNote 2016.
-
OneNote 2016 Setup and Usage Tips
After watching this video; you will be able to identify ways to personalize and use OneNote 2016.
-
Opening a Notebook in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to open and switch between notebooks in OneNote 2016.
-
Personalizing the OneNote 2016 Quick Access Toolbar
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the steps required to personalize the Quick Access in OneNote 2016.
-
Personalizing the OneNote 2016 Ribbon
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the steps required to personalize the Ribbon in OneNote 2016.
-
Printing Notebooks in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to print note pages in OneNote 2016.
-
Recording Audio and Video Content in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add audio and video content in notebooks in OneNote 2016.
-
Saving and Backing Up Notes in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure save and backup options in OneNote 2016.
-
Tagging and Searching in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to tag and search for notes in OneNote 2016.
-
Using Special Characters in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add symbols and common equations to notes in OneNote 2016.
-
Working with Notes and Images
After watching this video; you will be able to add a new note and image; change text font; apply a tag; and print a notebook in OneNote 2016.
-
Working with View Settings in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and customize view settings in OneNote 2016.
-
Configuring OneNote 2016 General and Display Options
After watching this video; you will be able to configure general and display options in OneNote 2016.
-
Configuring OneNote 2016 Proofing Options
After watching this video; you will be able to configure how OneNote 2016 will handle text corrections and formatting.
-
Accessing Notebook Information in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access and configure notebook information in OneNote 2016.
-
Adding File Printout and Attachments in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add a file printout and an attachment to a page in OneNote 2016.
-
Adding New Sections and Pages in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add sections and pages in OneNote 2016.
-
Adding Notes in a Notebook in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add new notes in OneNote 2016.
-
Accessing the Address Book in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access and use the address book in Outlook 2016.
-
Marking E-mails with Tags in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure e-mail importance and sensitivity levels in Outlook 2016.
-
Modify a Custom View in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to modify a custom view in Outlook 2016.
-
Modifying the People View in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to modify the people view using available views in Outlook 2016.
-
Navigating and Managing the Calendar
After watching this video; you will be able to access the calendar; create an appointment; create and edit a task; and manage the task view in Outlook 2016.
-
Navigating and Using the Outlook 2016 Calendar
After watching this video; you will be able to access and navigate the calendar in Outlook 2016.
-
Opening and Reading Messages in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to open and read e-mail messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Opening Attachments in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to preview; open; and download attachments in an e-mail in Outlook 2016.
-
Opening; Replying to; Configuring Messages
After watching this video; you will be able to perform the steps to open; reply; and configure e-mail message options in Outlook 2016.
-
Organizing and Customizing Outlook
After watching this video; you will be able to modify the view; customize the ribbon; and search for items in Outlook 2016.
-
Organizing Contacts in Folders in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to organize contacts using folders in Outlook 2016.
-
Organizing Tasks in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to organize tasks in Outlook 2016.
-
Printing a Calendar in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to print a calendar in Outlook 2016.
-
Printing an Address Book in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to print an address book in Outlook 2016.
-
Printing E-mails in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to print e-mail messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Printing Tasks in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to print tasks in Outlook 2016.
-
Replying to E-mail Messages in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to reply to e-mail messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Responding to Meeting Requests in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to respond to a meeting request using the propose new time and e-mail response options in Outlook 2016.
-
Running Rules in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to run a rule in Outlook 2016.
-
Saving an E-mail Message as a Draft
After watching this video; you will be able to save an e-mail message as a draft in Outlook 2016.
-
Saving E-mail Messages in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to save e-mail messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Sharing a Calendar in an E-mail in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to share an Outlook 2016 calendar using an e-mail message.
-
Sharing a Calendar in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to share an Outlook 2016 calendar with other users.
-
Sharing contacts in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to share Outlook 2016 contacts.
-
Sorting and Filtering Inbox Messages in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to sort and filter inbox messages using the view arrangement options and filter e-mail options in Outlook 2016.
-
Track Tasks and Send Status Reports in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to track assigned tasks and send task status reports in Outlook 2016.
-
Tracking Meetings in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the meeting tracking feature in Outlook 2016.
-
Using Advanced Find in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to search for items using the Advanced Find search tool in Outlook 2016 .
-
Using and Configuring Theme Settings in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use and change theme settings in Outlook 2016.
-
Accepting and Declining Meetings in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to accept or decline a meeting request in Outlook 2016.
-
Accessing Advanced Outlook Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access advanced Outlook Options in Backstage view in Outlook 2016.
-
Accessing Mail Outlook Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access mail Outlook Options in Backstage view in Outlook 2016.
-
Accessing Message Info Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access and use message Info options in Backstage view in a new message in Outlook 2016.
-
Accessing People and Tasks Outlook Options
After watching this video; you will be able to access people and tasks Outlook Options in Backstage view in Outlook 2016.
-
Accessing Search Outlook Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access search Outlook Options in Backstage view in Outlook 2016.
-
Adding a Calendar to Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add and view additional calendars in Outlook 2016.
-
Adding and Using Folders in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add and use new folders in Outlook 2016.
-
Adding Graphics to E-mail Messages in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert SmartArt and charts in Outlook 2016 messages.
-
Adding Notes to Contacts in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add notes to contacts in Outlook 2016.
-
Adding Other E-mail Accounts in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add additional e-mail accounts in Outlook 2016.
-
Adjusting E-mail Message Options
After watching this video; you will be able to configure message options when composing a new message and adjust the MailTips options in Outlook 2016.
-
Adjusting Reading and To-do Panes in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to change reading pane views and navigation options and configure the to-do pane options.
-
Adjusting the Folder Pane View in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the folder pane view and navigation options.
-
Applying Bullets and Lists in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a bullet list; numbered list; and multilevel list to message text in Outlook 2016.
-
Applying Color Categories in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to apply color categories to items and edit and create new categories in Outlook 2016.
-
Applying E-mail Message Font Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use various font options with e-mail messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Applying Flags and Using Quick Steps in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to apply flags to items and use quick steps to manage mail in Outlook 2016.
-
Applying Formats; Styles; and Themes
After watching this video; you will be able to configure e-mail message formats; and apply bullets; styles; and message themes in Outlook 2016.
-
Applying Tags to Contacts in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to apply tags to contacts in Outlook 2016.
-
Applying Text Styles to a Message in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to apply text styles to text in an e-mail message in Outlook 2016.
-
Archiving Items in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the archive feature in Outlook 2016.
-
Arranging and Managing E-mail Messages
After watching this video; you will be able to sort; filter; delete; restore; and apply tags in Outlook 2016.
-
Arranging and Viewing Messages by Conversation
After watching this video; you will be able to arrange and view inbox items by conversations in Outlook 2016.
-
Assigning a Task in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to assign an Outlook 2016 task to someone.
-
Attaching a File to a Message in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to attach files to e-mail messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Attaching Outlook Items to Messages in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to attach an Outlook item to an e-mail message in Outlook 2016.
-
Building a New View in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new view in Outlook 2016.
-
Changing the Calendar's Appearance in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to change calendar appearance in Outlook 2016.
-
Changing the View Settings in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to change the current view and recognize the current view options and settings.
-
Composing and Sending New E-mail Messages
After watching this video; you will be able to create and send a new mail message in Outlook 2016.
-
Configuring Automatic Reply Rules
After watching this video; you will be able to configure automatic message reply rules in Outlook 2016.
-
Configuring E-mail Background In Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to change e-mail background in Outlook 2016.
-
Configuring General Outlook 2016 Options
After watching this video; you will be able to configure general Outlook 2016 options located in backstage view.
-
Configuring Message Preview and People Pane Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the message preview and people pane options in Outlook 2016.
-
Configuring Outlook 2016 Calendar Options
After watching this video; you will be able to configure Outlook 2016 options using the options available in backstage view.
-
Configuring Out-of-office Replies in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure out-of-office replies in Outlook 2016.
-
Configuring Voting Buttons in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use and configure voting buttons in Outlook 2016.
-
Create a View with an Existing View in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new view using an existing view in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating a Contact in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add new contacts in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating a Custom Rule in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure a custom rule in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating a Mail Merge in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a mail merge to create a form letter and send to multiple contacts in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating a Meeting from a Message in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a meeting request from an e-mail message in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating a Meeting Request in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a meeting request in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating a Skype Meeting in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new Skype meeting in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating a Task in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new task in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating an Appointment in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create appointments in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating an Event in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create an event in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating and Editing Contact Groups in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new contact group in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating and Managing Contacts
After watching this video; you will be able to access the address book and create and edit contacts and contact groups in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating and Using Search Folders in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create and use search folders in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating Data Files in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create and configure data files in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating E-mail Signatures in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use an e-mail signature in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating Meetings and Notes
After watching this video; you will be able to create and edit a meeting request and create a note in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating New Styles and Styles Sets in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create new styles and styles sets in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating Notes in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create notes in Outlook 2016.
-
Creating Rules in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new rule in Outlook 2016.
-
Customizing and Deleting Rules in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to customize and delete rules in Outlook 2016.
-
Customizing the Outlook 2016 Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to use and configure the minimize folder pane option and the ribbon display options in Outlook 2016.
-
Customizing the Ribbon in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to customize the Outlook 2016 ribbon.
-
Defining New Bullets and Lists in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to define new bullet list; numbered lists; and multilevel list in Outlook 2016.
-
Exploring the Info Backstage Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to view and access the Info section of the Backstage view in Outlook 2016.
-
Exploring the Mail View Window
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and navigate around the mail view in Outlook 2016.
-
Exploring the Open & Export Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access open & export Backstage options in Outlook 2016.
-
Exploring the Quick Access Toolbar and Ribbon
After watching this video; you will be able to Identify and use the Outlook quick access toolbar; and the mail view ribbon tabs.
-
Exploring the Status Bar and Reading Pane Options
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and use the status bar options and configure the reading pane options in Outlook 2016.
-
Exploring Trust Center Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize Trust Center Outlook Options in Backstage view in Outlook 2016.
-
Exporting Contacts as a CSV File in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to export Outlook contacts to a CSV file in Outlook 2016.
-
Forwarding a Task in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to forward a task to another user in Outlook 2016.
-
Using Backstage Save Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use Save As and Save Attachments Backstage options in Outlook 2016.
-
Using Calendar; People; and Task Options
After watching this video; you will be able to share and e-mail an Outlook calendar; create a calendar group; share a contact; and forward a task in Outlook 2016.
-
Using Cleanup Tools in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use the mailbox cleanup and empty deleted items folder features in Outlook 2016.
-
Using Conversation Clean Up Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to clean up conversations in Outlook 2016.
-
Using Different E-mail Formats in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure e-mail formats for e-mail messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Using E-mail Templates to Compose a Message
After watching this video; you will be able to create and use e-mail templates to compose messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Using Insights and Language Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use and configure the insights and language options in Outlook 2016.
-
Using Instant Search in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to search for items in Outlook 2016 using Instant Search.
-
Using Paragraph Settings in Messages in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use paragraph settings in e-mail messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Using the Junk E-mail Filter in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to manage junk e-mails in Outlook 2016.
-
Using the People Pane to Access Mail in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access mail and other items using the people pane in Outlook 2016.
-
Using the Proofing Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the proofing options to ensure e-mail accuracy in Outlook 2016.
-
Using the Tell Me Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and use the new tell me feature in Outlook 2016.
-
Using Tracking Message Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure delivery and read receipt options and flag a message for action in Outlook 2016.
-
Using WordArt in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert WordArt and configure WordArt options in a message in Outlook 2016.
-
Viewing and Customizing Backstage Options
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the Office background and theme; message arrival settings; and task options; and save all attachments in Outlook 2016.
-
Viewing and Using Multiple Calendars in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to work with multiple calendars and groups in Outlook 2016.
-
Viewing Language and Add-in Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access and configure language and add-in Outlook Options in Outlook 2016.
-
Working with Calendar Permissions in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to view and edit calendar share permissions in Outlook 2016.
-
Working with Shared Contacts in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to forward and open shared contacts in Outlook 2016.
-
Delaying Message Sending in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure message delivery options when sending e-mail in Outlook 2016.
-
Delegating Access to an Account in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to delegate access to an Outlook account in Outlook 2016.
-
Deleting and Restoring Messages in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to delete and restore e-mail messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Editing a Contact in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to edit contacts in Outlook 2016.
-
Editing a Task in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to edit an existing task in Outlook 2016.
-
Editing and Cancelling a Meeting in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to edit and cancel a meeting in Outlook 2016.
-
Exploring Office Account Options in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to view and access the Office Account settings in Backstage view in Outlook 2016.
-
Exploring Outlook's Other Available Views
After watching this video; you will be able to identify other available views in Outlook 2016.
-
Inserting Symbols in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert equations; symbols; and horizontal lines in e-mail messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Inserting Tables in E-mail Messages in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert a table in messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Managing Favorites Folders in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add or remove folders in favorites folders list in the navigation pane.
-
Managing Message Automation and Cleanup
After watching this video; you will be able to manage rules and conversations and use cleanup tools in Outlook 2016.
-
Managing Proposed New Meeting Times in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to accept or decline proposed new meeting times in Outlook 2016.
-
Managing Task Views in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to apply and manage task views in Outlook 2016.
-
Forwarding and Sharing Notes in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to forward and share notes in Outlook 2016.
-
Forwarding E-mail Messages in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to forward a message in Outlook 2016.
-
Ignoring Conversations in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to ignore specific conversations in Outlook 2016.
-
Importing Contacts from a CSV File in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to import Outlook contacts from a CSV file in Outlook 2016.
-
Inserting a Text Box in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert a text box and configure text box options in a message in Outlook 2016.
-
Inserting an Object in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert an embed object in a message.
-
Inserting Attachments and Items
After watching this video; you will be able to preview; open; and attach files and pictures; and insert WordArt text in Outlook 2016.
-
Inserting Items and Tracking E-mails
After watching this video; you will be able to insert a table; shape; and hyperlink and configure tracking and voting options in Outlook 2016.
-
Inserting Links and Quick Parts in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert a hyperlink and Quick Parts in Outlook 2016.
-
Inserting Pictures in an E-mail in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert a picture in an e-mail message in Outlook 2016.
-
Inserting Shapes and Screenshots in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert shapes and screenshots in Outlook 2016.
-
Add and Manipulate Slide Content
After watching this video; you will be able to add and adjust a text box; display text in columns; rotate a picture; apply a picture style; and apply picture effects in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adding a Photo Album
After watching this video; you will be able to create; organize; and format a photo album in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adding Action Links
After watching this video; you will be able to set a hyperlink to open or another action to occur when an object on a slide is clicked or moused over in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adding and Editing Chart Elements
After watching this video; you will be able to add elements to a chart and edit and format individual chart elements in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adding and Renaming Sections
After watching this video; you will be able to create and rename sections in a PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
Adding Headers and Footers
After watching this video; you will be able to add and work with headers; footers; and slide numbering in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adding or Deleting a Data Series in a Chart
After watching this video; you will be able to remove a data series and add data from a selected data source to a chart in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adding SmartArt
After watching this video; you will be able to add and modify SmartArt; and use the Text pane to add text to it in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adding Table Shading; Borders; and Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to add shading; borders; and effects to tables in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adding the Mouse/Touch icon to the QAT
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Mouse/Touch icon and add it to the Quick Access Toolbar in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adding Video and Audio Content
After watching this video; you will be able to add audio and video content to a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adding; Removing; and Duplicating Slides
After watching this video; you will be able to add; duplicate; and remove presentation slides in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adjusting Images and Adding Artistic Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to perform image corrections; set image colors and transparency; and apply artistic effects in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adjusting Text Box Margins
After watching this video; you will be able to change the internal margins of text boxes in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adjusting Text Box Shape and Borders
After watching this video; you will be able to modify the borders of text boxes in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Adjusting Video or Audio Playback Options
After watching this video; you will be able to alter video durations; use the trim feature; add bookmarks; and set audio playback options in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Aligning Text and Changing Text Direction in Tables
After watching this video; you will be able to align text and change its direction in table cells in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Aligning Text and Using Columns
After watching this video; you will be able to set text alignment and direction; and convert text to columns; in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Aligning Text Boxes and Applying Columns
After watching this video; you will be able to align text boxes and their contents; wrap text; and convert text to columns in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Aligning; Grouping; and Rotating Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to align; group; and rotate objects in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Applying a Chart Style and Color Scheme
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a predefined color scheme and style to a chart in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Applying and Customizing Animations
After watching this video; you will be able to add built-in animations of different types to a slide and customize the animations in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Applying and Modifying a Theme
After watching this video; you will be able to apply and modify a theme; and hide background graphics; in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Applying and Modifying Transitions
After watching this video; you will be able to add and modify transitions in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Applying Animation Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to customize and apply animation effects in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Choosing Text Box Formats
After watching this video; you will be able to specify formats for a text box and set the default format in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Collapsing and Removing Sections
After watching this video; you will be able to expand; collapse; and remove sections in a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Comparing or Combining Presentations
After watching this video; you will be able to compare or combine different presentation versions and accept or reject changes in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Compressing Images
After watching this video; you will be able to compress images in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Configure Options and File Information
After watching this video; you will be able to configure AutoFormat settings; modify default user information; set a document property; and modify the Quick Access Toolbar in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Configuring AutoRecover Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the automatic recovery of presentations in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Converting a Presentation to a PDF or XPS Document
After watching this video; you will be able to convert a presentation to PDF or XPS format in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Converting Text to SmartArt
After watching this video; you will be able to convert text into SmartArt in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Copying; Moving; and Pasting Text
After watching this video; you will be able to copy and move text; and apply special paste options; in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Create and Save a Presentation
After watching this video; you will be able to create a presentation based on a template; add presentation content; and preview and save a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Creating a Custom Dictionary
After watching this video; you will be able to create a custom dictionary and add entries to it in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Creating a Master Slide
After watching this video; you will be able to insert a master slide and choose elements to place in the master layout in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Applying Artistic and Picture Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to apply predefined artistic effects; picture effects; and picture layouts in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Applying Password Protection
After watching this video; you will be able to add and remove password protection for a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Applying Shape Effects to Text Boxes
After watching this video; you will be able to add shape effects to text boxes in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Applying Slide Layouts
After watching this video; you will be able to apply predefined slide layouts to slides in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Applying SmartArt Styles and Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to apply styles and effects to SmartArt in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Applying Styles and Borders
After watching this video; you will be able to apply styles and add and modify object borders in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Applying Table Styles
After watching this video; you will be able to customize and apply table styles in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Changing SmartArt Color and Style
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a predefined style; color scheme; and layout to SmartArt in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Changing SmartArt Shapes
After watching this video; you will be able to change the layout of shapes in a SmartArt graphic and convert SmartArt to text or shapes in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Changing the Default Number of Recent Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to set the number of recently used documents and the number of unpinned folders to display in Word 2016.
-
Checking Words and Setting Language Options
After watching this video; you will be able to launch the spell checker; use the thesaurus; perform a smart lookup; and set translation and language options in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Choosing Print Layout Options
After watching this video; you will be able to set a print layout and print quality; and choose to print a frame; comments; and inking in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Creating a Presentation Using a Template
After watching this video; you will be able to create a presentation using a template in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Creating and Accessing Themes
After watching this video; you will be able to create and save a custom theme; and add themes to the Quick Access Toolbar; in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Creating and Opening Presentations
After watching this video; you will be able to create and open presentations in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Creating Handouts in Microsoft Word
After watching this video; you will be able to edit slide content in Word and automatically update a PowerPoint 2016 presentation with the changes.
-
Cropping Images and Removing Backgrounds
After watching this video; you will be able to crop images in different ways in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Delivering a Presentation Online
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Office Presentation Service to deliver a PowerPoint 2016 presentation online.
-
Editing and Removing Hyperlinks
After watching this video; you will be able to open; copy; edit; or remove existing hyperlinks in a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Editing and Viewing a Custom Slide Show
After watching this video; you will be able to access and edit a custom slide show and view the changes in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Editing User Information and Default File Location
After watching this video; you will be able to add to or modify default user information and change the default location where files are saved in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Entering Chart Data and Applying a Quick Layout
After watching this video; you will be able to enter chart data and apply a quick layout to a chart in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Erasing or Discarding Annotations
After watching this video; you will be able to remove annotations in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Export a Presentation and Optimize Media
After watching this video; you will be able to save a presentation as a video; export it as a picture presentation; and crop and compress images in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Exporting as a PowerPoint Picture Presentation
After watching this video; you will be able to export a set of slides as a picture presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Exporting as a PowerPoint Show
After watching this video; you will be able to export a presentation so it automatically opens as a slide show in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Exporting as a Template
After watching this video; you will be able to export a presentation as a template in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Exporting in OpenDocument Presentation Format
After watching this video; you will be able to export a presentation in the OpenDocument format in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Exporting Slides as Image Files
After watching this video; you will be able to export slides as image files in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Exporting to Previous PowerPoint Versions
After watching this video; you will be able to export a presentation in an earlier PowerPoint format in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Formatting a Photo Album
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a picture layout; frame shape; and theme to a photo album in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Formatting Inking
After watching this video; you will be able to customize the Ink tools and apply formatting to annotations in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Hiding or Unhiding Slides
After watching this video; you will be able to hide or show slides when delivering a PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
Including a Presentation as an E-mail Attachment
After watching this video; you will be able to attach a presentation to an e-mail from within PowerPoint 2016.
-
Insert and Modify a Table and Chart
After watching this video; you will be able to insert and modify a chart; add and format a table; and merge and split cells in the table in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Inserting an Outline
After watching this video; you will be able to insert an outline from an external source in a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Inserting and Formatting Lists
After watching this video; you will be able to add bulleted and numbered lists to slides in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Inserting Charts and Choosing a Chart Type
After watching this video; you will be able to insert charts of different types in slides in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Inserting Pictures
After watching this video; you will be able to add locally stored or online images to slides and save objects as pictures in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Inserting Screen Recordings and Screenshots
After watching this video; you will be able to insert screen recordings; screenshots; and screen clippings in a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Inserting Text Boxes and Adding Fills
After watching this video; you will be able to insert text boxes and apply fills to them in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Inserting; Editing; and Deleting Comments
After watching this video; you will be able to insert; edit; and delete comments in a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Inspecting Presentations Before Sharing Them
After watching this video; you will be able to check a presentation for hidden properties and personal information before sharing it with others in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Introducing the Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the different parts of the PowerPoint 2016 interface.
-
Linking to a Bookmark
After watching this video; you will be able to create a bookmark in a presentation and insert a hyperlink to the bookmark in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Linking to a New or Existing Presentation
After watching this video; you will be able to insert a hyperlink to a new or existing presentation in a PowerPoint 2016 slide.
-
Linking to a Web Site; Graphic; or Shape
After watching this video; you will be able to insert a hyperlink to a web site; a graphic; or a shape in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Linking Within a Presentation
After watching this video; you will be able to insert a hyperlink to a specific heading within the current presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Manipulating Animations
After watching this video; you will be able to modify animations and and apply text effects to animations in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Marking a Document as Final
After watching this video; you will be able to protect a document from changes by marking it as read only in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Modifying a Master Slide
After watching this video; you will be able to modify and format a master slide in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Modifying the Quick Access Toolbar
After watching this video; you will be able to modify the Quick Access Toolbar in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Modifying Video and Audio Content
After watching this video; you will be able to correct and adjust video content; add video styles and effects; and apply styles to audio content in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Optimizing Compatibility and Compressing Media Files
After watching this video; you will be able to compress media files and optimize them for compatibility with other systems using PowerPoint 2016.
-
Overview of Hyperlink Options
After watching this video; you will be able to choose the type of hyperlink to add to a slide and use the ScreenTip feature in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Overview of New Features
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize key new features in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Packaging a Presentation for CD
After watching this video; you will be able to package a presentation for CD in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Personalizing AutoCorrect Options
After watching this video; you will be able to enable the AutoCorrect feature and configure exceptions in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Playing Narrations and Displaying Media Controls
After watching this video; you will be able to play back audio narrations and laser pointer gestures and show media controls in a slide show in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Positioning Text in Text Boxes
After watching this video; you will be able to adjust text box size and position and automatically fit text to a text box in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Preserving Formatting by Embedding Fonts
After watching this video; you will be able to embed fonts in a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Protect and Share a Presentation
After watching this video; you will be able to inspect a presentation for personal information and hidden properties; apply password protection; and share the presentation using PowerPoint 2016.
-
Publishing Slides to a Slide Library
After watching this video; you will be able to save slides to a shared location; track and review changes; and choose to receive notifications of slide changes via e-mail in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Recording Slide Shows
After watching this video; you will be able to record audio narrations; laser pointer gestures; and slide and animation timings so they can be replayed during a slide show in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Recovering Unsaved Versions
After watching this video; you will be able to recover unsaved versions of presentations in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Rehearsing and Adjusting Slide Timing
After watching this video; you will be able to rehearse a slide show presentation and adjust timings where necessary in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Resizing and Resetting Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to resize objects and reset objects to their original state in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Resizing; Copying; Moving; or Deleting Charts
After watching this video; you will be able to resize; copy; move; or delete charts in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Reusing Saved Slides
After watching this video; you will be able to insert saved slides in a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Saving a Presentation as a Template
After watching this video; you will be able to save a presentation as a template in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Saving a Presentation as a Video
After watching this video; you will be able to save a presentation as a video and adjust its properties in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Set Slide Show Options
After watching this video; you will be able to create a custom slide show; configure the Presenter view; and add and modify a master slide in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Set Up Slides and Work with Text
After watching this video; you will be able to set up a sequence of slides; apply a theme and slide layout; add a header; add and format text; and convert text to SmartArt in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Setting AutoFormat and Math AutoCorrect Options
After watching this video; you will be able to configure AutoFormat and Math AutoCorrect options in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Setting Basic Print Options
After watching this video; you will be able to specify which pages to print and set document properties before printing in Word 2016.
-
Setting Image Size and Quality
After watching this video; you will be able to set default image size and quality settings for presentations in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Setting Presentation Properties
After watching this video; you will be able to set basic and advanced document properties in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Setting Printer Properties and Previewing
After watching this video; you will be able to choose a printer; check printer properties; and preview a presentation before printing it in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Setting Proofing Options
After watching this video; you will be able to set proofing options in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Setting Show and Zoom Options
After watching this video; you will be able to view the ruler; gridlines; guides; and slide notes; and zoom in or out of a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Setting Slide Size and Orientation
After watching this video; you will be able to set slide size and orientation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Setting Spelling and Grammar Options
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the way PowerPoint 2016 checks spelling and grammar.
-
Setting Text Indentation and Spacing
After watching this video; you will be able to indent text and set line and character spacing in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Setting Up a Slide Show
After watching this video; you will be able to set a slide show type and set a slide show to loop continuously in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Setting Up the Presenter View
After watching this video; you will be able to set up the Presenter view in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Sharing a Presentation via an E-mail Link
After watching this video; you will be able to share a presentation via e-mail from a shared location; from within PowerPoint 2016.
-
Sharing a Presentation via OneDrive
After watching this video; you will be able to send a presentation to OneDrive for sharing with others from within PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using the Animation Pane and Setting a Trigger
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Animation pane to configure an animation and set the trigger for an animation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using the Office Mix Add-In
After watching this video; you will be able to install the Office Mix add-in and use it to create interactive videos in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using the Online Store
After watching this video; you will be able to access the Microsoft Store Online; download an app; and use it when creating a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using the Save As Option
After watching this video; you will be able to save a presentation in any supported file type in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using the Selection and Visibility Pane
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Selection and Visibility pane to show; hide; or manipulate objects in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using the Start Inking Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Pen; Highlighter; Lasso; and Convert to Shapes options to annotate a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using the Status Bar and Presentation Views
After watching this video; you will be able to customize the status bar and use different presentation views in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Work with Albums; Sections; and Motion
After watching this video; you will be able to create; format; and modify a photo album; and add an animation and a transition to a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Work with SmartArt and Media Content
After watching this video; you will be able to add and format SmartArt; insert and modify a video; and add a screen recording to a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Working with Files and Compressing Pictures
After watching this video; you will be able to compress pictures; add tags to a presentation; and save a presentation in a required format.
-
Sharing a Presentation via the Cloud
After watching this video; you will be able to share a presentation to the cloud for collaboration purposes from within PowerPoint 2016.
-
Showing All or Specific Slides
After watching this video; you will be able to choose which slides to show when presenting a slide show in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Showing; Copying; and Moving Comments
After watching this video; you will be able to show; copy; and move comments in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Splitting; Merging; and Distributing Table Cells
After watching this video; you will be able to split and merge cells and distribute column widths and row heights equally in tables in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Switching Chart Rows and Columns
After watching this video; you will be able to swap the row and column data in a chart in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Switching Presentations and Arranging Windows
After watching this video; you will be able to switch between presentations and arrange windows in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Use Links; Comments; and Inking
After watching this video; you will be able to insert hyperlinks in a presentation; add a comment; configure an Inking tool; and annotate a slide in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using Adobe PDF for Shared Commenting
After watching this video; you will be able to use an Adobe PDF version of a presentation for shared commenting and incorporate the comments in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using an IM Link to Share a Presentation
After watching this video; you will be able to using instant messaging to share a link to a presentation from within PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using Comments to Collaborate
After watching this video; you will be able to collaborate with others by replying to comments in real time in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using Compatibility Mode
After watching this video; you will be able to work with presentations from a previous version of PowerPoint in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using Gridlines and Saving Tables as Images
After watching this video; you will be able to show or hide table gridlines and save a table as an image in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using Text Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to set font attributes; apply text effects; use WordArt; and use the Format Painter in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using Community Site Tools in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to access and use community site tools and settings in SharePoint 2016.
-
Using Microblogs in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use and create blog posts in SharePoint 2016.
-
Using Newsfeeds in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access and initiate newsfeed conversations in SharePoint 2016.
-
Using Tags and Notes in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add tags and notes to lists and libraries in SharePoint 2016.
-
Using the Global Navigation Bar in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the global navigation bar to access SharePoint 2016 features.
-
Using the Quick Launch Pane in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and use the quick launch links in SharePoint 2016.
-
Using the Search Field to Search In SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to use the search field to search in SharePoint 2016.
-
Using the Sync Feature in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the sync feature to work on documents offline in SharePoint 2016.
-
Using Windows Explorer to Search in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to perform searches using Windows Explorer in SharePoint 2016.
-
Work with a SharePoint Site
After watching this video; you will be able to rename and remove links in quick launch; change a team site title; and create a new list and document library in SharePoint 2016.
-
Working with Libraries and Lists
After watching this video; you will be able to upload; open; and check-out documents; and display and sort list columns.
-
Working with My Site Elements
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to edit My Site profile; upload a document to OneDrive; delete a blog post; and like newsfeeds in SharePoint 2016.
-
Working with OneDrive in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access and use OneDrive in SharePoint 2016 My Site.
-
Working with Sites in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access and work with the Sites feature in SharePoint 2016.
-
Working with Version History in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to view and manage document and list item version history in SharePoint 2016.
-
Adding and Configuring Web Parts in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add web parts in site pages in SharePoint 2016.
-
Adding Media and Links in Pages in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add pictures and links to a site page in SharePoint 2016.
-
Applying a Style to a Site in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a site style to a site in SharePoint 2016.
-
Changing the Look and Feel of a SharePoint 2016 Site
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the site title; description; and logo in SharePoint 2016.
-
Checking Documents In and Out in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to check documents in and out of a SharePoint 2016 document library.
-
Configuring Alerts in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create alerts in SharePoint 2016.
-
Configuring Library; Lists; and Pages
After watching this video; you will be able to follow and share documents; and create and customize a new site page in SharePoint 2016.
-
Following Documents in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to follow documents in SharePoint 2016.
-
Formatting a Site Page in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to format site pages in SharePoint 2016.
-
Interacting with Newsfeed Post in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to interact with newsfeeds in SharePoint 2016.
-
Joining a Community Site in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to join SharePoint 2016 communities.
-
Managing Blog Posts in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to view and manage published blog posts in SharePoint 2016.
-
Modifying Content Type Settings in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to view and modify content type settings in SharePoint 2016.
-
Opening and Deleting Documents in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to open and delete documents in a SharePoint 2016 document library.
-
Personalizing Your Blog in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to customize the blog page in SharePoint 2016.
-
Positioning and Sorting Columns in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to position and sort columns in SharePoint 2016 sites.
-
Searching for People in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to search for people in SharePoint 2016.
-
Set Search Alerts and Preferences in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure search alerts and people search preferences in SharePoint 2016.
-
Sharing Documents in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to share documents in SharePoint 2016.
-
Tagging; Discussing; and Searching
After watching this video; you will be able to create tags and notes; reply to community discussions; and use the search feature in SharePoint 2016.
-
Uploading Documents in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to upload a document in a SharePoint 2016 document library.
-
Using Advanced Search in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to use and perform advanced searches in SharePoint 2016.
-
Using Blog Post Categories in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use and manage blog post categories in SharePoint 2016.
-
Creating and Editing Documents in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create and edit documents in SharePoint 2016.
-
Creating Document Sets in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a document set in SharePoint 2016.
-
Creating Library or List Folders in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create new folders in libraries and lists in SharePoint 2016.
-
Creating New Columns in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create new columns in lists and libraries in SharePoint 2016 sites.
-
Customizing the My Site Page in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to make customizations to SharePoint 2016 My Site.
-
Customizing Web Parts in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to edit web parts in SharePoint 2016.
-
Deleting and Restoring in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to delete and restore documents and items in SharePoint 2016 sites.
-
Displaying and Hiding Columns in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to display and hide columns in a List or Library in SharePoint 2016 sites.
-
Editing and Deleting Tags in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to edit and delete tags in SharePoint 2016.
-
Editing Links in SharePoint 2016 Sites
After watching this video; you will be able to add and remove links from the quick launch and top link bar in SharePoint 2016.
-
Editing Newsfeed Settings in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and customize newsfeed settings in SharePoint 2016.
-
Editing the Home Page in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the edit option to edit the SharePoint 2016 home page.
-
Editing the My Site Profile in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to edit the My Site profile in SharePoint 2016.
-
Engaging in Community Discussions in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to post and reply to community discussions in SharePoint 2016.
-
Adding a Calendar to a Team Site in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add the calendar app to a SharePoint site in SharePoint 2016.
-
Adding and Editing Events in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add and edit calendar events in SharePoint 2016.
-
Adding Content Types to Libraries in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add new content types to libraries in SharePoint 2016.
-
Adding Workflows in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add new workflows in SharePoint 2016.
-
Changing the Content Type Order in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to change the new button order and default content type options in SharePoint 2016.
-
Editing Workflows in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to edit workflows in SharePoint 2016.
-
Launching Office Applications from SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to launch Office applications from SharePoint 2016 to open and create files in SharePoint 2016.
-
Using the Calendar App and Office Web Apps
After watching this video; you will be able to add and edit a calendar and preview; open; and edit a document using Office web apps in SharePoint 2016.
-
Using the Office Web Apps in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Office web apps preview pane and edit documents using the Office web app in SharePoint 2016.
-
Accessing and Navigating My Site in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access and navigate SharePoint 2016 My Site.
-
Accessing Tag Profiles in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to access and use tab profile features in SharePoint 2016.
-
Adding a Web Part in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add a web part to a SharePoint 2016 site home page.
-
Creating a List in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create lists in SharePoint 2016.
-
Creating a New Page in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create new site pages in SharePoint 2016.
-
Creating a New View in a Library in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create new views in a library in SharePoint 2016.
-
Creating a New View in a List in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create new views in a list in SharePoint 2016.
-
Creating and Editing a List Item in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create and edit list items in SharePoint 2016.
-
Creating a Document Library in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create document libraries in SharePoint 2016.
-
Add and Modify an Organizational Chart in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add and modify an organizational chart using an organizational chart template in Visio 2016.
-
Adding a Hyperlink to Shapes in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add a hyperlink to a Visio 2016 shape.
-
Adding and Editing Data Field Values in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add and edit values in data fields in Visio 2016.
-
Adding Comments in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add comments to shapes in Visio 2016.
-
Adding Data to Shapes in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add data fields to shapes in Visio 2016.
-
Adding Shapes to Diagrams in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add a shape to a diagram using basic drawing tools in Vision 2016.
-
Adding Text to Diagrams in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add text to a diagram in Visio 2016.
-
Applying Backgrounds to Pages in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a background; borders; and titles to pages in Visio 2016.
-
Applying Themes and Theme Variants in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to apply different themes and configure theme variants in Visio 2016.
-
Arranging Shapes and Objects in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to arrange shapes using alignment; positioning; and grouping options in Visio 2016.
-
Configuring and Using Track Markup in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to enable and use the Track Markup feature in Visio 2016.
-
Configuring Page Setup Options in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure page setup options in Visio 2016.
-
Connecting Shapes in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to connect shapes in a Visio 2016 diagram.
-
Creating a Basic Office Layout in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the office layout template to create an office layout in Visio 2016.
-
Creating a Calendar in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a calendar using the calendar template in Visio 2016.
-
Creating a Custom Stencil in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create and save a custom stencil in Visio 2016.
-
Creating a New Diagram Template in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new custom template in Visio 2016.
-
Creating New Diagrams with Templates in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create new diagrams using templates in Visio 2016.
-
Creating Shape Data Sets in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create a reusable set of data fields in Visio 2016.
-
Customizing Calendar Content in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to add or modify calendar content in Visio 2016.
-
Customizing Shape Connectors in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to customize the appearance of connectors in Visio 2016.
-
Enabling Task Panes and Other Tools in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to enable task panes and configure ruler; grid; and visual aid options in Visio 2016.
-
Exploring and Using the Shapes Window in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and use the shapes window in Visio 2016.
-
Formatting Text in a Visio 2016 Diagram
After watching this video; you will be able to format text in a Visio 2016 diagram.
-
Inserting and Managing Pages in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert and manage pages in Visio 2016.
-
Inserting Pictures and Charts in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert pictures and charts in a Visio 2016 diagram.
-
Inserting Symbols in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to insert special characters in Visio 2016.
-
Modifying an Office Layout in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use office stencils; shapes; and guides to modify an office layout in Visio 2016.
-
Modifying Shapes in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to modify shapes in a diagram in Visio 2016.
-
Navigating around the Visio 2016 Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate around and locate common options and features in Vision 2016 interface.
-
Printing Visio 2016 Diagrams
After watching this video; you will be able to print diagrams in Visio 2016.
-
Saving a Visio 2016 Diagram
After watching this video; you will be able to save a Visio 2016 diagram.
-
Sharing Diagrams in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to share diagrams using the share options in Visio 2016.
-
Using Insert and Save Options
After watching this video; you will be able to insert a picture; hyperlink; and comment; use the ink tool; and save diagrams in Visio 2016.
-
Using Stencils to Add Shapes in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use stencils to add shapes to diagrams in Visio 2016.
-
Using Templates and Customizing Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create new diagrams using a template; insert; rename; and delete pages; and apply a theme to a drawing in Visio 2016.
-
Using the Copy and Paste Options in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to copy and paste text and shapes in a Visio 2016 diagram.
-
Using the Export Option in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the export feature in Visio 2016.
-
Using the Find and Replace in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the find and replace text options in Visio 2016.
-
Using the Ink Tool in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the ink tool to create hands-free shapes or notes in Visio 2016.
-
Using the Organization Chart Wizard in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to create an organizational chart using an existing Excel data source in Visio 2016.
-
Working with Diagrams and Shapes
After watching this video; you will be able to add and edit data fields and values; and design organizational chart; office layout; and calendar diagrams in Visio 2016.
-
Working with Shapes and Text
After watching this video; you will be able to add shapes using basic drawing tools and stencils and add and format text shapes in Visio 2016.
-
Accessing Form Controls on the Developer Tab
After watching this video; you will be able to add the Developer tab to the ribbon and use the form controls it provides in Word 2016.
-
Adding a Bibliography to a Document
After watching this video; you will be able to use citations to add a bibliography to a Word 2016 document.
-
Adding a Blank Page or Forced Break
After watching this video; you will be able to add a blank page to a document and force a page break in Word 2016.
-
Adding a Different First Page Header or Footer
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a different header or footer to the first page of a document in Word 2016.
-
Adding a Footer and Cover Page
After watching this video; you will be able to add a footer to all the pages in document; start numbering from the second page; and insert a cover page in Word 2016.
-
Adding a Glow; Soft Edges; and 3-D Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a glow; soft edges; and 3-D formatting or rotation to an object in Word 2016.
-
Adjusting Line Spacing
After watching this video; you will be able to adjust line spacing in a Word 2016 document.
-
Adjusting Page Borders
After watching this video; you will be able to adjust the page border in a Word 2016 document.
-
Aligning Text
After watching this video; you will be able to justify and align text in a Word 2016 document.
-
Aligning Text Vertically and Horizontally
After watching this video; you will be able to align text vertically or horizontally in table cells in Word 2016.
-
Allowing Table Rows to Break Across Pages
After watching this video; you will be able to break table rows across pages in a Word 2016 document.
-
Apply Paragraph and Text Formatting
After watching this video; you will be able to change the formatting; style; and spacing of text in a Word 2016 document.
-
Apply Shading to Cells
After watching this video; you will be able to apply shading to table cells in Word 2016.
-
Applying and Creating Styles
After watching this video; you will be able to apply built-in and custom styles to text in Word 2016.
-
Applying Number Formats and Pasting Formulas
After watching this video; you will be able to apply number formatting to formulas and paste formulas in tables in Word 2016.
-
Applying Page Backgrounds and Creating Watermarks
After watching this video; you will be able to add a page background; apply transparency settings; and create a watermark in Word 2016.
-
Applying Picture Styles; Effects; and Layouts
After watching this video; you will be able to apply picture styles; effects; and layouts to pictures in Word 2016.
-
Applying Predefined and Custom Themes
After watching this video; you will be able to apply predefined and custom themes to documents in Word 2016.
-
Applying Styles to Text
After watching this video; you will be able to apply built-in styles to text in a Word 2016 document.
-
Adding a Header or Footer to a Document
After watching this video; you will be able to add a header or footer to a document in Word 2016.
-
Adding a Page Border
After watching this video; you will be able to add a page border to one or all pages in a Word 2016 document.
-
Adding Citations to a Document
After watching this video; you will be able to insert citations or citation placeholders in Word 2016 documents.
-
Adding Document Properties
After watching this video; you will be able to add and edit document properties in Word 2016.
-
Adding Endnotes and Footnotes
After watching this video; you will be able to add and modify endnotes or footnotes in Word 2016.
-
Adding Headers and Footers to Document Sections
After watching this video; you will be able to apply different headers or footers to sections within a document in Word 2016.
-
Adding References and Configuring Proofing
After watching this video; you will be able to insert a hyperlink to a specific heading in a document; create a table of contents; and configure an exception for the AutoFormat feature in Word 2016.
-
Adding Screenshots or Screen Clippings
After watching this video; you will be able to add available screenshots or screen clippings you create to documents in Word 2016.
-
Adding Shadows and Reflections
After watching this video; you will be able to add shadows and reflections to pictures in Word 2016.
-
Adding Shapes and SmartArt
After watching this video; you will be able to add shapes and SmartArt to a document and use the Lock Drawing mode in Word 2016.
-
Adding Text Boxes; WordArt; and Charts
After watching this video; you will be able to insert text boxes; WordArt; and charts in Word 2016 documents.
-
Adding Text Effects and Changing Case
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a range of effects to text and change its case in Word 2016.
-
Adding Text to a Shape and Using the Drawing Canvas
After watching this video; you will be able to add text to an existing shape and use the drawing canvas to control drawing elements in Word 2016.
-
Adjusting Character Spacing
After watching this video; you will be able to alter the spacing between characters in a Word 2016 document.
-
Arranging and Repositioning Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to rearrange objects in Word 2016.
-
Change Defaults and Document Views
After watching this video; you will be able to change a range of default settings and use different document views in Word 2016.
-
Changing a Shape and Adding Shape Styles and Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to change an existing shape and apply shape styles and effects in Word 2016.
-
Changing Chart Layout; Style; and Elements
After watching this video; you will be able to apply chart layouts and styles; and add additional chart elements; in Word 2016.
-
Changing Color Saturation; Tone; and Color
After watching this video; you will be able to apply color saturation; tone; and recolor options to a picture in Word 2016.
-
Changing Default Measurement Units
After watching this video; you will be able to change the default unit of measurement used in Word 2016.
-
Changing Header and Footer Margins
After watching this video; you will be able to adjust header and footer margins in Word 2016.
-
Changing SmartArt Layout and Style and Adding Text
After watching this video; you will be able to apply SmartArt layouts and styles; add new shapes; and use the Text Pane for SmartArt in Word 2016.
-
Changing Text Direction
After watching this video; you will be able to change the direction of text in table cells in Word 2016.
-
Changing the Default Document Location
After watching this video; you will be able to change the default location for saving documents in Word 2016.
-
Checking Spelling and Grammar
After watching this video; you will be able to check document spelling and grammar in Word 2016.
-
Choosing and Customizing a Number Format for Lists
After watching this video; you will be able to create numbered lists; using predefined or custom formats; in Word 2016.
-
Choosing Font and Font Size Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to apply fonts and different font sizes to text; and set a default font; in Word 2016.
-
Choosing Grammar and Style Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to configure options for checking spelling and grammar in Word 2016.
-
Clearing Formatting from a Document
After watching this video; you will be able to remove all formatting from a document in Word 2016.
-
Compare; Review; and Protect Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to use synchronous scrolling when viewing documents side by side; add a comment; display document contributors; and apply editing restrictions to all but a specific paragraph of a document in Word 2016.
-
Comparing and Combining Document Revisions
After watching this video; you will be able to compare different versions of a document and combine revisions from multiple authors in Word 2016.
-
Compressing and Cropping Pictures
After watching this video; you will be able to compress and crop pictures in Word 2016.
-
Configuring the AutoRecover Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to access and adjust the default AutoRecover settings in Word 2016.
-
Constructing a Form and Adding Controls
After watching this video; you will be able to construct a basic form and add and modify legacy form controls in Word 2016.
-
Converting Tables and Text
After watching this video; you will be able to convert existing text to a table or convert a table to text in Word 2016.
-
Converting Text into Columns
After watching this video; you will be able to add and remove column formatting; and add column breaks; in Word 2016.
-
Create and Format a Table
After watching this video; you will be able to create; modify; and format a table; display gridlines; and format the table's borders in Word 2016.
-
Create; Check; and Print a Document
After watching this video; you will be able to create a basic Word 2016 document; check spelling and grammar; and apply print settings in Word 2016.
-
Creating a Built-In or Custom Table of Contents
After watching this video; you will be able to create; modify; and update a table of contents for a document in Word 2016.
-
Creating a Drop Cap
After watching this video; you will be able to create a dropped cap and configure its settings in a Word 2016 document.
-
Creating a Master Document and Subdocuments
After watching this video; you will be able to create and work with a master document and subdocuments in Word 2016; and understand the document levels in Outline view.
-
Creating a Multilevel List
After watching this video; you will be able to create and modify multilevel lists in Word 2016.
-
Creating an Aligned Tabbed List
After watching this video; you will be able to create a tabbed list using different tabs and set tab positions and leaders in Word 2016.
-
Creating and Adjusting a Tabbed List
After watching this video; you will be able to create tabbed lists in Word 2016 and choose whether to show document markers and hidden elements.
-
Creating and Opening Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to create new documents; open existing documents; and navigate between documents in Word 2016.
-
Creating or Removing Table Borders
After watching this video; you will be able to create or remove table borders in Word 2016.
-
Creating Styles
After watching this video; you will be able to create and apply a new text style in Word 2016.
-
Customize a Table
After watching this video; you will be able to convert text to a table; use a formula to perform a calculation; and perform a basic table sort in Word 2016.
-
Customizing the Recent Documents List
After watching this video; you will be able to customize the list of recently used documents in Word 2016.
-
Deleting or Recovering Draft Document Versions
After watching this video; you will be able to delete and recover draft versions of documents in Word 2016.
-
Deleting or Replacing Tabs in an Aligned List
After watching this video; you will be able to remove; replace; or reset tabs in Word 2016.
-
Distributing Rows and Columns
After watching this video; you will be able to distribute column widths and row heights equally in a table in Word 2016.
-
Editing User Information
After watching this video; you will be able to locate and edit user information; and understand the effects of doing this; in Word 2016.
-
Entering Text in a Table
After watching this video; you will be able to add content to tables in Word 2016.
-
Finding and Highlighting Text
After watching this video; you will be able to highlight all instances of specific text in a Word 2016 document.
-
Format a Picture and Modify a Chart
After watching this video; you will be able to apply transparency and a picture style and layout to a picture; and add an element to a chart in Word 2016.
-
Importing Text Using the Text from File Option
After watching this video; you will be able to import external objects and text using the Text from File option in Word 2016.
-
Indenting Paragraphs
After watching this video; you will be able to indent paragraphs in different ways in Word 2016.
-
Insert and Edit Graphics and Illustrations
After watching this video; you will be able to add a screen clipping and text boxes to a Word 2016 document; paste a link; and crop and compress a picture in Word 2016.
-
Inserting a Cover Page
After watching this video; you will be able to insert a cover page in a Word 2016 document.
-
Inserting a Cover Page Quick Part
After watching this video; you will be able to access the Quick Parts Gallery and save a selection to the AutoText quick part in Word 2016.
-
Inserting an Alignment Tab in a Header or Footer
After watching this video; you will be able to include an alignment tab in a header or footer in Word 2016.
-
Inserting Elements into a Header or Footer
After watching this video; you will be able to insert page numbers; document properties; images; or quick parts in a header or footer in Word 2016.
-
Inserting Hyperlinks
After watching this video; you will be able to insert hyperlinks to web sites; documents; and bookmarks in Word 2016 documents.
-
Inserting Section Breaks
After watching this video; you will be able to insert new page and continuous section breaks in Word 2016.
-
Inserting Symbols and Special Characters
After watching this video; you will be able to add symbols and special characters to text in Word 2016.
-
Inserting the Date and Time
After watching this video; you will be able to insert the date and time in a Word 2016 document.
-
Inserting; Showing or Hiding; and Deleting Comments
After watching this video; you will be able to add; modify; show or hide; and remove comments in Word 2016.
-
Introducing the Navigation Pane
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Navigation pane to create interactive outlines and to navigate to specific content in a Word 2016 document.
-
Introduction to Printing
After watching this video; you will be able to choose basic print settings in Word 2016.
-
Modifying Existing Styles
After watching this video; you will be able to modify an existing text style and apply character and paragraph style options in Word 2016.
-
Navigate a Document and Create Lists
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate to specific content; find and replace fonts; and create tabbed and multilevel lists in Word 2016.
-
Overview of New Interface Features
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize new features of the Word 2016 interface.
-
Page Alignment Options
After watching this video; you will be able to set the vertical alignment of a page in Word 2016 and understand how this affects orientation and section breaks.
-
Page Numbering Options
After watching this video; you will be able to choose and apply page numbering options in Word 2016.
-
Password Protecting Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to add and remove password protection for a document in Word 2016.
-
Performing a Mail Merge Manually
After watching this video; you will be able to manually perform a mail merge in Word 2016.
-
Performing a Mail Merge using a Wizard
After watching this video; you will be able to use a wizard to perform a mail merge in Word 2016.
-
Performing Basic and Advanced Table Sorting
After watching this video; you will be able to perform basic and more advanced sorting of tables in Word 2016.
-
Performing Calculations in a Table
After watching this video; you will be able to use formulas calculate values in tables in Word 2016.
-
Presenting a Document Online
After watching this video; you will be able to set up a document for viewing in a web browser from within Word 2016.
-
Print Orientation; Collation; and Duplex Options
After watching this video; you will be able to set document orientation and collation and duplex options before printing a document in Word 2016.
-
Printing Background Colors and Images
After watching this video; you will be able to choose settings for printing background colors and images in Word 2016.
-
Recording and Assigning Macros
After watching this video; you will be able to record a macro and assign it to a command button in Word 2016.
-
Replacing Font Attributes Using Find and Replace
After watching this video; you will be able to replace font attributes throughout a document in Word 2016.
-
Resizing and Moving Rows and Columns
After watching this video; you will be able to set row and column sizes and copy or move rows and columns in tables in Word 2016.
-
Reviewing Document Changes and Listing Contributors
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Reviewing pane and list different contributors in Word 2016.
-
Saving a Document as a Template or Web Page
After watching this video; you will be able to save a document as a template or a web page in Word 2016.
-
Switching Between Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to use the ribbon to switch between different documents in Word 2016.
-
Switching; Promoting; and Demoting SmartArt Shapes
After watching this video; you will be able to modify the layout of shapes in SmartArt in Word 2016.
-
Tracking Document Changes
After watching this video; you will be able to enable or disable the tracking of changes and accept or reject changes in a document in Word 2016.
-
Using a Predefined or Custom Bullet for Lists
After watching this video; you will be able to create bulleted lists using predefined or custom symbols and layout in Word 2016.
-
Saving a Document to OneDrive for Sharing
After watching this video; you will be able to share a document with others via OneDrive from within Word 2016.
-
Scaling a Document for Printing
After watching this video; you will be able to set the number of pages of a document to print per sheet of paper in Word 2016.
-
Selecting and Editing Chart Data
After watching this video; you will be able to switch the layout of chart rows and columns; and select and edit chart data; in Word 2016.
-
Selecting Elements in a Table
After watching this video; you will be able to select tables and table elements in Word 2016.
-
Selecting; Rearranging; and Duplicating Text
After watching this video; you will be able to select text in different ways and cut; copy; and paste text in Word 2016 documents.
-
Sending a Document as a Blog Post
After watching this video; you will be able to set up and register a blog account and post a document directly to the blog from within Word 2016.
-
Sending a Link using IM
After watching this video; you will be able to using instant messaging to send a document from within Word 2016.
-
Setting a Table Header Row to Repeat on each Page
After watching this video; you will be able to set a table header row to repeat on each page of a document in Word 2016.
-
Setting AutoCorrect Options and Exceptions
After watching this video; you will be able to enable automatic correction of spelling and grammar and configure exceptions in Word 2016.
-
Setting Editing Restrictions
After watching this video; you will be able to allow only certain types of formatting and editing in a Word 2016 document.
-
Setting Image Brightness; Contrast; and Sharpness
After watching this video; you will be able to change image brightness and contrast; and soften or sharpen images; in Word 2016.
-
Setting Page Margins and Gutter Position
After watching this video; you will be able to apply predefined or custom margins and set gutter options in Word 2016.
-
Setting Paper Size and Margins for Printing
After watching this video; you will be able to set the paper size and adjust document margins for printing in Word 2016.
-
Setting Paragraph Format Options
After watching this video; you will be able to select the correct pagination option when working with paragraphs in a Word 2016 document.
-
Setting Paragraph Spacing Options
After watching this video; you will be able to adjust paragraph spacing in a Word 2016 document.
-
Setting Transparency and Removing a Background
After watching this video; you will be able to remove the background of an image in Word 2016.
-
Share a Document in Word 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to share a document as a blog post and present a document online via a link in Word 2016.
-
Sharing Documents on the Cloud
After watching this video; you will be able to allow collaboration on a document by sharing it to the cloud from within Word 2016.
-
Sharing Documents via PDF and XPS
After watching this video; you will be able to share Word 2016 documents in the PDF and XPS formats.
-
Sharing via E-mail
After watching this video; you will be able to share a document using e-mail from within Word 2016.
-
Splitting a Table
After watching this video; you will be able to split a table that spans more than one page in Word 2016.
-
Splitting and Merging Table Cells
After watching this video; you will be able to split and merge table cells in Word 2016.
-
Using Advanced Tracking Options
After watching this video; you will be able to set a password to restrict others from disabling tracking and use advanced tracking options in Word 2016.
-
Using AutoFit Options for Tables
After watching this video; you will be able to adjust column and row sizes automatically in tables in Word 2016.
-
Using AutoFormat and Replace Maths as you Type
After watching this video; you will be able to set AutoFormat options and use the math AutoCorrect option to replace text as you type in Word 2016.
-
Using Different Document Views
After watching this video; you will be able to use different document views in Word 2016.
-
Using Find and Replace
After watching this video; you will be able to find and replace specific content in a Word 2016 document.
-
Using Table AutoFit Options
After watching this video; you will be able to use table AutoFit options to resize table rows or columns automatically in Word 2016.
-
Using Tables to Organize Page Content
After watching this video; you will be able to position tables within other elements on a page in Word 2016.
-
Using Templates to Create New Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to create documents based on templates in Word 2016.
-
Using the "Find In" Option to Find Text
After watching this video; you will be able to search an entire Word 2016 document or specific parts of it for particular text.
-
Using the Border Painter and Border Sampler
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Border Painter and Border Sampler tools to format table borders in Word 2016.
-
Using the Format Painter
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Format Painter to copy existing formatting to other text in a Word 2016 document.
-
Using the Go To Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Go To feature to move to specific parts of a Word 2016 document.
-
Using the Paste Special and Paste Link Functions
After watching this video; you will be able to use special paste options to paste a copied object as a picture or to create a link in Word 2016.
-
Using the Word 2016 Search Facility
After watching this video; you will be able to use the internal search facility in Word 2016 to search for topics and images.
-
Using Zoom Options
After watching this video; you will be able to use various methods to zoom in or out of a Word 2016 document.
-
Viewing Documents Side by Side
After watching this video; you will be able to arrange documents side by side and apply synchronous scrolling in Word 2016.
-
Viewing Table Gridlines
After watching this video; you will be able to display table gridlines and understand their uses in Word 2016.
-
Working in Protected Mode
After watching this video; you will be able to work with a document that opens in Protected mode in Word 2016.
-
Working with the Quick Parts Gallery
After watching this video; you will be able to add items to the Quick Parts Gallery and modify them in Word 2016.
-
Wrapping Text Around Shapes or Pictures
After watching this video; you will be able to control how text wraps around shapes and pictures in Word 2016.
-
Tracking Changes in a Workbook
After watching this video; you will be able to manage changes in a Microsoft Excel 2016 Workbook.
-
Using Advanced Functions
After watching this video; you will be able to perform advanced queries in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Using Auto Fill to Copy Data
After watching this video; you will be able to copy data using Auto Fill in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Using Cell Styles
After watching this video; you will be able to apply cell styles to your data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Using Flash Fill with Data Lists
After watching this video; you will be able to complete data lists using Flash Fill in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Using Macros
After watching this video; you will be able to configure macro security settings in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Using Named Cell Ranges in Formulas
After watching this video; you will be able to use named cell ranges in formulas in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Using Shapes
After watching this video; you will be able to add shapes and lines to a worksheet in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Using Subtotals
After watching this video; you will be able to calculate subtotals and grand totals in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Using Tables
After watching this video; you will be able to create a table in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Using the Spellchecker
After watching this video; you will be able to check your documents with the spellchecker.
-
Using Trendlines
After watching this video; you will be able to add trendlines to a chart in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP
After watching this video; you will be able to look up data using the VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP functions in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
File Sharing
After watching this video; you will be able to share and publish your work in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Filter PivotTable Data
After watching this video; you will be able to filter PivotTable data with slicers in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Format Data in
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a cell style; formatting numbers and text; and modify the positioning of data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Format Numerical Data
After watching this video; you will be able to apply formatting to different types of numerical data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Format Text Boxes
After watching this video; you will be able to modify the look of a text box in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Formula Operators
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize Microsoft Excel 2016 formula operators.
-
Personalizing Display Options
After watching this video; you will be able to modify default display options in Excel 2016.
-
Printing in Excel 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to configure Excel 2016 worksheets and workbooks for printing.
-
Protecting Your Workbook
After watching this video; you will be able to apply different levels of protection to your Microsoft Excel 2016 Workbook.
-
Quick Conditional Formatting
After watching this video; you will be able to apply conditional formatting using Quick Analysis in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Recording Macros
After watching this video; you will be able to create a macro in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Refining Filters
After watching this video; you will be able to refine data filters in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Review and Share your Workbooks
After watching this video; you will be able to review and share existing Workbooks.
-
Running Macros
After watching this video; you will be able to run a macro in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Running Macros From the Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to run a custom macro from an interface element in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Saving a Workbook in Excel 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to save a workbook in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Saving to External Locations
After watching this video; you will be able to save a workbook to an online location in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
SmartArt
After watching this video; you will be able to insert SmartArt into a Microsoft Excel 2016 worksheet.
-
Styling PivotTables
After watching this video; you will be able to alter the look of your PivotTable in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
SUMIFS; AVERAGEIFS; and COUNTIFS
After watching this video; you will be able to use SUMIFS; AVERAGEIFS; and COUNTIFS in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Text; Shapes; and SmartArt
After watching this video; you will be able to add text; shapes; and SmartArt to a Microsoft Excel 2016 worksheet.
-
The DATE Function
After watching this video; you will be able to use the DATE function in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
The Excel 2016 Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the different parts of the Microsoft Excel 2016 interface.
-
The IF Function
After watching this video; you will be able to apply conditional logic using the IF function in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
The IFERROR Function
After watching this video; you will be able to handle errors using IFERROR in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
The LOOKUP Function
After watching this video; you will be able to look up data using the LOOKUP function in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
The NETWORKDAYS Function
After watching this video; you will be able to use the NETWORKDAYS function in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
The SUM Function
After watching this video; you will be able to use the SUM function to calculate totals in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Adding Basic Data Validation
After watching this video; you will be able to implement basic data validation in a Microsoft Excel 2016 worksheet.
-
Adding Header and Footer Information
After watching this video; you will be able to add headers and footers to a Microsoft Excel 2016 workbook.
-
Adding Visual Effects to a Worksheet
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a theme and a watermark to a Microsoft Excel 2016 worksheet.
-
Adjust the Appearance of a Chart
After watching this video; you will be able to style a chart with a quick style in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Advanced Sparklines
After watching this video; you will be able to create custom sparklines in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Aligning Cell Data
After watching this video; you will be able to alter the alignment; indentation; and orientation of cell data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Applying Functions within Formulas
After watching this video; you will be able to use the IF function with other functions in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Applying Text Formatting
After watching this video; you will be able to format text data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
AutoSum Functions
After watching this video; you will be able to calculate the AVERAGE; COUNT; MIN; and MAX of a column or row of numbers in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Basic Formulas
After watching this video; you will be able to create basic number and text formulas in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Basic Logical Functions
After watching this video; you will be able to use the AND; OR; and NOT functions in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Basic Sorting
After watching this video; you will be able to sort data alphabetically and numerically in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Basic Sparklines
After watching this video; you will be able to create and edit basic sparklines in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Borders and Fills
After watching this video; you will be able to apply borders and fills to cells in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Chart Templates
After watching this video; you will be able to create a chart template from an existing chart in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Charts and Tables
After watching this video; you will be able to add tables and charts to a worksheet in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Co-authoring
After watching this video; you will be able to work with others on the same document in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Color Sorting
After watching this video; you will be able to sort data by cell or font color in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Columns and Rows
After watching this video; you will be able to insert and resize columns and rows in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Complete a Series Using Auto Fill
After watching this video; you will be able to fill a series using Auto Fill in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Configuring Window Views
After watching this video; you will be able to select window view options in Excel 2016.
-
Configuring Workbook Views
After watching this video; you will be able to select workbook view options in Excel 2016.
-
Converting Text to Columns
After watching this video; you will be able to convert text to columns in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Copy Cell Formatting with Format Painter
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Format Painter tool to copy formatting in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Create a PivotChart
After watching this video; you will be able to use recommended charts to create a PivotChart in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Create a PivotChart from a PivotTable
After watching this video; you will be able to use PivotTable data to create a PivotChart in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Create and Open Workbooks
After watching this video; you will be able to create Microsoft Excel 2016 workbooks and open existing documents.
-
Create and Save an Excel Workbook (VSAE)
After watching this video; you will be able to create an Excel 2016 document; add data to it; enter property information; and save it.
-
Create Macros
After watching this video; you will be able to record a simple Macro in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Creating Custom Templates
After watching this video; you will be able to create and modify custom templates in Excel 2016.
-
Creating Form Fields
After watching this video; you will be able to create custom form fields in Excel 2016.
-
Creating Formulas and Using Functions
After watching this video; you will be able to create a formula and named cell range in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Creating PivotTables
After watching this video; you will be able to create a PivotTable in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Creating PivotTables and PivotCharts
After watching this video; you will be able to present data in PivotTables and PivotCharts.
-
Custom Cell Styles
After watching this video; you will be able to create a custom cell style in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Custom Conditional Formatting
After watching this video; you will be able to create custom conditional formatting rules in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Custom Filters
After watching this video; you will be able to create a custom filter in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Custom Formatting
After watching this video; you will be able to create custom text and numerical formats in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Custom Sorts
After watching this video; you will be able to configure a custom sort in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Customizing Columns and Rows
After watching this video; you will be able to modify default column and row settings in Excel 2016.
-
Customizing Data Validation
After watching this video; you will be able to apply advanced data validation in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Customizing Themes
After watching this video; you will be able to modify and save a theme in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Customizing Themes and Colors
After watching this video; you will be able to create custom color formats in Excel 2016.
-
Customizing Views and Layout
After watching this video; you will be able to configure appropriate views; layout; and visual elements in Excel 2016.
-
Customizing Your Data
After watching this video; you will be able to use hyperlinks; conditional formatting; and sparklines to customize the look of your data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Defining Named Cell Ranges
After watching this video; you will be able to create named cell ranges in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Deleting and Hiding Excel 2016 Data
After watching this video; you will be able to delete or hide cell; row; and column data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Dual Axis Charts
After watching this video; you will be able to create a dual axis chart in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Edit PivotTable Data
After watching this video; you will be able to modify the data in a PivotTable in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Enter Data in a Worksheet
After watching this video; you will be able to add data to a Microsoft Excel 2016 worksheet.
-
Excel Themes
After watching this video; you will be able to apply a theme to a Worksheet in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Exporting Excel 2016 Data
After watching this video; you will be able to export Excel 2016 document data in different formats.
-
Group and Ungroup Data
After watching this video; you will be able to create data summaries using groups in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Images; Headers; and Footers
After watching this video; you will be able to add images; headers; and footers in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Insert a Screenshot
After watching this video; you will be able to add screenshot and screen clippings to a worksheet in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Insert an Image
After watching this video; you will be able to add images to a worksheet in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Link to Access Databases
After watching this video; you will be able to add and manage connections to an Access database in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Link to Other Workbooks
After watching this video; you will be able to link to data in another Workbook in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Making Your Data Work
After watching this video; you will be able to sort; group; filter; and validate data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Managing Excel 2016 Worksheets
After watching this video; you will be able to create and customize worksheets in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Merging and Splitting
After watching this video; you will be able to merge and split cell data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Modify a Chart
After watching this video; you will be able to modify an existing chart in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Modify a Table
After watching this video; you will be able to modify an existing table in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Modify an Image
After watching this video; you will be able to modify an image using Microsoft Excel 2016 tools.
-
Modify Excel 2016 Document Properties
After watching this video; you will be able to add properties information to a Microsoft Excel 2016 document.
-
Modifying Cell Styles
After watching this video; you will be able to create and modify cell styles in Excel 2016.
-
Modifying Existing Hyperlinks
After watching this video; you will be able to modify an existing hyperlink in an Excel 2016 workbook.
-
Modifying PivotCharts
After watching this video; you will be able to alter the data in a PivotChart in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Modifying SmartArt
After watching this video; you will be able to edit SmartArt you have added to a Microsoft Excel 2016 worksheet.
-
Moving Data in Excel 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to cut; copy; and paste data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Multiple Workbooks
After watching this video; you will be able to manage multiple Workbooks in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
NOW and TODAY Functions
After watching this video; you will be able to use the NOW and TODAY functions in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Online Services
After watching this video; you will be able to sign in to Microsoft Excel 2016 and add a OneDrive service.
-
Order of Operations
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the order of operations in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Using the New Smart Lookup Feature in Office 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Smart Lookup feature in Office 2016.
-
mprovements to Skype for Business Call Controls
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and use the improved Skype for Business call controls.
-
he Skype for Business Call Monitor Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and use the Call Monitor feature in Skype for Business.
-
he Skype for Business Emoticons Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to use emoticons in Skype for Business.
-
Adding Ink Equations in Office 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the ink equation feature in Office 2016.
-
Attach Files to E-mails in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to demonstrate how to attach files to an e-mail in Outlook 2016.
-
Embedding Video in OneNote 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to demonstrate how to embed videos from Office Mix; Vimeo; or YouTube.
-
Explore Redesigned Templates in Access 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to explore the redesigned templates in Access 2016.
-
Exploring New Office Themes in Office 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and apply new Office themes in Office 2016.
-
Exploring New Shapes in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to explore the new shapes for office layouts; site plans; floor plans; home plans; and electrical diagrams.
-
Exploring the New Chart Types in Excel 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize new chart types available in Excel 2016.
-
Exploring the New Chart Types in PowerPoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize new chart types available in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Exploring the New Tell Me Feature in Office 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and use the Tell Me feature in Office 2016.
-
Formatting Shapes Quicker in Word 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to format shapes quicker in Word 2016.
-
Improved Version History in Word 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use version history to keep track of changes made to documents and to access earlier versions in Word 2016.
-
Prioritizing Messages Using Clutter in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use Clutter to prioritize messages in Outlook 2016.
-
Using Data Connectivity with Excel in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use one-step data connectivity in Visio 2016.
-
Using Get & Transform Data in Excel 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the get & transform feature in Excel 2016.
-
Using Groups in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to demonstrate the creation and use of groups in Outlook 2016.
-
Using Information Rights Management in Visio 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to protect sensitive information using IRM in Visio 2016.
-
Using One-click Forecasting in Excel 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use one-click forecasting in Excel 2016.
-
Using Real-time Co-authoring in Word 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and use the real-time co-authoring collaboration feature in Word 2016.
-
Using Screen Recording in PowerPoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the screen recording feature in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using Search in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the improved features of the search function in Outlook 2016.
-
Using the Ink Equation Feature in PowerPoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and use the ink equation feature in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Using the Simplified Sharing Feature in Office 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the sharing feature in Office 2016.
-
Exploring Cloud Attachments and Small Screen Layout
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the cloud attachment feature and recognize the small portrait screen layout functionality.
-
Exploring Forecasting Functions
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the new forecast functions in Excel.
-
Exploring New Themes and Accessibility improvements
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and apply new Office themes and Office updates.
-
Exploring the Co-Editing Feature in Word
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the real-time co-editing feature.
-
Exploring the Field Search and Power Query Integration
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the pivot tables and charts field search and integrated Power Query features in Excel.
-
Exploring the Math Input Control Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Math Input Control feature to write math equations using various input devices.
-
Exploring the Multiple Timeline Feature in Project 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use the multiple timeline feature in Project 2016.
-
Exploring the PivotTable Relationship Detection Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and use the PivotTable Automatic Relationship Detection feature.
-
Exploring the Ribbon and Group Changes in Excel
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the new ribbon and group changes in Excel.
-
Exploring the Search and Clutter Features
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and use the clutter and people suggestion search feature.
-
Exploring the Time Grouping Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to configure time groupings in PivotTables.
-
Exploring the Updated Backstage Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the new changes to the backstage interface.
-
Discovering the Business Intelligence Features
After watching this video; you will be able to discover and configure the Business Intelligence features.
-
Exploring Visio 2016 Features
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and use the getting started experience; visio shape panel; and the new building and electrical stencils.
-
Using Attachments in Outlook 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to use and identify the new attachment options in Outlook.
-
Using the Insight Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to describe and use the Insight feature.
-
Using the Skype for Business Search Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Skype for Business search to locate and add internal and external contacts.
-
Using the Slicer Multiselect Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and use the slicer Multiselect feature in Excel.
-
Viewing Documents; Loading Diagrams; and Image Rotation
After watching this video; you will be able to view documents in high resolution; edit documents quicker; and recognize the automatic image rotation feature.
-
Using the Global Template
After watching this video; you will be able to move views; reports and project elements between project files and the global template in Project 2016.
-
Using the Task Inspector
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Task Inspector in Project 2016.
-
Using Timeline View
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Timeline view in Project 2016.
-
Viewing the Critical Path
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how the critical path affects the project finish date in Project 2016.
-
What's New in Project 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the new features of Project 2016.
-
Working with Allocations and Conflicts
After watching this video; you will be able to resolve over-allocated tasks and resource conflicts in Project 2016.
-
Working with the Report Feature
After watching this video; you will be able to generate a resource overview report and produce a chart in Project 2016.
-
Working with the Schedule Status Date
After watching this video; you will be able to set the schedule status date in Project 2016.
-
Adding Milestones
After watching this video; you will be able to add milestones to indicate project progress in Project 2016.
-
Adding Project Tasks
After watching this video; you will be able to add a task to a project plan in Project 2016.
-
Adding Resources in Resource Sheet View
After watching this video; you will be able to set up a resource sheet in Project 2016.
-
Assigning Overtime
After watching this video; you will be able to assign overtime in Project 2016.
-
Assigning Resources to Tasks
After watching this video; you will be able to assign and modify resource assignments in Project 2016.
-
Constraint Types
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the types of date constraints in Project 2016.
-
Create and Organize Tasks
After watching this video; you will be able to insert; delete; reorder; and import tasks and add a project milestone in Project 2016.
-
Create Resources
After watching this video; you will be able to create a resource and assign it to tasks in Project 2016.
-
Creating a Material Resource
After watching this video; you will be able to create a material resource in Project 2016.
-
Creating a Project from Excel data
After watching this video; you will be able to create and save a new project using Excel workbook data in Project 2016.
-
Creating a Recurring Task
After watching this video; you will be able to add a recurring task to a project in Project 2016.
-
Creating a Work Breakdown Structure
After watching this video; you will be able to set up a custom Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) code in Project 2016.
-
Creating a Work Resource
After watching this video; you will be able to create a work resource in Project 2016.
-
Creating New Project Plans
After watching this video; you will be able to create and save a new project based on the default template and a new project based on a template.
-
Customizing Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to customize settings in Project 2016.
-
Defining Task Relationships
After watching this video; you will be able to modify; link; and unlink tasks in Project 2016.
-
Effort-Driven and Non-Effort-Driven Scheduling
After watching this video; you will be able to identify different types of scheduling in Project 2016.
-
Exporting Data from a Project
After watching this video; you will be able to export data from a project in Project 2016 to different file formats.
-
Group Tasks and Resources
After watching this video; you will be able to use the group and filter options on tasks and resources in Project 2016.
-
Importing Data into a project
After watching this video; you will be able to import data into a project using the import template in Project 2016.
-
Importing Tasks
After watching this video; you will be able to import tasks into Project 2016 from Word; Outlook and Excel.
-
Introduction to Microsoft Project
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the differences between the Standard and Professional editions of Project 2016.
-
Modifying Project Duration and Summary Task
After watching this video; you will be able to modify the duration of a project and activate the project summary task feature in Project 2016.
-
Opening; Closing; and Saving Projects
After watching this video; you will be able to open; save; and close projects in Project 2016.
-
Overlapping Tasks
After watching this video; you will be able to overlap tasks in Project 2016.
-
Protecting a Project File
After watching this video; you will be able to assign a password to protect the project file in Project 2016.
-
Reordering; Inserting; and Deleting Tasks
After watching this video; you will be able to rearrange tasks by reordering; inserting and deleting unwanted tasks in Project 2016.
-
Resource Types
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the different project resource types in Project 2016.
-
Selecting Views
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the purpose of different views in Project 2016.
-
Setting a Deadline Reminder
After watching this video; you will be able to assign a deadline reminder in Project 2016.
-
Setting and Clearing Baselines
After watching this video; you will be able to set a baseline for the entire project in Project 2016.
-
Setting Print Options
After watching this video; you will be able to set print options in Project 2016.
-
Setting Project Options
After watching this video; you will be able to customize options in Project 2016.
-
Setting Task Sheet Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to format text styles and gridlines in a task sheet in Project 2016.
-
Setting up a Project Calendar
After watching this video; you will be able to use different types of calendars in Project 2016.
-
Setting up Costs for Resources
After watching this video; you will be able to add costs for resources in Project 2016.
-
Sharing a Project Plan
After watching this video; you will be able to share projects via e-mail or online in Project 2016.
-
Start Screen and Project Workspace
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize elements of the Project 2016 interface.
-
Storing Project Files on OneDrive
After watching this video; you will be able to share a project to an online location in Project 2016.
-
Switching Between Projects
After watching this video; you will be able to switch between projects and pin or unpin objects in Project 2016.
-
Task Priorities; Notes; and Inactive Tasks
After watching this video; you will be able to add a task priority and make a task inactive in Project 2016.
-
The Ribbon; Toolbars and Backstage View
After watching this video; you will be able to customize and use elements of the Project 2016 interface.
-
Track and Manage a Project
After watching this video; you will be able to track and manage a project in Project 2016.
-
Tracking Projects
After watching this video; you will be able to apply tracking using Tracking Gantt View in Project 2016.
-
Using Baselines
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to use the baseline option in Project 2016.
-
Using Team Planner to Assign Resources
After watching this video; you will be able to use Team Planner to assign resources to tasks in Project 2016.
-
Deleting and Hiding Web Parts in SharePoint 2016
After watching this video; you will be able to delete and hide web parts in site pages in SharePoint 2016.
-
Multitouch/Swipe Keyboards
There are three ways to input data using the onscreen keyboard of an Android device. You can type individual letters; use predictive text; or use swiping. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates all three of these methods.
-
Using Google Maps
You can use the Google Maps app on an Android device to get directions to any location. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to generate a map and the options available for location information and directions.
-
Your Device as a Mobile Hotspot
You can turn your Android device into a mobile hotspot; which then operates just like a wireless router. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to do this with the Mobile Hotspot app.
-
Managing Multiple Browser Windows
You can easily open and manage multiple Internet browser windows on an Android device. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to open and navigate between new browser windows; and how to add web sites as bookmarks.
-
Adding a Calendar Event
You can use the Calendar app on an Android device to help you keep track of your schedule. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to add an event to the Android Calendar and set a reminder for it.
-
Adding a Contact
When you create a new contact on an Android device; you can save a lot more than just the person's phone number. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to add contact information to an Android device.
-
Adding a Repeating Event
You can use the Android Calendar to schedule events that occur on a regular basis. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to add a repeating event to your Android Calendar.
-
Adding and Removing Widgets
Widgets let you display a lot of information on the Home screens of an Android device. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to add; place; and remove a widget from the Home screen.
-
Adding Applications to the Screen
On an Android device; you can access applications more conveniently by using Home screens. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to add and remove an application from the Home screen.
-
Attaching an Image to an Email
The ability to e-mail pictures is integrated in the Android Gallery appl. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to send an image as a Gmail attachment.
-
Forwarding a Contact
Android devices allow you to easily forward contact information in a number of ways. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to forward a contact via Gmail.
-
Installing an Application from the Play Store
The Google Play Store consists of thousands of applications; which you can download to your Android device. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to access the Play Store and install a new application.
-
Managing Running Applications
If your Android device is running slowly or inconsistently; you may have too many applications open at the same time. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to manage the applications running on your device.
-
Uninstalling an Application
If you have applications on your Android device that you no longer use; you may want to uninstall them. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates how to access the Application manager to uninstall applications.
-
Setting Up Email
With Android; you can easily set up and manage multiple e-mail accounts. In this video; Mark Lassoff demonstrates the different types of e-mail accounts available for you to configure.
-
Avoiding Social Engineering Scams
After watching this video; you will be able to describe techniques to avoid being a victim of social engineering scams.
-
Communications Risks to Corporate Computers and Devices
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the threats to corporate security that can result from unsecured communications technologies.
-
Computer and Hardware Security Policies
After watching this video; you will be able to identify computer and hardware security policy best practices.
-
Definition of IT Security
After watching this video; you will be able to describe what IT security is and what it includes.
-
E-mail and Internet Security Policies
After watching this video; you will be able to identify e-mail and Internet security policy best practices.
-
E-mail Usage Threats
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the potential threats from unsecured e-mail usage.
-
End User Role in IT Security
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the end user's role in overall IT security.
-
File Encryption and Access Controls
After watching this video; you will be able to describe characteristics and best practices for using file encryption and access controls to protect your corporate computer.
-
Human Error Security Threats
After watching this video; you will be able to describe characteristics of human error threats to corporate computer security.
-
Internet Usage Threats
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the common corporate security risks of Internet usage.
-
IT Security Policy Fundamentals
After watching this video; you will be able to describe general IT policy characteristics.
-
Malicious Behavior Security Threats
After watching this video; you will be able to describe characteristics of malicious behavior that threatens corporate computer security.
-
Malware Threats
After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between the different types of malware threats.
-
Mobile Device Security Policies
After watching this video; you will be able to identify mobile device security policy best practices.
-
Password Security Policies
After watching this video; you will be able to identify password security policy best practices.
-
Physical Security Threats
After watching this video; you will be able to identify potential physical security threats to corporate mobile devices.
-
Protecting Computers against Malicious Behavior
After watching this video; you will be able to identify best practices for protecting your corporate computer against malicious behavior.
-
Protecting Mobile Devices against Malware Threats
After watching this video; you will be able to identify best practices for securing corporate mobile devices against common malware threats.
-
Protecting Mobile Devices against Network Threats
After watching this video; you will be able to identify best practices for securing corporate mobile devices against common wireless network threats.
-
Protecting Mobile Devices against Physical Threats
After watching this video; you will be able to identify best practices for securing corporate mobile devices against common physical threats.
-
Remote User Considerations
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the specific security considerations for remote users.
-
Remote User Policy Best Practices
After watching this video; you will be able to identify remote user security policy best practices.
-
Role of IT Security
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the role and purpose of IT security in the corporate environment.
-
Secure E-mail Use Best Practices
After watching this video; you will be able to describe best practices for ethical and safe e-mail use.
-
Secure Internet Usage Best Practices
After watching this video; you will be able to identify secure corporate Internet usage best practices.
-
Secure Social Networking Practices
After watching this video; you will be able to identify best practices when using social networking platforms.
-
Securing Corporate Devices Against Threats
After watching this video; you will be able to identify best practices for securing both corporate computers and corporate mobility devices against common threats.
-
Social Engineering Scam Characteristics
After watching this video; you will be able to identify characteristics and risks of social engineering scams.
-
Social Networking Security Challenges
After watching this video; you will be able to identify risks to corporate systems from unsecured social networking activities.
-
Social Networking Security Policies
After watching this video; you will be able to identify social networking security policy best practices.
-
System Patches
After watching this video; you will be able to describe characteristics and best practices for using system patches to protect your corporate computer.
-
The CIA Security Triad
After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between confidentiality; integrity; and availability security objectives.
-
Using Secure Corporate Communications Methods
After watching this video; you will be able to identify best practices for securely using corporate e-mail; access webmail; Internet use; and social networking activities.
-
Webmail Access Best Practices
After watching this video; you will be able to identify best practices for securely accessing webmail services.
-
Webmail Access Threats
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the common security threats to corporate systems and infrastructure from using unsecured webmail access at work.
-
Wireless Network Threats
After watching this video; you will be able to identify characteristics of threats to mobile devices via wireless networks.
-
Work Environment IT Security Policies
After watching this video; you will be able to identify fundamental IT security best practices for the work environment.
-
Calendar
In iOS 8 for iPad; you will find that the Calendar features are much easier to use than ever before. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Calendar application to create a new event and decide if it will be all-day and repeated.
-
Changing the Background Wallpaper
Apple's iOS 7 allows you; through its Wallpaper & Brightness settings; to change the background or wallpaper of your iPad's Home and Lock screens. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to apply static and dynamic backgrounds to each screen independently; before using a personal photograph as his Lock screen wallpaper.
-
Control Center
Apple iPad iOS 7 now hides some of the applications instead of crowding the home screen. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Control Center feature to browse through the play controls; Bluetooth; AirDrop; WiFi; clock; and camera options.
-
iTunes Radio
You can now stream music on your Apple iPhone iOS 7. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Music application to create a station and select the music album to stream.
-
Lock Screen Features
On the Apple iPhone iOS 7; you will notice a few screen enhancements on your locked device. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the lock screen feature to access the Notification Center; Control Center; and iTunes.
-
Loss Theft Protection
Apple iOS 7 handles loss and theft using Passcode Lock and Find My iPhone. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates these two features; how to find your phone when it has been lost; and also protect your data against theft.
-
Mail and Facetime
Apple iPad iOS 7 allows users to make voice-only calls in FaceTime and filter e-mail messages in various ways. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to make a video call in FaceTime; and an audio-only call to the same contact. He also demonstrates how to undo typed input when creating mail; and filter mail according to specific criteria.
-
Mobile Safari New Features
In Apple iOS7; new features have been added to Mobile Safari to improve the user experience. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates these new and improved features of Mobile Safari; such as the 3D multi-tab view; bookmarks; search options; and finger gestures.
-
Multitasking and App Switching
Enhanced multitasking in iOS 7 allows you to quickly preview; manage; and switch between all the apps that are running in the background on your Apple iPhone. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to switch between apps; how open apps can run continuously in the background; and how to close open apps; utilizing the multitasking abilities of iOS 7.
-
New Features of the Camera
Apple iPad iOS 7 provides users with new options in the Camera app. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates various camera modes; such as Panorama; Video; and Square; how to apply a filter; and create square photo images.
-
Personal Hotspot
The Personal Hotspot feature in iOS 7 allows you to use the cellular data connection on your Apple iPhone to connect your computer and other devices to the Internet. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to set up Personal Hotspot and share Internet connectivity with an iPad using Wi-Fi.
-
Phone Preferences
The new phone preferences in Apple iOS 7 include a small modification to the favourites list; the ability to enable call blocking; and a voicemail feature. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates the new items that have been added to the phone preferences screen in iOS 7.
-
Accessibility Options
The accessibility features on iPhone allow the device to be accessible to people with visual impairments. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to enable accessibility and quick access the accessibility options.
-
Airplay and Apple TV
AirPlay allows you to wirelessly present videos; music; or photos located on your Apple iPhone; or any other iOS 7 devices; on your HDTV via Apple TV. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to configure Wi-Fi network and AirPlay settings on the Apple TV; and how to mirror an iPhone's screen on an HDTV after enabling AirPlay Mirroring.
-
Privacy Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and change privacy settings in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Selling or Buying an iPhone
When buying or selling an iPhone; there are some important factors to consider in order to ensure the optimal functioning of Apple iOS 7. In this video; Bob Flisser discusses some of the considerations to make when buying or selling an iPhone; such erasing data and restoring factory settings.
-
Spotlight Search
Apple iPad iOS 7's Spotlight Search bar; accessed with a single-finger swipe of your Home screen; allows you to search your content; apps; and mail. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to configure and use Spotlight Search to find; filter; rank; and access your search results.
-
Syncing Mobile Devices with a Mac
Built into Apple's OS X; iCloud allows you to synchronize and share data from and between your and others' mobile devices and products. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to configure your Mac Book's System Preferences to enable iCloud synchronization services and their options; including iTunes Store downloads.
-
Syncing Mobile Devices with a PC
Built into Apple's OS X; iCloud allows you to synchronize and share data from and between your and others' mobile devices and products. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to download the iCloud Control Panel to your Windows PC and use it to select and synchronize multiple services; including Store downloads.
-
Using AirDrop to Share Files Between Mobile Devices
Apple iPad iOS 7 allows users to share files using the AirDrop feature. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates the settings required to use AirDrop; such as Bluetooth being turned on; and all devices being connected to the same WiFi network; and how to share files between an iPad and an iPhone; from both the sending and receiving perspectives.
-
3D Touch on the iPhone 6s
After watching this video; you will be able to use the 3D Touch feature of the iPhone 6S with iOS 9.
-
Apple Health App
After watching this video; you will be able to describe changes to the Apple Health app in iOS 9 on iPhone.
-
Safari Updates
After watching this video; you will be able to describe changes to the Safari Browser in iOS 9 on iPhone.
-
Test Your Knowledge of iOS 9
After watching this video; you will be able to have increased knowledge and a comprehensive understanding of iOS 9.
-
Contacts
iOS 8 for iPhone allows you to easily create and manage your contacts. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how you can manage and set up contacts using the Contacts App.
-
Messages
There are now a number of major updates to the Messages application in iOS 8 for iPad; such as the ability to easily add images to send to multiple contacts. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Photo Library to insert a photo into a group message.
-
Network Settings
iOS 8 for iPad allows you to connect your iPad to networks. By default; the iPad is going to prefer to connect to the internet via Wi-Fi rather than via mobile in order to save you money on broadband charges. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to manage your network settings.
-
Notes
In iOS 8 for iPad; you can create notes and select from a number of formatting features within the Notes application to customize the document. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Insert Photo option to attach a photo to the notes.
-
Phone Calls
iOS8 for iPhone allows you to do a number of interesting things when dealing with phone calls because there is so much functionality built into the phone. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates some of the options you have when using your iPhone for phone calls.
-
Safari
Safari in iOS 8 for iPhone provides a variety of new and existing features and extensions to enhance your browsing experience. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use some of these features on an iPhone.
-
FaceTime
iOS 8 for iPhone allows you to have built-in video conferencing with the FaceTime feature. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates some of the settings available to you when using FaceTime.
-
Mail
iOS 8 provides a Mail app that allows you to send; receive; and manage your e-mails from your iPhone. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use various features of the iOS 8 Mail app for iPhone.
-
Apple Maps with Public Transit Info
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the new features of the Apple Map application in iOS 9 on iPhone.
-
Notes App Improvements
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the new features with Apple Notes in iOS 9 on iPhone.
-
Spotlight Improvements
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the new features in Spotlight in iOS 9 on iPhone.
-
Updates to the Apple Keyboard
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the new features for the keyboard in iOS 9 on iPhone.
-
Using Siri
Siri; the intelligent personal assistant built into iPad; recognizes and responds to natural speech. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use your voice and get Siri to execute your commands.
-
Using the App Switcher
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the update to the iPhone Swipe Apple Switcher feature in iOS 9.
-
New Additions to Siri
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the new changes to Siri in iOS 9 on iPhone.
-
New Battery Controls
After watching this video; you will be able to use the new battery controls; including the Notification Center widget; to view and manage battery life in iOS 9 on iPhone.
-
Apple Pay
After watching this video; you will be able to use Apple Pay and the new Wallet application in iOS 9 on iPhone.
-
Main Features
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the main highlights of the iOS 9 platform.
-
Touch ID for iOS 7
iPhone iOS 7's Touch ID feature records up to five fingerprints and allows you to access your iPhone without having to enter a passcode. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to access your iPhone's Touch ID settings; record your fingerprints; and access your iPhone; iTunes; and the App Store without having to enter a passcode.
-
Browsing the Internet
Safari; iPhone’s mobile portal to the Internet; is simple; fast; and easy to use. In this video; Josh Penzell discusses the features of Safari and demonstrates how to configure and customize it for quick browsing.
-
Buying Apps
The App Store on iPhone allows you to access and download apps that can transform your iPhone into a super machine. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to navigate the App Store and download apps.
-
Clock App
The Clock App on the iPhone is a necessity for frequent business travellers. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set up and use each of the features in the Clock App.
-
Configuring Email
iPhone allows you to easy; instant access to mails. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add multiple email accounts and set the schedule for fetching new email.
-
Guided Access
iPhone allows you to teach an individual or group of people how to use a specific app; such as the Notes app. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to restrict access to areas of the screen and keep the iPhone in a single app.
-
iPhone Buttons
The physical buttons on your iPhone allow you to control how the device works. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the buttons to navigate; power on and off; and control sound.
-
Linking a Bluetooth Keyboard
iPhone allows you to attach a full keyboard for your longer writing tasks such as essays and novels. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to attach a cordless Bluetooth keyboard to your iPhone and get it working.
-
Lock Screen Orientation
iPhone allows you to lock its screen orientation if you want to stay in the same mode; such as when reading a book. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set and lock orientation.
-
Map App
iPhone’s Map App can keep you from getting lost. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to get turn-by-turn directions to a location.
-
Moving the Cursor
Moving the cursor on an iPhone without a keyboard can be a bit tricky; such as when you want to correct text on a note. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use your finger to navigate the cursor to exactly where you want to make changes.
-
Multitasking on the iPhone
iPhone’s built-in multitasking feature allows you to move between apps with ease; such as when taking quick notes from a website. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the multitasking feature and cut down on the back and forth clicks.
-
Newsstand
The Newsstand App on iPad allows you to access various magazines and newspapers on your iPad. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to search; shop; and download from the App Store.
-
Working with Calendar
The Calendar app on iPhone allows you to track events. In this video; Josh Penzell shows you how to view and update events; integrate with Facebook’s Birthdays calendar; and turn on time zone support.
-
Notification Settings
iPhone allows you to configure notifications settings and customize the Notification Center. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to configure notifications and make sure you are only informed of things that are absolutely important.
-
Organizing Apps
Organizing apps on your iPad is simple and easy. In this video; Josh Penzell shows you how to drag and drop apps to rearrange the layout of your Home page.
-
Passcodes
Passcodes in iPad allow you to secure your passwords and emails. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set up simple and full passcodes to restrict access to an iPad.
-
Privacy Controls
Privacy controls on iPhone allow you to manage location-based services and control what private information about you goes out. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to ensure that only programs you trust get access to your information.
-
Remotely Controlling Your PC
iPhone allows you to remotely control the files and programs on your computer. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to remotely access a desktop using the Internet and the LogMeIn app.
-
Syncing Calendar
iPhone allows you to sync the calendar on the device with calendars on cloud services such as Google. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to sync and configure the Calendar app.
-
Syncing Contacts with Gmail
iPad allows you to synchronize Contacts throughout all your devices. In this video; Josh Penzell shows how to sync your Contacts with Cloud services such as Google.
-
Undo
The undo feature on iPhone allows you to bring back text that was accidentally erased. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to undo and redo.
-
Updating Your iPhone and Apps
iPhone allows you to update your device to the latest apps and software available. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to download and install apps from the App Store and upgrade software.
-
Using Dictation
The dictation feature on iPad allows you to dictate your text instead of typing. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to compose a mail with punctuation.
-
Using Messaging
iPhone allows you to chat with your friends using Apple devices in real time. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to send; view; delete; and forward instant messages.
-
Using Your iPhone as a Keynote Remote
iPhone’s Keynote remote lets you dispense with expensive remote controls and USB connectors. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to control your presentations using the remote app on your iPhone.
-
Using Your iPhone as a Presentation Device
iPhone allows you to make wireless presentations from the palm of your hand. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the Apple TV to broadcast your full-sized Microsoft PowerPoint presentations.
-
Using/Modifying Text
iPhone allows you to copy and paste; find word meanings; and save shortcuts for phrases. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use your finger to quickly and easily modify and manipulate text.
-
Working with Contacts
The Contacts app on iPhone is simple and powerful. In this video; Josh Penzell shows how to search; create; and display contacts.
-
Lockscreen Features
Apple iPad iOS 7 allows users to use new features of the Lockscreen. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to control audio and how to access the notification area and Control Center without having to unlock the screen first.
-
Loss Theft Prevention
Apple iPad iOS 7 gives users several ways to find a lost or stolen iPad or iPhone. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to check and modify security settings; how to use Password Lock and the Find My iPhone app; how to work with Lost Mode; and how to erase data on a device you can't locate.
-
Notification Center
Apple iPad iOS 7 allows you access to the Notification Center from a locked screen. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Notification Center feature to browse through the notifications on the Today; All and Missed tabs.
-
Selling or Buying an iPad
Apple iPad iOS 7 allows users to buy or sell an iPad or iPhone securely. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to turn off Find My iPad and erase data when selling a device; and how to ensure when buying a device that the sale is legitimate and the device cannot be found by the previous owner.
-
The New Keyboard
iOS 8 for iPad allows you to use different keyboard options. There are a number of features offered by iOS 8 for using the Glass Keyboard; including Predictive Text and an Emoji Keyboard. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates some of the new keyboard features available to you.
-
iCloud Tabs in Safari
iPad iOS 7's iCloud allows you to access and switch to your Safari browser's tabbed Web pages in – and from – your Mac or iPhone. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to open multiple different Web pages using the iCloud icon on each browser to switch views and access the pages open on the other device.
-
iMovie
In OS X 10.9 Mavericks; updates to the iMovie app provide features that allow you to browse and share clips more easily; along with enhanced editing tools for creating a professional look when showcasing your movies. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to create a movie; and then apply transitions and enhancements; before sharing the movie using iMovie Theatre.
-
Battery Percentage
The battery percentage on iPad allows you to make a more accurate estimate of the battery life. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to display the battery level on the battery indicator.
-
Buying/Updating Apps
The App Store on iPad allows you to access numerous free and paid apps. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to search; download; and install the apps that you want.
-
Connecting a Keyboard
iPad allows you to attach a full-sized keyboard to make your typing easy. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to attach a cordless Bluetooth keyboard to your device and get it working.
-
Cellular Data vs. Wi-Fi
iPad’s built-in cellular data service; though expensive; is useful when WiFi is not available. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to configure your cellular data settings and keep the cost as low as possible.
-
Clock
The Clock App in iOS 6 on iPad is a necessity for frequent business travellers. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set up and use each of the features in the Clock App.
-
Configuring Wireless Networking
WiFi on iPad allows you to connect quickly to the Internet. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add and remove networks and enable and disable automatic connections.
-
Multitasking
Multitasking on your iPad may seem a little different from multitasking on your computer. In this video; however; Josh Penzell demonstrates the ease of multitasking and also the right way to do it to preserve battery life.
-
New Map App
iPad’s Maps app can keep you from getting lost. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to get turn-by-turn directions to a location.
-
Searching Your iPad
Spotlight Search on iPad allows you to quickly and easily locate apps; contacts; and content. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use and customize the search feature.
-
Using Sounds
iPad allows you to choose a sound you like for each kind of alert. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to turn on and off ringtones; lock sounds; and keyboard clicks.
-
Using Your iPad as a Hotspot
A wireless hotspot on iPad will take advantage of high-speed cellular network and allow other devices to use it wirelessly. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to turn your iPad into a travelling hotspot.
-
Wireless Synchronization
iPad allows you to wirelessly sync with iTunes with just a click of a button. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to sync your iPad when it is not plugged into power.
-
Working with Reminders
Reminders on iPad allow you to keep track of the things to do. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create and edit reminders; set repeats; and search reminders.
-
Social Media
iPad allows you to always remain connected to your social network no matter where you are. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to find iPad apps geared specifically towards social networks.
-
Reading Books
iPad allows you to access numerous book services such as Apple’s iBooks and Amazon’s Kindle. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to download books and read them on the iPad.
-
Rotation Lock
iPad allows you to lock its orientation if you want to stay in the same mode; such as when working on a document. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to lock screen orientation and prevent your document from flipping over.
-
Using Cursors
Moving the cursor on iPad without a keyboard can be a bit tricky; such as when you want to correct text on a note. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use your finger to navigate the cursor to exactly where you want to make changes.
-
Using Restrictions
Restrictions on iPad allow you to set limits to what your child or colleague can do on your device. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to enable restrictions and prevent access to specific apps and content.
-
Software Update
iOS 6 for iPad can be downloaded wirelessly to the device. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to check out the new features and apps on offer and download successfully.
-
Syncing Calendar with Gmail
iPad allows you to synchronize your calendar throughout all your devices and keep it up to date. In this video; Josh Penzell shows how to sync the calendar on iPad with calendars on Cloud services such as Google.
-
Text
Typing and manipulating text on your iPad is easy if you know a couple of keyboard tricks. In this video; Josh Penzell shows you how to type very fast by swiping; moving to the middle of the screen; and splitting the in-built keyboard.
-
The Undo Feature
The built-in undo feature on iPad allows you to bring back text that was accidentally erased. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to undo and redo.
-
Using Apple TV as a Presentation Device
iPad allows you to make wireless presentations without a laptop. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the Apple TV to broadcast your full-sized Microsoft PowerPoint presentations.
-
Gestures
Multitasking gestures in iPad allow you to input commands through the touch screen. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how swiping and pinching is fun and easier than using the mouse.
-
iCloud
In this video; Jamie Campbell describe the iCloud drive of the Mac OS X Yosemite operating system.
-
iPad Overview
The physical buttons on your iPad allow you to control how the device works. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use the buttons to accomplish important tasks such as navigation; power on and off; and volume control.
-
Notes App
The Notes App; iPad’s only built-in word processing capability; allows you to create and synchronize your notes. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use this simple tool to create; format; organize; and sync up your notes.
-
Do Not Disturb Feature
Do Not Disturb in iOS 6 on iPad offers you control over notifications. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use this powerful feature to mute; store; and schedule notifications.
-
Editing Word/Excel Documents
Docs To Go on iPad allows you to work on Microsoft Office products. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create and edit documents in a format that can be viewed by your friends.
-
Editing/Viewing PDFs
GoodReader on iPad allows you to read and edit PDF files. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to view; alter; and synchronize PDFs on GoodReader.
-
Search Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to configure search setting in Spotlight to suit individual needs in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Time Machine
In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses Time Machine in the Mac OS X Yosemite operating system.
-
Upgrading
After watching this video; you will be able to upgrade the environment to Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
User Account Overview
After watching this video; you will be able to transfer data and settings to Mac OS Yosemite using Migration Assistant.
-
Using Remote Management
After watching this video; you will be able to use Remote Management in Mac OS X Yosemite to control another host computer.
-
Using Tags in Finder
After watching this video; you will be able to use and configure Tags in Finder to organize files in data in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Widgets
In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use widgets in the Mac OS X Yosemite operating system.
-
Social Media and RSS Feeds
After watching this video; you will be able to create and configure social media feeds in Safari in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Smart Search
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Safari Smart Search feature in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Searching with Spotlight
In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Spotlight Search feature in the Mac OS X Yosemite operating system.
-
Securing Files and Folders
After watching this video; you will be able to secure files and folders in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Setting up Mail Accounts
After watching this video; you will be able to add e-mail accounts in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Setting Up OS X Yosemite
After watching this video; you will be able to use Migration Assistant to transfer data between computers; create and configure a user account; and set up and configure parental controls.
-
Setup Assistant
After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot issues while installing Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Sharing Files and Folders
After watching this video; you will be able to share files and folders in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
System Preferences
Mac OS X Yosemite; the latest version of Apple's OS; has many new features. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses System Preferences.
-
Batch Rename
After watching this video; you will be able to rename multiple files in Finder using batch rename in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Collaborate and Communicate
After watching this video; you will be able to apply tags; change tag names; and set up screen sharing.
-
Interface Changes
In this video; Jamie Campbell describes the interface changes in the Mac OS X Yosemite operating system.
-
Introduction to iCloud
After watching this video; you will be able to configure iCloud and access iCloud Drive in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Introduction to Spotlight
After watching this video; you will be able to describe and work with Spotlight for Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Introduction to Time Machine
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the main features of Time Machine for Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Launchpad
In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Launchpad feature in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Mac OS X File System
After watching this video; you will be able to describe and work with the file system in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Mail Drop
After watching this video; you will be able to use Mail Drop to send large files in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Markup
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Mail Markup Feature on Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Menu Bar
In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates the context-sensitive menu bar options of the Mac OS X Yosemite operating system.
-
Migrating Data and Settings Using Migration Assistant
After watching this video; you will be able to configure initial Mac OS X Yosemite environment post installation.
-
Network Diagnostics and Assistant
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and resolve networking and connection issues using Network Diagnostics and Assistant.
-
Networking
In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the network settings in the Mac OS X Yosemite operating system.
-
Notification Center
In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the features of the Notification Center in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Performing a Clean Installation
After watching this video; you will be able to install Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Preparing to Install
After watching this video; you will be able to prepare for installation of Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Preparing to Upgrade
After watching this video; you will be able to prepare the environment for upgrade to Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Remote Management Features
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the features of Mac OS X Yosemite Remote Management.
-
Restoring with Time Machine
After watching this video; you will be able to restore data and setting from backup made using Time Machine for Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Scanners
In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use scanners in the MAC OS X Yosemite operating system.
-
Favorites
After watching this video; you will be able to store and use the Favorites feature in Safari on Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Configuring Advanced Network Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to configure advanced network settings in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Configuring Domain User Accounts
After watching this video; you will be able to create user accounts in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Configuring Parental Controls
After watching this video; you will be able to configure user authentication in Mac OS X Yosemite using directory services.
-
Configuring Remote Desktop
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the Remote Desktop app in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Configuring Time Machine
After watching this video; you will be able to configure Time Machine to backup Mac OS X Yosemite data and settings.
-
Configuring User Accounts and Groups
After watching this video; you will be able to describe user accounts in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Configuring VPNs
After watching this video; you will be able to connect to networks using a VPN connection in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Customizing the Mail Toolbar
After watching this video; you will be able to customize the OS X Yosemite Mail toolbar.
-
Files and Folders
In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to work with files and folders in the Mac OS X Yosemite operating system.
-
Finder Preferences
After watching this video; you will be able to configure preferences in Finder in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
iMessages
In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the features of the iMessages application in the Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Installing and Configuring Printers
After watching this video; you will be able to set up and configure printers in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Desktop
In Windows 8; you can customize your desktop by changing the background and pin applications that you use often to the taskbar. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to switch from the desktop to Start screen and personalize the appearance of the desktop and the taskbar.
-
Enhanced Dictation
The Enhanced Dictation feature in OS X 10.9 (Mavericks) converts speech to text in real time without requiring an Internet connection. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to set up and use the standard dictation feature; which sends speech to the Apple Server; and does the same for Enhanced Dictation; using the same content to test the feature.
-
iBooks
OS X 10.9 Mavericks includes the iBooks app; providing intuitive features that allow you to read and work with books downloaded from the iBooks Store automatically synchronized with your iOS devices. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to download a book from the iBooks Store; and how to use the citation feature; highlight text; and add notes to books.
-
Improved Calendar Features
OS X 10.9 (Mavericks) provides users with updated Calendar features; such as improved navigation and the automatic inclusion of maps; directions and travel times when scheduling an event. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates various Calendar views; continuous scrolling; scheduling an event; setting an alert; and reviewing an event using the Inspector.
-
Inserting Special Characters
OS X 10.9 (Mavericks) provides users with a categorized panel of characters to choose special symbols or emoji avatars for insertion into a document. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to access the panel of special characters; switch between categories; and choose symbols for insertion. And also how to access an expanded panel of grouped characters.
-
iPhoto
In OS X 10.9 Mavericks; with 64-bit support; iPhoto provides easy ways to organize; edit; and share photos. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to import photos into iPhoto; how to use the Faces and Places features to organize and view photos; ways to enhance photos; and how to keep your photos up to date across devices with iCloud.
-
Multiple Displays
OS X 10.9 Mavericks provides flexibility when working with multiple displays connected to your Mac; enabling each display to run applications in full screen mode with its own menu bar. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to disable mirroring and then run full-screen apps independently on separate monitors.
-
New Features of the Finder
OS X 10.9 (Mavericks) allows users to create new tabs in a Finder window and tag files so they can be easily found. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates different ways to create new tabs in a Finder window and use them to move files between folders; then shows how to tag files and find tagged files.
-
New Features of the Power Button
OS X 10.9 (Mavericks) allows users to choose various options when powering down a regular workstation or a MacBook. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to access the standard sleep; restart; and shut down options; as well as powering the computer down with or without the countdown timer.
-
Power Nap
OS X 10.9 (Mavericks) provides users with a new feature called Power Nap; which automatically shuts down unused background programs to conserve energy. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to manually disable Power Nap on specific programs and how to enable Power Nap while running on battery power.
-
Shared Photo Streams
OS X 10.9 (Mavericks) allows you to share photos with other users using shared photo streams. In this Video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to share a photo from an iPad to an iPhone; and how to break a connection after the share is complete.
-
Spotlight Tips
In addition to quickly and easily locating files on your Mac; Spotlight in OS X 10.9 Mavericks includes some helpful lesser-known features that will assist you in your daily tasks. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use Spotlight to open applications; perform simple calculations; and look up word definitions.
-
iCloud Keychain
OS X 10.9 (Mavericks) provides users with the Keychain password management system linked to iCloud so that passwords are synchronized across devices. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to set up iCloud Keychain on a MacBook and view the synchronized results on a linked iPad.
-
El Capitan Explained
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the new OS and its release date; compatibilities.
-
Enhancements to Mission Control
After watching this video; you will be able to use the El Capitan Exposé behavior with Mission Control.
-
Metal: The New Graphics API
After watching this video; you will be able to identify Metal and the graphic enhancements it will provide.
-
New Ways to Use Notes
After watching this video; you will be able to use the new features of the Notes App.
-
Performance and Security Improvements
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the new improvements to OS X and their benefits.
-
Public Transit in Maps
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the Public Transit addition to the Apple Maps App.
-
Safari Browser New Additions
After watching this video; you will be able to use the new additions to the Safari Browser.
-
Some Improvements to Photos
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the changes to Photos App.
-
Test Your Knowledge of Mac OS X
After watching this video; you will be able to work with and describe the El Capitan operating system.
-
The Split View
After watching this video; you will be able to describe how to use the new Split View feature.
-
Using Mail Just Got Better
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the new Smart Suggestions and the benefits of using the Mail enhancement.
-
What's New with Spotlight?
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the new features of Spotlight and its search capabilities.
-
Music and Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to use Cortana to locate music on a device; or identify a song currently playing.
-
Network and Internet
After watching this video; you will be able to configure options for network settings; including Wi-Fi VPN and airplane mode; in Windows 10.
-
Network Connections
After watching this video; you will be able to configure network settings in Windows 10.
-
New Look
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the new options available in Microsoft Edge.
-
Personalize Windows 10
After watching this video; you will be able to change the background image; and set date; time; and location preferences in Windows 10.
-
Printers
After watching this video; you will be able to install printing devices on a Windows 10 machine.
-
Use Microsoft Edge
After watching this video; you will be able to set a home page; and add and share annotations in Microsoft Edge.
-
Log in and Check Notifications
After watching this video; you will be able to log in to Windows 10; launch apps; and check notifications.
-
Mail and Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to use Cortana to send an e-mail.
-
Making a Call with Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to use Cortana to make a telephone call to a contact.
-
Microsoft Account
After watching this video; you will be able to configure a Microsoft account to access a Windows 10 device.
-
Moving Applications between Desktops
After watching this video; you will be able to move open applications between multiple desktops in Windows 10.
-
Calendar Entries in Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to use Cortana to enter calendar entries.
-
Charm Bar
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the changes in the Charm bar from Windows 8.1 to Windows 10.
-
Command Prompt Hotkeys
After watching this video; you will be able to make use of the new hotkeys available in the new Windows 10 command prompt.
-
Command Prompt Options
After watching this video; you will be able to use the new features available in the Windows 10 command prompt menu.
-
Configure Backups and Share Folders
After watching this video; you will be able to configure a static IP address; set up a backup schedule; and share a local folder.
-
Connected Devices
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and configure peripheral devices in Windows 10.
-
Defender
After watching this video; you will be able to access; update; and configure the Windows 10 Defender options.
-
Desktop Settings
After watching this video; you will be able to customize background and personal settings in Windows 10.
-
Devices
After watching this video; you will be able to configure options for connected devices; including Bluetooth and printing devices; in Windows 10.
-
Ease of Access
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the Narrator; the screen magnifier; and high contrast in Windows 10.
-
Home Location
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the Home Location for your Windows 10 device.
-
Home Page
After watching this video; you will be able to access and change the default home page used when opening Microsoft Edge.
-
Location Directions in Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to use Cortana to get directions and map details.
-
Home View
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate the Home view of Windows 10 File Explorer.
-
InPrivate Viewing
After watching this video; you will be able to accessing InPrivate mode for web browsing.
-
Integration with Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the integration options available between Cortana and other Microsoft applications.
-
Location Application
After watching this video; you will be able to access and configure the built in Windows 10 location Application.
-
3D Builder
After watching this video; you will be able to create templates to use with a 3D Printer in Windows 10.
-
Accounts
After watching this video; you will be able to configure syncing options and work versus family settings in Windows 10.
-
Alarms and Clocks
After watching this video; you will be able to set alarms and access stopwatch features in Windows 10.
-
Alarms in Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to use Cortana to set an alarm.
-
Apps from the Start Screen
After watching this video; you will be able to launch applications from the Start menu and move apps between the Tile menu and Start menu in Windows 10.
-
Backup
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and configure the built-in Windows 10 Backup features.
-
Backward Compatibility
After watching this video; you will be able to access the previous version of Internet Explorer to access pages that are incompatible with Microsoft Edge.
-
Proxy
After watching this video; you will be able to access and change the Microsoft Edge proxy settings.
-
Quick Access
After watching this video; you will be able to enable and disable the Quick Access menu in Windows 10.
-
Reading List
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Reading list to save pages for offline viewing in Windows 10.
-
Reading View
After watching this video; you will be able to use the reading view to remove unneeded clutter from the current web page.
-
Recovery
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and configure the built-in Windows 10 recovery features.
-
Reminders in Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to use Cortana to set reminders on a Windows 10 device.
-
Ribbon View
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and access the features available in the ribbon view of Windows 10 File Explorer.
-
Setup of Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to access the settings for Cortana and personalize Cortana's reactions.
-
Share Annotations
After watching this video; you will be able to share annotations made on a web page with others in Windows 10.
-
Signing on Using a Domain Account
After watching this video; you will be able to sign in to a domain with Windows 10.
-
Signing on Using a Local Computer Account
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use a local computer account to sign in and access Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Signing on Using a Microsoft Live Account
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use a Microsoft live account to sign in and access Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Social Account
After watching this video; you will be able to configure a social account for online presence in Windows 10.
-
Start Menu
After watching this video; you will be able to customize and personalize the Start menu for ease of access.
-
Start Menu settings
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the Start menu.
-
Task View and Multiple Desktops
After watching this video; you will be able to create multiple desktops and switch between them in Windows 10.
-
Taskbar
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the Taskbar settings in Windows 10.
-
Texting with Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to use Cortana to send text messages.
-
Time and Language
After watching this video; you will be able to configure options for speech; region; and date settings in Windows 10.
-
Update and Security
After watching this video; you will be able to configure options for Windows 10 updates; recovery; and backups.
-
Use New Features
After watching this video; you will be able to use Universal Apps; Slide menus; and Snap Assist in Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Weather Application
After watching this video; you will be able to access and configure the built-in Windows 10 Weather application.
-
Weather Reports in Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to use Cortana to check the local weather reports.
-
Web Search with Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to use Cortana to perform web searches on your behalf.
-
Wi-Fi Connections
After watching this video; you will be able to connect to and configure a Wi-Fi network in Windows 10.
-
Windows Security
After watching this video; you will be able to access and configure the Windows 10 security options.
-
Work with Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to set voice commands; alarms; meeting reminders; and calendar entries; and send an e-mail using Cortana in Windows 10.
-
Xbox Integration
After watching this video; you will be able to sign in and access your Xbox account with your Windows 10 device.
-
Start Screen
After watching this video; you will be able to change view between the Start screen and Start menu in Windows 10.
-
Support Contact
After watching this video; you will be able to use the built-in support features to obtain Microsoft Support for Windows 10 system-related issues.
-
System
After watching this video; you will be able to configure options for the system display; notifications apps; and power settings in Windows 10.
-
Tablet Mode
After watching this video; you will be able to switch between tablet mode and desktop mode on Windows 10 device.
-
Task Manager Overview
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Task Manager.
-
Using Task View in Microsoft Windows 10
After watching this video; you will be able to set up multiple desktops to arrange and order multiple open windows in Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Using the HOTKEYS in Command Prompt
After watching this video; you will be able to identify and use the new hotkeys available in the Microsoft Windows 10 Command Prompt.
-
Using the Reading View in Edge
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Reading view feature within Edge to remove distractions from the web page.
-
Virtual Desktop
After watching this video; you will be able to move between the available desktops that have been created in Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Introducing Windows Hello
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use Windows Hello.
-
Layout Menu in Command Prompt
After watching this video; you will be able to access; identify; and use the new options in the Layout menu of the Microsoft Windows 10 Command Prompt.
-
Navigating the Settings Menu
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the settings options available in the Settings menu in Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Options Menu in Command Prompt
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the new items in the Options Menu of the Microsoft Windows 10 Command Prompt.
-
Setting Geo-location using Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Geo-location functionality from within Cortana in Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Use Cortana; Edge; and Task View
After watching this video; you will be able to use Cortana and Task View and create annotations in Edge.
-
Using and Sharing Annotations in Edge
After watching this video; you will be able to create annotations to a web page you are currently browsing and sharing them with others.
-
Using Cortana for Reminders
After watching this video; you will be able to use Cortana for basic voice functions in Microsoft Windows 10; including setting reminders.
-
Using Edge Offline
After watching this video; you will be able to use the new Edge Offline Feature.
-
Accessing the Settings Menu
After watching this video; you will be able to access the Settings menu in Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Customized Installation
After watching this video; you will be able to complete the initial Microsoft Windows 10 Installation by using the customizable settings.
-
Express Installation
After watching this video; you will be able to complete the initial Microsoft Windows 10 installation by using the express settings.
-
Integrating Cortana and other Microsoft Applications
After watching this video; you will be able to use the integration available in Microsoft Windows 10's Cortana to set up meetings and send messages.
-
Introducing Cortana
After watching this video; you will be able to access the Cortana menu in Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Introducing Edge
After watching this video; you will be able to open Edge and browse the Internet using the new Microsoft Windows 10 interface.
-
Introducing Snap Assist
After watching this video; you will be able to use Snap Assist to place multiple open windows easily on the Microsoft Windows 10 desktop.
-
Introducing Task View
After watching this video; you will be able to access the Task view menu and locate multiple desktops in Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Introducing the Slide Menus
After watching this video; you will be able to access the Slide menus in Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Introducing the Start button and Universal Apps
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the new Start button and Universal Apps in Microsoft Windows 10.
-
The Windows 8.1 Action Center
Windows 8.1 offers several important security features for end users and network administrators. An important part of its System and Security is the Action Centre; which keeps you notified on certain system events that may put your system at risk. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the Windows 8.1 Action Centre.
-
Using BitLocker Drive Protection without TPM
Windows 8.1 offers several important security features for end users and network administrators. An important part of its System and Security is the Action Centre; which keeps you notified on certain system events that may put your system at risk. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the Windows 8.1 Action Centre.
-
Windows 8.1 Remote Access and Remote Desktop
Windows 8.1 offers several important security features for end users and network administrators. An important part of its System and Security is the Action Centre; which keeps you notified on certain system events that may put your system at risk. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the Windows 8.1 Action Centre.
-
Windows 8.1 System and Security
The latest version of Windows 8.1 offers several important security features for end users and network administrators alike. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to the Windows 8.1 system security features.
-
Windows 8.1 User Account Control Settings
Windows 8.1 offers several important security features for end users and network administrators. An important part of its System and Security is the Action Centre; which keeps you notified on certain system events that may put your system at risk. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the Windows 8.1 Action Centre.
-
File History and Recovery Feature
Windows 8's File History and Recovery tools allow you to save copies of selected files; enabling you to restore them if lost or damaged. In this video; Isabel Garcia locates the File History tool's backup and restore options before introducing the Recovery tool's options.
-
Smart Screen Filter
Windows 8's SmartScreen security filter; enabled by default; blocks unrecognized programs from running and automatically checks web sites and files for malware and alerts you to it. In this video; Isabel Garcia describes the features of the SmartScreen filter and demonstrates how to disable it.
-
Aero Features
Microsoft Windows 8 gives you control of your computer’s themes and customization options; enabling you to personalize your Desktop; window-border colors; sounds; and screen saver. In this video; Isabel Garcia uses Windows 8's personalization options to introduce different theme and window-colorization options and controls.
-
Autosave Screen Shots
In Microsoft Windows 8.1; you can quickly and easily take screen shots and automatically save them to your Pictures library. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to capture a screen and save the screen shot to an auto-generated Screenshots folder using a simple key combination in Windows 8.1.
-
Charms Bar and Quick Access Menu
In Windows 8; the new hot corners feature replaces the Start menu and Start button. It allows you to quickly navigate between different screens through easy access to the Charm Bar and Quick Access menu. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to use the Charm Bar and Quick Access menu to access your favorite commands and settings.
-
Customizing Start Screen
In Windows 8; there are several options to customize your Start screen; including creating groups of tile resizing tiles; turning live tiles on and off; and pinning and unpinning tiles. You can also download applications from the store and install them. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to personalize your Start screen.
-
Hot Corners and Hot Keys
Microsoft Windows 8.1 provides several features that make it easier to navigate between screens and applications. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to use hot corners; specific mouse actions; and keyboard shortcuts in Windows 8.
-
Internet Explorer 10
Windows 8's Internet Explorer 10 web browser delivers responsive and intuitive navigation and browsing; incorporates the address and search functions into its new One Box bar; and features Frequent and Favorites tabs and tiles; as well as secure; InPrivate browsing. In this video; Isabel Garcia introduces Internet Explorer 10's new features.
-
PC Settings and Lock Screen
Microsoft Windows 8.1 includes a PC Settings screen. It also includes a smartphone-style Lock screen which is shown when you lock your computer. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates the settings you can configure using the PC Settings screen; as well as ways you can customize the Lock screen.
-
Shutting Down
In Microsoft Windows 8.1; a user can choose between using several methods for shutting down; logging off; disconnecting or restarting a computer. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates several methods for powering down a computer in Microsoft Windows 8.1.
-
Start Screen Overview
In Microsoft Windows 8.1; users can configure Windows 8.1 to launch right into the desktop; but by default Windows 8 and 8.1 land on the Start screen. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates an overview of the Start screen in Microsoft Windows 8.1.
-
Windows Explorer
Microsoft Windows 8's File Explorer features a responsive; tabbed ribbon incorporating new navigational features and containing all the commands you need to manage and organize your files. In this video; Isabel Garcia introduces File Explorer's ribbon; tabs; commands; and hierarchical folder structure.
-
Accessing Apps from the Start Screen
You can quickly and easily personalize the Start screen in Windows 8.1 to suit your particular needs. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to find and open apps from the Start screen; as well as personalize the Start screen to improve usage based on your requirements.
-
Add a New Account
In Windows 8.1; you can create a number of different accounts for users on the same machine. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to create an account which is authenticated on the Microsoft cloud; and presents options for creating parentally controlled child accounts; unauthenticated local accounts; and accounts with app restrictions.
-
PC Settings Overview
You can use the settings options provided by Windows 8 to customize features such as privacy; accessibility; synchronization; and device and power management. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to access and use the available settings from both the Start screen and the desktop.
-
Personalizing Aero Elements
Microsoft Windows 8.1 provides users with various options for customizing the Aero theme. In turn; this allows users to modify how the color scheme is applied to the desktop and lock screen. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to personalize Aero elements in Microsoft Windows 8.1.
-
Power; Shutdown; and Restart
Microsoft Windows 8.1 provides new options for powering up or down; and for managing Windows Store applications. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to shut down and restart; and access and close Windows Stores apps from within the desktop; as well as how to access startup parameters in Windows 8.1.
-
Running Windows Store Apps
In Microsoft Windows 8.1; a wide range of applications designed to run in the newer interface are available from the Windows Store. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to install; run; and manage Windows Store apps.
-
Charms Bar; Hot Corners; and Quick Access
Microsoft Windows 8.1 provides improved desktop navigation functionality for keyboard and mouse users while maintaining the flexibility touch users require. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to use hot corners to navigate between applications and access the Charms bar; how to access the Quick Access Menu; and how to swap between Start screen and desktop.
-
Customizing the Windows Start Screen
Microsoft Windows 8.1 allows you to customize your Start screen and helps you to keep track and use your apps more efficiently in a personalized environment. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to rearrange and change the appearance of your tiles; before highlighting some of the Start screen configuration options.
-
File Management and Organization
Microsoft Windows 8.1 allows you to locate information in a quick and intuitive manner while providing the necessary tools to work with files and folders. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how apps are organized on the Start screen; highlights the Search functionality; and shows how the ribbon interface in File Explorer allows you to manage files and folders.
-
Hot Corners; Gestures; and Hot Keys
Microsoft Windows 8.1 includes all the necessary actions that enable you to use your PC quickly and efficiently; whether you are using a mouse; keyboard; or touchscreen. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to navigate and access Charms and tools using hot corners; keystrokes; and touch gestures with both traditional and touch-enabled Windows 8.1 devices.
-
Installing Store and Desktop Apps
Microsoft Windows 8.1 provides two different types of applications; Windows Store Apps and Desktop Apps; which can be used for recreational; business; or personal purposes; catering to most needs. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to install and uninstall both Windows Store and Desktop Apps.
-
Internet Explorer 11
Microsoft Windows 8.1 includes Internet Explorer (IE) 11; a browser with intuitive controls that helps you navigate the web and view content in an optimized way. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to maximize your browsing experience; while highlighting the various options on the address and tabs bar that allow you to organize favorites; search; and protect your privacy.
-
Logging In to the Desktop
Microsoft Windows 8.1 includes features for users who prefer to work in the desktop rather than using the modern Windows touch-oriented interface. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to configure Windows 8.1 to log in to the desktop instead of the Start screen by default.
-
The Desktop
Although Windows 8 opens with the Start screen displayed; a number of applications still require the use of the traditional Windows desktop; which can be accessed from the Start screen. In this video; Byron Hynes explains how to access the desktop and how to use it.
-
The Start Screen
The Windows 8 Start screen interface; sometimes called the Metro interface; looks a lot different than the older versions and can be moused; keyboarded; or touched. The purpose of the new interface is to have up front the features you need most. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to use the Windows 8 Start screen.
-
Using a Microsoft Account
Besides using a local or domain account to log on to your computer; Windows 8 provides a Microsoft account; also referred to as a Live account; to access Microsoft’s online services. You can configure Windows 8 to use this account as your default login and to synchronize personal settings. In this video; Byron Hynes creates and uses a Microsoft account.
-
Using Assigned Access
In Microsoft Windows 8.1; you can use the new assigned access feature to limit a particular user to a particular Windows Store application in Microsoft Windows 8.1. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to use the assigned access feature to limit a particular user to the Maps application.
-
Web Browsing with IE 11
Microsoft Windows 8.1 comes with Internet Explorer 11 (IE 11); which is the fastest rendering engine that Microsoft has had in any edition of IE. In this video Byron Hynes; demonstrates how to use IE 11 to browse through the Modern UI and the traditional desktop web browser.
-
Windows File Explorer
In Microsoft Windows 8.1; File Explorer features new and old tools that allow you to easily access; navigate through; and manage your stored files. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to perform basic navigation and file management functions in File Explorer.
-
Customizing the Interface
There are various ways you can customize Windows 8. You can personalize the Start screen; Lock screen; and desktop. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how he personalizes various elements of the interface.
-
File Management
Information organization in Windows 8 is mostly based on searching for what you need – it’s more search-centric than previous versions. However; it still provides folders and files to organize your information. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how he uses Windows Explorer to organize files and folders on his computer.
-
Hot Corners
Windows 8 is designed to be touch-centric. You can use touches and motions on touch-enabled devices to navigate through the various screens. But Windows 8 can also be driven with a mouse and keyboard. In this video; Byron Hynes uses mouse positions; mouse actions; hot corners; and keyboard shortcuts to navigate through Windows 8.
-
Installing and Managing Applications
Windows 8 has two types of applications – the Metro-style applications; which are available only from the Microsoft Store; and traditional desktop applications. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to access and install a Metro application and how to access applications from the desktop.
-
Running Metro-style Applications
Windows 8 provides a new style of applications; the Metro applications; which are available in the Microsoft Store. There are various types of Metro applications available. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to install the CookBook application; and how to work with two open applications.
-
Shutting Down and Restarting
The closing of applications differs for desktop and Metro applications in Windows 8. Metro applications are managed directly by the OS; and you use the Task Manager to terminate individual desktop applications. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to use the Task Manager to close applications; and the power management options to shut down or disconnect from a session.
-
Using SkyDrive
Windows 8 is being integrated with SkyDrive; which is Microsoft’s cloud storage service. You can use SkyDrive to store any type of source file and make it available on many different platforms. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how he uses SkyDrive to store files.
-
Using the Semantic Zoom
In Windows 8; you can zoom by context using the Semantic Zoom feature; which causes information to change depending on the zoom level or as the user moves in and out through the information. In this video; Byron Hynes uses Semantic Zoom to demonstrate how to view different layers of content.
-
Web Browsing
In Windows 8; you can use a web browser within the Metro-style interface as well as in the traditional Windows desktop environment. In this video; Byron Hynes uses the Metro applications interface and the Windows 8 desktop to launch Internet Explorer 10.
-
Using Good Passwords and Managing Them
It's important to use good passwords for digital commerce and to protect your identity and confidential information. Good password practices include using passphrases or randomly generated strong passwords; using different passwords for different systems; and storing passwords safely. In the video; Byron Hynes uses good password practices to create strong passwords and store them in a password vault.
-
Introduction to Event Handlers
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you need to create event handlers to access events such as moving the mouse; typing on a keyboard; and clicking an item. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to create event handlers using Flash Professional CC.
-
Acrobat Collaboration Features
Adobe Acrobat Pro XI offers some powerful collaboration features while working with PDF files. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses some of the different collaboration features in Adobe Acrobat Pro XI.
-
How to Add Page Transitions
In Adobe Acrobat Pro XI; you can convert your PDF documents into presentations along with the transitions. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to add page transitions to the PDF documents.
-
How to Combine Files to Create PDFs
In Adobe Acrobat Pro XI; you can create documents by combining different file types. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to combine files to create PDFs.
-
How to Create a Digital Signature
In Adobe Acrobat Pro XI; you can protect your documents by using its powerful security features. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to create a digital signature in Acrobat Pro XI.
-
How to Create a PDF
Adobe Acrobat Pro XI is used to create shared documents; ranging from articles and reports to long complex documents. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create a PDF document by using Acrobat Pro XI.
-
How to Create Fillable Forms
Adobe Acrobat Pro XI has powerful form features that allow you to create and distribute your PDF files as forms. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to create fillable forms in Acrobat Pro XI.
-
How to Create Headers and Footers
Adobe Acrobat Pro XI; allows you to customize your documents after they have been created. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create headers and footers in your PDF documents.
-
How to Crop Pages
In Adobe Acrobat Pro XI; you can crop and resize your PDF pages. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to crop PDF pages.
-
How to Digitally Sign PDF Files
Adobe Acrobat Pro XI has powerful security features that allow you to protect your documents. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to digitally sign PDF files.
-
How to Edit Text and Images
Adobe Acrobat Pro XI provides the ability to edit PDF documents. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to edit text and images.
-
How to Manipulate Pages
In Adobe Acrobat Pro XI; you can manipulate your PDF files to add new pages; extract pages; and create transitions. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to manipulate PDF pages.
-
How to Save PDF Files in Different Formats
Adobe Acrobat Pro XI is the standard for cross-platform document creation and it is flexible with other file types. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to save PDF documents in different formats by using Acrobat Pro XI.
-
How to Use the Number Pages Feature
In Adobe Acrobat Pro XI; you can customize your documents after it has been created. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Number Pages feature in Adobe Acrobat Pro XI.
-
How to Work with Links; Bookmarks; and Attachments
Adobe Acrobat Pro XI has some powerful features for linking PDF documents. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to work with links; Bookmarks; and Attachments in Acrobat Pro XI.
-
How to Create Forms
Adobe Dreamweaver CC allows you to easily create forms for your web site. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create forms using Adobe Dreamweaver CC.
-
How to Create HTML Files and Attach Style Sheets
Adobe Dreamweaver CC supports many popular formats; including HTML 5; in web development. To be effective when you develop HTML; you need to be able to work with style sheets. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to create HTML files in Dreamweaver and how to attach style sheets.
-
How to Create Image Hot Spots
Adobe Dreamweaver CC helps web designers create hotspots; which can launch other links. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create image hotspots by using Adobe Dreamweaver CC.
-
How to Create Rollover Images
In Adobe Dreamweaver CC; you can use JavaScript and HTML to create a rollover effect for images. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create rollover images by using Adobe Dreamweaver CC.
-
How to Create Sites
Adobe Dreamweaver CC allows you to create manager sites and helps to automate the process of managing files and syncing with your servers. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to create sites in Dreamweaver CC.
-
How to Insert a DIV Using the Insert Panel
Adobe Dreamweaver CC helps you create and configure DIVs for organizing the web site contents. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to insert a DIV by using Dreamweaver CC's Insert panel.
-
How to Insert HTML5 Video
Adobe Dreamweaver CC allows you to insert movies easily into your HTML document. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to insert an HTML5 video by using Adobe Dreamweaver CC.
-
How to Insert JQuery Widgets
In Adobe Dreamweaver CC; you can easily integrate JQuery elements and add them to your HTML. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to insert JQuery widgets by using Adobe Dreamweaver CC.
-
How to Navigate the Dreamweaver Workspace
To work efficiently with Adobe Dreamweaver CC; you need to be familiar with its interface. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to navigate Dreamweaver's workspace.
-
How to Use Fluid Grid Layouts
Adobe Dreamweaver CC provides powerful Fluid Grid Layouts; which allow you to simultaneously develop your sites for multiple devices. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use Fluid Grid Layouts.
-
How to Use the Properties Panel with Images
Adobe Dreamweaver CC has a powerful context-sensitive Properties panel that allows users to work with images with ease. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Properties panel while working with images.
-
How to Use the Properties Panel with Text
Adobe Dreamweaver CC has a powerful context-sensitive Properties panel that allows users to work with different formats like HTML5 and CSS. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Properties panel while working with text.
-
How to Use Workspaces
In Adobe Dreamweaver CC; you can organize your workspace based on what you're doing. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use workspaces.
-
How to Work with Images
Adobe Dreamweaver CC is a powerful web development application that allows you to easily add and work with images. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to work with images.
-
Introduction to the Dreamweaver Interface
In Adobe Dreamweaver CC; you can develop single web pages as well as an entire web site. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Dreamweaver interface.
-
How to Add Text and Images to PDF Files
In Adobe Acrobat Pro XI; you can add more information to the existing PDF files. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to add text and images to PDF files by using Acrobat Pro XI.
-
How to Add Library Objects to the Stage Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can access the library assets by using the ActionScript. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to add library objects to the stage by using ActionScript 3.
-
How to Align and Distribute Objects
Adobe Flash Professional CC is a multimedia and software development platform that allows you to arrange objects in relation to each other on the stage. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to align and distribute objects in Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Animate Objects Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can animate objects by suing ActionScript. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to animate objects by using ActionScript 3.
-
How to Arrange and Group Objects
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you work with various objects on the stage and you need to understand how you can combine and order these objects. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to arrange and group objects in Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Assign Color to Objects Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use ActionScript to modify the properties of your objects. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to assign color to objects by using ActionScript 3.
-
How to Capture Keyboard Input Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can capture the keyboard inputs and create a programmatic logic to bring the application to life. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to capture the keyboard inputs using ActionScript 3 in Adobe Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Configure the Stage
Adobe Flash Professional CC provides several settings to organize and set up your stage. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to configure the stage.
-
How to Convert Objects to Symbols
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can convert objects into symbols and use them to perform other actions such as creating applications with ActionScript. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces symbols in Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Create and Edit Text
Adobe Flash Professional CC has several powerful text features. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to create and edit text in Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Create Animation Using Key Frames
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use Timelines to create animations. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to create animations by using keyframes.
-
How to Create Animation Using Tweening
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use the tweening feature to determine a smooth path for the animation. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to create animations by using tweening.
-
How to Create Arrays Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use ActionScript to modify objects; create program logic; and use arrays. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create arrays by using ActionScript 3 in Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Create Buttons and Other UI Components
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use various elements to create stunning User Interfaces. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to create buttons and other UI components by using Adobe Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Create Drag and Drop Using AS3
Adobe Flash Professional CC allows you to use drag and drop; the ability to click an item and move it somewhere else in the stage when you create it. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create drag and drop in Flash Professional CC in ActionScript 3.
-
How to Create Drawing Objects
Adobe Flash Professional CC provides several drawing tools to help users to create animations; applications; and movies. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to create drawing objects.
-
How to Create FOR Loops Using AS3
In application development; you need to understand Loops which are a programming structure that are used to create iterative functions. In this video; Jamie Campbell discuss how to use for Loops with action scripts in Flash professional CC.
-
How to Create Sprites and Store them in an Array
Adobe Flash Professional CC allows you to use sprites; which are graphic objects that can be created and manipulated by using ActionScript. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create sprites and store them in an array by using ActionScript 3.
-
How to Draw a Rectangle Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use ActionScript to draw objects on the stage. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to draw a rectangle using ActionScript 3.
-
How to Draw Objects Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use ActionScript to draw objects on the stage. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to draw objects.
-
How to Embed Fonts
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you need to embed the fonts while packaging; to ensure that others can run the application without any error. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to embed the fonts in an application by using Adobe Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Generate Random Numbers Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can generate random numbers and simulate events. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to generate random numbers by using ActionScript 3.
-
How to Import Objects
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can create movies and applications by using external objects and images. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to import objects by using Adobe Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Use the Pen Tools
Adobe InDesign CC has several types of Pen tools that allow you to create unique designs and modify them. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Pen Tool.
-
How to Use the Ruler; Grid; and Guides
Adobe Flash Professional CC allows you to use different tools to create and place objects with precision. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Rulers; Grids; and Guides in Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Use the Selection Tools
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use the selection tools to select and work with various objects. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how use the selection tools to select objects.
-
How to Work with Timeline Layers
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use the Timeline to create animations and manage layers. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to work with Timeline layers.
-
Introduction to AS3 Variables
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; variables are a critical part of application development and Flash has variable types that can be used to ensure the proper values are assigned to your variables. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses variable types and shows how to use the common types in Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Modify Text Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can modify the text on the stage by using ActionScript. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to modify the text by using ActionScript 3 in Adobe Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Move and Change Objects Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use ActionScript to access and modify objects on the stage. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to move and change objects using Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Move Objects Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can modify the created object by using the action scripts. The key to creating applications in Adobe Flash Professional CC is the use of action scripts. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to move objects by using ActionScript 3.
-
How to Organize Applications on the Timeline
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use the Timeline layers to organize your ActionScript applications. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to organize applications on the Timeline.
-
How to Program Buttons Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you use ActionScript to create clickable objects such as buttons on the interface. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create buttons in Flash Professional CC and program them using ActionScript 3.
-
How to Publish Flash Productions
Adobe Flash is a powerful software development platform that offers various options for publishing your work. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to publish movies using Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Set Fill and Stroke
Adobe InDesign is a powerful desktop publishing application that’s used to create documents for print and screen output. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses Fill and Stroke in InDesign CC and shows you how to set them.
-
How to Transform Objects
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use the various transform tools to work with the objects. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to transform objects in Adobe Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Use Code Snippets
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use code snippets with ActionScript to speed up the development process. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to the Code Snippets option with ActionScript in Adobe Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Use Sliders
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use sliders that allow the user to choose a value from a numerical range by sliding a marker along a path. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to add sliders and program them by using ActionScript 3.
-
How to Use the 3D Rotation Tool
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can rotate 2D objects in 3D space. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the 3D Rotation Tool in Adobe Flash Professional CC.
-
How to Use the Lasso; Polygon; and Magic Wand Tools
Adobe Flash Professional CC is used to create animated movies and applications for the Web and mobile devices. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Lasso; Polygon; and Magic Wand tools in Flash Professional CC.
-
Introduction to Functions Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; functions are used to group codes that have a specific purpose in application development. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces how action script functions are used in Flash Professional CC.
-
Introduction to IF…ELSE Statements Using AS3
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; conditional statements are used to test values and act according to the results of those values for application development. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces if/else statements by using action scripts in Flash Professional CC.
-
Introduction to the Actions Panel
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use ActionScript; which is similar to C language that's used in program interactions with the objects on the stage. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Actions panel in Adobe Flash Professional CC.
-
Introduction to the Flash Interface
The Flash Interface in Adobe Flash Professional CC contains several new features and enhancements. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the Flash Interface.
-
How to Use the Blend Tool
Adobe Illustrator offers a number of powerful tools that put that power in your hands and make you feel that you are painting. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the Blend Tool.
-
How to Align Objects
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you have precise control over how the objects are placed and modified to create designs. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to align and distribute objects by using the Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Configure and Use Workspaces
Adobe InDesign CC offers many impressive features to create publications of any size. Its workflow-related workspace feature allows you to work with greater ease and work more efficiently. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to configure and use workspaces in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Create Compound Paths
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can create some impressive results with your drawing objects. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create compound paths in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Create Gradients
Adobe Illustrator has a tool for gradient fills which simulate dimension; add lighting; and create a beautiful looking design. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to the Gradient Tool .
-
How to Create New Documents
Adobe Illustrator CC is used by professional graphic designers and novices to create stunning original artwork because it is extremely flexible. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create new documents and modify their layout settings using Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Create Transparency
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can create a transparency effect in an image. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create transparency effect in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Edit Curves
Adobe Illustrator offers variety of tools to modify mathematical lines and curves. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to edit a curve.
-
How to Group and Arrange Objects
Adobe Illustrator works with multiple objects by grouping and arranging them for quick and easy modification. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the Group and arrange options.
-
How to Navigate the Illustrator Workspace
Adobe Illustrator CC allows you to create complex designs and add stunning effects. However; before you create designs; it is important to understand the workspace. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to navigate the workspace in Illustrator CC.
-
How to Open; Place; and Export Files
In Adobe InDesign CC; you work with different documents and file types; and a large part of your production workflow will be spent either bringing files into InDesign or outputting your InDesign documents to different formats. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to open; place; and export files in InDesign.
-
How to Place Text on a Path
Adobe Illustrator CC provides several features that help in adding stunning effects to text. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to place text on a path in Illustrator CC.
-
How to Use Artboards
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can use artboards to create ads and brochures. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use artboards in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Use Crystallize and Wrinkle
Adobe Illustrator CC offers several features to drastically edit and modify objects after they have been created. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Crystalllize and Wrinkle Tools.
-
How to Use Pucker; Bloat; and Scallop
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can modify and add effects to the objects by using the Pucker; Bloat; and Scallop tools. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Pucker; Bloat; and Scallop tools in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Use Rotate and Reflect
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can rotate objects and create reflection effect. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Rotate and Reflect Tools in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Use Scale; Shear; and Reshape
In Adobe illustrator CC; you can modify an object by scaling; shearing; and reshaping it. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Scale; Shear; and Reshape tools in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Use the Blob Brush
Adobe Illustrator is a highly configurable and a powerful design and illustration application. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to configure the various tabs and toolboxes in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Use the Drawing Tools
Adobe Illustrator is used for working with vectors; line art; mathematical lines and curves and offers a number of drawing tools. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the drawing tools in Adobe Illustrator CC and shows you how to use them.
-
How to Use the Eraser; Scissors; and Knife Tools
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you use a number of different tools to create objects; modify them; and apply effects with amazing results. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Eraser; Scissor; and Knife tools to apply effects to the objects in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Use the Free Transform Tool
Adobe Illustrator CC offers several features for editing objects after they have been created. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Free Transform tool in Illustrator CC.
-
How to Use the Graph Tools
Adobe Illustrator offers a number of desktop publishing features to create ads or brochures and one of such features is Graph tools. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the Graph Tools.
-
How to Use the Live Paint Tools
Adobe Illustrator CC offers the Live Paint tools to allow users to paint on complex objects in ways that will produce unbelievable results. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Live Paint tools.
-
How to Use the Magic Wand and Lasso Tools
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can use the Magic Wand and Lasso tools to select text and objects of the same color in an Illustrator file. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Magic Wand and Lasso Tools.
-
How to Use the Mesh Tool
Adobe Illustrator offers a large number of tools and the Mesh Tool allows you to create complex fills and shading on Illustrator objects. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to the Mesh Tool.
-
How to Use the Paintbrush and Pencil Tools
Adobe Illustrator CC offers painting and pencil tools that can produce some stunning results. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Paintbrush and Pencil Tools in Adobe Illustrator CC and explains how they’re used.
-
How to Use the Perspective Tools
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can create objects and then give perspectives to your creations to give them a sense of dimension and depth. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Perspective Grid Tool.
-
How to Use the Shape Builder Tool
Adobe Illustrator CC provides several tools such as the Shape Builder Tool; to edit objects after you create them. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Shape Builder Tool.
-
How to Use the Shape Tools
Adobe Illustrator offers a number of shape tools that allows you to create complex objects. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the shape tools in Adobe Illustrator CC and shows you how they’re used.
-
How to Use the Slice Tools
Adobe Illustrator offers slice tools to break web layouts in different graphic images for quick loading and ease of design. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the Slice Tool.
-
How to Use the Symbol Tools
Adobe Illustrator offers a large number of tools and the Symbol Tools to add effects to objects. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the symbol tools and shows you how they can be used in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Use the Touch Type Tool
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can apply effects to texts that simply can’t be accomplished in desktop publishing and one of Illustrator’s interesting tools is the Touch Type Tool. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Touch Type Tool and shows how it’s used.
-
How to Use Width; Warp; and Twirl
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can modify an object by using the Width; Warp; and Twirl Tools. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Width; Warp; and Twirl Tools in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Work with Bitmap Files
Adobe Illustrator offers some powerful features for using bitmap images. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to work with bitmap images in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Work with Color
Adobe InDesign CC is very flexible and is used to produce documents for printing in color laser printers and commercial offset printers. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses InDesign CC’s color handling features and shows you how they are used.
-
How to Work with Line Art
Adobe Illustrator CC preserves the integrity of mathematical lines and curves and ensures that the final quality won’t be affected by resizing. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to work with line art in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Work with Paragraph Text
Adobe Illustrator CC offers several sophisticated paragraph text features. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to work with paragraph texts in Illustrator CC.
-
How to Work with Templates
Adobe Illustrator CC provides many standardized templates for designing labels; business cards; advertisements; and web site banners. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses templates and shows you how to use them in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Work with Text
Adobe Illustrator CC's text handling features are one of its biggest strengths. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to work with text in Illustrator CC.
-
Introduction to the Illustrator Toolbars and Tabs
Adobe Illustrator CC is a very flexible application that helps you create designs from simple illustrations to complex designs such as logos; web banners; brochures; and posters. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the toolbars and tabs in Illustrator CC.
-
How to Create Sections and Apply Numbering
In Adobe InDesign CC; it is important to know about sections and numbering when creating long documents. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create sections and apply numbering in InDesign CC.
-
How to Create Text Frames
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can create text frames to place text. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to create and work with text frames using InDesign CC.
-
How to Generate a Table of Contents
Adobe InDesign CC allows you to easily generate a table of contents once you have finished creating a long document. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to generate a table of contents in InDesign CC.
-
How to Modify Paragraph Settings
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can easily modify the paragraph styles as per your preferences. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to modify paragraph settings using InDesign CC.
-
How to Navigate the InDesign Workspace
In Adobe InDesign CC; you need to become familiar with the workspace and understand how to navigate around the documents. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to navigate the workspace.
-
How to Package Publications
After you finish your creations in Adobe InDesign CC; you need to package them and send it to the service bureau. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to package publications.
-
How to Place Multiple Images in a Grid Layout
In Adobe InDesign CC; placing image files is an easy process but the application has a great feature for importing several images at the same time. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to import several images at the same time and place them in a grid.
-
How to Build Folios
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can create folios; which are online magazines; and publish to the cloud. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to build folios in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Create and Use Libraries
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can collect and repurpose the objects by using the libraries. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create and use the libraries in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Create and Use Templates
Adobe InDesign CC allows you to repurpose your designs and create templates to do that. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create and use templates in InDesign CC.
-
How to Create Books
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can create long documents; such as books; by using the Book feature. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create books in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Create PDF Files
Adobe InDesign CC allows you to create PDF files; a very useful feature when you output for the screen or a commercial offset printer. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses InDesign's PDF output settings and shows how to create PDF files.
-
How to Create Pull Quotes
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can create pull quotes. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create pull quotes in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Place Text and Link Text Frames
Adobe InDesign CC allows users to bring large text documents into the application. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to place text and link text frames using InDesign CC.
-
How to Place Type on a Path
Adobe InDesign CC allows users to place and modify text on a path. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Type on the Path Tool.
-
How to Set Margins and Gutters
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can set precision in the document by using the margins and Gutters features. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to set margins and Gutters in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Use InDesign’s Collaboration Tools
Adobe InDesign CC allows several users to work on the same document at the same time. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the collaboration tools in InDesign CC.
-
How to Use Master Pages
Adobe InDesign CC has a powerful Master Pages feature that allows you to set up your documents and determine how they’ll be presented. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use Master Pages in InDesign CC.
-
How to Use Rulers and Guides
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can set guides to provide precision to the designs. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use rulers and guides.
-
How to Use the AutoFit Feature
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can place and resize images. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Auto-Fit feature in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Use the Content Collector Tool
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can collect and repurpose objects by using the Content Collector Tool. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Content Collector Tool in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Use the Eyedropper and Measure Tools
Adobe InDesign CC has several effective tools that help users to get precise measurements and copy formatting styles; colors; and text styles. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Eyedropper and Measure tools.
-
How to Use the Frame and Shape Tools
Adobe InDesign CC contains powerful drawing tools that rival those found in Adobe Illustrator. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Frame and shape tools in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Use the Gap Tool
Adobe InDesign CC provides tools that help you automate your workflow and produce some impressive results. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Gap Tool in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Use the Gradient Tools
The gradient tools in Adobe InDesign CC allow users to create impressive effects in the objects they create. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the gradient tools.
-
How to Use the Pencil Tools
Adobe InDesign CC has powerful drawing tools that help you create stunning documents for print or screen output. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Pencil tools in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Use the Scissors Tool
Adobe InDesign CC contains many tools that allow you to modify the various shapes that you create. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Scissors Tool in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Use the Transform Tools
Adobe InDesign CC has several powerful tools that allow you to create impressive results with your drawing objects. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Transform Tools in Adobe InDesign CC.
-
How to Work with Links
Adobe InDesign CC allows you to place and modify text; images; and graphics in the document. You can then update the links in the InDesign files to reflect the changes in the placed files. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to work with links.
-
How to Work with Pages
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can create documents that range from a single page to many pages by using the Page Tool. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to create a page and how to work with pages.
-
Introduction to Leading and Kerning
Adobe InDesign CC has several powerful type setting features. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains about the Leading and Kerning features in InDesign CC.
-
Introduction to the InDesign Toolbars and Tabs
Adobe InDesign CC is a powerful desktop publishing application that is used to create stunning documents for print and screen output. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces InDesign's toolbars and tabs.
-
Advanced Layer Features
Adobe Photoshop is an image editing application that allows you to work with layer. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses advanced layer features in Photoshop.
-
Advanced Paragraph Text Features
Adobe Photoshop is a powerful image editing and can be used to create complex designs; like ads or posters. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses some of Photoshop’s advanced paragraph features.
-
Advanced Techniques Using the Magic Wand Tool
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can select similarly colored areas to add effects by using the Magic Wand Tool. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use some advanced techniques for Magic Wand Tool.
-
Beginning to Restore Old or Damaged Photographs
Adobe Photoshop has the ability to take older damaged photographs and restore them In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates the beginning steps that you can use to restore old or damaged photos in Photoshop.
-
Configuring and Working with Workspaces
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can use workspaces to edit images; create stunning new pictures; and restore old creations. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to configure and work with workspaces in Adobe Photoshop CC.
-
How to Change the Color of a Complex Object
Adobe Photoshop CC allows you select a specific object from a complex background and change its color. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to change the color of a car by using Photoshop CC.
-
How to Change the Color of a Person’s Eyes
In Photoshop; you have the ability to select a specific object and change its look. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how you can change the color of a person's eyes using Adobe Photoshop CC.
-
How to Create a Circular Inset
One classic effect is the circular inset photo surrounded by soft edges that seem to be faded into the background image. The myriad tools in Adobe Photoshop CC make this effect easy. And in this video Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to create a circular inset using Photoshop.
-
How to Create a Drop Shadow
It is very easy to create a drop shadow in Adobe Photoshop CC. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to create a drop shadow by using Adobe Photoshop CC.
-
How to Create a Glow Effect
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can create stunning glow effects quickly. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to create a glow effect around objects using Adobe Photoshop CC.
-
How to Create a Lens Flare Effect
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can use the Lens Flare feature to add stunning effects to photos. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to create the Lens Flare effect in Adobe Photoshop CC.
-
How to Create a Reflection Effect
You can use Adobe Photoshop CC to create stunning visual effects. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to create a reflection effect in Photoshop CC.
-
How to Create Duotones; Tritones and Quadtones
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can change grayscale photographs by using the Duotone Mode. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Duotone; Tritone; and Quadtone coloring features in a Photoshop document.
-
How to Create Text
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can add and modify text as per your preferences. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to create text in Photoshop CC.
-
How to Edit Smart Objects
The Smart Objects feature in Adobe Photoshop CC allows you to make edits to an object without corrupting the object; and therefore helps preserve the original. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to edit Smart Objects in Adobe Photoshop CC.
-
How to Isolate and Swap a Background
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can create amazing editing effects; such as swapping a background. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to isolate and swap a background in a Photoshop document.
-
How to Place Images
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can place image files in the existing Photoshop document. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to place images in a Photoshop document.
-
How to Resample Images
Adobe Photoshop is a powerful image editing program that can be used to design for print or the screen. And when working with photographs or graphics on a regular basis; you probably need to resample those images. Resampling means changing the image whether sizing up or sizing down. And in this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates Photoshop's resampling functions.
-
How to Use Adjustment Layers
In Photoshop; you can use adjustment layers to preserve the original images while editing them. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use adjustment layers in Photoshop.
-
How to Use Canvas Size
Adobe Photoshop CC allows you to resize the canvas size of an image. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Canvas Size feature in Photoshop CC.
-
How to Use Feathering
Adobe Photoshop includes a number of features that give you precise control over images and your edits seem natural. One of the features of Photoshop is Feathering; which allows you to take selections with hard edges and smooth those edges out to give a natural look. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use feathering in Photoshop.
-
How to Use Image Size
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can resize the images. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Image Size to resize the images in a Photoshop document.
-
How to Use Layer Styles
In Photoshop extensive work is done using images and layers and it is easier and safer to use layer styles; which allow you to add interesting and non-destructive effects to your layers.. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use layer styles in Photoshop.
-
How to Use Paste Into
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can use the Paste Into feature that can be used while working with nonlinear or irregular selections. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Paste Into feature in a Photoshop document.
-
How to Use Photoshop’s Healing Tools
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can restore old or damaged photographs. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses Adobe Photoshop's healing tools and shows how to use them.
-
How to Use Print Screen and the Clipboard with Photoshop
Adobe Photoshop is an image editing application and has the ability to grab a print screen; copy it to Windows clipboard and place it into Photoshop. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the relationship between the print screen command; the clipboard and Adobe Photoshop CC.
-
How to Use the Brush; Pencil; and Color Replacement Tools
Adobe Photoshop CC contains powerful tools that can be used both for editing and painting. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the painting tools and shows how they are used.
-
How to Use the Clone Stamp Tool
Adobe Photoshop CC is program a powerful program used by many. The Clone Stamp Tool makes it easy to copy either the whole image or bits of an image; within the image itself or onto another image. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the Clone Stamp Tool and demonstrates how to use it.
-
How to Use the Clone Stamp Tool on Other Documents
Adobe Photoshop CC has a variety of features; such as the Clone Stamp Tool; which make editing easy. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Clone Stamp Tool to draw from one document to another.
-
How to Use the Crop Tools
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can crop images and add perspective to them to create some interesting effects. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Crop Tool and Perspective Crop Tool.
-
How to Use the History Brush Tools
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can easily undo effects and manipulate images. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the History Brush tools.
-
How to Use the Lasso Tools
Adobe Photoshop CC allows users to select image objects that are not linear or contiguous. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to work with Lasso tools.
-
How to Use the Magic Wand Tool
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can select elements in an image by using the Magic Wand Tool. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Magic Wand Tool.
-
How to Use the Marquee and Move Tools
Adobe Photoshop CC offers you various tools to modify your image selections and place them in the required location. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Marquee tools in conjunction with the Move Tool.
-
How to Use the Mixer Brush
In Adobe Photoshop CC; the Mixer Brush Tool is a tool that simulates painting on a canvas by using color that’s on the brush to create a realistic painting effect. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the mixer brush; shows how it's used; and shows some of its configuration options.
-
How to Use the Pattern Stamp Tool
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can easily create interesting designs and patterns. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Pattern Stamp Tool.
-
How to Use the Photoshop History
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can go back in time and see the different states of the image and undo a series of edits. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates the History feature of Photoshop to undo the edits done to an image.
-
How to Use the Quick Selection Tool
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can quickly select elements in an image by using the Quick Selection Tool. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Quick Selection Tool.
-
How to Use the Refine Edge Tool
Adobe Photoshop CC allows you to edit your image selections precisely. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Refine Edge tool.
-
How to Use the Slice Tool
In Adobe Photoshop CC there is useful feature that web designers will love called the Slice Tool; and this tool will let you design stunning web interfaces and cut them up anyway you want. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how the Slice Tool is used; and how to save the work as separate files and HTML.
-
How to Use Variations
Adobe Photoshop provides precise control while editing photographs and designs. There are a variety of options in the image adjustments' menu that allow a range of effects. One of these features is an option known as Variations. In this video; Jamie Campbell will introduce the explain Variations feature.
-
Introduction to Layer Masks
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can mask out certain portions of the image. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Add layer mask feature in Adobe Photoshop CC.
-
Introduction to the Marquee Tools
Adobe Photoshop is a powerful image editing application used to edit existing images as well as create new ones. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the marquee tools and how to make marquee selections.
-
Introduction to the Pen Tool and Paths
Adobe Photoshop is a powerful image editing application and one of its powerful features is the pen tool which allows you to create precise selections. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to the pen tool and shows you how to create paths.
-
Marquee Selection Techniques
Adobe Photoshop is used to work with images to edit and enhance them; and it is important to use marquees to make selections. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the various techniques for using marquee selections.
-
Photoshop Preferences
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can develop a workflow by configuring the preferences settings. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to configure the Preferences settings.
-
Text Layers and Rasterizing Type
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can transform text into pixels to perform special effects on it. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces text layers and explains how to rasterize Type in Adobe Photoshop CC.
-
The Image Adjustments Fly-Out Menu
Adobe Photoshop gives you precise control over photographs and designs. And in this video; Jamie Campbell introduces the image adjustments fly-out and a few of its powerful features.
-
The Photoshop Toolbars and Tabs
Adobe Photoshop CC is used for image editing; to create stunning original images or simply edit photographs. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the toolbars and tabs in the Photoshop interface.
-
Using Live Shapes Properties
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can use the new live shapes feature and work with complex shapes that do not suffer from the same constraints that affect pixels. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use live shapes and their properties.
-
Working with Colors in Photoshop
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can choose colors by suing a number of methods and color models. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to work with colors in Adobe Photoshop.
-
Working with Image Modes
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can edit the colors in an image using the image modes. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the image modes feature in a Photoshop document.
-
Working with Live Shapes
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can work with complex curves and polygons that don’t have the same constraints as pixels. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to work with Live Shapes.
-
Working with PSD and Other File Types
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can edit images and work with popular image file formats; such as PNG; JPEG; GIF; and its native document format PSD. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to work with PSD and other image file formats.
-
Working with Text Rendering and Paragraph Text
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can create; modify; and render paragraph texts effectively. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to work with paragraph text.
-
Save an Image for the Web
Adobe Photoshop CS6 includes the Save for Web dialog box to enable you to make the best choices; such as quality versus file size; for online image output. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates the features available when optimizing an image for web use.
-
Saving an E-mail as a Template
Microsoft Outlook 2013 is a communication tool that helps save time with its predetermined email templates. In this video; Lynn Tao explains how to effectively create and save an email template in Outlook 2013.
-
Communicating with Contacts
LinkedIn is a popular social networking Website which allows users to connect with other professionals; build their professional network; and enhance their professional profile. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use email within LinkedIn to communicate with LinkedIn contacts.
-
Endorsements and Your Profile
In LinkedIn; you can enhance your profile by adding endorsements from your co-workers or friends. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses endorsements and how they can be added to the LinkedIn profile page.
-
How to Create a Account
A LinkedIn account is essential to initiate your professional networking in LinkedIn. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to create a LinkedIn account.
-
Searching for and Adding Contacts
LinkedIn is a popular social networking website that allows users to connect with other professionals; build their professional network; and enhance their professional profile. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to search for and add contacts using LinkedIn.
-
Setting Up Your Profile
LinkedIn is a popular social networking website that allows users to connect with other professionals; build their professional network; and enhance their professional profile. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to set up your LinkedIn profile.
-
Suggesting Connections
LinkedIn makes networking and building contacts with other professionals effortless. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses endorsements and connection suggestions using LinkedIn.
-
Upgrading Your Account
In LinkedIn; you can upgrade in order to take full advantage of its features. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Upgrade option in LinkedIn.
-
Configuring Settings
Twitter is a popular social media website where users can comment on what’s important to them and configure their Twitter account the way they want. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to configure your Twitter settings.
-
Creating Tweets and Using Hashtags
Twitter is a popular social media website where users can comment on what’s important to them and link messages using hashtags. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create tweets and use hashtags in your tweets.
-
Following and Unfollowing
In Twitter; you can follow and unfollow people to participate in the conversations. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Follow and Unfollow options in Twitter.
-
Sending Messages to Others
Twitter is a popular social media Website where users can comment on what’s important to them; participate in trending topics; and connect with and engage others. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to send messages to others using Twitter.
-
Shortening URLs
In Twitter; you can add hyperlinks to the tweets. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to shorten hyperlinks using Twitter and other methods.
-
Trending Topics
Twitter is a social media Website that allows users to express what’s important to them; update themselves on current topics; connect with; and engage others. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to search for trending topics using Twitter.
-
Privacy Settings
The privacy settings in Apple iOS 7 allow you to set various options for deciding how private or open your device will be. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates the purpose of; and how to set; some of these options.
-
Privacy Settings
Apple's iOS 7 allows you to tailor your iPad's Privacy settings to your security or privacy needs. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how Location Services and other settings affect your privacy and user experience; before introducing the Location-Based iAds and Popular Near Me services.
-
Reminders
With iOS 8 for iPhone; you can create and configure reminders that will be activated based on your specifications. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to create; configure; and delete reminders on your iPhone.
-
Reminders
In iOS 8 for iPad; you can schedule a reminder message for a specific time. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Reminders application to create a reminder for a particular day; and explores the alarm; repeat; calendar; priority; and notes options.
-
Apps
In iOS 8 for iPhone; you can easily download; update; browse; and search for apps through the App Store. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to navigate the App Store; and download and update apps on your iPhone.
-
Apps
In iOS 8 for iPad; you will find thousands of free; paid; and mostly inexpensive applications in the App Store. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Business option to view a selection of productivity applications.
-
Notes
iOS 8 provides an app you can use to easily work with notes on your iPhone. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to create and format notes using the Notes app on your iPhone.
-
Messages
iOS 8 for iPhone provides a messaging app that allows you to easily create and send different types of messages to other devices. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to create and send text; voice; and video messages using iOS 8's Messages settings.
-
Network Settings
The iOS 8 network settings for the iPhone allow you to control how and when your phone connects to Wi-Fi networks. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to configure your iOS 8 Wi-Fi network settings for the iPhone.
-
Using Siri
After watching this video; you will be able to use Siri to find information and manage your iPhone in iOS 9.
-
Using Siri
Siri; the intelligent personal assistant built into iPhone; recognizes and responds to natural speech. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to enable Siri; have a dialogue with her; and accomplish your tasks.
-
Organizing Apps
iPhone allows you to organize your apps into groups. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to take control and organize your iPhone apps to your own workflow.
-
Passcodes
Passcodes in iPhone allow you to secure vital information; such as email; back accounts; and sensitive documents. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to set up numeric and alphanumeric passcodes to restrict access to your phone.
-
Newsstand
The Newsstand App on iPhone allows you to access specific magazines and newspapers on your iPhone. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to search; shop; and download from the App Store.
-
Newsstand
Using iOS 8 for iPad; you can access magazines and newspapers on any subject from all over the world. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Newsstand application to search for Wired magazine and install a free preview.
-
Syncing Contacts with Gmail
iPhone allows you to synchronize the contacts on your phone with Google Contacts. In this video; Josh Penzell shows how to sync your contacts with the Google's cloud service.
-
Using Dictation
The dictation feature on iPhone allows you to dictate your text instead of typing. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use voice to compose a mail with punctuation.
-
Calendar
The Calendar app has been updated in iOS 7 running on the Apple iPhone; and features usability enhancements that provide well-organized; space-efficient views to better manage events. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates the different Calendar views; and how to review and edit the details of a scheduled event.
-
Calendar
In iOS 8 for iPhone; you can use the Calendar App to help organize events for both your work and personal life. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates some of the setting that are available to you and how to configure and use the Calendar App.
-
Calendar
Apple's iOS 7 Calendar app enhances your ability to navigate your iPad's calendar; change views; and create and edit events. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to navigate your iPad's calendar using continuous scrolling and views; and how to create; edit; and view events.
-
Calendar
In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the calendar feature in the Mac OS X Yosesmite operating system.
-
New Features of the Camera
In Apple iPhone iOS 7; you can now swipe your finger between panorama; video; and square modes. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Camera application to explore the video; square photos; panorama; filter; and Camera Roll options.
-
Spotlight Search
iOS 7 allows you to quickly search for content in your Apple iPhone's apps; e-mails; and contents by accessing Spotlight Search from anywhere on your Home screen. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to access Spotlight Search; perform a search; and configure the Spotlight Search criteria.
-
Syncing Mobile Devices with a Mac
iCloud is built into OS X; allowing you to easily synchronize your MacBook with your Apple iPhone or any other iOS 7 mobile devices and share content. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to configure the iCloud Control Panel options for photo sharing between a Mac and a mobile device; and how to sync media downloaded with iTunes.
-
Syncing Mobile Devices with a PC
iCloud allows you to manage and share content effortlessly by synchronizing your Apple iPhone; or other iOS 7 devices; with a Windows PC in a few easy steps. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to download the iCloud Control Panel for a PC and configure its sharing options; before highlighting the preferences in iTunes for syncing downloads.
-
Using AirDrop to Share Files Between Mobile Devices
You can share files on your Apple iPhone iOS 7 with mobile devices on the same Wi-Fi network. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the AirDrop feature to share a photo with an iPad device.
-
Antivirus Software
After watching this video; you will be able to describe characteristics and best practices for using antivirus software to protect your corporate computer.
-
Applying Effects to Bitmaps
After watching this video; you will be able to apply effects to bitmaps in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Audience Reports
After watching this video; you will be able to view reports about the people visiting and using your site.
-
Accessibility Options
iOS 7 provides enhanced accessibility options that help people with disabilities; as well as everyone else; to experience the function of iOS on the Apple iPhone through the many built-in assistive features. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates some of the new accessibility options and how to configure them from the Accessibility menu in the iOS 7 Settings app.
-
Arranging Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to arrange objects in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Cloning between Layers
After watching this video; you will be able to clone to a different layer in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Converting Anchor Points
After watching this video; you will be able to convert anchor points in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Changing the Background Wallpaper
iOS 7 allows you to change the background wallpaper of the Lock screen and Home screen separately on your Apple iPhone using built-in images; personal photos; or the new Dynamic Wallpaper. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates the different wallpaper options while setting the background of the Lock screen and Home screen; and how to arrange Home screen icons.
-
Creating a Document
After watching this video; you will be able to create a document in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Creating and Sharing Presentations
After watching this video; you will be able to create a presentation; add shapes and text; and share it with other contacts.
-
Creating Complex Paths
After watching this video; you will be able to create complex paths with the Pen tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Customizing the Ribbon
In Microsoft OneNote 2013; the Ribbon allows you to access the commands available to you. You can customize the Ribbon to suit your needs by choosing specific tabs; groups; and commands; and you can add or remove options as required. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to customize the Ribbon.
-
Extensions
In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the Extensions feature in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
How to Open; Place; and Export Files
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can work with content from all the popular design formats. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to open; place; and export files in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Use Workspaces
Adobe Flash Professional CC has several preset workspaces that users can choose from and customize while creating their applications and graphics. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use workspaces.
-
How to Use the Pen Tools
Adobe Illustrator CC has several flexible and effective tools such as Pen tools; for vectors and line art. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use Pen tools in Illustrator CC.
-
iCloud
iCloud keeps your iPad in sync with all your other devices. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to register with Apple and configure a few settings to get this free service working for you.
-
Inserting a Table of Contents
By using the built-in heading styles; Microsoft Word 2013 can automatically generate an updated table of contents that allows you to easily refer to the relevant sections of a document. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to insert a table of contents into a document.
-
Introduction to the Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to work with the interface in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Introduction to Color
After watching this video; you will be able to work with color in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Keyboard Shortcuts
In Adobe Premiere Pro CS6; you can assign keyboard shortcuts. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to access and set keyboard shortcuts for menu items in Premiere Pro CS6.
-
Linking Text Frames
After watching this video; you will be able to link text frames in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Isolating for Drawing
After watching this video; you will be able to isolate an object and draw around it in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Joining and Breaking Apart Paths
After watching this video; you will be able to join and break apart paths in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Notifications
The Notifications Center in iOS 8 provides a customizable means of retrieving notifications and accessing apps on your iPhone at any time. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to access and customize the iOS 8 Notifications Center for iPhone.
-
Manipulating Pages
After watching this video; you will be able to manipulate pages in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Printing
Microsoft Excel 2010 enables you to print your entire workbook or only a portion of the data in it. You can use the Print options to specify which data you want to print and set the page layout before printing it. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to print a portion of the data in a Sales workbook.
-
Placing Text
After watching this video; you will be able to place text from a file in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Positioning Images
After watching this video; you will be able to position images in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Printing via Office Online
After watching this video; you will be able to print documents using Office Online.
-
Privacy
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the device location and the devices camera settings in Windows 10.
-
Adding Hyperlinks
Microsoft Access 2013 lets you incorporate hyperlinks to any documents; files and even e-mails. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to to add hyperlinks using Project 2013.
-
Bluetooth Devices
After watching this video; you will be able to Install Bluetooth-enabled devices in Windows 10.
-
Applying Responsive Themes
After watching this video; you will be able to create responsive projects and apply built-in themes in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Arranging Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to arrange objects in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Adding Column Guides
After watching this video; you will be able to add column guides in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Best Practices
There are various best practices available for making PowerPoint 2010 presentations more engaging and effective. In this video; Josh Penzell explains some basic rules to help avoid poor presentations.
-
Adding and Removing Anchor Points
After watching this video; you will be able to add and remove anchor points to paths in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Applications
In Windows 8; you can access all your applications; software programs; and system tools from one screen using the All apps button. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to launch; pin; and shop for applications.
-
Applying Table Styles
After watching this video; you will be able to apply different styles to a table in Word 2016.
-
Accessibility Options
The Accessibility features in iPad enable users with vision and hearing impairment to access and enjoy the device. In this video; Josh Penzell discusses how to configure the voice; gestures; text size; and colors on screen and make the device easier to use.
-
Adding Watermarks
The Watermark feature in Microsoft Word 2010 enables you to display transparent text or graphics behind the printed text in a document. You can have it appear on the background of every page or in specific sections. In this video; Steve English uses the Watermark feature to add a watermark to a draft copy of a document.
-
Applying Stroke and Fill
After watching this video; you will be able to apply stroke and fill in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Adding Pictures
After watching this video; you will be able to add locally saved and online pictures to a document and save an object as a picture in Word 2016.
-
App Store
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Windows App store to locate applications for purchase and download.
-
Apply Styles
Microsoft Word 2013 provides a number of predefined style options that can be easily and consistently applied; allowing you to create streamlined documents that stand out. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart applies styles to the headings of a document using the Styles menu in Word 2013.
-
Applying Effects
After watching this video; you will be able to apply effects in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Co-authoring Documents via Office 365
After watching this video; you will be able to use the co-authoring functionality in Office 365 to collaborate with others on documents.
-
Aligning
After watching this video; you will be able to align selections in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
App Store
In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use the App Store feature in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Best Practices
Following best practices in Microsoft OneNote 2013 will help you handle your work in a timely and organized fashion. In this video; Allen Goldberg demonstrates the four best practices that will help you work more effectively in OneNote 2013.
-
Anchoring Images in Text
After watching this video; you will be able to anchor images in text frames in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Sharing a Screen
Microsoft Lync 2010 allows you to collaborate and share information with your contacts. In this video; Erin Olsen demonstrates how to do screen sharing and give true control to your contact group.
-
Sharing Documents Using OneDrive for Business
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; users can be invited to share documents in OneDrive. Without having to send out an e-mail invitation; invited users would have explicit permissions to access documents. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to share documents using OneDrive for business and how this functionality works.
-
Signing on Using a Local Computer Account
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use a local computer to sign in and access Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Accessibility Options
Apple's iOS 7 offers multiple accessibility options to those who have physical difficulty using their iPads. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use the iOS 7 Settings app to configure multiple Accessibility features and technologies accommodating physical and sensory impairments.
-
Annotations
After watching this video; you will be able to use the annotations toll to make notes on a web page in Windows 10.
-
Setting Preferences
After watching this video; you will be able to set preferences in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Control Center
The Control Center is a new iOS 7 feature that allows you to quickly change commonly used settings and access certain apps on the Apple iPhone from anywhere within the iOS. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to access the Control Center; the settings you can adjust; and the apps you can use directly from the Control Panel.
-
Creating Gradient Fills
After watching this video; you will be able to create and modify gradient fills in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Creating Task Lists
After watching this video; you will be able to create and add multiple tasks in Google Calendar.
-
Text Boxes
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 includes two types of text boxes. Text boxes can have a specific width and wrap text automatically; or they can automatically adjust their width as you enter text. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create text boxes and change the text layout and appearance.
-
The Pen Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Pen tool in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Creating Glow Effects in
After watching this video; you will be able to create a glow effect in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Templates
Templates are premade forms in Microsoft Excel 2010 that can provide a lot of the labels and formulas you might need without having to set them up. You can create your own or use built-in templates in Excel. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to open; save; and modify templates.
-
The Dock
In this video; Jamie Campbell describes the Dock bar in the Mac OS X Yosemite operating system.
-
The Lasso Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Lasso tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Creating Tables
After watching this video; you will be able to create tables in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can customize the Quick Access Toolbar to add and group command that you use often. In this video; Lynn Tao explains how to customize the Quick Access Toolbar.
-
File Sharing
After watching this video; you will be able to configure file sharing across network-connected devices.
-
How to Use Rulers and Guides
Adobe Photoshop CC provides the ability to align objects and texts with precision while creating designs. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to work with Rulers and Guides in Adobe Photoshop CC.
-
How to Work with Color
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can choose a perfect color from the different color selection methods. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to work with colors using Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
How to Work with Layers
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can use a layer and assign objects to it. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to work with the Layers feature in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
Outlook in Office 365
After watching this video; you will be able to use the business version of Outlook Online in Office 365.
-
Personalization
After watching this video; you will be able to configure options for desktop background; colors; and the system lock screen in Windows 10.
-
Placing Text
After watching this video; you will be able to place text files in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
PowerPoint Online in Office 365
After watching this video; you will be able to access and use PowerPoint Online in Office 365.
-
Prerequisites
After watching this video; you will be able to define prerequisites for Mac OS X Yosemite prior to upgrading.
-
Printing
In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the print settings in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Recording New Narration onto a Slide
In Adobe Captivate 7; you can add additional narration after you have recorded a demo or simulation. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to use the Record button to add a new narration that will go onto a single slide.
-
Setting Preferences
After watching this video; you will be able to modify preferences in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Task Manager
In Windows 8; the improved and redesigned Task Manager provides more options and information on processes for apps and allows you to do a direct restart of Windows Explorer. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to access and use the improved Task Manager.
-
The Brush Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Brush tool in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Using OneDrive
In Microsoft Windows 8.1; you can synchronize files and store them securely in the cloud. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to use OneDrive to integrate and share files.
-
Variables
After watching this video; you will be able to use ActionScript variables in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Working with Calendar
The Calendar app in iPad allows you to view your agenda in many different ways and add and edit events. In this video; Josh Penzell shows you how to manage your calendars and keep your day on track.
-
The Pencil Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Pencil tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Transforming Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to transform objects in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Enable Users
Enabling users in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 is a simple task. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure Internet Explorer security settings and enable multiple users to use the Lync Server services.
-
How to Create Transparency
Adobe Illustrator offers powerful transparency features to create amazing results. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to create transparency.
-
How to Use the Pen Tools
Adobe Flash Professional CC has several drawing and pen tools that enable users to create stunning effects with their creations. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the pen tools.
-
How to Use the Selection Tools
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can use the Selection tool to select and modify the objects. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Selection Tools in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
Installing the Extension Manager
After watching this video; you will be able to install extension manager in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Introduction to Layers
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can work with layers to create visual masterpieces. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses layers and explains how they work.
-
Maps
After watching this video; you will be able to configure settings for the Windows 10 Maps feature to store favourite location details.
-
People
After watching this video; you will be able to configure settings for the Windows 10 People feature to store contact information.
-
Privacy Controls
Privacy controls on iPad allow you to set limits on and control what private information about you goes out. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to manage location-based services and enjoy the iPad experience.
-
Search
Windows 8 has been designed to be search centric. It’s all about searching and finding the information that you need in a relevant way. You can perform searches for files; places; and people quickly and easily using the Search feature. In this video; Byron Hynes uses the Search feature in Windows 8 to search for files.
-
Setting up a Project Calendar
After watching this video; you will be able to set up a project calendar in Project 2016.
-
Sharing Documents Using SharePoint Online
After watching this video; you will be able to use SharePoint Online to share and manage documents.
-
Taking Mail Offline with Outlook in Office 365
Microsoft Office 365 allows you to take mail offline with Outlook using any modern browser; such as Internet Explorer or Chrome. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to take mail offline with Outlook.
-
The Refine Edge Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Refine Edge tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The Start Screen
The Microsoft Windows 8.1 Start screen provides a simple; clean; and uncluttered interface for you to interact with; using the touch screen and the keyboard and mouse. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to perform basic operations from the Start screen in Windows 8.1.
-
Working with
After watching this video; you will be able to practice working with Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Working with Doc Files
After watching this video; you will be able to move files around within Google Drive.
-
Working with Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to work with objects in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Configuring Workspaces
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and save workspaces in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Creating Drawings
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new drawing and use the Google drawing tools.
-
Creating Tables
Microsoft OneNote 2013 allows you to create tables so you can organize your information more easily. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to use the table group to insert tables into your notebooks.
-
Introducing
Twitter is a popular social media website where users can participate in discussions. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to Twitter.
-
Introducing
After watching this video; you will be able to find and launch Google apps.
-
iTunes Radio
Apple iPad iOS 7 allows users to listen to iTunes Radio; which is now integrated with the Music app. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to create a new station; choose a genre; and step through music tracks. He also explains the difference between the free service and the paid service.
-
Managing Documents Using SharePoint Online
After watching this video; you will be able to use SharePoint Online to manage documents.
-
PC Settings and Lock Screen
Microsoft Windows 8's PC settings and lock screen feature enable you; whether you operate a standalone machine or a network with multiple user accounts; to customize and personalize your computer's search; privacy; device; notification; and HomeGroup. In this video; Isabel Garcia introduces these settings and shows you how to enable and customize Windows 8's lock screen feature.
-
Resizing and Moving Rows and Columns
After watching this video; you will be able to change cell spacing in tables and adjust table cell margins in Word 2016.
-
Resizing Images
After watching this video; you will be able to resize images in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Rotating and Reflecting
After watching this video; you will be able to use Rotate and Reflect in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Safari
In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the features of Safari; the Mac OS X Yosemite web browser.
-
Scaling; Shearing; and Reshaping
After watching this video; you will be able to apply Scale; Shear; and Reshape settings in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
The Clone Stamp Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Clone Stamp tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The Scissors Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Scissors tool in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Use New Features
After watching this video; you will be able to create multiple desktops; change a device to Tablet mode; and set an alarm in Windows 10.
-
Working with Color
After watching this video; you will be able to work with color in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Working with Images
After watching this video; you will be able to work with images and tools in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Cloning from Different Files
After watching this video; you will be able to clone from different image files in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Creating a New Project
In Adobe Premiere Pro CS6; you can create projects. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to create a new project; video presets; and how to add video clips to a project.
-
Customize the Ribbon
Microsoft Project 2013 enables users to customize the ribbon by creating their own tabs. Like the standard ribbon; a custom tab can contain collections of similar commands arranged in groups. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to add a new tab containing a group of commands; and how to remove a custom tab.
-
Exercise: Work with Paths
After watching this video; you will be able to practice working with the Adobe Photoshop CC 2015 interface.
-
Handling Errors
Microsoft Excel 2010 makes it easy to find and fix errors in your workbooks using the Data Validation; Error Checking; Trace Error; and Evaluate Formula features. In addition; you can use functions to test for errors. In this video; Adam Wilcox demonstrates how to find; resolve; and test for errors in a workbook.
-
How to Create Clipping Masks
Adobe Illustrator works with clipping masks to remove or edit information from and around the image. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to use clipping masks.
-
How to use Free Transform
Adobe Photoshop CC allows you to place objects and work with layers. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Free Transform feature Photoshop CC.
-
Joins
Microsoft Access 2013 uses joins as a method of connecting multiple data sources; in order to perform a query based on the combined data values of the different sources. In this video; Gary Leenhouts performs a query on two related tables before demonstrating how to change the join between them and alter the query.
-
Mail
In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the features of the Mail application in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Marking a Document as Final
After watching this video; you will be able to protect a document by marking it as a final version in Word 2016.
-
Multitasking
Windows 8 handles running multiple applications concurrently differently from previous versions. The Task Manager has several new options to enable you to easily switch between or end Metro and traditional desktop applications. In this video; Byron Hynes uses the Task Manager to manage the execution of your applications in the desktop and Metro modes.
-
Navigating the Workspace
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate documents in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Navigating the Workspace
After watching this video; you will be able to familiarize yourself with the workspace and understand how to navigate around documents in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Notifications
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the options available in the Notifications menu.
-
Placing Images
After watching this video; you will be able to place images in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Search
Microsoft Windows 8.1 makes it easy to conduct searches. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates various ways you can conduct searches and configure search behavior in Microsoft Windows 8.1.
-
The Eraser Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Eraser tool in AdobeFlash Professional CC 2015.
-
The Eyedropper Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Eyedropper tool to select colors in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Magic Wand Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Magic Wand tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The Slice Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Slice tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Time Machine
OS X 10.9 Mavericks includes Time Machine; a built-in backup feature that automatically backs up your entire Mac allowing you to easily go back in time to restore file to specific dates. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to set up Time Machine backups using an external drive; and how to select backups from the restore interface.
-
Using Comments
After watching this video; you will be able to add and modify comments in a Microsoft Excel 2016 workbook.
-
Using Google Calendars
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate the Google Calendar interface; and use the features of Google Calendar.
-
Working with Drafts in Office 365
The Drafts mail folder in Microsoft Office Online and Office 365 provides you with additional mail management capabilities for e-mails not yet ready to be sent. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create a draft and manage it from the Drafts folder.
-
Configuring Workspaces
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and save workspaces in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Creating a Mask with a Path
After watching this video; you will be able to use a path to create a mask in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Creating Sequences
In Adobe Premiere Pro CS6; you can create sequences from imported assets. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to create a new sequence and how to modify a workspace.
-
How to Create New Documents
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can create new documents easily if you apply the correct settings. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to create a new document and how the various settings are used.
-
Managing E-mail Messages
After watching this video; you will be able to move e-mails under different tabs; and label e-mails.
-
New Look and Feel
After watching this video; you will be able to describe the new font and changes to the common icon.
-
Office Marketplace Apps
After watching this video; you will be able to extend Office 365 functionality using the applications available in the Office Marketplace.
-
Presentations
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new presentation; choose a theme; create objects; and arrange objects.
-
Privacy
After watching this video; you will be able to configure privacy setting in Safari on Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Saving and Organizing Files on OneDrive for Business
After watching this video; you will be able to organize files and create and navigate directories using OneDrive for Business.
-
Shutting Down
Windows 8 enables you to shut down; restart; or log off from the computer's charms bar Power button; Start screen account profile; or using keyboard hotkey options. In this video; Isabel Garcia introduces and demonstrates each method of shutting down; restarting; or logging off from your computer.
-
SkyDrive
Microsoft Office 2013's SkyDrive enables you to access; manage; edit; synchronize; and share – from the Windows 8 Start screen of any of your devices – your cloud-based document libraries. In this video; Isabel Garcia introduces you to SkyDrive's cloud-based interface and demonstrates its functions and features.
-
Templates
Microsoft Project 2013 enables you to create project templates from existing project documents; negating duplication of effort. Cleaned of project-specific data such as date constraints; error-free templates ensure the success of future projects. In this video; Ashley Hunt saves a Microsoft Project 2013 document as a Project Template; and cleans it further using Project's Save As Template wizard.
-
The Office 365 People App
In Microsoft Office 365; the People application is where your personal contacts are stored and where you can view address books. You will also discover who is available within your own mailbox's contact list. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how you can log into Office 365 and access your Global Address List.
-
The Pencil Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Pencil tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Working with Junk Mail in Office 365
Microsoft Office Online and Office 365 provide you with a Junk mail folder and capabilities for handling junk mail that make mail management much easier. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage Junk mail and the Junk mail folder in Office 365.
-
Working with Tables
Microsoft Word 2013 allows you to manage the data and alter the layout of tables within your documents. In this video; Tiffany Gelbart demonstrates how to add rows to a table; apply various sorting options; and repeat the header rows.
-
Contacts
In iOS 8 for iPad; you can use the interactive features of the Contacts application to send messages and hold voice and video conversations. In this video; Bob Flisser uses FaceTime's phone icon to have an audio-only conversation.
-
Creating Charts
Microsoft Project 2013 enables you to quickly and easily create and customize charts that compile the project data in a graphical report that you can use to convey an overview of information in a concise and easy-to-read format. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to create a chart report and highlights some of the different formatting options.
-
Creating New Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to create new documents in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Find and Replace Data
After watching this video; you will be able to search a workbook to find and replace data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Hot Corners and Hot Keys
In Windows 8; there are hot corners and hot keys that you can use to navigate the new interfaces; as well as access your applications; commands; and your files. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to use hot corners and hot keys to access the Charms bar; Quick Access menu; and Start screen; and to boot into Safe Mode.
-
How to Configure and Use Workspaces
Adobe Illustrator CC's workspaces allow you to customize and streamline your workflow. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to configure and use workspaces in Illustrator CC.
-
How to Group and Arrange Objects
In Adobe InDesign CC; everything you create is treated as an object; and you can manage multiple objects by arranging them. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to group and arrange objects in InDesign CC.
-
How to Use the Selection Tools
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can modify objects in different ways by using its various tools. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses InDesign CC’s Selection tools and shows you how they are used.
-
Importing Contacts
After watching this video; you will be able to import contacts in CSV format.
-
Introduction to the Timeline
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate the Timeline interface in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Isolating a Layer Object
After watching this video; you will be able to isolate a layer object and create transparency in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Placing Text on a Path
After watching this video; you will be able to place text on a path in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Privacy
After watching this video; you will be able to accessing history and cookies settings in Microsoft Edge.
-
The Eraser Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Eraser Tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The History Brush Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the History Brush tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
The Magic Wand Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Magic Wand tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Transposing Data
After watching this video; you will be able to use TRANSPOSE to alter a worksheet in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Using Messaging
iPad’s powerful instant messaging service allows you to stay connected with friends and have fun. In this video; Josh Penzell discusses how to send and receive messages in real time.
-
Using Rulers and Guides
After watching this video; you will be able to work with rulers and create guides in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Using Smart Guides
After watching this video; you will be able to use smart guides in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Using the Scissors Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Scissors Tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Working with
After watching this video; you will be able to practice object transformations with Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Working with Contacts
The Contacts app on iPad is simple and powerful. In this video; Josh Penzell shows how the device frees you of the impossible task of committing hundreds and thousands of snail mail addresses; birthdays; and important information to memory.
-
Working with Google Drive Files
After watching this video; you will be able to enable files offline; organize folders and files; and move files around in the drive.
-
Working with Layers
After watching this video; you will be able to manage layers on the Timeline in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Working with Objects
In Adobe Fireworks CS6; all the graphic types that are used are treated as objects. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to works with objects in Adobe fireworks CS6.
-
Word Online in Office 365
Microsoft Office Online and Office 365's integration of OneDrive and Word Online facilitates the creation; editing; storage; and sharing of documents. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to sign in to Office 365 to show how the integration of OneDrive and Word Online provides the functionality of Microsoft Word online.
-
Working with Graphics
In Microsoft Outlook 2010; you can embed or attach images to your e-mails. You can also manipulate images that you've added to the body of a message. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add an image to an e-mail and make any necessary adjustments.
-
Working with Tables
Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 enables you to add tables to your presentation. You can also easily format these tables to help present complex information in an organized and structured manner. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to add a table to a slide and then use various table formatting options.
-
Autosave Screen Shots
Windows 8 makes screenshots effortless by automatically naming and saving them to your Pictures library; ready for launch in your Photos app. In this video; Isabel Garcia takes a screenshot and saves it to the Pictures library before viewing it in the Photos app.
-
Creating Gmail Signatures
After watching this video; you will be able to add signatures in the settings area of Google Mail.
-
Creating Text Frames
After watching this video; you will be able to create text frames to place text in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Drag and Drop from Other Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to drag and drop from other documents in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Drawings Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to give your drawing a name; resize drawings; use the menus; navigate in the workspace; and add text and graphics.
-
Introducing
LinkedIn is a popular social networking website that allows users to connect with other professionals and enhance their professional profile. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to LinkedIn.
-
Lists
Lists in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allow users to share information in a structured way. In this video; David Santana discusses the additional uses of this feature in SharePoint 2013.
-
Mail
In iOS 8 for iPad; the built-in Mail application provides a number of sophisticated features. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the Notify Me feature to beep when a new message arrives in the Inbox; and examines features such as editing a signature; and viewing and marking mail.
-
Markup
The Markup feature in Mac OS X Yosemite helps to quickly annotate an image or a PDF attachment in Mail. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to mark up attachments in the Mail application.
-
Marquee Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to make simple marquee selections in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
New Features
After watching this video; you will be able to identify the new features available in Microsoft Windows 10.
-
New Look and Feel
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the new look and feel of Skype for Business.
-
Notification Settings
iPad allows you to configure and manage the notifications settings for your applications. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to configure the notification settings and make sure you are only informed of something important when you absolutely want to be.
-
Security
After watching this video; you will be able to configure security preferences in Safari on Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Signing on Using a Microsoft Live Account
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use a Microsoft live account to sign in and access Microsoft Windows 10.
-
Start Screen Overview
In Windows 8; the Start screen launches first when you log in. This Start screen has a new interface that allows you to navigate to your applications. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates how to navigate the Start screen using the All apps button; Charms Bar; and Quick Access menu.
-
The Magic Wand Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Magic Wand tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
The Office 365 Lync App
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; Lync Online is more than able to replace desktop functionality if you do not have the desktop client installed. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how The Lync Online web client gives you significant meeting functionality.
-
The Pencil Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Pencil Tool in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Tracing Bitmaps
After watching this video; you will be able to trace bitmaps in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Using Semantic Zoom
In Microsoft Windows 8.1; you can zoom in or out to vary the presentation of information according to your needs. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to use the Semantic Zoom feature to navigate and zoom around various Windows pages.
-
Using Text Layers to Modify Other Layers
After watching this video; you will be able to use text layers to modify other layers in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Working with Transparency
In Adobe Photoshop you can edit existing pictures by using Transparency; especially with the color white. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses transparency and demonstrates how to select solid backgrounds and make them transparent.
-
Wrapping Text Around Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to wrap text around objects in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Working with Text
In Adobe Fireworks CS6; you can add text into the projects. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to add text in Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
Configuring the Workspace
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the workspace in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Configuring Workspaces
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use workspaces in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Contacts
Mac OS X Yosemite offers many new features such as Contacts. When you create contacts; they are automatically integrated into other applications. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses the Contacts application.
-
Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar
After watching this video; you will be able to modify the Quick Access Toolbar layout in Excel 2016.
-
Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar
After watching this video; you will be able to add commands to the Quick Access Toolbar and change its default position in Word 2016.
-
Enabling and Using AutoRecover
PowerPoint 2013 has a unique AutoRecover feature. The feature will back up files in any case there’s a power outage or system crash. In this video; Lynn Tao discusses this feature and shows you how to recover files.
-
Excel Online in Office 365
After watching this video; you will be able to access and use Excel Online in Office 365.
-
How to Create Gradients
In Adobe Photoshop CC; you can create gradient effects on an image. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to use the Gradient Tool and its various options.
-
Inserting Images
After watching this video; you will be able to insert an image into a document and align it.
-
Notifications
In iOS 8 for iPad; you can insert widgets into the Notification Center. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the App Store application to search for PCalc Lite and install a free version on the desktop; before attaching it to the Notification Center.
-
Placing Images
After watching this video; you will be able to place images in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Resizing Images
After watching this video; you will be able to resize images in Adobe InDesign CC 2014.
-
Safari
Safari has a number of great features that you can use in iOS 8 for iPad. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates features such as adding bookmarks and taking an image of a credit card; and uses the Handoff feature to continue using an application on one device that was started off on another device.
-
Selecting Objects on the Fly Using Ctrl
After watching this video; you will be able to select and modify objects on the fly using the Ctrl key in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
The Brush Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Brush tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Transparency
After watching this video; you will be able to create transparency in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using a Microsoft Account
In Microsoft Windows 8.1; you can log in using a Microsoft account; which is an account housed in Microsoft’s public cloud services. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to log in using a Microsoft account and the advantages of doing this in Windows 8.
-
Working with E-mail Using Outlook in Office 365
In Microsoft Office Online and Office 365; working with and organizing e-mail is an essential skill. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use Outlook Online to manage your mailbox.
-
Working with Layers
After watching this video; you will be able to use layers in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Working with Master Pages
After watching this video; you will be able to work with master pages in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Create a Project
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new project and set up a project calendar in Project 2016.
-
Creating Alerts
Creating alerts in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to receive specific email notifications on site pages; search query results; and any list or site page. In this video; David Santana shows you how to set up alerts.
-
Configuring Workspaces
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and save workspaces in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Converting a Selection into a Path
After watching this video; you will be able to convert a selection into a path in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Counting Words in a Document
After watching this video; you will be able to count words in a document by using the Word count feature under Tools.
-
Creating a New Project
After watching this video; you will be able to create a new project in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Creating New Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to create new documents in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Customizing the Ribbon
In Microsoft Project 2013; you can customize the ribbon. In this video; Lynn Tao demonstrates how to customize the ribbon in Microsoft Project 2013.
-
Finder
In this video; Jamie Campbell outlines the uses of the Finder application in the Mac OS X Yosemite operating system.
-
How to Align Objects
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can create objects and align them. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to align objects.
-
How to Work with Layers
In Adobe InDesign CC; you can use the Layers feature while working with complex document designs. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to work with the Layers feature.
-
Making a Selection with a Path
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Pen tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Overview
Microsoft Office 2013 offers a clean new look. The features you already know how to use are still there; and it still offers the ribbon interface. In this video; Isabel Garcia demonstrates some of the new features and changes made to the user interface; starting with Word 2013.
-
Using Templates
After watching this video; you will be able to create new documents from templates in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Using the Online Store
After watching this video; you will be able to download apps for Word 2016 from the Microsoft Store Online.
-
Using the Selection Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use the selection tools in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Working with Images
After watching this video; you will be able to place bitmap images and modify them in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Working with Text
Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 includes a number of formatting options to emphasize headings and other text in a presentation. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to make text more presentable by using formatting such as character spacing and WordArt.
-
Creating Drop Shadows
After watching this video; you will be able to create a drop shadow in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Creating Templates
After watching this video; you will be able to create and use templates in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Customizing the User Interface
Microsoft Windows 8.1 allows you to customize the user interface; according to your preferences and making it better suited to your working environment. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to personalize the Start screen and change PC settings in Windows 8.1.
-
Guided Access
Guided access on iPad is a powerful and useful resource for teaching an individual or group of people how to use a specific app. In this video; Josh Penzell discusses how to enable the feature; restrict access to areas of the screen; and start and end sessions.
-
Changing the Default Number of Recent Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to change the default number of recent documents listed in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Create a Site Page
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to create and edit site pages. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a new page in the SharePoint Team Site.
-
Create an Asset Library
The asset library in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to upload and share media-rich content. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create an asset library to store media.
-
Creating Charts
Charts in Microsoft Word 2010 are useful for showing table data in a visual format; such as a graph. In this video; Steve English uses the Chart feature to create a bar chart from a table of data and edit the appearance of the bar chart using different layouts.
-
Creating New Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to create new documents in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Creating New Documents
After watching this video; you will be able to create new documents in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Editing Artboards
After watching this video; you will be able to edit artboards in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Explore a Publishing Site
Publishing a publishing site in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 is an important task. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to explore a publishing site and explains how it is different from an intranet corporate site.
-
Graphing Tools
After watching this video; you will be able to use Graph tools in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Grouping
Microsoft Project 2013 allows you to quickly group your information so that you can sort through your project details easily. In this video; Ashley Hunt demonstrates how to use the grouping function in Microsoft Project 2013.
-
How to Create a Account
To connect and engage with others in Twitter; you have to create a Twitter account. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains the process of creating a Twitter account.
-
Inserting and Creating Equations
In Microsoft Word 2013; you can insert equations in the document. In this video; Lyn Tao demonstrates how to insert predefined equations and create new equations in Word 2013.
-
Rulers and Guides
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use rulers and guides in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Splitting Layout View
After watching this video; you will be able to split the layout view in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
The Grid
After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use the grid in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Threading Text
After watching this video; you will be able to thread text between frames a file in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Typesetting
After watching this video; you will be able to use typesetting features in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Working with Color
After watching this video; you will be able to work with color in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
How to Set Fill and Stroke
In Adobe Flash Professional CC; you can use the Fill color and Stroke color controls to determine the changes done to the stroke and fill of the selected object. In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to set the Fill color and Stroke color in Adobe Flash Professional CC.
-
Notifications
After watching this video; you will be able to gain quick access to Office 365 administrative notification area.
-
Office 365 Calendar Sharing and Subscription
After watching this video; you will be able to share and subscribe to calendars using the Calendar application in Office 365.
-
OneNote Online in Office 365
After watching this video; you will be able to access and use OneNote Online in Office 365.
-
PC Settings Overview
In Microsoft Windows 8.1; you users access a wide range of settings using either the modern Windows UI or the traditional desktop. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates application-specific and general settings and preferences in the modern Windows UI; as well as settings in the Control Panel.
-
Placing Bitmap Images
After watching this video; you will be able to place bitmap images into Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Recycle Bin
The Recycle Bin in Microsoft SharePoint 2010 allows you to recover documents accidentally deleted. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to view and restore deleted items.
-
Safari
Safari; iPad’s built-in browser; is simple; fast; and easy to use. In this video; Josh Penzell discusses the features of Safari and demonstrates how to configure and customize it for safe browsing.
-
Selecting Objects
After watching this video; you will be able to select objects in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
Tags
In this video; Jamie Campbell demonstrates how to create and rename tags to organize documents in Mac OS X Yosemite.
-
Working with Pages
Adobe Fireworks CS6 is a powerful bitmap and vector graphics editor that’s used primarily to develop graphics intended for screen output. It is ideal for web designers wanting to build sophisticated graphics for devices and employ rapid prototyping of websites; or design application interfaces. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to work with pages in Adobe Fireworks CS6.
-
Configuring Email
iPad allows you the easy; instant access to mails that you would want from a mobile device. In this video; Josh Penzell shows how to create a mail account on iPad and configure settings to access mail from anywhere.
-
Creating a Custom Slide Show
After watching this video; you will be able to create a custom slide show from particular slides within a presentation in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Creating Tables
After watching this video; you will be able to insert or draw a table and add an Excel spreadsheet to a slide in PowerPoint 2016.
-
Creating Tables
You can add tables in Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 to visually organize data in a presentation. In this video; Steve English demonstrates how to create and modify a simple table.
-
Fitting Images
After watching this video; you will be able to fit images in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Mail and Facetime
The Mail and FaceTime apps in iOS 7 allow you to easily communicate with others. They have both been updated to include some new features. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates some of the new features of the Mail and FaceTime apps.
-
Multitasking and App Switching
Apple iPad iOS 7 allows apps to run in the background; enabling true multitasking. In this video; Bob Flisser uses the iOS 7 application switcher's multitasking screen to show you how to view; access; activate; switch; and close single or multiple apps.
-
Placing Text on a Path
After watching this video; you will be able to place text on a path in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Setting Permissions and Notifications
After watching this video; you will be able to set viewing permissions and send e-mail notifications to recipients.
-
Templates
After watching this video; you will be able to use templates to create new Flash documents in Adobe Flash Professional CC 2015.
-
The Desktop
The Windows 8.1 Desktop; Start screen; and Charms bar allow you to run applications; manage your files; and access a number of system tools. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to navigate between the Start screen and Desktop; access the Quick Access menu; and personalize the Desktop and Start screen when working on both touchscreen and desktop computers.
-
The Lasso Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Lasso tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
The Polygonal Lasso Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Polygonal Lasso tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2014.
-
Using Rulers and Guides
After watching this video; you will be able to work with rulers and create guides in Adobe InDesign CC 2015.
-
Working with Tables
In Microsoft Publisher 2013; you can create table to organize and display your data. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses working with tables in Publisher.
-
Working with Text
After watching this video; you will be able to work with text in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Configuring the Workspace
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the workspace in Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015.
-
Creating Tables
After watching this video; you will be able to create tables and apply quick table layouts in Word 2016.
-
Creating Type
After watching this video; you will be able to create type in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Feathering
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Feathering feature in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Mission Control
In OS X 10.9 Mavericks; Mission Control combines Dashboard; Exposé; and Desktops; helping you to keep open files and apps organized on your Mac. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates the different methods for entering Mission Control; and how to organize your desktop by moving certain open applications to a new desktop.
-
Multitasking
Microsoft Windows 8.1 provides enhanced multitasking features that allow you to work concurrently with different applications in an intuitive and efficient way. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to manipulate multiple applications on the Start screen and the desktop; and highlights information relevent to the apps you're running with the Task Manager Details tab.
-
Printing
iPad allows you to print directly to a compatible printer. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to print directly to a compatible printer with just a few clicks of a button.
-
Security
Microsoft Access 2013 enables you to encrypt and password protect your organization's databases – in exclusive use mode – for secure use by individuals using mobile devices. In this video; Gary Leenhouts opens a database in Exclusive mode; uses the Encrypt with Password feature to set a password; and tests its encryption.
-
Task Manager
In Microsoft Windows 8.1; the Task Manager features several changes since previous versions of the OS aimed at improving its functionality and ease of use. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to use the Task Manager in Microsoft Windows 8.1.
-
The Magnetic Lasso Tool
After watching this video; you will be able to use the Magnetic Lasso tool in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Filters
After watching this video; you will be able to filter data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Using OneDrive with Office 365
Microsoft Office 365 includes OneDrive; which allows you to save files and back up data to the cloud and access this information whenever you choose. It is entirely SharePoint based. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use OneDrive for Business as an effective file system replacement.
-
Using Templates
After watching this video; you will be able to create new documents from templates in Adobe Illustrator CC 2014.
-
Configuring the Workspace
After watching this video; you will be able to configure the workspace in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
How to Create Compound Paths
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can take sets of objects and group them quickly and create complex objects. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to use the Compound Path feature in Illustrator CC.
-
How to Set Fill and Stroke
In Adobe Illustrator CC; you can work with vectors; shapes; and line art. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to set the Fill and Stroke in Adobe Illustrator CC.
-
iMovie
iPad iOS 7's iMovie app allows you to easily create movies or trailers from video shot on your Apple device. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates iMovie's easy interface by creating an iMovie project; selecting a theme and theme music; and editing and playing his finished project.
-
Inserting Video and Animation
After watching this video; you will be able to insert video and animation including HTML 5 animation in Adobe Captivate 8.
-
Introducing Office Online for Office 365
After watching this video; you will be able to recognize key features and business uses of the Office Online applications in Office 365.
-
Introduction to the Interface
After watching this video; you will be able to work with the interface in Adobe Dreamweaver CC 2015.
-
Introduction to the Timeline
After watching this video; you will be able to navigate the Timeline interface in AdobeFlash Professional CC 2015.
-
Isolating and Cloning
After watching this video; you will be able to isolate and clone objects in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Lync Online Integration with Office Online
After watching this video; you will be able to use Lync Online with other Office 365 applications.
-
Placing Text
After watching this video; you will be able to place text from a file in Adobe Illustrator CC 2015.
-
Publishing Projects
Adobe Captivate 7 provides numerous options that allow you to configure and publish your project in different formats so it can be viewed optimally by others depending on their device. In this video; Bob Flisser demonstrates the publish settings and how to publish a Captivate project using the SWF and HTML5 output format options.
-
Remote Access
iPad allows you to remotely control your computer and access files. In this video; Josh Penzell demonstrates how to remotely access a desktop using the Internet and the LogMeIn app.
-
Setting Basic Print Options
After watching this video; you will be able to set basic print options in PowerPoint 2016.
-
The Office 365 Calendar App
The Office 365 Calendar App in Office 365 integrates with Outlook and the People view; offering several useful features. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to launch the Office 365 Calendar and change its view; as well as schedule meetings.
-
Using Adjustment Layers
After watching this video; you will be able to use adjustment layers in Adobe Photoshop CC 2015.
-
Using Compatibility Mode
After watching this video; you will be able to convert documents from previous versions of Word and understand the implications of doing this in Word 2016.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Generating Visual Reports in Excel and Visio
After watching this video, you will be able to create visual reports of project data exported from Project 2013 in Excel and Visio.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Exporting Timelines to E-mail
After watching this video, you will be able to export a timeline to an e-mail using Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Customizing Print Settings
After watching this video, you will be able to customize print settings in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Sharing a Custom View with Another Project
After watching this video, you will be able to use the Organizer to share a custom view with another project in Project 2013, without adding the view to the Global template.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Sharing Data with Excel
After watching this video, you will be able to import project data from Excel and export project data to Excel using Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Adding Documents and Links to a Project Plan
After watching this video, you will be able to attach supporting documents and links to a project plan in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Copying Timelines and Reports to Office Web Apps
After watching this video, you will be able to copy timelines and reports from Project 2013 to other Office Web Apps.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Highlighting Specific Project Data
After watching this video, you will be able to highlight project data that meets criteria you specify in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating New Custom Tables and Views
After watching this video, you will be able to create new custom tables and views in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using the Global Template
After watching this video, you will be able to use the Organizer to add a custom view to the Global template in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Syncing with a SharePoint Task List
After watching this video, you will be able to use functions in custom fields that contain formulas in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using SharePoint to Collect Progress Updates
After watching this video, you will be able to use SharePoint to collect team members' progress updates for a project in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Customizing Reports and Dashboards
After watching this video, you will be able to customize reports and dashboards in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Working with Cumulative Fields
After watching this video, you will be able to work with cumulative fields in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Copying a Report for Pasting into Other Documents
After watching this video, you will be able to copy a report for pasting into other documents in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Sharing Project Plans Using SharePoint
After watching this video, you will be able to create and use a custom field containing a formula in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Saving a Project in PDF or XPS Format
After watching this video, you will be able to save a project in the PDF or XPS file format in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting File Password Protection
After watching this video, you will be able to assign a password to protect a project file in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Built-in Reports and Dashboards
After watching this video, you will be able to report progress status in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Reporting Data for a Given Date Range
After watching this video, you will be able to report on project data for a date range you specify in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Task Path Highlighting
After watching this video, you will be able to use the Task Path feature in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Tracking Date, Work, and Cost Variances
After watching this video, you will be able to track date, work, and cost variances by comparing actual progress against baselines in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Identifying Task Slippage
After watching this video, you will be able to identify potential task slippage using the Tracking Gantt view in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Views for Tracking Variances
After watching this video, you will be able to use different views to track variances in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using the Task Inspector
After watching this video, you will be able to use the Task Inspector to identify and resolve scheduling problems in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Updating Actual Progress
After watching this video, you will be able to update actual progress information in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Updating Project Dates
After watching this video, you will be able to update the status date, current date, actual start and actual finish in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Work and Usage Views to Monitor Progress
After watching this video, you will be able to use actual work and usage views to monitor actual progress in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Rescheduling or Cancelling Tasks
After watching this video, you will be able to reschedule uncompleted work and cancel unnecessary tasks in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Working with Multiple Baselines
After watching this video, you will be able to create and view multiple baselines for a project in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Customizing Existing Project Views
After watching this video, you will be able to customize existing views so they show specific types of information in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Grouping Project Data
After watching this video, you will be able to use predefined and custom groups to group related project data in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Filtering Tasks and Resources
After watching this video, you will be able to filter tasks and resources using predefined and custom filters, as well as AutoFilters, in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Sorting Project Data in Views
After watching this video, you will be able to sort project data within existing views in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Viewing the Critical Path
After watching this video, you will be able to view the critical path for a single project in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Viewing the Critical Path for a Master Project
After watching this video, you will be able to view the critical path for a master project in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Viewing Total Slack for a Project
After watching this video, you will be able to view total slack for a project in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Tracking and Managing Project Progress
After watching this video, you will be able to track and manage the progress of a project in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Resolving Resource Overallocations
After watching this video, you will be able to identify and resolve resource over-allocations in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: The Effect of the Critical Path
After watching this video, you will be able to recognize how the critical path affects a project's finish date in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Saving Project Files to OneDrive
After watching this video, you will be able to set general project options in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Templates from Office.com
After watching this video, you will be able to set default task types in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using VBA to Automate Routine Operations
After watching this video, you will be able to implement manual or automatic scheduling and recognize the implications of each scheduling mode in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Communicate and Share Project Data
After watching this video, you will be able to customize a view and export and share project information in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Adding Apps to Project 2013
After watching this video, you will be able to add graphical indicators to custom fields in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Leveling Resources
After watching this video, you will be able to describe resource leveling, its benefits, and its limitations in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: The Team Planner View
After watching this video, you will be able to access and navigate the Team Planner view in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Team Planner to Resolve Overallocations
After watching this video, you will be able to use the Team Planner view to manually level resources in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Modifying Resource Assignments
After watching this video, you will be able to edit resource assignments in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Monitoring Resource Use
After watching this video, you will be able to use task and resource views to monitor resource use in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Monitoring Resource Availability Across Projects
After watching this video, you will be able to monitor resource use and availability across multiple projects in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Changing Resource Assignments
After watching this video, you will be able to change resource assignment information and replace resources in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Task Forms to Assign Resources
After watching this video, you will be able to use task forms to create and modify resource assignments in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Assigning Multiple Resources to a Single Task
After watching this video, you will be able to assign multiple resources per task in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Assigning Part-Time Resources
After watching this video, you will be able to assign part-time resources in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting Project Baselines
After watching this video, you will be able to create baselines for a project in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Updating a Project Baseline
After watching this video, you will be able to update an existing project baseline in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting Fixed Costs
After watching this video, you will be able to assign fixed costs to tasks in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Resource Rate Tables
After watching this video, you will be able to use resource rate tables in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Configuring Accrual Options
After watching this video, you will be able to add the Accrue At field to a resource view and select appropriate accrual options in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Manage Resources
After watching this video, you will be able to work with resources in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Team Planner to Assign or Schedule Tasks
After watching this video, you will be able to use the Team Planner view to assign and schedule tasks in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Team Planner to Substitute Resources
After watching this video, you will be able to substitute resources using the Team Planner view in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting Resource Rates
After watching this video, you will be able to assign rate-based costs for resources in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting Per Use Costs for Resources
After watching this video, you will be able to assign costs per use for material and work resources in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: User-Controlled Summary Tasks
After watching this video, you will be able to display and use user-controlled summary tasks in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating a Shared Resource Pool
After watching this video, you will be able to create a shared resource pool in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Connecting to a Resource Pool
After watching this video, you will be able to connect to a resource pool in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating Project Links and Resolving Conflicts
After watching this video, you will be able to create links between projects and resolve conflicts between linked projects in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Effort-Driven versus Fixed Duration Tasks
After watching this video, you will be able to distinguish between effort-driven and fixed duration tasks in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Choosing Task Types
After watching this video, you will be able to set appropriate task types in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Manually Scheduling Tasks
After watching this video, you will be able to switch from automatic to manual task scheduling and manually enter task scheduling details in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Warnings and Suggestions
After watching this video, you will be able to show or hide warnings and suggestions for manually scheduled tasks in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting Dependencies and Links
After watching this video, you will be able to apply task dependencies and link or unlink tasks in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting up Resource Costs
After watching this video, you will be able to specify the costs and availability of resources in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Grouping Resources
After watching this video, you will be able to create resource groups in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Working with Cost Resources
After watching this video, you will be able to create cost resources and recognize their uses in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Filtering and Highlighting Resources
After watching this video, you will be able to filter and highlight resources in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Resource Types
After watching this video, you will be able to describe the project resource types used in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Entering and Editing Resource Information
After watching this video, you will be able to enter and edit appropriate resource information in a project plan in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Resource Sheet View
After watching this video, you will be able to use the Resource Sheet view to add resources to a project in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Resource Rate Table
After watching this video, you will be able to create a resource rate table in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Summarizing Data in Master Projects
After watching this video, you will be able to summarize the data in a master project in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Modify Tasks and Resources
After watching this video, you will be able to modify tasks and resources in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Master Projects and Sub-Projects
After watching this video, you will be able to work with master projects and sub-projects in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Office 2016: Enhanced PivotTable in Excel 2016
After watching this video, you will be able to recognize the new and enhanced features in the PivotTable in Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Office 2016: Identify New Features in Office 2016
After watching this video, you will be able to recognize the new cross-platform features in Office 2016 and use enhanced features in Word 2016 and Outlook 2016.
-
Microsoft Office 2016: Use New Features in Office 2016 Products
After watching this video, you will be able to use new features in Office 2016 product suite.
-
Microsoft Office 2016: Managing Notes in OneNote 2016
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to write notes on the web using Microsoft Edge and share these notes or send notes to an e-mail address.
-
Microsoft Office 2016: Using Flexible Timelines in Project 2016
After watching this video, you will be able to use flexible timelines in Project 2016.
-
Microsoft Office 2016: Using the Linked Table Manager in Access 2016
After watching this video, you will be able to use the Linked Table Manager in Access 2016.
-
Microsoft PowerPoint 2016: Sending an Object Forward or Back
After watching this video, you will be able to send objects forward or back in PowerPoint 2016.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Receiving Payments and Recording Deposits
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to receive payments and record deposits.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Creating Invoices
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to create invoices.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Creating Estimates
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to create estimates.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Creating Refunds and Credits
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to create refunds and credits.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Creating Sales Receipts
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to create sales receipts.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Filing Sales Tax
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to file sales tax.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Paying Bills
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to pay bills.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Working with Jobs
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to create customer jobs and assign them to customers.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Creating Customer Profiles
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to create customer profiles.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Entering Bills
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to enter bills.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Purchase Orders and Inventory
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to enter purchase orders and receive inventory items.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Creating Vendor Profiles
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to create vendor profiles.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Setting up Sales Taxes
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to set up sales tax items.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: The QuickBooks Calendar
After watching this video, you will be able to describe the QuickBooks calendar and how it can assist you in tracking important financial information.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Working with Documents
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to use the document center and attach documents to transactions and items.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Setting up Your Company to Receive Inventory
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to set up your company to receive inventory.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Modifying Accounts
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to modify accounts in the QuickBooks Chart of Accounts.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: The QuickBooks Chart of Accounts
After watching this video, you will be able to describe the QuickBooks Chart of Accounts and how it relates to your business accounting.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Modifying Items and Services
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to add and remove items and services in QuickBooks.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Items and Services
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how products and services can be added as separate income accounts.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Doing More with QuickBooks
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to turn on payroll, order checks and supplies, add more users, and accept credit cards.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: The Menu System
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate use of the menu system and describe how it complements the main interface.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: The QuickBooks Live Community
After watching this video, you will be able to describe the QuickBooks Community and how it can be used to search for information and enhance the user experience.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: The QuickBooks Interface
After watching this video, you will be able to describe the QuickBooks interface and its various aspects.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: The QuickBooks File Doctor
After watching this video, you will be able to perform a scan and recovery of a QuickBooks company file using the File Doctor tool.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: The QuickBooks Shortcuts Panel
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to work with the QuickBooks Shortcuts panel.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: QuickBooks Home
After watching this video, you will be able to describe the QuickBooks Home page.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Setting up a New Company
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to set up a new company and choose initial settings.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Backing Up and Restoring Company Files
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to back up and restore company files in QuickBooks.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: First-Time Setup
After watching this video, you will be able to enter customers, sales items, and bank accounts in QuickBooks after the creation of a new company file.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: QuickBooks Preferences
After watching this video, you will be able to perform QuickBooks configuration using application preferences.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Keeping QuickBooks Up-to-Date
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to keep QuickBooks up-to-date.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Working with Network Files
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to use QuickBooks company files located on a network computer.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: The QuickBooks Server Manager
After watching this video, you will be able to configure and work with the QuickBooks Server Manager.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Installing QuickBooks Pro 2017
After watching this video, you will be able to perform a QuickBooks Pro 2017 and QuickBooks Server Manager installation.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: What Is QuickBooks?
After watching this video, you will be able to describe QuickBooks Pro 2017 and basic accounting concepts
-
iPhone Orientation: Battery Percentage
The battery percentage on iPhone allows you to make a more accurate estimate of the battery life. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to display the battery level on the battery indicator.
-
iPhone Orientation: Podcasts
iPhone allows you to subscribe to podcasts and broadcast stations. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to subscribe, unsubscribe, and sync up your podcasts.
-
iPhone Orientation: Editing Word/Excel Documents
Docs To Go on iPhone allows you to work on Microsoft Office products. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to edit Word documents on the device and attach to mail or sync up to the server.
-
iPhone Orientation: Syncing iPhone with iCloud
iCloud keeps your iPhone in sync with all your other devices. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to register with Apple and configure a few settings to get this free service working for you.
-
iPhone Orientation: Editing/Viewing PDFs
GoodReader on iPhone allows you to read and edit PDF files. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to view, annotate, and email PDFs on iPhone.
-
iPhone Orientation: Printing
iPhone allows you to print directly to a compatible printer and save on time and effort. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to print directly to a compatible printer with just a few clicks of a button.
-
iPhone Orientation: Working with Reminders
Reminders on iPhone allow you to keep track of the things to do, such as calling mom when you get home. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create location-specific reminders, set priority, and organize in lists.
-
iPhone Orientation: Social Networking
iPhone allows you to always remain connected to your social network no matter where you are. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to find iPhone apps geared specifically towards social networks.
-
iPhone Orientation: Cellular Data vs. Wi-Fi
iPhone’s built-in cellular data service is useful when WiFi is not available. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to configure your cellular data settings to keep the cost low.
-
iPhone Orientation: Reading Books
iPhone allows you to access numerous book services such as Apple’s iBooks, Amazon’s Kindle, and Barnes & Noble’s Nook. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to get books and read and annotate on the iPhone.
-
iPhone Orientation: Sounds
iPhone allows you to customize the sounds on the device to your needs, such as to discretely send a text message. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to adjust volume, set time for notifications, and turn off keyboard clicks.
-
iPhone Orientation: Notes App
The Notes app on iPhone is simple yet powerful. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create, configure settings, and email notes.
-
iPhone Orientation: Searching
Spotlight Search on iPhone allows you to quickly and easily locate apps, emails, and content. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to access, use, and customize the search feature.
-
iPhone Orientation: Do Not Disturb Feature
Do Not Disturb on iPhone allows you to control notifications. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to use this powerful feature to schedule notifications and block random calls.
-
iPhone Orientation: Passbook
The Passbook app on iPhone allows you to store passes and coupons on the device, such as flight boarding passes and Starbucks gift cards. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to view, add, and update your cards and other paper products.
-
iPhone Orientation: Reply to Phone Calls with a Message
The Reply with a Message feature on iPhone allows you to immediately respond to calls with a text message. In this video, Josh Penzell demonstrates how to create and use configured texts and quick custom messages.
-
iPhone Orientation: QR Codes
A QR reader app on iPhone allows you to scan QR codes on posters and stores. In this video, Josh Penzell explains what QR codes are, where to acquire an app to read the codes, and how to scan the codes to visit websites.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Creating Custom Reports
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to generate your own custom reports.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Using Preset Reports
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to use preset reports.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: The Employee Center
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate the various features of the Employee Center.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Entering Time
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to enter employee timesheets.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Managing Employee Information
After watching this video, you will be able to demonstrate how to manage employee information.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Reconciling Accounts
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to reconcile QuickBooks transactions with your bank account.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Entering Credit Cards
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to manage credit card information.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: The Report Center
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to access and use the Report Center.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Adding Bank Accounts
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to add bank accounts.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Entering Mileage
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to enter vehicles and mileage.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Using the Register
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to access and use the QuickBooks Register to review and enter transactions.
-
QuickBooks Pro 2017 Fundamentals: Working with Cheques
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how to write cheques.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Data Tables with Two Variables
After watching this video, you will be able to create a two-variable data table in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Data Tables
After watching this video, you will be able to create a single variable data table in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Setting up Power Pivot
After watching this video, you will be able to configure Power Pivot and import data into a Microsoft Excel 2016 Workbook.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Experiment with Values
After watching this video, you will be able to Use Goal Seek, Scenario Manager, and Data Tables to try different values in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Managing Add-ins in Excel
After watching this video, you will be able to insert and manage an add-in in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Adding Office Add-ins to Excel
After watching this video, you will be able to add an app-in for Microsoft Excel 2016 to your Microsoft account.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Using Solver
After watching this video, you will be able to determine a value based on a number of variables using Solver in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Goal Seek
After watching this video, you will be able to use Goal Seek to find required input values in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Consolidating Scenario Information
After watching this video, you will be able to create a summary report of scenarios in a Microsoft Excel 2016 Worksheet.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Scenario Manager
After watching this video, you will be able to create and compare scenarios using scenario manager in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Merging Scenarios
After watching this video, you will be able to merge scenarios in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Advanced Custom Conditional Formatting
After watching this video, you will be able to create custom conditional formatting rules in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Advanced Filters
After watching this video, you will be able to apply complex filtering criteria to data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Altering Custom Rules
After watching this video, you will be able to modify custom conditional formatting rules in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Checking Accessibility
After watching this video, you will be able to check for accessibility issues in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Customizing Data
After watching this video, you will be able to use custom formats, filters, and fill series when working with data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Create a PivotTable Using PowerPivot
After watching this video, you will be able to create and populate a PivotTable using PowerPivot in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Connecting Tables
After watching this video, you will be able to create a PivotTable using Power Pivot in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Custom Date and Time Formats
After watching this video, you will be able to create a custom date and time format in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Custom Number Formats
After watching this video, you will be able to create a custom number format in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Custom Fill Series
After watching this video, you will be able to create a custom fill series in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Custom Accounting Formats
After watching this video, you will be able to create a custom accounting format in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Checking for Errors
After watching this video, you will be able to run the error checker in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Troubleshoot Formulas
After watching this video, you will be able to troubleshoot formulas using the evaluate formula tool in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Tracing Errors
After watching this video, you will be able to trace errors in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Combine Data and Check it for Errors
After watching this video, you will be able to use Microsoft Excel 2016 transform features to work with data, and check it for errors.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Displaying Data in International Formats
After watching this video, you will be able to prepare a workbook for internationalization in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Adjusting the Tab Order
After watching this video, you will be able to modify the tab order between workbook elements in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Get & Transform
After watching this video, you will be able to use Get & Transform to pull together data from different sources in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Ensuring Workbook Accessibility
After watching this video, you will be able to adjust a workbook to ensure accessibility and optimal tab order.
-
Microsoft Excel 2016: Unpivot Data
After watching this video, you will be able to use the unpivot columns feature to transform data in Microsoft Excel 2016.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Creating a Clear Message
After watching this video, you will be able to create a clear message and establish credibility in a PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Presentation Design Principles
After watching this video, you will be able to apply design principles that help ensure long-term retention of your message in PowerPoint 2016.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: The Role of the Presenter
After watching this video, you will be able to recognize the role of the presenter in imparting PowerPoint 2016 presentation content effectively.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: The Presentation Process
After watching this video, you will be able to recognize the use of a presentation process when designing PowerPoint 2016 presentations.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Impact of Sound and Images
After watching this video, you will be able to make effective use of sound and images in PowerPoint 2016 presentations.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: How the Brain Processes Visual Input
After watching this video, you will be able to describe how the brain processes visual input and what this implies for effective slide design in PowerPoint 2016.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Persuading Your Audience
After watching this video, you will be able to fully engage with and persuade your audience when delivering a PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Communicating Your Message
After watching this video, you will be able to recognize how to deliver a message clearly and effectively in a PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: PowerPoint's Design Tools
After watching this video, you will be able to identify PowerPoint 2015 design tools and presentation add-ons for speedy design.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Importance of Design and Presentation Skills
After watching this video, you will be able to describe the importance of design and presentation skills in creating effective PowerPoint 2016 presentations.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Creating a Timeline
After watching this video, you will be able to create a visual timeline using PowerPoint 2016.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Using a Slide Master for Branding
After watching this video, you will be able to use a slide master to reflect company branding in a PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Use Presentation Best Practices
After watching this video, you will be able to apply best practices for designing and delivering a PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Analyzing Visual Impact
After watching this video, you will be able to analyze the visual impact of PowerPoint 2016 slides, distinguishing between effective and ineffective slide designs.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Using Shapes for Maximum Effect
After watching this video, you will be able to use shapes to maximize impact in a PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Using Lock Drawing Mode
After watching this video, you will be able to use Lock Drawing Mode to create shapes efficiently in PowerPoint 2016.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Using Connectors
After watching this video, you will be able to distinguish between simple lines and connectors, and use connectors in diagrams in PowerPoint 2016.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Engaging an Audience with Charts
After watching this video, you will be able to use charts effectively in PowerPoint 2016.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Using Slide Styles
After watching this video, you will be able to apply consistent styles to slides in PowerPoint 2016.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Using Color Psychology
After watching this video, you will be able to use color to increase the effectiveness of PowerPoint 2016 presentations.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Using Guides, Alignment, and Grouping
After watching this video, you will be able to use guides, alignment, and grouping to create a professional PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Controlling File and Image Size
After watching this video, you will be able to control file and image size in a PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Using Presenter View and Notes
After watching this video, you will be able to use Presenter view and speaker notes as presentation aids in PowerPoint 2016.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Using Hyperlinks to Engage an Audience
After watching this video, you will be able to use hyperlinks to capture attention or add interactive elements to a PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Best Practices for Hyperlinks
After watching this video, you will be able to recognize best practices for using hyperlinks in PowerPoint 2016 presentations.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Use a Slide Master and Slide Elements
After watching this video, you will be able to use a slide master and slide elements to maximize the effectiveness of a PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Presenter Best Practices
After watching this video, you will be able to apply best practices for delivering a PowerPoint 2016 presentation.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Using Timing and Layout to Capture Attention
After watching this video, you will be able to control audience attention through timing and layout in PowerPoint 2016.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Using Animation to Simulate Pop-Up Boxes
After watching this video, you will be able to use animation tools to simulate pop-up boxes in PowerPoint 2016.
-
PowerPoint Best Practices: Using Pan and Zoom Techniques
After watching this video, you will be able to use PowerPoint 2016 panning and zooming techniques to engage an audience.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating Milestones
After watching this video, you will be able to add project milestones to a project plan in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Working with Summary Tasks and Subtasks
After watching this video, you will be able to create and modify summary tasks and subtasks, and view an outline of these tasks in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Adding and Reordering Project Tasks
After watching this video, you will be able to add single and recurring tasks to a project plan and reorder tasks in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Displaying the Project Summary Task
After watching this video, you will be able to display a project summary task in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating Work Breakdown Structure Codes
After watching this video, you will be able to create work breakdown structure (WBS) codes in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Overlapping Tasks
After watching this video, you will be able to overlap tasks in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Inactivating Tasks
After watching this video, you will be able to mark tasks as inactive in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Manually Scheduling Tasks
After watching this video, you will be able to create manually scheduled tasks in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting Project Properties
After watching this video, you will be able to set project properties in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Identifying the Project Calendar
After watching this video, you will be able to identify the calendar for a project as part of the project's information in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Defining the Project Start Date
After watching this video, you will be able to set the start date for a project and recognize what this affects in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting Date Constraints and Deadlines
After watching this video, you will be able to set date constraints and project deadlines in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Constraint Types
After watching this video, you will be able to identify constraint types in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating a Template From an Excel Workbook
After watching this video, you will be able to create a template from an Excel 2013 workbook in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating a Template From a SharePoint Task List
After watching this video, you will be able to create a template from a SharePoint task list in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating and Working with Task Calendars
After watching this video, you will be able to create and work with task calendars in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating and Working with Resource Calendars
After watching this video, you will be able to create and work with resource calendars in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Modifying a Project Calendar
After watching this video, you will be able to modify the working times in a project calendar in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting up a Project Calendar
After watching this video, you will be able to choose a base calendar and set it as the project calendar in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Adding Tasks to a Project Plan
After watching this video, you will be able to add tasks to a project plan in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Switching Between Projects
After watching this video, you will be able to switch between projects and pin or unpin objects in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Opening, Saving, and Closing Projects
After watching this video, you will be able to open, save, and close projects in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating a Project From an Existing Project
After watching this video, you will be able to create a project using an existing project in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating a Template From a Project
After watching this video, you will be able to create a template from an existing project in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting Default Task Types
After watching this video, you will be able to set default task types in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting General Project Options
After watching this video, you will be able to set general project options in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Adding Graphical Indicators to Fields
After watching this video, you will be able to add graphical indicators to custom fields in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Create and Customize a Project
After watching this video, you will be able to create and edit a new project in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Customizing the Ribbon and Quick Access Toolbar
After watching this video, you will be able to customize the ribbon and the Quick Access Toolbar in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Setting Calendar Options
After watching this video, you will be able to set default calendar options in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Manual or Automatic Scheduling
After watching this video, you will be able to implement manual or automatic scheduling and recognize the implications of each scheduling mode in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating Custom Fields with Lookup Tables
After watching this video, you will be able to create a custom field with a lookup table in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Using Functions in Custom Fields
After watching this video, you will be able to use functions in custom fields that contain formulas in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating Custom Fields with Formulas
After watching this video, you will be able to create and use a custom field containing a formula in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating Custom Task and Resource Fields
After watching this video, you will be able to create custom task and resource fields in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Creating a Blank Project
After watching this video, you will be able to create and save a new project based on the default template in Project 2013.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: The Ribbon, Toolbars, and Backstage View
After watching this video, you will be able to use the Project 2013 ribbon, toolbars, and Backstage view.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: The Start Screen and Project Workspace
After watching this video, you will be able to recognize elements of the Project 2013 interface.
-
Microsoft Project 2013: Introduction to Project 2013 and Certification
After watching this video, you will be able to distinguish between the different editions of Project 2013.
